BULL Documentation

 

 

 CD ROM Annuaire d'Entreprises France prospect (avec ou sans emails) : REMISE DE 10 % Avec le code réduction AUDEN872

10% de réduction sur vos envois d'emailing --> CLIQUEZ ICI

Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici

DOCUMENTATION BULL http://support.bull.com/documentation/byproduct/soldoc_popupList?k=servers/escala&fromsso=y

http://support.bull.com/documentation/byproduct/soldoc_popupList?k=servers/ns&fromsso=y

[   ] 86A101FH01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:33 15M [   ] 86A102ET05.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:07 6.7M [   ] 86A102FA01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:45 81M [   ] 86A102FH01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:37 16M [   ] 86A114FG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:28 20M [   ] 86A116EF01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:55 20M [   ] 86A117EF01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:03 11M [   ] 86A121EG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:26 11M [   ] 86A121EM01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:49 9.8M [   ] 86A125EM01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:52 5.5M [   ] 86A129FG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:14 14M [   ] 86A134EM00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:14 6.7M [   ] 86A134ER00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:04 5.8M [   ] 86A138EG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:07 13M [   ] 86A141EM06.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:49 9.5M [   ] 86A142EG00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:33 12M [   ] 86A150FD06.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:18 3.8M [   ] 86A154FF03.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:14 45M [   ] 86A156EG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:38 11M [   ] 86A169FG02.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:50 10M [   ] 86A171FA10.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:16 4.7M [   ] 86A172EG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:01 5.9M [   ] 86A182EF03.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:04 26M [   ] 86A185ER00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:11 6.7M [   ] 86A189EF02.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:57 5.0M [   ] 86A190FF03.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:44 16M [   ] 86A194EF01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:20 11M [   ] 86A194EM01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:03 11M [   ] 86A196KX00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:04 3.3M [   ] 86A197KX00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:05 4.7M [   ] 86A198KX00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:02 4.6M [   ] 86A235ER00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:50 34M [   ] 86A254FA04.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:19 1.4M [   ] 86A255FA04.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:17 2.5M [   ] 86A256FA04.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:19 3.4M [   ] 86A257FA04.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:18 831K [   ] 86A258FA05.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:18 464K [   ] 86A259FA04.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:18 1.7M [   ] 86F102ET05.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:07 8.5M [   ] 86F102FA01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 20:39 68M [   ] 86F114FG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:07 33M [   ] 86F129FG01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 18:45 14M [   ] 86F134EM00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:10 6.2M [   ] 86F141EM06.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:54 9.7M [   ] 86F150FD06.pdf 16-Dec-2011 17:16 3.8M [   ] 86F189FF03.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:45 24M [   ] 86F190FF03.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:26 28M [   ] 86F194EM01.pdf 16-Dec-2011 16:58 11M [   ] 86X116EM00.pdf 16-Dec-2011 19:00 108M Bull ESCALA Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices 86 X1 16EM 00 ORDER REFERENCE Bull ESCALA Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices 86 X1 16EM 00 ORDER REFERENCE Bull ESCALA Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices Hardware November 2003 BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE 86 X1 16EM 00 ORDER REFERENCE The following copyright notice protects this book under the Copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries which prohibit such actions as, but not limited to, copying, distributing, modifying, and making derivative works. Copyright Bull S.A. 1992, 2003 Printed in France Suggestions and criticisms concerning the form, content, and presentation of this book are invited. A form is provided at the end of this book for this purpose. To order additional copies of this book or other Bull Technical Publications, you are invited to use the Ordering Form also provided at the end of this book. Trademarks and Acknowledgements We acknowledge the right of proprietors of trademarks mentioned in this book. AIX is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation, and is being used under licence. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States of America and other countries licensed exclusively through the Open Group. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Bull will not be liable for errors contained herein, or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this material. Contents About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Who should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations . . . 1 Bulgarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Brazilian-Portuguese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Chinese, simplified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Chinese, traditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Dutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Hebrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Macedonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Portuguese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Slovenia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Electronic emission statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . . 646 Industry Canada compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Chinese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 European Community compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Germany compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) class 1 statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) statement . . . . 648 Taiwan class A compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2003 iii iv Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices About this document This publication contains translated safety notices and safety inspection procedures for the Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 (hereafter referred to as the 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4). Important: The installation of this product is the responsibility of the customer. Who should read this document This publication is intended for people who operate a system that connects one or more 2104 Model DS4s and Model TS4s to it. Throughout this publication, the term service representative applies to the person that has been authorized by your organization to maintain your 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4. Additional information This section contains the following information: v A list of the documents in the 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 library v A list of the related documents v The available Web sites v Information about how to send your comments 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 library The following documents contain information related to this product: v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Hardware Technical Information, 86 A1 19EM v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Operator’s Guide, 86 A1 17EM v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 Installation Guide, 86 A1 14EM v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model TS4 Installation Guide, 86 A1 15EM v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide, 86 A1 18EM v Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices, 86 X1 16EM Related documents The following documents contain information related to this product: v The operator’s guide for your system v The user’s guide for your using system SCSI attachment (for example, your SCSI adapter) v The site and hardware planning information for your system v The problem solving guide and reference for your system v The 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide, 86 A1 94KX The following documents contain information related to the Expandable Storage Plus disk enclosures that attach to the RISC systems: © Copyright IBM Corp. 2003 v v Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems, 86 A1 26HX v Site Preparation Guide for Rack Systems, 86 A1 30PX v Adapters, Devices and Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems, 86 A1 27HX vi Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations Following are the translated safety notices and environmental notices for the 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2003 1 Bulgarian 2 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 3 4 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 5 6 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 7 8 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 9 10 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 11 12 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 13 14 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 15 16 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 17 18 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 19 20 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 21 22 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 23 Brazilian-Portuguese 24 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 25 26 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 27 28 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 29 30 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 31 32 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 33 34 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 35 36 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 37 38 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 39 40 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 41 42 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 43 44 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 45 46 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Chinese, simplified Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 47 48 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 49 50 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 51 52 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 53 54 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 55 56 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 57 58 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 59 60 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 61 62 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 63 64 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 65 66 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 67 68 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 69 Chinese, traditional 70 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 71 72 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 73 74 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 75 76 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 77 78 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 79 80 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 81 82 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 83 84 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 85 86 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 87 88 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 89 90 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 91 92 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Croatian Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 93 94 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 95 96 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 97 98 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 99 100 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 101 102 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 103 104 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 105 106 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 107 108 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 109 110 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 111 112 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 113 114 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 115 Czech 116 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 117 118 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 119 120 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 121 122 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 123 124 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 125 126 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 127 128 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 129 130 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 131 132 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 133 134 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 135 136 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 137 138 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Danish Sikkerhedsmæssige og miljømæssige forskrifter Oversatte sikkerhedsforskrifter SCDAN901 Dette afsnit indeholder følgende oplysninger: Oversatte sikkerhedsforskrifter Retningslinjer for sikkerhedstjek af dette produkt Miljømæssige forskrifter Denne vejledning indeholder udelukkende sikkerhedsforskrifter. Sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket advarer om forhold, der kan være livsfarlige eller forårsage alvorlige ulykker. Sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket advarer om forhold, der kan være farlige. Sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket advarer om forhold eller procedurer, der kan forårsage skade på maskiner, udstyr, programmer eller data. Sikkerhedsforskrifterne er opstillet i numerisk rækkefølge efter deres id, der vises i parentes efter hver forskrift. Nedenfor vises eksempler på id-nummeret på sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket Fare! og Pas på!. Fare! Pas på! Bemærk Fare! En forkert forbundet stikkontakt kan give livsfarlig elektrisk spænding på metaldele i systemet eller på enheder, der er tilsluttet systemet. Det er kundens ansvar at sikre, at stikkontakten er korrekt forbundet til jord. (1) Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i den åbning, hvor ventilatoren har været monteret. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 139 Statisk elektricitet Retningslinjer for sikkerhedstjek Tjek af rack SCDAN902 Bemærk: Tag følgende forholdsregler for at undgå statisk elektricitet, når du håndterer udskiftelige enheder (FRU) og andre computerdele: Begræns dine bevægelser. Bevægelse kan skabe statisk elektricitet omkring dig. Vær altid forsigtig, når du rører ved computerdele. Hold på kanten af kortene eller på metaldækslet. Rør aldrig ved et udækket kredsløb. Personer, der ikke har en antistatisk beskyttelsesstrop om håndleddet, skal undgå at røre ved computerdele. Gør følgende, inden du installerer en ny del: Sørg for, at transportposen med delen rører en ikke-malet metaldel på 2104 Model DS4, 2104 Model TS4 eller værtssystemet i mindst 2 sekunder. Herved reduceres den statiske elektricitet i pakken og i din krop. Tag delen ud af emballagen, og installér den om muligt direkte i 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4, uden først at lægge den fra dig. Gør følgende, hvis du skal lægge delen fra dig: 1. Placér den antistatiske emballage, delen blev leveret i, på en plan flade. 2. Læg delen oven på den antistatiske emballage. Læg ikke delen direkte på en metalflade. Vejledningen beskriver, hvordan du udfører et sikkerhedstjek af 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Der er oplysninger om udførelse af sikkerhedstjek af racket i installationsvejledningen til racket. Pas på! 2104 Model DS4 og Model TS4 er designet, så de kan installeres af kunden, og certificerede som "kundeinstallation". Kontrollér, at det system eller det rack, som 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 skal installeres i, også er designet og de er certificeret til kundeinstallation. Er det ikke tilfældet, skal 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 installeres af en servicetekniker. (22) 140 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Kontrol af 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 Udvendigt maskintjek Indvendigt maskintjek SCDAN903 Foretag følgende indvendige kontrol af maskinen: 1. Kontrollér, om der er foretaget ikke-IBM-ændringer af maskinen. Hvis der er foretaget sådanne ændringer, skal du bestille formularen "Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey" nummer R009 via IBM's bestillingssystem - Publications Ordering System. Udfyld formularen, og send den. 2. Kontrollér maskinen indvendigt for følgende: Løse metaldele eller andre forurenende stoffer Tegn på vand eller anden væske Ild Røgskade 3. Kontrollér, om der er tydelige mekaniske problemer, f.eks. løse komponenter. 4. Kontrollér ikke-beskyttede kabler og stik for slid, revner eller klemskader. Foretag følgende udvendige kontrol af maskinen: 1. Kontrollér kabinettet for evt. skader (løse, afbrækkede eller skarpe kanter) 2. Kontrollér netledningerne, og tjek, at isoleringen ikke er slidt eller beskadiget. 3. Kontrollér, om der er foretaget åbenlyse ikke-standardændringer. Brug sund fornuft ved vurderingen af sikkerheden i forbindelse med sådanne ændringer. 4. Kontrollér, at alle udvendige dæksler er på plads og ikke er beskadiget. 5. Kontrollér, at alle låse og hængsler er i orden. 6. Kontrollér, at netledningen ikke er beskadiget. 7. Kontrollér, at ledningerne ikke er slidte, beskadigede eller sidder i klemme. 8. Tjek ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhederne. Kontrollér, at skruer eller nitter i dækslet til strømforsyningsenheden ikke er fjernet, og at de ikke sidder forkert. 9. Kontrollér, at det eksterne signalkabel ikke er beskadiget. 10. Kontrollér, at der ikke er nogen skarpe kanter på dækslet, at det ikke er beskadiget, og at der ikke er foretaget ændringer, som gør, at man kan komme til at berøre enhedens indvendige dele. 11. Afhjælp eventuelle problemer. Udfør nedenstående sikkerhedstjek for at klarlægge eventuelle farlige forhold. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 141 Kontrol af sikkerhedsmærkater SCDAN904 Kontrollér følgende i forbindelse med mærkaterne: 1. Kontrollér, at der er sikkerhedsmærkater på 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Se Figur 1. 2. Kontrollér, at advarselsmærkaten angående netledningen er placeret på strømforsyningen i 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Se Figur 2. SC000274 Figur 1. 2104 Model DS4- eller Model TS4-mærkat Figur 2. Advarselsmærkat angående netledning SC000325 Pas på! Enheden kan have to netledninger. Tag begge ledninger ud for at fjerne al strøm til maskinen. (1) 142 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN905 3. Kontrollér, at advarselsmærkaten angående strømforsyningsdækslet er placeret på strømforsyningen til 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Se Figur 3. 4. Kontrollér, at advarselsmærkaten angående sikringen er placeret på strømforsyningen til 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Se Figur 4. Figur 3. Advarselsmærkat angående strømforsyningsdæksel Figur 4. Advarselsmærkat angående sikring SC000326 SC000327 Pas på! Fjern ikke dækslet. Der er ingen dele, der kan repareres. (2) Pas på! Dobbeltpolet/neutral sikring. (3) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 143 SCDAN905A 5. Kontrollér, at mærkaten med vægtangivelse er placeret på 2104 Model DS4. Se Figur 5. Pas på! Denne enhed vejer over 32 kg. Der er flere oplysninger i manualerne. (4) Figur 5. 2104 Model DS4 - mærkat med vægtangivelse SC000220 Der er flere oplysninger I manualerne 32 kg Bemærk: Hvis der er lagret data på diskene, skal du mærke diskene, før du fjerner dem. Når du monterer diskene igen, skal du montere hver disk i samme bås, som du fjernede den fra. Hvis du ikke gør det, kan du risikere at miste data. > 18 kg > 32 kg Pas på! Hvis der er installeret alt, hvad der er muligt i en 2104 Model DS4, det vil sige 14 diske og 2 strømforsyninger, er den samlede vægt 32 kg. Du skal fjerne mindst 6 diske fra 2104 Model DS4, før du løfter den eller installerer den i et rack eller i 2104 Model TS4. Derved bliver den samlede vægt mindre end 32 kg, og 2104 Model DS4 kan håndteres af to personer. Hvis vægten ikke reduceres, kan det resultere i personskade. 144 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Pas på! Enheden vejer mellem 32 kg og 55 kg. (5) Figur 6. 2104 Model TS4 - mærkat med vægtangivelse 32 - 55 kg SC000219 6. Kontrollér, at mærkaten med vægtangivelse er placeret på 2104 Model TS4. Se Figur 6. Pas på! Det medfølgende løfteværktøj skal bruges ved flytning og montering af produktet, når alt ekstraudstyr er installeret i det. Der skal 3 personer til at flytte det på forsvarlig måde. Hvis løfteværktøjet ikke er ved hånden, skal vægten reduceres til 32 kg eller derunder, ved at du fjerner alle de tunge komponenter (diske og strømforsyninger) fra produktet. Der skal så kun 2 personer til at flytte eller montere produktet. (6) Bemærk: Hvis der er lagret data på diskene, skal du mærke diskene, før du fjerner dem. Når du monterer diskene igen, skal du montere hver disk i samme bås, som du fjernede den fra. Hvis du ikke gør det, kan du risikere at miste data. > 18 kg > 32 kg SCDAN906 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 145 SCDAN907 7. Kontrollér, at den mærkat, der angiver standbytilstand, er placeret på 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4. Se Figur 7. Pas på! Standbytilstand angives ved symbolet til højre for jævnstrøm direkte over kontakten, SW1. Når du placerer SW1 i højre position direkte under standbysymbolet, slukker du ikke for vekselstrømmen til enheden. (7) Figur 7. Mærkat angående standbytilstand SC000326 146 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN908 Dette afsnit beskriver, hvordan du kontrollerer jordforbindelsen til 2104 Model DS4 og Model TS4. Kontrol af jordforbindelse til 2104 Model DS4 Gør følgende for at kontrollere jordforbindelsen til 2104 Model DS4: 3. Bemærk: Elektriske kredsløb kan blive beskadiget, hvis de eksterne SCSI-kabler tilsluttes 2104 Model DS4, mens du tjekker jordforbindelsen. Kontrollér, at der ikke er tilsluttet eksterne SCSI-kabler til stikkene . 4. Kontrollér jordforbindelsen til 2104 Model DS4: a. Kig på selve de stik, som du fjernede fra strømfordelingsenheden eller backupbatterienheden i trin 2, og kontrollér, at det stikben, der giver jordforbindelsen, er i god stand. b. Brug et ohmmeter, når du forbinder den ene leder til 2104 Model DS4-rammen og den anden leder til det tredje stikben til jordforbindelse foran på de stik, som du fjernede i trin 2. Der skal være 0,1 ohm eller derunder mellem stikbenet til jordforbindelse på stikket og 2104 Model DS4-rammen. Figur 8. Strømforsyningskabler og SCSI-stik på 2104 Model DS4 Kontrol af jordforbindelse til 2104 Model DS4 og Model TS4 1. Sørg for, at der ikke er strøm til racket. Der er flere oplysninger i vejledningen til racket eller værtssystemet. 2. Kontrollér, at netledningerne er tilsluttet hver enkelt ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed. Se Figur 8. Kontrollér også, at netledningerne er taget ud af strømfordelingsenheden eller backupbatterienheden i racket. Der er flere oplysninger i vejledningen til racket eller værtssystemet. 2 1 SC000210 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 147 SCDAN909 Fortsæt med trin 5, hvis du udfører service på en 2104 Model DS4 (220 volt). Fortsæt med tirn 7, hvis du udfører service på en 2104 Model DS4 (-48 volt). 5. Kontrollér, at der er forbindelse mellem 2104 Model DS4-rammen og stikbenet til jord på netledningen på hver enkelt ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed. Se Figur 9. 6. Fortsæt med trin 9. 7. Kontrollér, at der er forbindelse mellem 2104 Model DS4-rammen og stikbenene 1 og 7 til jord på hvert hovednetledningsstik. Se Figur 10. 8. Fortsæt med trin 9. 9. Udskift en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed, hvis forbindelserne ikke er i orden. Der er flere oplysninger om ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheder i . Kontrollér jordforbindelsen igen. Hvis forbindelserne er i orden i en ventilatorog strømforsyningsenhed, kan problemet skyldes netledningen eller værtssystemets jordforbindelse. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figur 9. Stikben til jord (220 V 2104 Model DS4 ) Figur 10. Stikben til jord (-48 V 2104 Model DS4) 1 SC000329 Kontrollen af jordforbindelsen er afsluttet, hvis jordforbindelsen er i orden. Fjern netledningerne fra ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden i 2104 Model DS4, hvis jordforbindelsen ikke er i orden. SC000330 Ben 6 Ben 1 Ben 12 Ben 7 148 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN910 Fortsæt med trin 10, hvis du udfører service på en 2104 Model DS4 (220 volt). Læs i installationsvejledningen til racket eller værtssystemet for at isolere fejlen, hvis du udfører service på en 2104 Model DS4 (-48 volt). Kontrollér jordforbindelsen igen. 10. Kontrollér forbindelserne i netledningen. Hvis forbindelserne i netledningen ikke er i orden, skal du udskifte den med en ny, og derefter kontrollere jordforbindelsen igen. Installationsvejledningen til racket eller værtssystemet indeholder oplysninger om, hvordan du isolerer fejlen, hvis forbindelsen i netledningen er i orden. Gør følgende for at kontrollere jordforbindelsen til 2104 Model TS4: 2. Kontrollér, at den anden ende af netledningerne ikke er tilsluttet stikkontakten. Tag om nødvendigt ledningerne ud. Kontrol af jordforbindelse til 2104 Model TS4 1. Kontrollér, at der er tilsluttet en netledning i hvert stik 1 . Se Figur 11. Figur 11. Netledninger og SCSI-stik (2104 Model TS4) SC000230 1 2 3 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 149 SCDAN911 3. Elektriske kredsløb kan beskadiges, hvis de eksterne SCSI-kabler tilsluttes 2104 Model TS4, mens du tjekker jordforbindelsen. Kontrollér, at der ikke er tilsluttet eksterne SCSI-kabler til SCSI-stikkene . Se Figur 11. 4. Kontrollér, at der er forbindelse mellem 2104 Model TS4-rammen og stikbenet til jord på hver netledning. a. Tjek netledningerne, og kontrollér, at stikbenet til jord er i god stand. b. Brug et ohmmeter til at kontrollere, at forbindelsen mellem stikbenet til jord og jordforbindelsen til rammen er på 0,1 ohm eller derunder. 5. Kontrollen af jordforbindelsen er afsluttet, hvis forbindelsen er i orden. 6. Tag netledningerne ud af stikkontakterne, hvis forbindelsen til jord ikke er i orden. a. Kontrollér forbindelserne i hver netledning. b. Udskift en netledning, hvis den er fejlbehæftet. c. Kontrollér, at der er forbindelse mellem 2104 Model TS4-rammen og stikbenet til jord på netledningen til hver enkelt ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed. Se Figur 12. Bemærk: d Udskift en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed, hvis forbindelsen ikke er i orden. Der er flere oplysninger i i afsnittet om ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheder. Fortsæt med "Kontrol af jordforbindelse til 2104 Model TS4", og udfør trin 1 til og med 6d for at udføre kontrollen af jordforbindelsen igen. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figur 12. Stikben til jord (2104 Model TS4) 1 2 3 SC000331 150 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN912 Figur 13. Fjernelse af strøm fra 2104 Model DS4 Bemærk: Bemærk: Medmindre du har en særlig grund til at gøre det, skal du ikke fjerne strømmen fra værtssystemet eller fra 2104 Model DS4, medmindre du får besked på at gøre det i de vejledninger, du følger. Gør følgende for at fjerne strømmen fra 2104 Model DS4: 1. Kontrollér med kunden, at al kommunikation mellem 2104 Model DS4 og værtssystemet er standset. 2. Indstil kontakten dc on/standby på hver ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed på standby. Se Figur 13. a. Nogle 2104 Model DS4-enheder har en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed og en ventilatorenhed. Ventilatorenheden har ingen dc on/standbykontakt. b. På en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed kan CHK-lampen lyse, selvom dc on/standbykontakten er sat til standby. Fjern strømmen fra 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 1 Fjern strømmen fra 2104 Model DS4 SC000206 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 151 SCDAN913 3. Fare! Når du udfører næste trin, skal du fjerne netledningerne. Ledningerne er strømførende, når strømfordelingsenheden i racket eller UPSenheden (Uninterruptable Power Supply) er tændt. (1) 1 1 2 2 Bemærk: Bemærk: Medmindre du har en særlig grund til at gøre det, skal du ikke fjerne strømmen fra værtssystemet eller fra 2104 Model TS4, medmindre du får besked på at gøre det i de vejledninger, du følger. Gør følgende for at fjerne strømmen fra 2104 Model TS4: 1. Kontrollér med kunden, at al kommunikation mellem 2104 Model TS4 og værtssystemet er standset. 2. Indstil dc on/standbykontakten på hver ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed bag på 2104 Model TS4 på standby. Se Figur 14. a. Nogle 2104 Model TS4-enheder har en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed og en ventilatorenhed. Ventilatorenheden har ingen dc on/standbykontakt. b. På en ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed kan CHK-lampen lyse, selvom dc on/standbykontakten er sat til standby. Fjern strømmen fra 2104 Model TS4 Fjern netledningerne fra bagsiden af 2104 Model DS4. Se Figur 13. 4. Gør følgende for at slutte strømmen til 2104 Model DS4 igen: a. Montér netledningerne igen. b. Indstil dc on/standbykontakten på hver ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed til on. Du kan konfigurere motorstartsekvensen på 2104 Model DS4. Der er flere oplysninger i afsnittene om kontakterne til automatisk start af disk og til forsinket motorstart i . Bemærk: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide 152 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN914 1 2 2 3. Fjern netledningerne fra bagsiden af 2104 Model TS4. Se Figur 14. 4. Gør følgende for at slutte strømmen til 2104 Model TS4 igen: a. Montér netledningerne igen. b. Indstil dc on/standbykontakten på hver ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed på on. Du kan konfigurere motorstartsekvensen på 2104 Model TS4. Der er flere oplysninger i afsnittene om kontakterne til automatisk start af disk og til forsinket motorstart i . Bemærk: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figur 14. Fjern strømmen fra 2104 Model TS4 SC000207 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 153 SCDAN915 Sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket Fare! (DANGER) Fare! Fare! Fare! Fare! Fare! Når du udfører næste trin, skal du fjerne netledningerne. Ledningerne er strømførende, når strømfordelingsenheden i racket eller UPS-enheden (Uninterruptable Power Supply) er tændt. (1) Sæt ikke en netledning i ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden, før enheden er helt på plads, og fingerskruerne er skruet helt i. (3) Kabler til skærmterminaler, printere, telefoner eller overspændingsafledere til kommunikationsudstyr må ikke afmonteres i tordenvejr. (5) En forkert forbundet stikkontakt kan give livsfarlig elektrisk spænding på metaldele i systemet eller på udstyr, der er tilsluttet systemet. Det er kundens ansvar at sikre, at stikkontakten er korrekt forbundet til jord. Kabler til skærmterminaler, printere, telefoner eller overspændingsafledere til kommunikationsudstyr må ikke afmonteres i tordenvejr. (4) Forsøg ikke at åbne dækslerne til ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden. (2) 154 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN916 Sikkerhedsforskrifter mærket Pas på! (CAUTION) Pas på! Enheden kan have to netledninger. Tag begge ledninger ud for at fjerne al strøm til maskinen. (1) Pas på! Fjern ikke dækslet. Der er ingen dele, der kan repareres. (2) Pas på! Dobbeltpolet/neutral sikring. (3) Figur 15. Advarselsmærkat angående netledning Figur 16. Advarselsmærkat angående dæksel til strømforsyning Figur 17. Advarselsmærket angående sikring SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 155 SCDAN916A Pas på! Enheden vejer over 32 kg. Der er flere oplysninger i manualerne. (4) Figur 18. 2104 Model DS4 - mærkat med vægtangivelse SC000220 Der er flere oplysninger i manualerne 32 kg Bemærk: Hvis der er lagret data på diskene, skal du mærke diskene, før du fjerner dem. Når du monterer diskene igen, skal du montere hver disk i samme bås, som du fjernede den fra. Hvis du ikke gør det, kan du risikere at miste data. > 18 kg > 32 kg Pas på! Hvis der er installeret alt, hvad der er muligt i en 2104 Model DS4, det vil sige 14 diske og 2 strømforsyninger, er den samlede vægt 32 kg. Du skal fjerne mindst 6 diske fra 2104 Model DS4, før du løfter den eller monterer den i et rack eller i 2104 Model TS4. Derved bliver den samlede vægt under 32 kg, og 2104 Model DS4 kan håndteres af to personer. Hvis vægten ikke reduceres, kan det resultere i personskade. 156 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Pas på! Enheden vejer mellem 32 kg og 55 kg. (5) Pas på! Det medfølgende løfteværktøj skal bruges ved flytning eller montering af produktet, når alt ekstraudstyr er installeret i produktet. Der skal 3 personer til at flytte det på forsvarlig måde. Hvis løfteværktøjet ikke er ved hånden, skal vægten reduceres til 32 kg eller derunder, ved at du fjerner alle de tunge komponenter (diske og strømforsyninger) fra produktet. Der skal så kun 2 personer til at flytte eller montere produktet. (6) Figur 19. 2104 Model TS4 - mærkat med vægtangivelse SC000219 Bemærk: Hvis der er lagret data på diskene, skal du mærke diskene, før du fjerner dem. Når du monterer diskene igen, skal du montere hver disk i samme bås, som du fjernede den fra. Hvis du ikke gør det, kan du risikere at miste data. > 18 kg > 32 kg 32 - 55 kg SCDAN917 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 157 SCDAN918 Pas på! Standbytilstand angives ved symbolet til højre for jævnstrøm direkte over kontakten, SW1. Når du placerer SW1 i højre position direkte under standbysymbolet, slukker du ikke for vekselstrømmen til enheden. (7) Pas på! Støttepladen skal fastgøres korrekt foran i bunden af racket for at forhindre det i at vælte, når du fjerner 2104 Model DS4 fra racket. Du må ikke fjerne eller installere enheder, medmindre der er monteret en støtteplade på racket. (8) Pas på! Støttepladen skal fastgøres korrekt foran i bunden af racket for at forhindre det i at vælte, når du monterer 2104 Model DS4 i racket. Du må ikke montere eller fjerne enheder, medmindre der er monteret en støtteplade på racket. (9) Figur 20. Angivelse af standbytilstand SC000328 158 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN319 Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i den åbning, hvor ventilatoren har været monteret. (10) Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i den åbning, hvor ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden har været monteret. (11) Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i den åbning, hvor SCSI-interfacekortet har været monteret. (12) Pas på! Dette produkt er forsynet med en 3-polet netledning og et trebensstik. Af sikkerhedshensyn skal netledningen altid bruges sammen med en korrekt jordforbundet stikkontakt. (13) Pas på! Rør ikke stikkontakten eller dens dækplade med andet end testpindene (probe), før du har udført dette sikkerhedstjek. (14) Pas på! Hvis aflæsningen ikke er uendelig, må du ikke fortsætte. Få det elektriske system bragt i orden, inden du fortsætter. Strømafbryderen må ikke slås til, før ovennævnte trin er udført tilfredsstillende. (15) Pas på! Brug ikke håndtagene på ventilatorenheden eller ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden til at løfte 2104 Model DS4. Håndtagene er ikke konstrueret til at bære enhedens vægt. (16) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 159 SCDAN920 Pas på! Når du skubber enheden helt ind, flyttes grebet automatisk mod dets låste position. Pas på, at dine fingre ikke kommer i klemme mellem grebet og enheden. (17) Pas på! Sørg for, at hovednetledningen er fjernet fra den fejlbehæftede ventilator- og strømforsyningsenhed, før du fortsætter .(18) Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i åbningen oven over ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden. (19) Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i åbningen mellem strømforsyningsenhederne. (20) Pas på! Du skal også overholde sikkerhedsforskrifterne for rackmodellerne T00 og T42, før du begynder at fjerne rammeenheden, hvis 2104 Model DS4 er installeret i en Model T00 eller T42. Sikkerhedsforskrifterne findes i afsnittet om systeminstallation i , SA38-0577 eller på webstedet: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) Pas på! 2104 Model DS4 og Model TS4 er designet, så de kan installeres af kunden, og de er certificerede som "kundeinstallation". Kontrollér, at det system eller det rack, som 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 skal installeres i, også er designet og certificeret til kundeinstallation. Er det ikke tilfældet, skal 2104 Model DS4 eller Model TS4 installeres af en servicetekniker. (22) 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide 160 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCDAN921 Pas på! Placér ikke hænder eller værktøj i den åbning, hvor kortet har været monteret. (23) Pas på! Der skal tre personer til at løfte 2104 Model TS4. Forsøg ikke at løfte 2104 Model TS4 alene. (24) Pas på! Brug ikke håndtagene på ventilatorenheden eller ventilator- og strømforsyningsenheden til at løfte 2104 Model TS4. Håndtagene er ikke konstrueret til at bære enhedens vægt. (25) 2104 Model DS4 er designet, så den kan installeres af kunden, og den er certificeret som "kundeinstallation". Kontrollér, at det system eller det rack, som 2104 Model DS4 skal installeres i, også er designet og certificeret til kundeinstallation. Er det ikke tilfældet, skal 2104 Model DS4 installeres af en servicetekniker. (26) Pas på! Pas på! 2104 Model TS4 er designet, så den kan installeres af kunden, og den er certificeret som "kundeinstallation". Kontrollér, at det system, som 2104 Model TS4 skal installeres i, også er designet og certificeret til kundeinstallation. Er det ikke tilfældet, skal 2104 Model TS4 installeres af en servicetekniker. (27) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 161 Dutch 162 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 163 164 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 165 166 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 167 168 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 169 170 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 171 172 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 173 174 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 175 176 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 177 178 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 179 180 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 181 182 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 183 184 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices English Safety and environmental notices Safety notices and their translations SC000901 This section contains the following information: Safety notices and their translations Safety inspection procedures for this product Environmental notices and statements Safety notices are printed throughout this document. A notice warns you of conditions or procedures that can result in death or severe personal injury. A warns you of conditions or procedures that can cause personal injury that is neither lethal nor extremely hazardous. An notice warns you of conditions or procedures that can cause damage to machines, equipment, programs, or data. The notices are listed in numeric order based on their IDs, which are displayed in parentheses, at the end of each notice. See the following examples of danger and caution notices for the location of the ID number. Danger Caution Attention DANGER An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place a hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the system or the products that attach to the system. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock. (1) CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the opening of the empty space that contained the fan assembly. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 185 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Safety inspection procedures Inspecting the rack SC000902 Attention When you handle field-replaceable units (FRUs) and other computer parts, take these precautions to avoid static damage: Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always touch the computer parts carefully. Hold the cards by their edges or metal cover. Never touch any exposed circuits. Prevent people who are not correctly grounded from touching computer parts. Before you install a new part, touch the static-protective package that contains the part against an unpainted metal part of the 2104 Model DS4, 2104 Model TS4, or host system for at least 2 seconds. This reduces the static electricity in the package and in your body. Remove the part from its package and, if possible, install it directly into the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 without putting the part down. If you must put the part down, follow these steps: 1. Place the static-protective package that contained the part onto a smooth, level surface. 2. Place the part onto the static-protective package. Do not place the part directly onto any metal surface. The safety inspection procedures describe how to inspect the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4. Refer to your rack installation manual for information about performing a safety inspection on the rack. CAUTION: The 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 are designed to be installed by the customer and are certified as customer setup. Make sure that the system or rack into which the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 will be installed is also designed and certified for customer setup. If they are not, then the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 must be installed by a CE. (22) 186 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Inspecting the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 External machine checks Internal machine checks SC000903 Perform the following internal machine checks: 1. Check for any non-IBM changes that might have been made to the machine. If any are present, obtain the “Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey” form, number R009, from the IBM branch office. Complete the form, and return it to the branch office. 2. Check the condition of the inside of the machine for: Metal or other contaminants Indications of water or other fluid Fire Smoke damage 3. Check for any obvious mechanical problems, such as loose components. 4. Check any exposed cables and connectors for wear, cracks, or pinching. Perform the following external machine checks: 1. Check the chassis for damage (loose, broken, or sharp edges). 2. Check the power cables and ensure that the insulation is not worn or damaged. 3. Check for any obvious nonstandard changes. Use good judgment about the safety of any such changes. 4. Verify that all external covers are present and are not damaged. 5. Ensure that all latches and hinges are in correct operating condition. 6. Check the power cable for damage. 7. Check for worn, damaged, or pinched cables. 8. Inspect the fan-and-power-supply assemblies. Check that the fasteners in the cover of the power-supply unit (screws or rivets) have not been removed or disturbed. 9. Check the external signal cable for damage. 10. Check the cover for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that expose the internal parts of the device. 11. Correct any problems that you find. Perform the following safety checks to identify unsafe conditions. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 187 Safety label checks SC000904 Perform the following safety label checks: 1. Verify that the label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4. See Figure 1. 2. Verify that the linecord caution label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 power supply. See Figure 2. SC000274 Figure 1. 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 label Figure 2. Linecord caution label SC000325 CAUTION: This unit might have two linecords. To remove all power, disconnect both linecords. (1) 188 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000905 3. Verify that the power supply cover caution label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 power supply. See Figure 3. 4. Verify that the fusing caution label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 power supply. See Figure 4. Figure 3. Power supply cover caution label Figure 4. Fusing caution label SC000326 SC000327 CAUTION: Do not remove cover, do not service, no serviceable parts. (2) CAUTION: Double Pole/Neutral Fusing. (3) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 189 SC000905A 5. Verify that the weight label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4. See Figure 5. CAUTION: This unit weighs over 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). Refer to manuals. (4) Figure 5. 2104 Model DS4 weight label SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Attention: If you have data stored on the drives, label the drives before you remove them. When you replace the drives, install each one in the same drive bay from which you removed it. Failure to do so could result in a loss of data. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) CAUTION: If a 2104 Model DS4 is fully loaded with 14 drives and two power supplies, its total weight exceeds 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). You must remove at least six drives from the 2104 Model DS4 before you lift it or install it into a rack or 2104 Model TS4. This reduces the total weight to less than 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) and the can then be safely handled by two people. Failure to do so can result in injury. 2104 Model DS4 190 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices CAUTION: This unit weighs between 32 Kg - 55 Kg (70.5 lbs - 121.2 lbs). (5) Figure 6. 2104 Model TS4 weight label 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000219 6. Verify that the weight label is installed on the 2104 Model TS4. See Figure 6. CAUTION: ) The provided cardboard lifting tool is required for moving, installing, and relocating the product when fully populated. Three people are required to safely move the product. Failure to do so might result in injury. In case the lifting tool is not readily available, you must reduce the weight to 32 Kg or less by removing all of the heavy components (disk drives and power supplies) from the product. Then only two people are required to move, install, and relocate the product. (6 Attention: If you have data stored on the drives, label the drives before you remove them. When you replace the drives, install each one in the same drive bay from which you removed it. Failure to do so could result in a loss of data. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) SC000906 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 191 SC000907 7. Verify that the standby condition label is installed on the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4. See Figure 7. CAUTION: A standby condition is indicated by the symbol to the right of the DC directly above the switch, SW1. When you toggle SW1 to the right position directly under the standby symbol, the ac-power to the unit is not shut off. (7) Figure 7. Standby condition label SC000326 192 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000908 This section contains instructions for checking the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4. Checking the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4 Perform the following steps to check the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4: 3. Some electrical circuits could be damaged if the external SCSI cables are connected to the 2104 Model DS4 while the grounding check is being done. Ensure that no external SCSI cables are plugged at the connectors . 4. Check the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4: Attention: a. At the connector ends of the power plugs that you unplugged from the power distribution unit or battery-backup unit in step 2, do a visual inspection and ensure that the third wire ground pin is in good condition. b. Use an ohm meter to connect one lead to the 2104 Model DS4 chassis and the other lead to the third wire ground pin at the face of the power connectors that you unplugged in step 2. You should read 0.1 ohm o Model DS4 r less between the ground pin on the power connector and the 2104 chassis. Figure 8. Power cables and SCSI connectors on the 2104 Model DS4 Checking the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 1. Ensure that all power is removed from the rack. See the installation document for the rack or host system. 2. Ensure that the power cables are plugged into each fan-and-power-supply assembly. See Figure 8. Also ensure that the other ends of the power cables are unplugged from the power distribution unit or battery-backup unit in the rack. See the installation document for the rack or host system. 2 1 SC000210 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 193 SC000909 If you are servicing a 220-volt 2104 Model DS4, go to step 5. If you are servicing a -48 volt 2104 Model DS4, go to step 7. 5. Check for continuity between the chassis of the 2104 Model DS4 and the ground pin of the power connector on each fan-and-power-supply assembly. See Figure 9. 6. Go to step 9. 7. Check for continuity between the chassis of the 2104 Model DS4 and the ground pins 1 and 7 of each mainline-power connector. See Figure 10. 8. Go to step 9. 9. If any fan-and-power-supply assembly has no continuity, exchange that assembly for a new one. See the section about fan and power supply assemblies in the . Perform the complete grounding check again. If each fan-and-power-supply assembly has continuity, you might have a problem with the power cable or with the grounding of the host system. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figure 9. Ground pin (220 V 2104 Model DS4 ) Figure 10. Ground pins ( -48 V 2104 Model DS4) 1 SC000329 If the grounding is correct, the grounding check is complete. If the grounding is not correct, unplug the power cables from the fan-and-power-supply assemblies in the 2104 Model DS4. SC000330 Pin 6 Pin 1 Pin 12 Pin 7 194 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000910 If you are servicing a 220-volt 2104 Model DS4, go to step 10. If you are servicing a -48 volt 2104 Model DS4, see the installation document for the rack or host system to isolate the fault. Perform the complete grounding check again. 10. Check the power cable for continuity. If the power cable does not have continuity, exchange it for a new one, then perform the complete grounding check again. If the power cable does have continuity, see the installation document for the rack or host system to isolate the fault. Perform the following steps to check the grounding of the 2104 Model TS4: 2. Ensure that the other ends of the power cables are not plugged into electrical power outlets. Unplug the cables if necessary. Checking the grounding of the 2104 Model TS4 1. Ensure that a power cable is plugged into each power socket . See Figure 11. 1 Figure 11. Power cables and SCSI connectors (2104 Model TS4) SC000230 1 2 3 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 195 SC000911 3. : Some electrical circuits could be damaged if the external SCSI cables are connected to the 2104 Model TS4 while the grounding check is being done. Ensure that no external SCSI cables are connected at the SCSI connectors . See Figure 11. 4. Check for continuity between the chassis of the 2104 Model TS4 and the ground pin of each power cable. a. Check the power cables and ensure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. b. Use a meter to check that the third-wire ground continuity is 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and the chassis ground. 5. If the continuity is good, the grounding check is complete. 6. If the grounding is not correct, unplug the power cables from the mainline power connectors. a. Check each power cable for continuity. b. If either power cable is failing, exchange it for a new one. c. Check for continuity between the chassis of the 2104 Model TS4 and the ground pin of the power connector on each fan-and-power-supply assembly. See Figure 12. Attention d If either fan-and-power-supply assembly does not have continuity, exchange that assembly for a new one. (See the section about fan and power supply assemblies in the Go to “Checking the grounding of the 2104 Model TS4” and perform step 1 through step 6d to complete the grounding check again. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide.) Figure 12. Ground pin (2104 Model TS4) 1 2 3 SC000331 196 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000912 Figure 13. Removing the power from a 2104 Model DS4 Unless you have a particular reason to do so, do not remove power from the host system or from the 2104 Model DS4 unless the instructions that you are following tell you to. Perform the following steps to remove the power from a 2104 Model DS4: 1. Verify with the customer that all operations between the 2104 Model DS4 and the host system have stopped. 2. Set the dc on/standby switch of each fan-and-power-supply assembly to standby. See Figure 13. a. Some 2104 Model DS4s have a fan-and-power-supply assembly and a fan assembly. The fan assembly has no dc on/standby switch. b. A fan-and-power-supply assembly might have its CHK light on although its dc on/standby switch is set to standby. Note: Notes: Removing power from the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 1 Removing power from a 2104 Model DS4 SC000206 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 197 SC000913 3. DANGER In the following step you are going to remove the power cables. These cables are live if the rack power distribution unit or uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit is still switched on. (1) 1 1 2 2 Note: Notes: Unless you have a particular reason to do so, do not remove power from the host system or from the 2104 Model TS4 unless the instructions that you are following tell you to. Perform the following steps to remove the power from a 2104 Model TS4: 1. Verify with the customer that all operations between the 2104 Model TS4 and the host system have stopped. 2. At the back of the 2104 Model TS4, set the dc on/standby switch of each fan-and-power-supply assembly to standby. See Figure 14. a. Some 2104 Model TS4s have a fan-and-power-supply assembly and a fan assembly. The fan assembly has no dc on/standby switch. b. A fan-and-power-supply assembly might have its CHK light on although its dc on/standby switch is set to standby. Removing power from a 2104 Model TS4 Remove the power cables from the back of the 2104 Model DS4. See Figure 13. 4. Perform the following steps to return power to the 2104 Model DS4: a. Reinstall the power cables . b. Set the dc on/standby switch of each fan-and-power-supply assembly to on. You can configure the motor-start sequencing of the 2104 Model DS4. For more information, see the sections about the drive autostart switch and the delay motor start mode switch in the . Note: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide 198 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000914 1 2 2 3. Remove the power cables from the electrical power outlet and from the back of the 2104 Model TS4. See Figure 14. 4. Perform the following steps to return power to the 2104 Model TS4: a. Reinstall the power cables . b. Set the dc on/standby switch of each fan-and-power-supply assembly to on. You can configure the motor-start sequencing of the 2104 Model TS4. For more information, see the sections about the drive autostart switch and the delay motor start mode switch in the Note: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide. Figure 14. Removing power from a 2104 Model TS4 SC000207 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 199 SC000915 Danger notices DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER In the following step you are going to remove the power cables. These cables are live if the rack power distribution unit or uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit is still switched on. (1) Do not plug a power cable into the fan-and-power-supply assembly until the assembly is fully home and its thumbscrews are fully tightened. (3) During an electrical storm, do not disconnect cables for display stations, printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines. (5) An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to that system. It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock. During an electrical storm, do not disconnect cables for display stations, printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines. (4) Do not try to open the covers of the fan-and-power-supply assembly. (2) 200 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000916 Caution notices CAUTION: This unit might have two linecords. To remove all power, disconnect both linecords. (1) CAUTION: Do not remove cover, do not service, no serviceable parts. (2) CAUTION: Double Pole/Neutral Fusing. (3) Figure 15. Linecord caution label Figure 16. Power supply cover caution label Figure 17. Fusing caution label SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 201 SC000916A CAUTION: This unit weighs over 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). Refer to manuals. (4) Figure 18. 2104 Model DS4 weight label SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Attention: If you have data stored on the drives, label the drives before you remove them. When you replace the drives, install each one in the same drive bay from which you removed it. Failure to do so could result in a loss of data. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) CAUTION: If a 2104 Model DS4 is fully loaded with 14 drives and two power supplies, its total weight exceeds 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). You must remove at least six drives from the 2104 Model DS4 before you lift it or install it into a rack or 2104 Model TS4. This reduces the total weight to less than 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) and the can then be safely handled by two people. Failure to do so can result in injury. 2104 Model DS4 202 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices CAUTION: This unit weighs between 32 Kg - 55 Kg (70.5 lbs - 121.2 lbs). (5) CAUTION: (6) The provided cardboard lifting tool is required for moving, installing, and relocating the product when fully populated. Three people are required to safely move the product. Failure to do so might result in injury. In case the lifting tool is not readily available, you must reduce the weight to 32 Kg or less by removing all of the heavy components (disk drives and power supplies) from the product. Then only two people are required to move, install, and relocate the product. Figure 19. 2104 Model TS4 weight label SC000219 Attention: If you have data stored on the drives, label the drives before you remove them. When you replace the drives, install each one in the same drive bay from which you removed it. Failure to do so could result in a loss of data. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000917 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 203 SC000918 CAUTION: A standby condition is indicated by the symbol to the right of the DC directly above the switch, SW1. When you toggle SW1 to the right position directly under the standby symbol, the ac-power to the unit is not shut off. (7) CAUTION: The stabilizer must be correctly attached to the bottom front of the rack to prevent the rack from tipping forward while the 2104 Model DS4 is being removed from the rack. Do not pull out or install any unit if a stabilizer is not attached to the rack. (8) CAUTION: The stabilizer must be correctly attached to the bottom front of the rack to prevent the rack from tipping forward while the 2104 Model DS4 is being installed into the rack. Do not remove or install any unit if a stabilizer is not attached to the rack. (9) Figure 20. Location of standby condition SC000328 204 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000319 CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the empty space that contained the fan assembly. (10) CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the empty space that contained the fan-and-power-supply assembly. (11) CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the empty space that contained the SCSI interface card assembly. (12) CAUTION: This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cable and plug for the user’s safety. Use this power cable in conjunction with a correctly grounded electrical outlet to avoid an electrical shock. (13) CAUTION: Do not touch the power outlet or the power outlet face plate with anything other than test probes before you complete this safety check. (14) CAUTION: If the reading is not infinity, do not proceed. Make the necessary corrections to the wiring before you continue. Do not switch on the branch circuit CB until you satisfactorily complete the previous steps. (15) CAUTION: Do not use the handles of the fan or fan-and-power-supply assemblies to carry the 2104 Model DS4. These handles are not intended to support the weight of the unit. (16) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 205 SC000920 CAUTION: As you push the assembly fully home, the lever automatically moves toward its closed position. Ensure that your fingers do not become pinched between the lever and the assembly. (17) CAUTION: Ensure that the mainline power cable has been removed from the failing fan-and-power supply before you continue. (18) CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the empty space above the fan-and-power supply assembly. (19) CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the empty space between the power supply assemblies. (20) CAUTION: If the 2104 Model DS4 is installed in a Model T00 or T42 rack, you must also observe the safety notices for those racks before you start to remove the frame assembly. You can find the safety notices in the section about system installation in the SA38-0577, or at the following Web site: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) CAUTION: The 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 are designed to be installed by the customer and are certified as customer setup. Make sure that the system or rack into which the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 will be installed is also designed and certified for customer setup. If they a the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4 must be installed by a CE. (22) 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide, re not, then 206 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000921 CAUTION: Do not insert hands or tools into the space that contained the card assembly. (23) CAUTION: It takes three people to lift the 2104 Model TS4. Do not attempt to lift the 2104 Model TS4 by yourself. Do not attempt to lift it without help from two other people. (24) CAUTION: Do not use the handles of the fan or fan-and-power-supply assemblies to carry the 2104 Model TS4. These handles are not intended to support the weight of the unit. (25) The 2104 Model DS4 is designed to be installed by the customer and is certified as customer setup. Make sure that the system or rack into which the 2104 Model DS4 will be installed is also designed and certified for customer setup. If they are not, then the 2104 Model DS4 must be installed by a CE. (26) CAUTION: CAUTION: The 2104 Model TS4 is designed to be installed by the customer and is certified as customer setup. Make sure that the system into which the 2104 Model TS4 will be installed is also designed and certified for customer setup. If it is not, then the 2104 Model TS4 must be installed by a CE. (27) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 207 Finnish 208 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 209 210 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 211 212 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 213 214 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 215 216 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 217 218 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 219 220 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 221 222 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 223 224 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 225 226 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 227 228 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 229 230 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices French Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 231 232 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 233 234 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 235 236 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 237 238 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 239 240 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 241 242 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 243 244 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 245 246 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 247 248 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 249 250 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 251 252 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 253 German Sicherheitshinweise und Hinweise zum Umweltschutz Sicherheitshinweise und ihre Übersetzungen SCGER901 Dieser Abschnitt enthält die folgenden Informationen: Sicherheitshinweise und ihre Übersetzungen Prozeduren zur Sicherheitsüberprüfung für dieses Produkt Hinweise zur Wiederverwertbarkeit und Entsorgung Dieses Buch enthält Sicherheitshinweise. Die Nichtbeachtung der Vorschriften in den mit gekennzeichneten Sicherheitshinweisen kann zu schweren Verletzungen oder sogar zum Tod führen. Die Nichtbeachtung der Vorschriften in den mit gekennzeichneten Sicherheitshinweisen kann zu leichten Verletzungen bzw. zu Schäden an Hardware oder Software führen. Die Sicherheitshinweise sind in numerischer Reihenfolge anhand ihrer IDs aufgeführt, die am Ende der einzelnen Sicherheitshinweise in Klammern stehen. Die folgenden Beispiele zeigen die Position der ID-Nummern in den Sicherheitshinweisen. Vorsicht Achtung Vorsicht Bei nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossener Netzsteckdose können an offen liegenden Metallteilen des Systems oder an angeschlossenen Einheiten gefährliche Berührungsspannungen auftreten. Für den ordnungsgemäßen Zustand der Steckdose ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. (1) Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in die Öffnung des freien Bereichs einführen, in dem sich die Ventilatorbaugruppe befand. (1) 254 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Elektrostatische Entladung (ESE) Prozeduren zur Sicherheitsüberprüfung Rack überprüfen SCGER902 Achtung: Bei der Handhabung von durch den Kundendienst austauschbaren Funktionseinheiten (FRUs) oder anderen Computerteilen die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen ergreifen, um Schäden durch statische Entladung zu vermeiden: Bewegungen einschränken. Durch Bewegung kann statische Aufladung aufgebaut werden. Computerteile vorsichtig anfassen. Karten an den Rändern oder an der Metallabdeckung anfassen. Niemals offen liegende Schaltkreise berühren. Vermeiden, dass Personen, die nicht korrekt geerdet sind, Computerteile berühren. Vor der Installation eines neuen Teils die antistatische Verpackung, in der sich das Teil befindet, mit einem unlackierten Metallteil des 2104 Modells DS4 oder Ts4 oder des Hostsystems mindestens zwei Sekunden lang berühren. Hierdurch wird die statische Elektrizität abgeleitet. Das Teil aus der Verpackung nehmen und (wenn möglich) direkt in das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 installieren, ohne das Teil abzusetzen. Muss das Teil abgesetzt werden, wie folgt vorgehen: 1. Die antistatische Verpackung, in der sich das Teil befindet, auf eine glatte, ebene Oberfläche legen. 2. Das Teil auf die antistatische Verpackung und nicht direkt auf eine Metalloberfläche legen. In den Prozeduren zur Sicherheitsüberprüfung wird beschrieben, wie das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 überprüft wird. Informationen über die Ausführung einer Sicherheitsüberprüfung für das Rack enthält das Installationshandbuch für das Rack. Achtung: Die 2104 Modelle DS4 und TS4 sind für die Installation durch Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert. Achten Sie darauf, dass das System oder Rack, in das das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 eingebaut wird, ebenfalls für die Installation durch den Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, muss das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 vom Kundendienst installiert werden. (22) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 255 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 überprüfen Externe Maschinenprüfungen Interne Maschinenprüfungen SCGER903 Führen Sie die folgenden internen Maschinenüberprüfungen aus: 1. Überprüfen Sie, ob Änderungen an der Maschine vorgenommen wurden, die nicht von IBM ausgeführt wurden. Ist dies der Fall, besorgen Sie sich das Formular für nicht von IBM ausgeführte Änderungen (Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey, Formnummer R009) bei der zuständigen Geschäftsstelle. Füllen Sie das Formular aus und geben Sie es an die Geschäftsstelle zurück. 2. Überprüfen Sie das Innere der Maschine auf: Metallteile oder andere Verschmutzungen Anzeichen von Wasser oder Feuchtigkeit Brandschäden Rauchschäden 3. Überprüfen Sie, ob offensichtliche mechanische Probleme wie z. B. lose Komponenten vorliegen. 4. Überprüfen Sie offen liegende Kabel auf Abnutzung oder Beschädigung. Führen Sie die folgenden externen Maschinenüberprüfungen aus: 1. Überprüfen Sie das Gehäuse auf Beschädigungen (lockere, abgebrochene oder scharfe Kanten). 2. Überprüfen Sie die Netzkabel. Die Isolierung darf nicht abgenutzt oder beschädigt sein. 3. Überprüfen Sie, ob vom Standard abweichende Änderungen vorgenommen wurden. Überprüfen Sie die Sicherheit solcher Änderungen mit besonderer Sorgfalt. 4. Überprüfen Sie, ob alle externen Abdeckungen vorhanden und unbeschädigt sind. 5. Überprüfen Sie, ob alle Verriegelungen und Scharniere in der korrekten Betriebsposition sind. 6. Überprüfen Sie das Netzkabel auf Beschädigungen. 7. Überprüfen Sie, ob Kabel abgenutzt oder beschädigt sind. 8. Überprüfen Sie die aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Befestigungen in der Abdeckung des Netzteils (Schrauben oder Nieten) nicht entfernt wurden oder beschädigt sind. 9. Überprüfen Sie das externe Signalkabel auf Beschädigungen. 10. Überprüfen Sie die Abdeckung auf scharfe Kanten, Beschädigungen oder Veränderungen, durch die interne Teile der Einheit freigelegt werden. 11. Beheben Sie alle gefundenen Probleme. Führen Sie die folgenden Sicherheitsüberprüfungen aus, um Gefahrenquellen zu erkennen. 256 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Sicherheitsaufkleber überprüfen SCGER904 Führen Sie die folgenden Überprüfungen für Sicherheitsaufkleber durch: 1. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Aufkleber am 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 1. 2. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Sicherheitsaufkleber für Netzkabel am Netzteil für das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 2. SCGER274 Abbildung 1. Aufkleber für 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 Abbildung 2. Sicherheitsaufkleber für Netzkabel SCGER325 Achtung: Diese Einheit könnte zwei Netzkabel haben. Um die Einheit ganz von der Netzspannung zu trennen, beide Netzkabel lösen. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 257 SCGER905 3. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Sicherheitsaufkleber für die Netzteilabdeckung am Netzteil für das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 3. 4. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Sicherheitsaufkleber für die Sicherung am Netzteil für das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 4. Abbildung 3. Sicherheitsaufkleber für Netzteilabdeckung Abbildung 4: Sicherheitsaufkleber für Sicherung SCGER326 SCGER327 Achtung: Abdeckung nicht entfernen. Nicht reparieren. Keine wartungsbedürftigen Teile. (2) Achtung: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung. (3) 258 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER905A 5. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Gewichtsaufkleber am 2104 Modell DS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 5. Achtung: Diese Einheit wiegt über 32 kg. Siehe Handbücher. (4) Abbildung 5. Gewichtsaufkleber für 2104 Modell DS4 SCGER220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Achtung: Sind Daten auf den Laufwerken gespeichert, die Laufwerke vor dem Ausbau mit einem Aufkleber versehen. Die Laufwerke müssen beim Einbau wieder in die Laufwerkpositionen installiert werden, aus denen sie beim Ausbau entfernt wurden. Andernfalls kann es zu einem Datenverlust kommen. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Achtung: Ist ein 2104 Modell DS4 mit 14 Laufwerken und 2 Netzteilen ausgestattet, überschreitet das Gesamtgewicht 32 kg. Es müssen mindestens 6 Laufwerke aus dem 2104 Modell DS4 entfernt werden, bevor es angehoben oder in ein Rack oder 2104 Modell TS4 installiert werden kann, damit das Gesamtgewicht auf unter 32 kg reduziert und das 2104 Modell DS4 sicher von zwei Personen gehandhabt werden kann. Andernfalls können Verletzungen auftreten. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 259 Diese Einheit wiegt zwischen 32 und 55 kg. (5) Achtung: Abbildung 6. Gewichtsaufkleber für 2104 Modell TS4 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SCGER219 6. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Gewichtsaufkleber am 2104 Modell TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 6. Achtung: Wird ein vollständig ausgestattetes Produkt versetzt, installiert oder transportiert, ist das mitgelieferte Anhebewerkzeug erforderlich. Zum sicheren Versetzen, Installieren oder Transportieren des Produkts sind drei Personen erforderlich. Andernfalls können Verletzungen auftreten. Ist das Anhebewerkzeug nicht verfügbar, muss das Gewicht durch das Entfernen aller schweren Komponenten (Plattenlaufwerke und Netzteile) aus dem Produkt auf unter 32 kg reduziert werden, da in diesem Fall nur zwei Personen erforderlich sind, um das Produkt zu versetzen, zu installieren oder zu transportieren. (6) Achtung: Sind Daten auf den Laufwerken gespeichert, die Laufwerke vor dem Ausbau mit einem Aufkleber versehen. Die Laufwerke müssen beim Einbau wieder in die Laufwerkpositionen installiert werden, aus denen sie beim Ausbau entfernt wurden. Andernfalls kann es zu einem Datenverlust kommen. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) SCGER906 260 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER907 7. Überprüfen Sie, ob der Aufkleber für Bereitschaftsbedingung am 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 angebracht ist. Siehe Abbildung 7. Achtung: Durch das Symbol rechts von "DC", direkt über dem Schalter SW1, wird eine Bereitschaftsbedingung angegeben. Wird der Schalter SW1 nach rechts direkt unter das Bereitschaftssymbol gelegt, wird dieWechselstromversorgung der Einheit nicht ausgeschaltet. (7) Abbildung 7. Aufkleber für Bereitschaftsbedingung SCGER326 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 261 SCGER908 Dieser Abschnitt enthält Anweisungen zur Überprüfung der Erdung des 2104 Modells DS4 oder TS4. Erdung des 2104 Modells DS4 überprüfen Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um die Erdung des 2104 Modells DS4 zu überprüfen: 3. Einige elektrische Schaltkreise können beschädigt werden, wenn die externen SCSI-Kabel an das 2104 Modell DS4 angeschlossen sind, während die Erdung überprüft wird. Achten Sie darauf, dass keine externen SCSI-Kabel an die Anschlüsse angeschlossen sind. 4. Überprüfen Sie die Erdung des 2104 Modells DS4: a. Stellen Sie an den Anschlussenden der Netzkabel, die in Schritt 2 aus der Stromversorgungseinheit oder der Notstromversorgung herausgezogen wurden, durch eine Sichtprüfung fest, ob die Schutzleiterverbindung in Ordnung ist. b. Schließen Sie eine Messleitung eines Ohm-Meters an das Gehäuse des 2104 Modells DS4 und die andere Messleitung an die Schutzleiterverbindung an der Vorderseite der Netzteilanschlüsse an, die in Schritt 2 herausgezogen wurden. Der zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt am Netzteilanschluss und dem Gehäuse des 2104 Modells DS4 gemessene Wert darf maximal 0,1 Ohm betragen. Achtung: Abbildung 8. Netzkabel und SCSI-Anschlüsse auf dem 2104 Modell DS4 Erdung des 2104 Modells DS4 oder TS4 überprüfen 1. Achten Sie darauf, dass die Stromzufuhr zum Rack ausgeschaltet ist.Weitere Informationen enthält das Installationsdokument für das Rack oder Hostsystem. 2. Achten Sie darauf, dass die Netzkabel in die aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen eingesteckt sind. Siehe Abbildung 8. Achten Sie zudem darauf, dass die anderen Enden der Netzkabel aus der Stromversorgungseinheit oder der Notstromversorgung im Rack herausgezogen sind. Weitere Informationen enthält das Installationsdokument für das Rack oder Hostsystem. 2 1 SCGER210 262 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER909 Wird ein 220 Volt 2104 Modell DS4 gewartet, machen Sie mit Schritt 5 weiter. Wird ein -48 Volt 2104 Modell DS4 gewartet, machen Sie mit Schritt 7 weiter. 5. Führen Sie eine Durchgangsprüfung zwischen dem Gehäuse des 2104 Modells DS4 und dem Schutzleiterkontakt des Netzteilanschlusses der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen aus. Siehe Abbildung 9. 6. Machen Sie mit Schritt 9 weiter. 7. Führen Sie eine Durchgangsprüfung zwischen dem Gehäuse des 2104 Modells DS4 und den Schutzleiterkontakten 1 und 7 der einzelnen Hauptstromanschlüsse aus. Siehe Abbildung 10. 8. Machen Sie mit Schritt 9 weiter. 9. Wird für eine aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe kein Durchgang gemessen, tauschen Sie die Baugruppe aus.Weitere Informationen enthält der Abschnitt über aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppen im . Führen Sie die gesamte Erdungsprüfung erneut aus. Wird für jede aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe Durchgang gemessen, liegt der Fehler möglicherweise beim Netzkabel oder bei der Erdung des Hostsystems. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Abbildung 9. Schutzleiterkontakt (220 V 2104 Modell DS4) Abbildung 10. Schutzleiterkontakte (-48 V 2104 Modell DS4) 1 SCGER329 Ist die Erdung korrekt, ist die Erdungsüberprüfung abgeschlossen. Ist die Erdung nicht korrekt, ziehen Sie die Netzkabel aus den aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen im 2104 Modell DS4. SCGER330 Kontaktstift 6 Kontaktstift 1 Kontaktstift 12 Kontaktstift 7 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 263 SCGER910 Wird ein 220 Volt 2104 Modell DS4 gewartet, machen Sie mit Schritt 10 weiter. Wird ein -48 Volt 2104 Modell DS4 gewartet, können Sie dem Installationsdokument für das Rack oder das Hostsystem Informationen zur Fehlerbestimmung entnehmen. Führen Sie die gesamte Erdungsprüfung erneut aus. 10. Überprüfen Sie das Netzkabel auf Durchgang. Wird am Netzkabel kein Durchgang gemessen, tauschen Sie das Netzkabel aus. Führen Sie dann die gesamte Erdungsprüfung erneut aus. Wird am Netzkabel Durchgang gemessen, können Sie dem Installationsdokument für das Rack oder das Hostsystem Informationen zur Fehlerbestimmung entnehmen. Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um die Erdung des 2104 Modells TS4 zu überprüfen: 2. Achten Sie darauf, dass das andere Ende der Netzkabel nicht an eine Netzsteckdose angeschlossen ist. Ziehen Sie die Kabel gegebenenfalls heraus. Erdung des 2104 Modells TS4 überprüfen 1. Achten Sie darauf, dass an jeden Stromversorgungsanschluss ein Netzkabel abgeschlossen ist. Siehe Abbildung 11. 1 Abbildung 11. Netzkabel und SCSI-Anschlüsse (2104 Modell TS4) SCGER230 1 2 3 264 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER911 3. Einige elektrische Schaltkreise können beschädigt werden, wenn die externen SCSI-Kabel an das 2104 Modell TS4 angeschlossen sind, während die Erdung überprüft wird. Achten Sie darauf, dass keine externen SCSI-Kabel an die SCSI-Anschlüsse angeschlossen sind. Siehe Abbildung 11. 4. Führen Sie eine Durchgangsprüfung zwischen dem Gehäuse des 2104 Modells TS4 und dem Schutzleiterkontakt der einzelnen Netzkabel aus. a. Überprüfen Sie die Netzkabel. Achten Sie darauf, dass die Schutzleiterverbindung in Ordnung ist. b. Messen Sie den Widerstand der Schutzleiterverbindung zwischen dem externen Schutzleiterkontakt und dem Gehäuse. Der gemessene Wert darf maximal 0,1 Ohm betragen. 5. Ist der Durchgang korrekt, ist die Erdungsüberprüfung abgeschlossen. 6. Ist die Erdung nicht korrekt, ziehen Sie die Netzkabel aus den Hauptstromanschlüssen. a. Überprüfen Sie die einzelnen Netzkabel auf Durchgang. b. Tauschen Sie die Netzkabel aus, bei denen der Durchgang nicht korrekt ist. c. Führen Sie eine Durchgangsprüfung zwischen dem Gehäuse des 2104 Modells TS4 und dem Schutzleiterkontakt des Netzteilanschlusses der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen aus. Siehe Abbildung 12. Achtung: d. Wird für eine aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe kein Durchgang gemessen, tauschen Sie die Baugruppe aus. (Weitere Informationen enthält der Abschnitt über aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppen im .) Machen Sie mit "Erdung des 2104 Modells TS4 überprüfen" weiter und führen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 6d aus, um die Erdungsprüfung erneut auszuführen. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Abbildung 12. Schutzleiterkontakt (2104 Modell TS4) 1 2 3 SCGER331 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 265 SCGER912 Abbildung 13. 2104 Modell DS4 von der Stromversorgung trennen Anmerkung: Anmerkungen: Liegt kein besonderer Grund vor, das Hostsystem oder das 2104 Modell Ds4 nur dann von der Stromversorgung trennen, wenn in den auszuführenden Anweisungen dazu aufgefordert wird. Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das 2104 Modell DS4 von der Stromversorgung zu trennen: 1. Überprüfen Sie zusammen mit dem Kunden, ob alle Operationen zwischen dem 2104 Modell DS4 und dem Hostsystem gestoppt wurden. 2. Setzen Sie den DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen auf "Bereitschaft". Siehe Abbildung 13. a. Einige 2104 Modelle DS4 haben eine aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe und eine Ventilatorbaugruppe. Die Ventilatorbaugruppe hat keinen DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft. b. Bei einer aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppe kann die Anzeige CHK an sein, obwohl der DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft auf “Bereitschaft" steht. 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 von der Stromversorgung trennen 1 2104 Modell DS4 von der Stromversorgung trennen SCGER206 266 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER913 3. Vorsicht Im folgenden Schritt werden die Netzkabel entfernt. Ist die Stromversorgungseinheit des Gehäuses oder die unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung noch eingeschaltet, führen diese Kabel Strom. (1) 1 1 2 2 Anmerkung: Anmerkungen: Liegt kein besonderer Grund vor, das Hostsystem oder das 2104 Modell TS4 nur dann von der Stromversorgung trennen, wenn in den auszuführenden Anweisungen dazu aufgefordert wird. Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das 2104 Modell TS4 von der Stromversorgung zu trennen: 1. Überprüfen Sie zusammen mit dem Kunden, ob alle Operationen zwischen dem 2104 Modell TS4 und dem Hostsystem gestoppt wurden. 2. Setzen Sie den DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft (er befindet sich an der Rückseite des 2104 Modells TS4) der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen auf "Bereitschaft". Siehe Abbildung 14. a. Einige 2104 Modelle TS4 haben eine aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe und eine Ventilatorbaugruppe. Die Ventilatorbaugruppe hat keinen DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft. b. Bei einer aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppe kann die Anzeige CHK an sein, obwohl der DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft auf “Bereitschaft" steht. 2104 Modell TS4 von der Stromversorgung trennen Trennen Sie die Netzkabel von der Rückseite des 2104 Modells DS4. Siehe Abbildung 13. 4. Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das 2104 Modell DS4 wieder an die Stromversorgung anzuschließen: a. Schließen Sie die Netzkabel wieder an. b. Setzen Sie den DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen auf "Ein". Sie können die Motorstartfolge des 2104 Modells DS4 konfigurieren. Weitere Informationen enthalten die Abschnitte über den Schalter für automatisches Starten des Laufwerks und für den Modus für verzögerten Motorstart im . Anmerkung: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 267 SCGER914 1 2 2 3. Trennen Sie die Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose und von der Rückseite des 2104 Modells TS4. Siehe Abbildung 14. 4. Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das 2104 Modell TS4 wieder an die Stromversorgung anzuschließen: a. Schließen Sie die Netzkabel wieder an. b. Setzen Sie den DC-Schalter Ein/Bereitschaft der einzelnen aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen auf "Ein". Sie können die Motorstartfolge des 2104 Modells TS4 konfigurieren.Weitere Informationen enthalten die Abschnitte über den Schalter für automatisches Starten des Laufwerks und für den Modus für verzögerten Motorstart im . Anmerkung: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Abbildung 14. 2104 Modell TS4 von der Stromversorgung trennen SCGER207 268 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER915 Sicherheitshinweise "Vorsicht" Vorsicht Vorsicht Vorsicht Vorsicht Vorsicht Im folgenden Schritt werden die Netzkabel entfernt. Ist die Stromversorgungseinheit des Gehäuses oder die unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung noch eingeschaltet, führen diese Kabel Strom. (1) Kein Netzkabel in die aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe einstecken, bis die Baugruppe vollständig in Ausgangsposition ist und die Rändelschrauben angezogen sind. (3) Während eines Gewitters keine Kabel von Bildschirmeinheiten, Druckern, Telefonapparaten oder Blitzschutzeinheiten lösen. (5) Bei nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossener Netzsteckdose können an Metallteilen des Gerätes und an angeschlossenen Einheiten gefährliche Berührungsspannungen auftreten. Für den ordnungsgemäßen Zustand der Steckdose ist der Betreiber verantwortlich.Während eines Gewitters keine Kabel von Bildschirmeinheiten, Druckern,Telefonapparaten oder Blitzschutzeinheiten lösen. (4) Die Abdeckungen der aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppe nicht öffnen. (2) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 269 SCGER916 Sicherheitshinweise "Achtung" Achtung: Diese Einheit könnte zwei Netzkabel haben. Um die Einheit ganz von der Netzspannung zu trennen, beide Netzkabel lösen. (1) Achtung: Abdeckung nicht entfernen. Nicht reparieren. Keine wartungsbedürftigen Teile. (2) Achtung: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung. (3) Abbildung 15. Sicherheitsaufkleber für Netzkabel Abbildung 16. Sicherheitsaufkleber der Netzteilabdeckung Abbildung 17. Sicherheitsaufkleber für Sicherung SCGER327 SCGER326 SCGER325 270 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER916A Achtung: Diese Einheit wiegt über 32 kg. Siehe Handbücher. (4) Abbildung 18. Gewichtsaufkleber für 2104 Modell DS4 SCGER220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Achtung: Sind Daten auf den Laufwerken gespeichert, die Laufwerke vor dem Ausbau mit einem Aufkleber versehen. Die Laufwerke müssen beim Einbau wieder in die Laufwerkpositionen installiert werden, aus denen sie beim Ausbau entfernt wurden. Andernfalls kann es zu einem Datenverlust kommen. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Achtung: Ist ein 2104 Modell DS4 mit 14 Laufwerken und 2 Netzteilen ausgestattet, überschreitet das Gesamtgewicht 32 kg. Es müssen mindestens 6 Laufwerke aus dem 2104 Modell DS4 entfernt werden, bevor es angehoben oder in ein Rack oder 2104 Modell TS4 installiert werden kann, damit das Gesamtgewicht auf unter 32 kg reduziert und das 2104 Modell DS4 sicher von zwei Personen gehandhabt werden kann. Andernfalls können Verletzungen auftreten. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 271 Achtung: Diese Einheit wiegt zwischen 32 und 55 kg. (5) Achtung: Wird ein vollständig ausgestattetes Produkt versetzt, installiert oder transportiert, ist das mitgelieferte Anhebewerkzeug erforderlich. Zum sicheren Versetzen, Installieren oder Transportieren des Produkts sind drei Personen erforderlich. Andernfalls können Verletzungen auftreten. Ist das Anhebewerkzeug nicht verfügbar, muss das Gewicht durch das Entfernen aller schweren Komponenten (Plattenlaufwerke und Netzteile) aus dem Produkt auf unter 32 kg reduziert werden, da in diesem Fall nur zwei Personen erforderlich sind, um das Produkt zu versetzen, zu installieren oder zu transportieren. (6) Abbildung 19. Gewichtsaufkleber für 2104 Modell TS4 SCGER219 Achtung: Sind Daten auf den Laufwerken gespeichert, die Laufwerke vor dem Ausbau mit einem Aufkleber versehen. Die Laufwerke müssen beim Einbau wieder in die Laufwerkpositionen installiert werden, aus denen sie beim Ausbau entfernt wurden. Andernfalls kann es zu einem Datenverlust kommen. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SCGER917 272 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER918 Achtung: Durch das Symbol rechts von "DC", direkt über dem Schalter SW1, wird eine Bereitschaftsbedingung angegeben. Wird der Schalter SW1 nach rechts direkt unter das Bereitschaftssymbol gelegt, wird dieWechselstromversorgung der Einheit nicht ausgeschaltet. (7) Achtung: Der Stabilisator muss ordnungsgemäß unten an der Vorderseite des Racks angebracht werden, um ein Vorkippen beim Ausbau des 2104 Modells DS4 aus dem Rack zu verhindern. Keine Einheiten installieren oder entfernen, wenn kein Stabilisator am Rack montiert ist. (8) Achtung: Der Stabilisator muss ordnungsgemäß unten an der Vorderseite des Racks angebracht werden, um ein Vorkippen beim Einbau des 2104 Modells DS4 in das Rack zu verhindern. Keine Einheiten installieren oder entfernen, wenn kein Stabilisator am Rack montiert ist. (9) Abbildung 20. Position einer Bereitschaftsbedingung SCGER328 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 273 SCGER919 Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den freien Bereich einführen, in dem sich die Ventilatorbaugruppe befand. (10) Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den freien Bereich einführen, in dem sich die aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehende Baugruppe befand. (11) Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den freien Bereich einführen, in dem sich die SCSI-Schnittstellenkarten-Baugruppe befand. (12) Achtung: Netzkabel und Netzstecker dieses Gerätes entsprechen den einschlägigen Sicherheitsbestimmungen. Dieses Gerät nur an eine Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit ordnungsgemäßer Schutzleiterverbindung anschließen. (13) Achtung: Die Netzsteckdose und die Abdeckplatte der Netzsteckdose nicht mit etwas anderem als den Prüfspitzen berühren, bevor diese Sicherheitsüberprüfung beendet ist. (14) Achtung: Wird nicht 'Unendlich' gemessen, nicht weiterarbeiten. Die entsprechenden Korrekturen an der Verkabelung vornehmen, bevor weitergearbeitet wird. Netzstromkreis erst einschalten, wenn alle genannten Schritte richtig ausgeführt wurden. (15) Achtung: Nicht die Griffe des Ventilators oder der aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen benutzen, um das 2104 Modell DS4 zu tragen. Diese Griffe sind nicht dafür vorgesehen, das Gewicht der Einheit zu tragen. (16) 274 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCGER920 Achtung: Wird die Baugruppe vollständig in Ausgangsposition gebracht, bewegt sich der Hebel automatisch zur geschlossenen Position hin. Darauf achten, dass die Finger nicht zwischen dem Hebel und der Baugruppe eingeklemmt werden. (17) Achtung: Das Hauptnetzkabel muss von der fehlerhaften, aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppe entfernt werden, bevor weitergearbeitet wird. (18) Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den freien Bereich über der aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppe einführen. (19) Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den freien Bereich zwischen den Netzteilbaugruppen einführen. (20) Achtung: Wird das 2104 Modell DS4 in ein Rack-Modell T00 oder T42 installiert, müssen zudem die Sicherheitshinweise für diese Racks beachtet werden, bevor mit dem Ausbau des Rahmens begonnen wird. Die Sicherheitshinweise befinden sich in dem Abschnitt über die Systeminstallation im , IBM Form SA38-0577, oder auf der folgendenWeb-Site: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) Achtung: Die 2104 Modelle DS4 und TS4 sind für die Installation durch Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert. Achten Sie darauf, dass das System oder Rack, in das das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 eingebaut wird, ebenfalls für die Installation durch den Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, muss das 2104 Modell DS4 oder TS4 vom Kundendienst installiert werden. (22) 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 275 SCGER921 Achtung: Keine Hände oderWerkzeuge in den Bereich einführen, in dem sich die Kartenbaugruppe befand. (23) Achtung: Zum Anheben des 2104 Modells TS4 sind drei Personen erforderlich. Nicht versuchen,das 2104 Modell TS4 alleine anzuheben. Zum Anheben sind zwei weitere Personen erforderlich. (24) Achtung: Nicht die Griffe des Ventilators oder der aus Ventilator und Netzteil bestehenden Baugruppen benutzen, um das 2104 Modell TS4 zu tragen. Diese Griffe sind nicht dafür vorgesehen, das Gewicht der Einheit zu tragen. (25) Das 2104 Modell DS4 ist für die Installation durch Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert. Achten Sie darauf, dass das System oder Rack, in das das 2104 Modell DS4 eingebaut wird, ebenfalls für die Installation durch den Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, muss das 2104 Modell DS4 vom Kundendienst installiert werden. (26) Achtung: Achtung: Das 2104 Modell TS4 ist für die Installation durch Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert. Achten Sie darauf, dass das System, in das das 2104 Modell TS4 eingebaut wird, ebenfalls für die Installation durch den Kunden konzipiert und zertifiziert ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, muss das 2104 Modell TS4 vom Kundendienst installiert werden. (27) 276 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Greek Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 277 278 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 279 280 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 281 282 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 283 284 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 285 286 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 287 288 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 289 290 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 291 292 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 293 294 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 295 296 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 297 298 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 299 Hebrew 300 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 301 302 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 303 304 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 305 306 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 307 308 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 309 310 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 311 312 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 313 314 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 315 316 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 317 318 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 319 320 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 321 322 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Hungarian Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 323 324 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 325 326 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 327 328 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 329 330 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 331 332 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 333 334 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 335 336 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 337 338 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCHUN916 Óvatosságra intõ figyelmeztetések VIGYÁZAT: Ennek az egységnek lehet, hogy két hálózati csatlakozóvezetéke van. Áramtalanításkor húzza ki mindkét hálózati csatlakozóvezetéket! (1) VIGYÁZAT: Ne vegye le a burkolatot, és ne kísérelje meg a javítást! Nem tartalmaz javítható alkatrészt. (2) VIGYÁZAT: Kétpólusú nullavezetõs biztosítás. (3) 15. ábra Hálózati csatlakozóvezeték figyelmeztetõ címke 16. ábra Tápegységburkolat figyelmeztetõ címke 17. ábra Biztosító figyelmeztetõ címkéje SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 339 340 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 341 342 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 343 344 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 345 Japanese 346 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 347 348 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 349 350 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 351 352 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 353 354 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 355 356 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 357 358 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 359 360 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 361 362 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 363 364 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 365 366 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 367 368 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Korean Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 369 370 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 371 372 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 373 374 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 375 376 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 377 378 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 379 380 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 381 382 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 383 384 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 385 386 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 387 388 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 389 390 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 391 Lithuanian Saugos ir aplinkosaugos informacija Saugos áspëjimai ir jø vertimas SCLIT901 Ðiame skyriuje pateikiama tokia informacija: Saugos áspëjimai ir jø vertimas Ðio produkto saugos patikrinimo instrukcijos Aplinkosaugos informacija ir nuostatos. Ðiame dokumente pateikiami saugos patarimai. Áspëjimas informuoja jus apie sàlygas arba veiksmus, kurie gali bûti mirtinai pavojingi arba dël kuriø galite rimtai susiþaloti. Áspëjimas informuoja jus apie sàlygas arba veiksmus, dël kuriø galite susiþeisti, bet ne mirtinai ir ne per daug pavojingai. Praneðimas informuoja apie sàlygas ir veiksmus, dël kuriø gali sugesti maðinos áranga, neveikti programa bei gali bûti paþeisti duomenys. Praneðimai yra pateikiami eilës tvarka pagal jø ID, kurie rodomi skliausteliuose kiekvieno praneðimo pabaigoje. Perþiûrëkite toliau pateikiamus pavojaus ir perspëjimo praneðimus, susietus su tam tikru ID numeriu. Pavojus Áspëjimas Dëmesio PAVOJUS Dël neteisingai prijungto elektros tinklo lizdo metalinës sistemos dalys arba prie sistemos prijungti prietaisai gali bûti labai aukðtos átampos. Pirkëjas yra atsakingas ir turi uþtikrinti, kad tinklo lizdas yra teisingai ájungtas ir áþemintas, ir tokiu bûdu apsaugo nuo elektros ðoko. (1) ÁSPËJIMAS: Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á tuðèià ertmæventiliatoriø rinkinyje. (1) 392 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Elektros krûvio paðalinimas Saugos tikrinimo veiksmai Korpuso patikrinimas SCLIT902 Dëmesio Kai lieèiate pakeièiamus elementus ir kitas kompiuterio dalis, imkitës ðiø priemoniø, kad iðvengtumëte paþeidimo statiniu krûviu: Apribokite savo judesius. Dël judesiø aplink jus gali susikaupti statinis krûvis. Visuomet bûkite atidûs liesdami kompiuterio dalis. Plokðtes laikykite uþ briaunø arba metalinës dangos. Niekada nelieskite neapsaugotø grandiniø. Neleiskite liesti kompiuterio daliø kitiems þmonëms nepasirûpinus áþeminimu. Prieð ádiegdami naujà dalá modeliams 2104 Model DS4, 2104 Model TS4 arba valdanèiajai sistemai, palieskite paketo apsauganèio nuo statinës iðkrovos nedaþytà metalinædalá ir laikykite palietæmaþiausiai 2 sekundes. Tai sumaþins pakuotës ir jûsø kûno statiná krûvá. Árenginio dalá iðimkite ið pakuotës ir, jei ámanoma, nepadëdami ámontuokite jà tiesiai á modelá 2104 DS4 arba TS4. Jei árenginio dalá turite kur nors padëti, atlikite ðiuos veiksmus: 1. Nuo statiðkumo apsauganèià pakuotæ, kurioje buvo árenginio dalis, padëkite ant lygaus ir horizontalaus pavirðiaus. 2. Padëkite detalæant nuo statinio krûvio apsauganèios pakuotës. Árenginio dalies negalima dëti tiesiai ant metalinio pavirðiaus. Saugos tikrinimo procedûrose nurodoma, kaip tikrinti modelá 2104 DS4 arba Ts4. Informacijos apie korpuso saugos patikrinimà ieðkokite korpuso montavimo ir diegimo vadove. ÁSPËJIMAS: Modeliai 2104 DS4 ir TS4 yra sukurti taip, kad juos ádiegti galëtø vartotojas, ir yra sertifikuoti kaip vartotojo sàranka. Ásitikinkite, kad sistema arba korpusas, á kurá bus diegiamas modelis 2104 DS4 arba TS4, yra pritaikytas ir sertifikuotas vartotojo sàrankai. Jeigu ne, tuomet modelá 2104 DS4 arba TS4 turi ádiegti techninës prieþiûros specialistai. (22) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 393 Modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 patikrinimas Iðoriniai árenginio patikrinimai Vidiniai árenginio patikrinimai SCLIT903 Atlikite ðiuos vidinius árenginio patikrinimus: 1. Patikrinkite, ar nebuvo kokiø nors, ne ámonës IBM atliktø pakeitimø. Jei tokiø pakeitimø radote, ið IBM filialo bûstinës paimkite blankà "Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey", Nr. R009. Jà uþpildægràþinkite á filialo bûstinæ. 2. Patikrinkite, ar árenginio viduje nëra: Metalo arba kitokiø neðvarumø Vandens arba kito skysèio pëdsakø Degimo poþymiø Dûmø 3. Patikrinkite, ar nëra matomø mechaniniø nesklandumø, pvz., atsilaisvinusiø komponentø. 4. Patikrinkite, ar matomi laidai ir jungtys nesusidëvëjæ, nesuskilæ, nesuspausti. Atlikite ðiuos iðorinius árenginio patikrinimus: 1. Patikrinkite, ar korpusas nepaþeistas (sulauþytas, nesutvirtintas arba aðtriomis briaunomis). 2. Patikrinkite el. maitinimo laidus ir ásitikinkite, kad izoliacija nesusidëvëjusi ir nepaþeista. 3. Patikrinkite, ar nëra kokiø nors matomø neáprastø pakitimø. Bûkite labai atidûs vertindami ðiø pakitimø saugà. 4. Patikrinkite, ar yra visi iðoriniai dangalai, ir, ar jie nesugadinti. 5. Ásitikinkite, kad visi sklàsèiai ir vyriai yra tinkamoje eksploatavimui bûklëje. 6. Patikrinkite, ar nepaþeistas el. maitinimo laidas. 7. Patikrinkite, ar laidai nesusidëvëjæ, nepaþeisti arba neprispausti. 8. Patikrinkite ventiliatoriaus ir el. maitinimo tiekimo árenginius. Patikrinkite, ar el. maitinimo tiekimo árenginio dangèio sàvarþos (varþtai arba kniedës) neiðimti arba neatsilaisvinæ. 9. Patikrinkite, ar nepaþeistas iðorinis ryðio laidas. 10. Patikrinkite, ar dangtis neturi aðtriø briaunø, nesugadintas, ar nëra pakitimø, kurie atidengia vidines árenginio dalis. 11. Paðalinkite rastus nesklandumus. Norëdami nustatyti, kokios sàlygos yra nesaugios, atlikite ðiuos saugos patikrinimus. 394 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Saugos korteliø patikrinimai SCLIT904 1. Patikrinkite, ar kortelë pritvirtinta ant modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4. Þr. 1 paveikslëlá. 2. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 el. maitinimo ðaltinio pritvirtinta kortelë su áspëjimu apie laidà. Þr. 2 paveikslëlá. SCLIT274 1 paveikslëlis. Kortelë, skirta modeliui 2104 DS4 arba Ts4 2 paveikslëlis. Áspëjimo apie laidà kortelë. SCLIT325 ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðiame árenginyje gali bûti du laidai. Norëdami nutraukti el. maitinimà, atjunkite abu laidus. (1) Atlikite saugos korteliø patikrinimà: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 395 SCLIT905 3. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 el. maitinimo ðaltinio danèio yra privirtinta kortelë su áspëjimu. Þr. 3 paveikslëlá. 4. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 el. maitinimo ðaltinio yra pritvirtinta kortelë su áspëjimu apie saugiklá. Þr. 4 paveikslëlá. 3 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo ðaltinio dangèio áspëjimo kortelë 4 paveikslëlis. Lentelë su áspëjimu apie saugiklá SCLIT326 SCLIT327 ÁSPËJIMAS: Nenuimkite dangèio, nieko nekeiskite, nëra keièiamø daliø. (2) ÁSPËJIMAS: Du poliai/ Neutralë su saugikliu. (3) 396 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT905A 5. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 DS4 yra svorio kortelë. Þr. 5 paveikslëlá. ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðis árengimas sveria daugiau nei 32 kg (70,5 svaro). Skaitykite vartotojo instrukcijose. (4) 5 paveikslëlis. Modelio 2104 DS4 svorio kortelë SCLIT220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Dëmesio: Jei diskuose saugote duomenis, prieð diskus iðimdami, uþdëkite ant jø etiketes. Kai diskus keièiate, kiekvienà ið jø ádëkite á tà patá disko dëklà, ið kurio já iðëmëte. Antraip prarasite duomenis. > 18 kg (37 svaro) > 32 kg (70,5 svaro) PERSPËJIMAS: Jei modelyje 2104 DS4 yra visi 14 diskø árenginiø ir du el.maitinimo ðaltiniai, visas jo svoris virðija 32 kg (70.5 svaro). Ið modelio 2104 DS4 reikia paðalinti maþiausiai ðeðis diskus, jei norite já pakelti arba já ámontuoti á korpusà arba 2104 modelá TS4. Bendras svoris bus maþesnis nei 32 kg (70,5 svaro) ir modelá 2104 DS4 du þmonës galës saugiai paimti. Antraip galima susiþeisti. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 397 ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðis árenginys sveria nuo 32 iki 55 kg (70.5 - 121.2 svarai). (5) 6 paveikslëlis. Modelio 2104 TS4 svorio etiketë. 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SCLIT219 6. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 TS4 pritvirtinta svorio etiketë. Þr. 6 paveikslëlá. DËMESIO: Pridëto dëþës pakëlimo árankio reikia perstumiant, diegiant ir perkeliant árenginá, kai jis visai uþpildytas. Norint árenginá perkelti saugiai, reikia trijø þmoniø. Antraip galite susiþeisti. Jei këlimo priemonës neturite, árenginio svorá privalote sumaþinti iki 32 kg arba daugiau nuimdami visas sunkias dalis (diskus ir el. maitinimo ðaltinius). Tuomet reikës tik dviejø þmoniø árenginiui pastumti, ádiegti arba perkelti. (6) Dëmesio: Jei diskuose saugote duomenis, prieð diskus iðimdami, uþdëkite ant jø etiketes. Kai diskus keièiate, kiekvienà ið jø ádëkite á tà patá disko dëklà, ið kurio já iðëmëte. Antraip prarasite duomenis. > 18 kg (37 svarai) > 32 kg (70.5 svaro) SCLIT906 398 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT907 7. Patikrinkite, ar ant modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 pritvirtinta budëjimo reþimo etiketë. Þr. 7 paveikslëlá. ÁSPËJIMAS: Budëjimo reþimas paþymëtas simboliu, esanèiu deðinëje tiesioginës srovës pusëje, tiesiai virð jungiklio SW1. Kai SW1 perjungiate á deðinæpozicijà tiesiai po budëjimo reþimo simboliu, árenginio kintamos srovës el. Maitinimas neiðjungiamas. (7) 7 paveikslëlis. Budëjimo reþimo etiketë SCLIT326 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 399 SCLIT908 This section contains instructions for checking the grounding of the 2104 Model DS4 or Model TS4. Modelio 2104 DS4 áþeminimo patikrinimas Norëdami patikrinti modelio 2104 DS4 áþeminimà atlikite ðiuos veiksmus: 3. Kai kurios el. grandinës gali bûti paþeistos, jei iðoriniai SCSI kabeliai prijungti prie modelio DS4 tuo metu, kai atliekamas áþeminimo patikrinimas. Ásitikinkite, kad iðoriniai SCSI kabeliai neájungti á jungtis . 4. Patikrinkite modelio DS4 áþeminimà: ø akumuliatoriø árenginio antrajame þingsnyje, kiðtukai ir treèiojo laido kontaktas yra geros bûklës à ommetro kontaktà prie 2104 modelio DS4 korpuso iðvado ir kità prie treèiojo laido áþeminimo kontakto. vienà jungiamàjá laidà prie 2104 modelio DS4 korpuso ir kità jungiamàjá laidà prie treèiojo laido áþeminimo kontakto, esanèio prieð maitinimo jungtis, kurias atjungëte antrajame þingsnyje. Ommetro parodymai turi bûti 0,1 omo ar maþiau tarp áþeminimo kontakto, esanèio maitinimo laido jungtyje, ir 2104 modelio DS4 korpuso. Dëmesio: a. Apþiûrëkite ir ásitikinkite, kad maitinimo jungèiø, kurias iðjungëte ið maitimo tiekimo ar atsargini . 2104 2104 b. Pajunkite vien Prijunkite ommetro 8 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo kabeliai ir SCSI jungtys modelyje 2104 DS4 Modelio 2104 DS4 arba TS4 áeminimo patikrinimas 1. Ásitikinkite, kad visi el. maitinimo ðaltiniai atjungti nuo korpuso. Þr. montavimo diegimo dokumente, skirtame korpusui arba valdanèiajai sistemai. 2. Ásitikinkite, kad el. maitinimo kabeliai yra ájungti á kiekvienà ventiliatoriaus ir el. maitinimo ðaltinio deriná. Þr. 8 paveikslëlá. Taip pat patikrinkite, ar el. maitinimo kabeliø galai atjungti nuo el. maitinimo paskirstymo arba atsarginio akumuliatoriø árenginio. Þr. montavimo diegimo dokumente, skirtame korpusui arba valdanèiajai sistemai. 2 1 SCLIT210 400 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT909 Jei dirbate su 220 voltø 2104 modeliu DS4, rinkitës 5 þingsná. Jei dirbate su -48 voltø 2104 modeliu DS4, atlikite 7 þingsná. 5. Patikrinkite modelio DS4 korpuso ir kiekvieno ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio el. maitinimo jungties áþeminimo kontakto tolydumà. Þr. 9 paveikslëlá. 2104 6. Pereikite prie 9 þingsnio. 7. Patikrinkite modelio DS4 korpuso ir kiekvieno pagrindinio el. maitinimo ðaltinio 1 ir 7 áþeminimo kontaktø tolydumà. Þr. 10 paveikslëlá. 2104 8. Pereikite prie 9 þingsnio. 9. Jei kuris nors ventiliatoriaus el. tiekimo árenginys netolydus, pakeiskite já nauju. Þr. skyriø, kuriame raðoma apie ventiliatoriaus ir el. maitinimo tiekimo árenginius, esantá vadove . Dar kartà iðsamiai patikrinkite áþeminimà. Jei kiekvienas ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginys tolydus, gali bûti, kad nesklandumø iðkyla dël el. maitinimo kabelio arba valdanèiosios sistemos áþeminimo. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide 9 paveikslëlis. Áþeminimo kontaktas (220 V 2104 modelis DS4 ) 10 paveikslëlis. Áþeminimo kontaktai (48 V modelis 2104 DS4) 1 SCLIT329 Jei áþeminimas tinkamas, áþeminimo patikrinimas uþbaigtas. Jei áþeminimas netinkamas, iðjunkite 2104 DS4 maitinimo kabelius ið ventiliatoriaus - el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio. modelio SCLIT330 6 kontaktas 1 kontaktas 12 kontaktas 7 kontaktas Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 401 SCLIT910 Jei dirbate su 220 voltø modeliu DS4, pereikite prie 10. Jei dirbate su 48 voltø modeliu DS4, norëdami paðalinti gedimà þr. korpuso arba valdanèiosios sistemos diegimo dokumentà. Dar kartà iðsamiai patikrinkite áþeminimà. 2104 2104 10. Patikrinkite, ar tolydus el. maitinimo kabelis. Jei kabelis netolydus, pakeiskite já nauju, tuomet dar kartà iðsamiai patikrinkite áþeminimà. Jei el. maitinimo kabelis netolydus, skaitykite korpuso arba valdanèiosios sistemos diegimo ir montavimo instrukcijas ir paðalinkite gedimà. Norëdami patikrinti 2104 modelio TS4 áþeminimà, atlikite ðiuos veiksmus: 2. Patikrinkite, ar el. maitinimo kabelio galai neájungti á el. maitinimo lizdus. Jei reikia, kabelius atjunkite. Modelio 2104 TS4 áþeminimo patikrinimas 1. Patikrinkite, ar el. maitinimo kabelis ájungtas á kiekvienà el. maitinimo lizdà . Þr. 11 paveikslëlá. 1 11 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo kabeliai ir SCSI jungtys (2104 modelis Ts4) SCLIT230 1 2 3 402 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT911 3. Kai kurios el. grandinës gali bûti paþeistos, jei iðoriniai SCSI kabeliai jungiami prie modelio TS4 tuo metu, kai atliekamas áþeminimo patikrinimas. Ásitikinkite, kad nëra jokiø iðoriniø SCSI kabeliø, ájungtø á jungtis. . Þr. 11 paveikslëlá. 4. Patikrinkite modelio TS4 korpuso ir kiekvieno pagrindinio el. Maitinimo ðaltinio áþeminimo kontaktø tolydumà. a. Patikrinkite el. maitinimo kabelius ir paþiûrëkite, ar treèiojo laido áþeminimo jungtis yra geros bûklës. b. Norëdami patikrinti, ar treèiojo laido áþeminimo tolydumas tarp iðorinio áþeminimo kontakto pagrindo ir korpuso pagrindo yra 0,1 omø arba maþiau, naudokite matavimo prietaisà. 5. Jei áþeminimas tinkamas, jo patikrinimas baigtas. 6. Jei áþeminimas netinkamas, iðjunkite modelio DS4 el. maitinimo kabelius ið ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio. a. Patikrinkite, ar el. maitinimo kabelis tolydus. b. Jei kuris nors el. maitinimo kabelis yra paþeistas, pakeiskite nauju. c. Patikrinkite modelio TS4 korpuso ir kiekvieno ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio el. maitinimo jungties áþeminimo kontakto tolydumà. Þr. 12 paveikslëlá. Dëmesio: 2104 2104 2104 2104 d Jei kuris nors ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginys netolydus, pakeiskite já nauju. (Þr. vadovo dalá apie ventiliatoriaus ir el. maitinimo ðaltiniø árengimus.) Pasirinkite " odelio TS4 áþeminimo patikrinimas" ir atlikite 1-6 veiksmus, kad dar kartà iðsamiai patikrintumëte áþeminimà. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide 2104 m 12 paveikslëlis. Áþeminimo kontaktas (2104 modelis Ts4) 1 2 3 SCLIT331 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 403 SCLIT912 13 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo ðaltinio atjungimas nuo 2104 modelio DS4 Neatjunkite srovës ið valdanèiosios sistemos arba modelio DS4, jei tam nëra konkreèiø prieþasèiø, nebent taip nurodo intrukcijos, kuriomis vadovaujatës. Atlikite ðiuos veiksmus ir atjunkite el. srovës maitinimà nuo modelio DS4: 1. Pasiteiraukite kliento, ar visos operacijos, vykdomos tarp modelio DS4 ir valdanèiosios sistemos, yra sustabdytos. 2. Kiekvieno ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginio tiesioginës srovës jungiklius ájungta/ budëjimas perjunkite á budëjimo reþimà. Þr. 13 paveikslëlá. a. Kai kuriuose modeliuose DS4 yra ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginys ir ventiliatoriø árenginys. Ventiliatoriø árenginyje nëra tiesioginës srovës jungiklio ájungta/ budëjimas. b. Ventiliatoriaus - el. maitinimo árenginyje CHK lemputë gali ðviesti, nors jo tiesioginës srovës jungiklis ájungta/ budëjimas yra budëjimo reþime. Pastaba: Pastabos: 2104 2104 2104 2104 El. srovës atjungimas nuo 2104 modelio DS4 arba TS4 El. srovës atjungimas nuo 2104 modelio DS4 SCLIT206 404 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT913 3. PAVOJUS Ðiais kabeliais teka srovë, jei korpuso el. maitinimo paskirstymo árenginys arba nepertraukiamos srovës árenginys yra dar ájungti. (1) 1 1 2 2 2104 2104 2104 2104 2104 Pastaba: Pastabos: Neatjunkite el. maitinimo ðaltinio nuo valdanèiosios sistemos arba modelio TS4, jei tam nëra konkreèiø prieþasèiø, nebent taip nurodo instrukcijos, kuriomis vadovaujatës. Atlikite ðiuos veiksmus ir atjunkite el. srovës maitinimà nuo modelio TS4: 1. Pasiteiraukite kliento, ar visos operacijos, vykdomos tarp modelio TS4 ir valdanèiosios sistemos, yra sustabdytos. 2. Kiekvieno ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginio tiesioginës srovës jungiklius ájungta/ budëjimas, esanèius modelio TS4 galinëje dalyje, perjunkite á budëjimo reþimà. Þr. 14 paveikslëlá. a. Kai kuriuose modeliuose DS4 yra ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginys ir ventiliatoriø árenginys. Ventiliatoriø árenginyje nëra tiesioginës srovës jungiklio ájungta/ budëjimas. b. Ventiliatoriaus - el. maitinimo árenginyje CHK lemputë gali ðviesti, nors jo tiesioginës srovës mygtukas ájungta/ budëjimas yra budëjimo reþime. El. maitinimo ðaltinio atjungimas nuo modelio 2104 TS4 2104 m 2104 Maitinimo kabelius išjunkite iš 2104 modelio DS4 upakalin s dalies. r. 13 paveiksl . ë ëlá 4. odelio DS4 el. maitinimui ájungti atlikite ðiuos veiksmus: a. Vël ájunkite el. maitinimo kabelius . b. Kiekviename ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginyje ájunkite mygtukà ájungta/ budëjimas. Galite konfigûruoti modelio DS4 variklio ájungimo eigà. Jei norite suþinoti daugiau, skaitykite skyrius apie variklio automatinio ájungimo jungiklá ir uþdelsto ájungimo reþimo jungiklá, esanèius vadove . Pastaba: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 405 SCLIT914 1 2 2 3. Iðtraukite el. maitinimo kabelius ið el. srovës iðvadø ir ið galinës 2104 modelio 104 TS4 dalies. Þr. 14 paveikslëlá. 4. odelio TS4 el. maitinimui ájungti atlikite ðiuos veiksmus: a. Vël ájunkite el. maitinimo kabelius . b. Kiekviename ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginyje ájunkite mygtukà ájungta/ budëjimas. Galite konfigûruoti modelio TS4 variklio ájungimo eigà. Jei norite suþinoti daugiau, skaitykite skyrius apie variklio automatinio ájungimo jungiklá ir uþdelsto ájungimo reþimo jungiklá, esanèius vadove Pastaba: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide. 2104 m 2104 14 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo ðaltinio atjungimas nuo 2104 modelio TS4 SCLIT207 406 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT915 Praneðimai apie pavojø PAVOJUS PAVOJUS PAVOJUS PAVOJUS PAVOJUS Kitu þingsniu atjungsite el. maitinimo kabelius. Ðiais kabeliais teka srovë, jei korpuso el. maitinimo paskirstymo árenginys arba nepertraukiamos srovës árenginys yra dar ájungti. (1) Nejunkite el. maitinimo kabelio á ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginá, kol árenginys nëra baigtas montuoti ir verþlës nëra visiðkai priverþtos. (3) Perkûnijos metu nereikia atjungti kabeliø nuo ekranø, spausdintuvø, telefonø arba ryðiø linijø apsaugos stoèiø. (5) Dël neteisingai prijungto elektros srovës iðvado metalinës sistemos dalys arba prie sistemos prijungti prietaisai gali bûti labai aukðtos átampos. Pirkëjas yra atsakingas ir turi uþtikrinti, kad tinklo lizdas yra teisingai ájungtas ir áþemintas, ir tokiu bûdu apsaugo nuo elektros ðoko. Perkûnijos metu nereikia atjungti kabeliø nuo ekranø, spausdintuvø, telefonø arba ryðiø linijø apsaugos stoèiø. (4) Nebandykite atidaryti ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio dangèiø. (2) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 407 SCLIT916 Áspëjamieji praneðimai ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðiame árenginyje gali bûti du laidai. Norëdami nutraukti el. maitinimà, atjunkite abu laidus. (1) ÁSPËJIMAS: Nenuimkite dangèio, netaisykite, nëra keièiamø daliø. (2) ÁSPËJIMAS: Du poliai/ Neutralë su saugikliu. (3) 15 paveikslëlis. Áspëjimo apie laidà kortelë 16 paveikslëlis. El. maitinimo ðaltinio dangèio áspëjimo kortelë 17 paveikslëlis. Lentelë su áspëjimu apie saugiklá SCLIT327 SCLIT326 SCLIT325 408 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT916A ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðis árenginys sveria daugiau nei 32 kg (70.5 svaro). Skaitykite vartotojo instrukcijose. (4) 18 paveikslëlis. 2104 modelio DS4 svorio kortelë SCLIT220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Dëmesio: Jei diskuose saugote duomenis, prieð diskus iðimdami, uþdëkite ant jø etiketes. Kai diskus keièiate, kiekvienà ið jø ádëkite á tà patá disko dëklà, ið kurio já iðëmëte. Antraip prarasite duomenis. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) PERSPËJIMAS:Jei modelyje 2104 DS4 yra visi 14 diskø árenginiø ir du el. maitinimo ðaltiniai, visas jo svoris virðija 32 Kg (70.5 svaro).Ið modelio 2104 DS4 reikia paðalinti maþiausiai ðeðis diskus, jei norite já pakelti arba já ámontuoti á korpusà arba 2104 modelá TS4. Bendras svoris bus maþesnis ne 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) ir modelá 2104 DS4 du þmonës galës saugiai paimti. Antraip galima susiþeisti. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 409 ÁSPËJIMAS: Ðis árenginys sveria nuo 32 iki 55 kg (70.5 - 121.2 svarai). (5) ÁSPËJIMAS: Pridëto dëþës pakëlimo árankio reikia perstumiant, diegiant ir perkeliant árenginá, kai jis visai uþpildytas. Norint árenginá perkelti saugiai, reikia trijø þmoniø. Antraip galite susiþeisti. Jei këlimo priemonës neturite, árenginio svorá privalote sumaþinti iki 32 kg arba maþesnio nuimdami visas sunkias dalis (diskus ir el. maitinimo ðaltinius). Tuomet reikës tik dviejø þmoniø árenginiui pastumti, ádiegti arba perkelti. (6) 19 paveikslëlis. 2104 modelio TS4 svorio kortelë SCLIT219 Dëmesio: Jei diskuose saugote duomenis, prieð diskus iðimdami, uþdëkite ant jø etiketes. Kai diskus keièiate, kiekvienà ið jø ádëkite á tà patá disko dëklà, ið kurio já iðëmëte. Antraip prarasite duomenis. > 18 kg (37 svarai) > 32 kg (70.5 svaro) 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SCLIT917 410 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT918 Budëjimo reþimas paþymëtas simboliu, esanèiu deðinëje tiesioginës srovës pusëje, tiesiai virð jungiklio SW1. Kai SW1 pakeièiate á deðinæpozicijà tiesiai po budëjimo reþimo simboliu, árenginio kintamosios srovës el. maitinimas neiðjungiamas. (7) ÁSPËJIMAS: Stabilizatorius turi bûti teisingai prijungtas prie apatinës priekinës korpuso dalies, kad apsaugotø korpusà nuo pasvirimo á prieká tuo metu, kai modelis DS4 yra iðimamas ið korpuso. Neiðimkite ir nemontuokite jokiø árenginiø, jei stabilizatorius nëra pritaisytas prie korpuso. (8) Stabilizatorius turi bûti teisingai prijungtas prie apatinës priekinës korpuso dalies, kad apsaugotø korpusà nuo pasvirimo á prieká tuo metu, kai modelis DS4 yra iðimamas ið korpuso. Neiðimkite ir nemontuokite jokiø árenginiø, jei stabilizatorius nëra pritaisytas prie korpuso. (9) 2104 ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 20 paveikslëlis. Budëjimo reþimo pozicija SCLIT328 ÁSPËJIMAS: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 411 SCLIT919 DËMESIO: Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á ertmæventiliatoriø rinkinyje. (10) DËMESIO: Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á ertmæventiliatoriø rinkinyje. (11) DËMESIO: Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á ertmæ, esanèià SCSI sàsajø kortelës árenginyje. (12) DËMESIO: Dël vartotojø saugumo ðiame produkte yra 3-laidþiai el. maitinimo kabeliai ir kiðtukai. Naudokite ðá el. maitinimo kabelá kartu su teisingai áþemintu elektros iðvadu, kad iðvengtumëte elektros ðoko. (13) DËMESIO: Nelieskite el. maitinimo iðvadø arba el. maitinimo iðvadø skydeliø ne su tikrinimo liestukais, kol nebaigsite ðio saugos patikrinimo. (14) DËMESIO: Jei matavimo parodymas nëra begalybë, negalima nieko daryti. Atlikite reikiamus elektros laidø sistemos pataisymus prieð tæsdami. Neájunkite atðakinës grandinës pertraukiklio, kol tinkamai neatliksite ankstesniø þingsniø. (15) DËMESIO: Nenaudokite ventiliatoriaus arba ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginio rankenø neðdami modelá DS4. Ðios rankenos gali neiðlaikyti árenginio svorio. (16) 2104 412 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCLIT920 ÁSPËJIMAS: Kai árengys paruoðtas, svirtis automatiðkai pajuda link savo uþdaros padëties. Pasisaugokite, kad jûsø pirðtai nebûtø suspausti tarp svirties ir árenginio. (17) Prieð tæsdami toliau, patikrinkite, ar pagrindinio el. maitinimo ðaltinio kabelis buvo iðjungtas ið sugedusio ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo. (18) Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á tuðèià ertmævirð ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo ðaltinio árenginio. (19) Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á tuðèià ertmætarp el. maitinimo árenginiø. (20) Jei modelis DS4 yra ámontuotas modelio T00 arba T42 korpuse, prieð nuimdami karkasà turite atkreipti dëmesá á pastabas apie tø korpusø saugà. Saugos nurodymus galite rasti skyriuje apie sistemos diegimà vadove , SA38-0577 arba ðiame tinklapyje: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) odelis DS4 ir modelis TS4 yra sukurti taip, kad juos galëtø ámontuoti pirkëjas, ir yra sertifikuoti kaip vartotojo sàranka. Ásitikinkite, kad sistema arba korpusas, á kurá bus diegiamas modelis DS4 arba TS4, yra pritaikytas ir sertifikuotas vartotojo sàrankai. Jeigu ne, tuomet modelá DS4 arba TS4 turi ádiegti techninës prieþiûros specialistai. (22) 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide ÁSPËJIMAS: ÁSPËJIMAS: ÁSPËJIMAS: ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 m 2104 2104 2104 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 413 SCLIT921 ÁSPËJIMAS: Nekiðkite rankø arba árankiø á ertmæ, esanèià kortø árenginyje. (23) odelio TS4 pakelti reikia trijø þmoniø. Nebandykite jo kelti vienas. Nebandykite jo kelti be kitø dviejø þmoniø pagalbos. (24) Nenaudokite ventiliatoriaus arba ventiliatoriaus el. maitinimo árenginio rankenø neðdami modelá TS4. Ðios rankenos gali neiðlaikyti árenginio svorio. (25) ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 m ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 odelis DS4 ir modelis TS4 yra sukurti taip, kad juos galëtø ámontuoti pirkëjas, ir yra sertifikuoti kaip vartotojo sàranka. Patikrinkite ar sistema arba korpusas, á kurá bus ádiegtas modelis 2104 DS4, yra taip pat sukurti ir sertifikuoti vartotojo sàrankai. Jeigu ne, tuomet modelá DS4 turi ádiegti techninës prieþiûros specialistai. (26) 2104 m 2104 2104 ÁSPËJIMAS: ÁSPËJIMAS: 2104 m 2104 2104 odelis TS4 yra sukurtas taip, kad já galëtø ámontuoti vartotojas, ir yra sertifikuotas kaip vartotojo sàranka. Patikrinkite ar sistema á kurià bus ádiegtas modelis TS4 yra taip pat sukurta ir sertifikuota vartotojo sàrankai. Jeigu ne, tuomet modelá TS4 turi ádiegti techninës prieþiûros specialistai. (27) 414 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Macedonia Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 415 416 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 417 418 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 419 420 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 421 422 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 423 424 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 425 426 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 427 428 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 429 430 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 431 432 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 433 434 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 435 436 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 437 Norwegian 438 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 439 440 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 441 442 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 443 444 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 445 446 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 447 448 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 449 450 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 451 452 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 453 454 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 455 456 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 457 458 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 459 460 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Polish Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 461 462 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 463 464 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 465 466 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 467 468 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 469 470 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 471 472 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 473 474 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 475 476 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 477 478 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 479 480 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 481 482 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 483 Portuguese Avisos de segurança e ambientais Avisos de segurança e respectivas traduções SC000901 Esta secção contém as seguintes informações: Avisos de segurança e respectivas traduções Procedimentos de inspecção de segurança para este produto Avisos e declarações ambientais Os avisos de segurança estão impressos ao longo deste documento. Um aviso de Perigo informa-o de condições ou procedimentos que podem resultar em morte ou ferimentos pessoais graves. Um aviso de informa-o de condições ou procedimentos que podem resultar em ferimentos pessoais que não são nem letais nem extremamente perigosos. Um aviso de informa-o de condições ou procedimentos que podem provocar danos em má quinas, equipamento, programas ou dados. Os avisos estão listados por ordem numérica com base nos seus IDs, que são apresentados entre parentesis, no fim de cada aviso. Consulte os seguintes exemplos de avisos de perigo e cuidado para a localização do número de ID. Cuidado Atenção PERIGO Uma tomada eléctrica que não esteja correctamente ligada pode passar corrente perigosa para as peças metá licas do sistema ou para os produtos que ligam ao sistema. É da responsabilidade do cliente assegurar que a tomada está correctamente ligada e com ligação à terra de modo a evitar um choque eléctrico. (1) CUIDADO: Não insira as mãos ou ferramentas na abertura do espaço vazio que continha o conjunto da ventoinha. (1) 484 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Descarga electroestá tica (ESD) Procedimentos de inspecção de segurança Inspeccionar o bastidor SC000902 Atenção Ao manusear unidades substituíveis localmente (FRUs) e outras peças de computador, tome estas precauções de modo a evitar danos devidos à está tica: Limite os movimentos. O movimento pode criar electricidade está tica à sua volta. Toque sempre com cuidado nas peças do computador. Segure nas placas pelas extremidades ou pela cobertura metá lica. Nunca toque em circuitos expostos. Evite que pessoas que não estejam correctamente protegidas com terra toquem em peças do computador. Antes de instalar uma nova peça, toque com a embalagem de protecção contra está tica que contém a peça numa parte metá lica não pintada do 2104 Modelo DS4, 2104 Modelo TS4, ou sistema central durante pelo menos 2 segundos. Isto reduz a electricidade está tica da embalagem e do corpo do utilizador. Remova a peça da embalagem e, se possível, instale-a directamente no 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4 sem a pousar. Se tiver de pousar a peça, siga estes passos: 1. Coloque a embalagem de protecção contra está tica que continha a peça numa superfície lisa e nivelada. 2. Coloque a peça numa embalagem de protecção contra está tica. Não coloque a peça directamente em cima de qualquer superfície metá lica. Os procedimentos de inspecção de segurança descrevem o modo de inspecção do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4. Consulte o manual de instalação do bastidor para obter informações sobre como efectuar a inspecção no bastidor. CUIDADO: O 2104 Modelo DS4 e Modelo TS4 estão concebidos sendo para instalação pelo cliente e estão certificados como para instalação pelo cliente. Certifique-se que o sistema ou bastidor no qual o 2104 Modelo DS4 / Modelo TS4 será instalado também está concebido e certificado para configuração pelo cliente. Se não, o 2104 Modelo DS4 / Modelo TS4 terá então que ser instalado por um CE. (22) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 485 Inspeccionar o 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4 Verificações externas na má quina Verificações internas na má quina SC000903 Efectue as seguintes verificações internas na má quina: 1. Verifique se existem quaisquer alterações alheias à IBM que possam ter sido feitas na má quina. Se existir alguma, peça o formulá rio “Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey”, número R009, ao representante da IBM. Preencha o formulá rio e devolva-o ao representante. 2. Verifique o estado do interior da má quina e veja se não existem: Contaminantes metá licos ou outros Vestigios de á gua ou outro fluido Fogo Danos provocados por fumo 3. Verifique se existem problemas mecânicos óbvios, como componentes soltos. 4. Verifique se existem cabos e conectores expostos com desgaste, rachas ou trincados. Efectue as seguintes verificações externas na má quina: 1. Verifique danos no chassis (arestas soltas, partidas ou cortantes). 2. Verifique os cabos de alimentação e certifique-se que o isolamento não está gasto ou danificado. 3. Verifique quaisquer alterações óbvias fora do comum. Faça uma boa avaliação sobre a segurança de tais alterações. 4. Verifique que todas as tampas exteriores existem e não estão danificadas. 5. Certifique-se que todos os trincos e dobradiças estão no correcto estado de funcionamento. 6. Verifique se existem danos no cabo de alimentação. 7. Verifique se existem cabos gastos, danificados ou trincados. 8. Inspeccione os conjuntos da vetoínha e fonte de alimentação. Verifique se os grampos de fixação da cobertura da unidade da fonte de alimentação (parafusos ou rebites) não foram removidos ou alterados. 9. Verifique se existem danos no cabo de sinal externo. 10. Verifique se existem arestas vivas, danos ou alterações que exponham as peças internas do dispositivo. 11. Corrija quaisquer problemas que possa encontrar. Efectue as seguintes verificações de segurança para identificar condições inseguras. 486 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Verificações na etiqueta de segurança SC000904 Efectue as seguintes verificações na etiqueta de segurança: 1. Certifique-se de que a etiqueta está instalada no 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 1. 2. Certifique-se que a etiqueta de cuidado do cabo eléctrico está instalada na fonte de alimentação 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 2. SC000274 Figura 1. Etiqueta do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4 Figura 2. Etiqueta de cuidado do cabo eléctrico SC000325 CUIDADO: Esta unidade pode ter dois cabos eléctricos. Para toda a alimentação, desligue ambos os cabos eléctricos. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 487 SC000905 3. Verifique se a etiqueta de cuidado para colocar em coberturas se encontra na da fonte de alimentação do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou do Modelo Ts4. Consulte a Figura 3. 4. Verifique se a etiqueta de cuidado com fusíveis está colocada na fonte de alimentação do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou do Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 4. Figura 3. Etiqueta de cuidado com a cobertura da fonte de alimentação Figura 4. Etiqueta de cuidado com fusíveis SC000326 SC000327 CUIDADO: Não retire a cobertura, não tente reparações, as peças não necessitam de manutenção. (2) CUIDADO: Bipolaridade/Fusíveis Neutros. (3) 488 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000905A 5. Verifique se a etiqueta do peso está instalada no 2104 Modelo DS4. Ver Figura 5. CUIDADO: Este unidade pesa mais de 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). Consulte os manuais. (4) Figura 5. Etiqueta de peso do 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Atenção: Caso tenha dados armazenados nas unidades, identifique as mesmas antes de as remover. Ao voltar a colocar as unidades, instale-as no compartimento de unidade de onde as removeu. De contrá rio, pode ter como resultado a perda de dados. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) CUIDADO: Se o 2104 Modelo DS4 estiver completamente carregado com 14 unidades e duas fontes de alimentação, o seu peso total excede os 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). Tem de remover pelo menos seis unidades do 2104 Modelo DS4 antes de o levantar ou instalar num bastidor ou no 2104 Modelo TS4. Assim, reduz o peso total para menos de 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) e o . Se não o fizer, corre o risco de provocar ferimentos. 2104 Modelo DS4 pode ser manuseado de forma segura por duas pessoas Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 489 CUIDADO: Esta unidade pesa entre 32 Kg - 55 Kg (70.5 lbs - 121.2 lbs). (5) Figura 6. 2104 Etiqueta de peso do Modelo TS4 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000219 6. Verifique se a etiqueta de peso está instalada no 2104 Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 6. CUIDADO: A ferramenta de elevação de embalagens fornecida é necessá ria para mover, instalar e reposicionar o produto quando totalmente carregado. São necessá rias três pessoas para mover o produto em segurança. Uma falha neste procedimento pode provocar lesões. No caso da ferramenta de elevação não estar prontamente disponível, deve reduzir o peso para 32 Kg ou menos removendo todos os componentes pesados (unidades de disco e fontes de alimentação) do produto. Sendo então necessá rias apenas duas pessoas para mover, instalar e reposicionar o produto. (6) Atenção: Se tiver dados armazenados nas unidades, identifique as unidades com etiquetas antes de as remover. Quando substituir as unidades, instale cada uma destas no compartimento do qual as removeu. Uma falha neste processo pode resultar numa perda de dados. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) SC000906 490 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000907 7. Verifique se a etiqueta de condição de espera está instalada no 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 7. CUIDADO: Uma condição de espera é indicada pelo símbolo à direita de DC logo acima do interruptor, SW1. Quando muda o SW1 para a posição direita logo abaixo do símbolo de espera, a corrente-ca para a unidade não é cortada. (7) Figura 7. Etiqueta da condição de espera SC000326 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 491 SC000908 Esta secção contém instruções para verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4. Verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo DS4 Execute os seguintes passos para verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo DS4: 3. Parte dos circuitos eléctricos pode ser danificada se os cabos SCSI externos estiverem ligados ao 2104 Modelo DS4 enquanto a verificação de ligação à terra estiver a ser efectuadas. Certifique-se de que não existem cabos externos SCSI ligados aos conectores . 4. Verifique a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo DS4: unidade de distribuição de alimentação ou de baterias de reserva Atenção: a. Nas extremidades do conector das fichas de alimentação que desligou da no passo 2, efectue uma inspecção visual e certifique-se de que o pino de ligação à terra do terceiro fio está em boas condições. b. Utilize um ohmímetro e ligue um fio ao chassis d 2104 Modelo DS4 e o outro ao pino de ligação à terra do terceiro fio na face dos conectores de alimentação que desligou no passo 2. Deve ler 0.1 ohm ou Modelo DS4 menos entre o pino de ligação à terra do conector de alimentação e o chassis do 2104 . Figura 8. Cabos de alimentação e conectores SCSI no 2104 Modelo DS4 Verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4 1. Certifique-se de que toda a alimentação é removida do bastidor. Consulte o documento de instalação do bastidor ou sistema central. 2. Certifique-se de que os cabos de alimentação estão ligados a cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação. Consulte a Figura 8. Certifique-se também de que as outras extremidades dos cabos de alimentação estão desligados da unidade de distribuição de alimentação ou de baterias de reserva do bastidor. Consulte o documento de instalação do bastidor ou sistema central. 2 1 SC000210 492 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000909 Se estiver a efectuar a manutenção num 2104 Modelo DS4 de 220-volt, avance para o passe 5. Se estiver a efectuar a manutenção num 2104 Modelo DS4 de -48 volts, avance para o passo 7. 5. Verifique a continuidade entre o chassis do 2104 Modelo DS4 e o pino da terra do conector de alimentação de cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação. Consulte a Figura 9. 6. Avance para o passo 9. 7. Verifique a continuidade entre o chassis do 2104 Modelo DS4 e os pinos de terra 1 e 7 de cada conector de alimentação principal. Consulte a Figura 10. 8. Avance para o passo 9. 9. Se algum dos conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação não tiver continuidade, troque-o por um novo. Consulte a secção sobre conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação em . Efectue de novo toda a verificação de ligação à terra. Se todos os conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação tiverem continuidade, pode ter um problema no cabo de alimentação ou com a ligação à terra do sistema central. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figura 9. Pino de ligação à terra (2104 Modelo DS4 de 220 V) Figura 10. Pinos de ligação à terra (2104 Model DS4 de -48 V) 1 SC000329 Se a ligação à terra estiver correcta, a verificação da mesma está completa. Se a ligação à terra não estiver correcta, desligue os cabos de alimentação dos conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação do 2104 Modelo DS4. SC000330 Pino 6 Pino 1 Pino 12 Pino 7 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 493 SC000910 Se estiver a efectuar manutenção no 2104 Modelo DS4 de 220-volts, avance para o passo 10. Se estiver a efectuar manutenção no 2104 Modelo DS4 de -48 volts, consulte o documento de instalação do bastidor ou sistema central para isolar a falha. Efectue novamente toda a verificação de ligação à terra. 10. Verifique a continuidade do cabo de alimentação. Se o cabo de alimentação não tiver continuidade, troque-o por um novo, efectue então novamente toda a verificação de ligação à terra. Se o cabo de alimentação não tiver continuidade, consulte o documento de instalação do bastidor ou sistema central para isolar a falha. Efectue os seguintes passos para verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo TS4: 2. Certifique-se de que as outras extremidades dos cabos de alimentação não estão ligados a tomadas eléctricas. Desligue os cabos se necessá rio. Verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo TS4 1. Certifique-se de que têm um cabo de alimentação ligado a cada uma das tomadas de alimentação 1 . Consulte a Figura 11. Figura 11. Cabos de alimentação e conectores SCSI (2104 Modelo TS4) SC000230 1 2 3 494 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000911 3. : Alguns circuitos eléctricos podem ser danificados se os cabos SCSI externos estiverem ligados ao 2104 Modelo TS4 enquanto a verificação da ligação à terra estiver a ser efectuada. Certifique-se que não existem cabos SCSI externos ligados nos conectores SCSI . Consulte a Figura 11. 4. Verifique a continuidade entre o chassis do 2104 Modelo TS4 e o pino de ligação à terra de cada cabo de alimentação. a. Verifique os cabos de alimentação e certifique-se de que o conector de ligação à terra do terceiro fio está em perfeitas condições. b. Utilize um medidor para verificar que a continuidade da ligação à terra do terceiro fio é de 0.1 ohm ou inferior entre o pino externo de ligação à terra e a terra do chassis. 5. Se a continuidade for boa, a verificação de ligação à terra está completa. 6. Se a ligação à terra não estiver correcta, desligue os cabos de alimentação dos conectores de alimentação da linha principal. a. Verifique a continuidade de cada um dos cabos de alimentação. b. Se algum dos cabos de alimentação estiver a falhar, troque-o por um novo. c. Verifique a continuidade entre o chassis do 2104 Modelo TS4 e o pino de ligação à terra do conector de alimentação em cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação. Consulte a Figura 12. Atenção d Se o conjunto de ventoínha ou de fonte de alimentação não tiver continuidade, troque esse conjunto por um novo. (Consulte a secção sobre conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação em Avance para “Verificar a ligação à terra do 2104 Modelo TS4” e execute os passos desde o 1 até ao 6d para completar de novo a verificação de ligação à terra. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide.) Figura 12. Pino de ligação à terra (2104 Modelo TS4) 1 2 3 SC000331 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 495 SC000912 Figura 13. Remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo DS4 A não ser que tenha uma razão especial para o fazer, não remova a alimentação do sistema central ou do 2104 Modelo DS4 se as instruções que estiver a seguir não o indicarem. Efectue os seguintes passos para remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo DS4: 1. Verifique junto do cliente que todas as operações entre o 2104 Modelo DS4 e o sistema central foram paradas. 2. Coloque o interruptor cc on/standby de cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação na posição standby. Consulte a Figura 13. a. Alguns 2104 Modelo DS4 têm um conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação e outro de ventoínha.O conjunto de ventoínha não tem interruptor cc on/standby. b. É possível que um conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação possa ter a luz CHK ligada embora o interruptor cc on/standby esteja na posição standby. Nota: Notas: Remover a alimentação do 2104 Modelo DS4 ou Modelo TS4 1 Remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000206 496 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000913 3. PERIGO No passo seguinte irá remover os cabos de alimentação. Estes cabos estão alimentados se a unidade de distribuição de alimentação ou fonte de alimentação ininterruptível (UPS) ainda estiver ligada. (1) 1 1 2 2 Nota: Notes: A não ser que tenha uma razão especial para o fazer, não remova a alimentação do sistema central ou do 2104 Modelo TS4 se as instruções que estiver a seguir não o indicarem. Efectue os seguintes passos para remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo TS4: 1. Verifique junto do cliente que todas as operações entre o 2104 Modelo TS4 e o sistema central foram paradas. 2. Na parte posterior do 2104 Modelo TS4, Coloque o interruptor cc on/standby de cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação na posição standby. Consulte a Figura 14. a. Alguns 2104 Modelo TS4 têm um conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação e outro de ventoínha.O conjunto de ventoínha não tem interruptor cc on/standby. b. É possível que um conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação possa ter a luz CHK ligada embora o interruptor cc on/standby esteja na posição standby. Remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo TS4 Remova os cabos de alimentação da parte posterior do 2104 Modelo DS4. Consulte a Figura 13. 4. Efectue os seguintes passos para devolver a alimentação ao 2104 Modelo DS4: a. Volte a instalar os cabos de alimentação . b. Coloque o interruptor cc on/standby de cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação para on. É possível configurar a sequência de arranque do motor do 2104 Modelo DS4. Para obter mais informações, consulte as secções sobre os interruptores de arranque automá tico e de modo de arranque retardado do motor em . Nota: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 497 SC000914 1 2 2 3. Remover os cabos de alimentação da tomada eléctrica e da parte posterior do 2104 Modelo TS4. Consulte a Figura 14. 4. Execute os seguintes passos para realimentar o 2104 Modelo TS4: a. Reinstale os cabos de alimentação . b. Mude o interruptor ca on/standby de cada conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação para on. É possível configurar a sequência de arranque do motor do 2104 Modelo TS4. Para obter mais informações, consulte as secções sobre o interruptor de arranque automá tico da unidade e o de modo de arranque retardado do motor em Nota: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide. Figura 14. Remover a alimentação de um 2104 Modelo TS4 SC000207 498 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000915 Avisos de perigo PERIGO PERIGO PERIGO PERIGO PERIGO No passo seguinte irá remover os cabos de alimentação. Estes cabos estão se a unidade de distribuição de alimentação ou fonte de alimentação ininterruptível (UPS) ainda está ligada. (1) Não ligue um cabo de alimentação ao conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação até que o conjunto esteja perfeitamente encaixado e as porcas de orelhas devidamente apertadas. (3) Durante uma trovoada, não desligue os cabos de estações de visualização, impressoras, telefones ou protectores de estação para linhas de comunicação. (5) Uma tomada eléctrica que não esteja correctamente ligada pode passar uma voltagem perigosa às peças metá licas do sistema ou dispositivos que estejam ligados ao sistema. É da responsabilidade do cliente certificar-se de que a tomada está correctamente ligada e com ligação à terra de modo a prevenir um choque eléctrico. Durante uma trovoada, não desligue os cabos das estações de visualização, impressoras, telefones ou protectores de estação para linhas de comunicação. (4) Não tente abrir as tampas do conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação. (2) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 499 SC000916 Avisos de segurança CUIDADO: Esta unidade poderá ter dois cabos eléctricos. Para cortar a alimentação, desligue ambos os cabos. (1) CUIDADO: Não retire a cobertura, não tente reparações, as peças não necessitam de manutenção. (2) CUIDADO: Bipolaridade/Fusíveis Neutros. (3) Figura 15. Etiqueta de cuidado com cabos eléctricos Figura 16. Etiqueta de cuidado com a cobertura da fonte de alimentação. Figura 17. Etiqueta de cuidado com fusíveis SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 500 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000916A CUIDADO: Esta unidade pesa mais de 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). Consulte os manuais. (4) Figura 18. Etiqueta de peso do 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Atenção: Caso tenha dados armazenados nas unidades, identifique as mesmas antes de as remover. Ao voltar a colocar as unidades, instale-as no compartimento de unidade de onde as removeu. De contrá rio, pode ter como resultado a perda de dados. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) CUIDADO: Se o 2104 Modelo DS4 , 32 Kg (70.5 lbs). 2104 Model DS4 2104 Modelo TS4. 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) e o estiver completamente carregado com 14 unidades e duas fontes de alimentação o seu peso total excede os Tem de remover pelo menos seis unidades do antes de o levantar ou instalar num bastidor ou no Assim, reduz o peso total para menos de 2104 Modelo DS4 pode ser manuseado de forma segura por duas pessoas. Se não o fizer, correo risco de provocar ferimentos. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 501 CUIDADO: Esta unidade pesa entre 32 Kg - 55 Kg (70.5 lbs - 121.2 lbs). (5) CUI O: (6) DAD A ferramenta de elevação de embalagens fornecida é necessá ria para mover, instalar e reposicionar o produto quando totalmente carregado. São necessá rias três pessoas para mover o produto em segurança. Uma falha neste procedimento pode provocar lesões. No caso da ferramenta de elevação não estar prontamente disponível, deve reduzir o peso para 32 Kg ou menos removendo todos os componentes pesados (unidades de disco e fontes de alimentação) do produto. Sendo então necessá rias apenas duas pessoas para mover, instalar e reposicionar o produto. Figura 19. Etiqueta de peso 2104 Modelo TS4 SC000219 Atenção: Se tiver dados armazenados nas unidades, identifique as unidades com etiquetas antes de as remover. Quando substituir as unidades, instale cada uma destas no compartimento do qual as removeu. Uma falha neste processo pode resultar numa perda de dados. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000917 502 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000918 CUIDADO: Uma condição de espera é indicada pelo símbolo à direita de CA logo acima do interruptor, SW1. Quando muda SW1 para a posição da direita logo abaixo do símbolo standby, a alimentação ca para a unidade não é cortada. (7) CUIDADO: O estabilizador tem de estar correctamente montado na parte inferior frontal do bastidor de modo a evitar que este tombe para a frente aquando da remoção do 2104 Modelo DS4 do bastidor. Não remova nem instale qualquer unidade se não houver um estabilizador montado no bastidor. (8) CUIDADO: O estabilizador tem de estar correctamente montado na parte inferior frontal do bastidor de modo a evitar que este tombe para a frente aquando da instalação do 2104 Model DS4 no bastidor. Não remova nem instale qualquer unidade se não houver um estabilizador montado no bastidor. (9) Figura 20. Localização da condição de espera SC000328 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 503 SC000319 CUIDADO: Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas no espaço vazio que continha o conjunto de ventoínha. (10) CUIDADO: Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas no espaço vazio que continha o conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação. (11) CUIDADO: Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas no espaço vazio que continha o conjunto da placa da interface SCSI. (12) CUIDADO: Este produto está equipado com um cabo de alimentação e uma ficha de 3 fios para segurança do utilizador. Utilize este cabo de alimentação juntamente com uma tomada eléctrica devidamente ligada à terra de modo a evitar um choque eléctrico. (13) CUIDADO: Não toque na tomada de alimentação ou na chapa da mesma com nada que não sondas de teste antes de completar esta verificação de segurança. (14) CUIDADO: Se a leitura não for infinito, não avance. Faça as correcções necessá rias na ligação dos fios antes de continuar. Não ligue o circuito de derivação CB até que conclua satisfatoriamente os passos anteriores. (15) CUIDADO: Não utilize as pegas dos conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação para transportar o 2104 Modelo DS4. Estas pegas não foram concebidas para suportar o peso da unidade. (16) 504 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000920 CUI O: , . . (17) CU : . (18) CUI O: no e . (19) CUI O: no e . (20) CUI O: 2104 Model DS4 n Model T00 o T42, observ . e s e SA38-0577, o Web site: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) CUI O: 2104 Model DS4 Model TS4 nstal d c e certifi . no 2104 Model DS4 o Model TS4 i . 2104 Model DS4 o Model TS4 instal d CE. (22) DAD À medida que encaixa o conjunto a alavanca move-se automaticamente para a posição de fechada Assegure-se que não entala os dedos entre a alavanca e o conjunto IDADO Certifique-se de que os cabo de alimentação da linha principal foi removido da ventoínha e fonte de alimentação com falhas antes de continuar DAD Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas spaço vazio por cima do conjunto de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação DAD Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas spaço vazio entre os conjuntos de fonte de alimentação DAD Se o o estiver instalado um bastidor o u deve também ar os avisos de segurança para esses bastidores antes de começar a remover o conjunto da moldura Pode encontrar os avisos d egurança na secção sobre instalação do sistema m u no seguinte DAD O o e o foram concebidos para serem i a os pelo liente estão cados como para instalação pelo cliente Certifique-se de que o sistema ou bastidor qual o o u o vai ser nstalado também está concebido e certificado como para instalação pelo cliente Caso contrá rio 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide, , o o u o terá que ser a o por um Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 505 SC000921 CUIDADO: Não inserir as mãos ou ferramentas no espaço que continha o conjunto da placa. (23) CUIDADO: São necessá rias três pessoas para levantar o 2104 Modelo TS4. Não tente levantar o 2104 Modelo TS4 sózinho. Não tente levantá -lo sem a ajuda de outras duas pessoas. (24) CUIDADO: Não utilize as pegas da ventoínha ou conjuntos de ventoínha e fonte de alimentação para transportar o 2104 Modelo TS4. Estas pegas não foram concebidas para suportar o peso da unidade. (25) O 2104 Modelo DS4 está concebido como sendo para instalação pelo cliente e está certificado como para instalação pelo cliente. Certifique-se de que o sistema ou bastidor no qual o 2104 Modelo DS4 irá ser instalado também está concebido e certificado como para instalação pelo cliente. Caso contrá rio, o 2104 Modelo DS4 terá então que ser instalado por um CE. (26) CUIDADO: CUIDADO: O o está concebido como sendo para instalação pelo liente e está certificado como para instalação pelo cliente Certifique-se de que o sistema qual o o irá ser instalado também está concebido e certificado como para instalação pelo cliente Caso contrá rio o 2104 Modelo TS4 terá então que ser instalado por um 2104 Model TS4 c . no 2104 Model TS4 . , CE. (27) 506 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Romanian Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 507 508 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 509 510 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 511 512 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 513 514 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 515 516 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 517 518 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 519 520 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 521 522 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 523 524 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 525 526 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 527 528 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 529 Russian 530 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 531 532 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 533 534 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 535 536 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 537 538 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 539 540 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 541 542 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 543 544 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 545 546 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 547 548 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 549 550 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 551 552 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Slovak Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 553 554 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 555 556 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 557 558 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 559 560 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 561 562 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 563 564 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 565 566 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 567 568 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 569 570 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 571 572 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 573 574 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 575 Slovenia 576 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 577 578 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 579 580 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 581 582 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 583 584 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 585 586 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 587 588 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 589 590 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 591 592 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 593 594 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 595 596 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 597 598 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Spanish Avisos de seguridad y medioambientales Avisos de seguridad y sus traducciones SC000901 Esta sección contiene la siguiente información: Avisos de seguridad y sus traducciones Procedimientos de inspección de la seguridad para este producto Avisos y declaraciones medioambientales Los avisos de seguridad aparecen impresos a lo largo de este documento. Los avisos de advierten de condiciones o procedimientos que pueden causar la muerte o daños personales graves. Los avisos de advierten de condiciones o procedimientos que pueden causar daños personales no letales ni extremadamente peligrosos. Los avisos de advierten de condiciones o procedimientos que pueden causar daños en má quinas, equipos, programas o datos. Los avisos se listan en orden numérico según sus ID, que se muestran entre paréntesis al final de cada uno de ellos. Compruebe la ubicación del número de ID en los siguientes ejemplos de mensajes de peligro y precaución. Peligro Precaución Atención PELIGRO Una toma de corriente que no esté correctamente conectada podría dar lugar un voltaje peligroso en las piezas metá licas del sistema o en los productos conectados al mismo. Es responsabilidad del cliente asegurarse de que la toma esté correctamente cableada y conectada a tierra para evitar descargas eléctricas. (1) PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en la abertura del espacio vacío que aloja el conjunto del ventilador. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 599 Descarga electroestá tica (ESD) Procedimientos de inspección de la seguridad Inspección del bastidor SC000902 Atención Cuando manipule unidades sustituibles localmente (FRU) y otras piezas, tome las siguientes precauciones para evitar daños producidos por la electricidad está tica: Limite sus movimientos. El movimiento puede atraer la electricidad está tica a su alrededor. Manipule siempre con cuidado las piezas informá ticas. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o su cubierta metá lica. No toque nunca circuitos que estén al descubierto. Evite que toquen las piezas informá ticas personas que no estén debidamente en conctacto a tierra. Antes de instalar una pieza nueva, tome el paquete protector de electricidad está tica que contiene la pieza y póngalo en contacto con una pieza sin pintar del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4, 2104 Modelo TS4 o sistema principal durante 2 segundos como mínimo. De este modo se reducirá la electricidad está tica del paquete y de su cuerpo. Extraiga la pieza de su paquete y, si es posible, instá lela en el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 sin depositarla sobre ninguna superficie. Si debe depositar la pieza, siga los siguientes pasos: 1. Coloque el paquete protector de electricidad está tica que contenía la pieza sobre una superficie lisa y plana. 2. Deposite la pieza sobre el paquete protector de electricidad está tica. No la deposite directamente sobre ninguna superficie metá lica. Los procedimientos de inspección de la seguridad describen el modo de inspeccionar el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Consulte el manual de instalación del bastidor para obtener información sobre el modo de realizar una inspección segura del mismo. PRECAUCIÓN: El sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 y Modelo TS4 se han diseñado para que los instale el cliente y está n certificados como configurables por el cliente. Asegúrese de que el sistema o el bastidor en el que se vaya a instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 esté también diseñado y certificado como configurable por el cliente. De lo contrario, el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 deberá instalarlo un técnico de sistemas. (22) 600 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Inspección del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 Comprobaciones externas de la má quina Comprobaciones internas de la má quina SC000903 Realice las siguientes comprobaciones internas de la má quina: 1. Compruebe si se ha realizado alguna modificación en la má quina que no haya hecho IBM. En caso afirmativo, obtenga el formulario “Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey” (Inspección anexa de alteración no realizada por IBM), número R009, de la sucursal de IBM. Rellene el formulario y devuélvalo a la sucursal. 2. Compruebe las condiciones del interior de la má quina, por si hubiese: Metales u otros contaminantes Indicaciones de agua u otros fluidos Fuego Daños por humo 3. Compruebe cualquier problema mecá nico obvio, tal como la pérdida de componentes. 4. Compruebe el desgaste, roturas o pinzamientos de los cables y conectores expuestos. Realice las siguientes comprobaciones externas de la má quinas: 1. Compruebe los daños en el chasis (pérdidas, roturas o bordes cortantes). 2. Compruebe los cables de alimentación y asegúrese de que el material aislante no esté desgastado o dañado. 3. Compruebe cualquier cambio no está ndar que sea obvio. Realice una valoración de las implicaciones en la seguridad de cualquiera de tales cambios. 4. Verifique que todas las cubiertas externas estén presentes y no estén dañadas. 5. Compruebe que todos los pestillos y bisagras estén en condiciones de funcionamiento correctas. 6. Compruebe si existen daños en el cable de alimentación 7. Compruebe si los cables está n desgastados, dañados o pinzados. 8. Inspeccione los conjuntos de ventilador y fuente de alimentación. Compruebe que el mecanismo de cierre de la cubierta de la unidad de fuente de alimentación (tornillos o remaches) no se haya desmontado o alterado. 9. Compruebe si existen daños en el cable de señal externo. 10. Compruebe si la cubierta tiene bordes cortantes, daños o alteraciones que expongan las piezas internas del dispositivo. 11. Corrija cualquier problema que encuentre. Realice las siguientes comprobaciones de seguridad para identificar las condiciones en las que no exista seguridad. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 601 Comprobaciones de las etiquetas de seguridad SC000904 Realice las siguientes comprobaciones de las etiquetas de seguridad: 1. Verifique que la etiqueta esté instalada en el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Vea la figura 1. 2. Verifique que la etiqueta de precaución de la línea conductora esté instalada en la fuente de alimentación del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Vea la figura 2. SC000274 Figura 1. Etiqueta del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 Figura 2. Etiqueta de precaución de cable conductor SC000325 PRECAUCIÓN: Esta unidad puede tener dos cables conductores. Para eliminar toda la alimentación, desconecte ambos cables conductores. (1) 602 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000905 3. Verifique que la etiqueta de precaución de la cubierta de la fuente de alimentación esté instalada en la fuente de alimentación del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Vea la figura 3. 4. Verifique que la etiqueta de precaución del fusible esté instalada en la fuente de alimentación del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Vea la figura 4. Figura 3. Etiqueta de precaución de la cubierta de la fuente de alimentación Figura 4. Etiqueta de precaución del fusible SC000326 SC000327 PRECAUCIÓN: No desmonte la cubierta, no proporcione servicio, no hay piezas susceptibles de recibir servicio. (2) PRECAUCIÓN: Fusible de doble polo/neutro. (3) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 603 SC000905A 5. Verifique que la etiqueta del peso esté instalada en el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. Vea la figura 5. PRECAUCIÓN: Esta unidad pesa sobre 32 Kg (70,5 lbs). Consulte los manuales. (4) Figura 5. Etiqueta de peso del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Atención: Si tiene datos guardados en la unidades, etiquete las unidades antes de extraerlas. Cuando sustituya las unidades, instale cada una en la misma bahía de unidad de la que la ha extraído. El no hacerlo de esta manera, puede producir una pérdida de datos. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) PRECAUCIÓN 2104 Modelo DS4 está completamente cargado con 14 unidades y dos fuentes de alimentación, su peso total excede de 32 Kg (70,5 lbs). Debe extraer al menos seis unidades del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 antes de levantarlo o instalarlo en un bastidor o sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. Esta acción reduce el peso total a menos de 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) con lo que dos personas pueden manejar el sistema Si no se hace de está forma se pueden producir lesiones físicas. : Si un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. 604 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices PRECAUCIÓN: Esta unidad pesa entre 32 y 55 Kg (70,5 lbs y 121,2 lbs). (5) Figura 6. Información de peso del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000219 6. Verifique que la etiqueta del peso esté instalada en el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. Vea la Figura 6. PRECAUCIÓN: Para trasladar, instalar y reubicar el producto cuando esté completamente lleno se requiere la herramienta para levantar el embalaje que se proporciona. Para mover el producto con seguridad son necesarias tres personas. De no hacerse así podrían producirse lesiones personales ) . 32 Kg o menos extrayendo todos los componentes pesados (unidades de disco y fuentes de alimentación) del producto. Entonces se necesitará n solo dos personas para trasladar, instalar y reubicar el producto. (6 En caso de que la herramienta para levantar el producto no esté disponible fá cilmente, puede reducir el peso a Atención: Si tiene datos almacenados en las unidades, etiquételas antes de extraerlas. Cuando sustituya las unidades, instale cada una en la misma bahía de unidad de la que la ha extraído. Si no se hiciese así, se podría producir una pérdida de datos. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) SC000906 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 605 SC000907 7. Verifique que la etiqueta de condición de en espera esté instalada en el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Vea la Figura 7. PRECAUCIÓN: Una condición de en espera se indica mediante el símbolo a la derecha de DC directamente por encima del interruptor, SW1. Cuando se conmuta SW1 a la posición derecha directamente bajo el símbolo de en espera, la alimentación de ca para la unidad no se apaga. (7) Figura 7. Etiqueta de condición de En espera SC000326 606 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000908 Esta sección contiene instrucciones para comprobar la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4. Comprobación de la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 Siga los pasos siguientes para comprobar la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4: 3. Algunos circuitos eléctricos se podrían dañar si los cables SCSI externos se conectan al sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 mientras se está realizando la comprobación de la toma de tierra. Asegúrese de que no haya cables SCSI externos enchufados a los conectores . 4. Compruebe la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4: Atención: a. En los extremos de conexión de los cables de alimentación que ha desenchufado de la unidad de distribución de alimentación o de la unidad de respaldo en el paso 2, realice una inspección visual y asegúrese de que la clavija de toma de tierra de tres cables esté en buenas condiciones. b. Utilice un medidor de ohmios y conecte un extremo al chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 y el otro extremo a la clavija de toma de tierra de tres cables en la cara de los conectores de alimentación que ha desenchufado en el paso 2. La lectura debería ser igual o inferior a 0,1 ohmios entre la clavija de toma de tierra del conector de alimentación y el chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. Figura 8. Cables de alimentación y conectores SCSI en el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 Comprobación de la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 1. Asegúrese de que toda la alimentación eléctrica se haya desconectado del bastidor. Vea el bastidor o sistema principal en el documento de instalación. 2. Asegúrese de que los cables de alimentación estén enchufados en cada conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación. Vea la figura 8. Asegúrese también de que los otros extremos de los cables de alimentación en el bastidor estén desconectados de la unidad de distribución de alimentación o de la unidad de respaldo por batería. Vea el bastidor o sistema principal en el documento de instalación. 2 1 SC000210 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 607 SC000909 Si está proporcionando servicio técnico a un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de 220 voltios, vaya al paso 5. Si está proporcionando servicio técnico a un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de -48 voltios, vaya al paso 7. 5. Compruebe la continuidad entre el chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 y la clavija de toma de tierra del conector de alimentación de cada conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación. Vea la figura 9. 6. Vaya al paso 9. 7. Compruebe la continuidad entre el chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 y las clavijas de toma de tierra 1 y 7 de cada conector de línea principal. Vea la figura 10. 8. Vaya al paso 9. 9. Si alguno de los conjuntos de ventilador-fuente de alimentación no tiene continuidad, cambie dicho conjunto por uno nuevo. Vea la sección sobre conjuntos de ventilador y fuente de alimentación en el manual . Realice de nuevo la comprobación completa de la toma de tierra. Si cada conjunto de ventiladorfuente de alimentación tienen continuidad, es posible que exista un problema con el cable de alimentación o con la toma de tierra del sistema principal. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide Figura 9. Clavija de toma de tierra (Sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de 220 voltios) Figura 10. Clavijas de toma de tierra (Sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de -48 voltios) 1 SC000329 Si la toma de tierra es correcta, la comprobación de la misma habrá finalizado. Si la conexión a tierra no es correcta, desenchufe los cables de alimentación de los conjuntos de ventilador-fuente de alimentación del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. SC000330 Clavija 6 Clavija 1 Clavija 7 Clavija12 608 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000910 Si está proporcionando servicio a un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de 220 voltios, vaya al paso 10. Si está proporcionando servicio a un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 de -48 voltios, vea la documentación de instalación del del bastidor o sistema principal para determinar la anomalía. Realice la comprobación completa de la conexión de tierra de nuevo. 10. Compruebe la continuidad del cable de alimentación. Si el cable no tiene continuidad, cá mbielo por uno nuevo y, a continuación, realice la comprobación completa de la conexión de tierra de nuevo. Si el cable tiene continuidad, vea la documentación de instalación para el bastidor o sistema principal para determinar la anomalía. Para comprobar la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo Ts4, realice los pasos siguientes: 2. Asegúrese de que los otros extremos de los cables de alimentación no estén conectados a las tomas de alimentación eléctrica. Desenchufe los cables si fuese necesario. Comprobación de la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 1. Asegúrese de que haya conectado un cable de alimentación en cada toma de alimentación 1 . Vea la figura 11. Figura 11. Cables de alimentación y conectores SCSI (Sistema 2104 Modelo TS4) SC000230 1 2 3 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 609 SC000911 3. : Algunos circuitos eléctricos se podrían dañar si los cables SCSI externos se conectan al sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 mientras se está realizando la comprobación de la toma de tierra. Asegúrese de que no haya cables SCSI externos conectados a los conectores . Vea la figura 11. 4. Compruebe la continuidad entre el chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 y la clavija de toma de tierra de cada cable de alimentación. a. Compruebe los cables de alimentación y asegúrese de que el conector de tierra del tercer cable se encuentre en buenas condiciones. b. Utilice un medidor para comprobar que la continuidad de la toma de tierra del tercer cable es de 0,1 ohmios o menor entre la clavija de toma de tierra externa y la toma de tierra del chasis. 5. Si la continuidad es buena, la comprobación de la toma de tierra se ha completado. 6. Si la toma de tierra no es correcta, desenchufe los cables de alimentación de los conectores de la línea principal de alimentación. a. Compruebe la continuidad de cada cable de alimentación. b. Si el cable de alimentación falla, cá mbielo por uno nuevo. c. Compruebe la continuidad entre el chasis del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 y la clavija de toma de tierra del conector de alimentación en cada conjunto de ventilador y fuente de alimentación. Vea la figura 12. Atención d Si el conjunto de ventilador y fuente de alimentación no tiene continuidad, cambie el conjunto por uno nuevo. (Vea la sección sobre conjuntos de ventilador y fuente de alimentación en el manual Vaya a “Comprobación de la toma de tierra del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4” y realice los pasos 1 al 6d para completar la comprobación de la toma de tierra de nuevo. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide.) Figura 12. Clavija de toma de tierra (Sistema 2104 Modelo TS4) 1 2 3 SC000331 610 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000912 Figura 13. Eliminación de la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 Salvo que tenga una razón particular para hacerlo, no elimine la alimentación del sistema principal o del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 a menos que las instrucciones que está siguiendo así se lo indiquen. Siga los pasos siguientes para eliminar la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4: 1. Compruebe con el cliente que todas las operaciones entre el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 y el sistema principal se hayan detenido. 2. Posicione el interruptor de encendido/espera de cc de cada conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación en posición de espera. Vea la figura 13. a. Algunos sistemas 2104 Modelo DS4 tienen un conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación y un conjunto de ventilador. El conjunto de ventilador no tiene interruptor de encendido/espera de cc. b. Un conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación puede tener su indicador de comprobación (CHK) encendido aunque su interruptor de encendido/espera de cc esté en posición de espera. Nota: Notas: Eliminación de la alimentación del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 1 Eliminación de la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000206 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 611 SC000913 3. PELIGRO En el paso siguiente se van a extraer los cables de alimentación. Estos cables tienen corriente si la unidad de distribución de alimentación del bastidor a la unidad de fuente de alimentación ininterrumpida (UPS) está n aún encendidas. (1) 1 1 2 2 Note: Notas: Salvo que tenga una razón particular para hacerlo, no elimine la alimentación del sistema principal o del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 a menos que las instrucciones que está siguiendo le indiquen que lo haga. Siga los pasos siguientes para eliminar la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo TS4: 1. Compruebe con el cliente que todas las operaciones entre el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 y el sistema principal se hayan detenido. 2. En la parte posterior del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4, posicione el interruptor de encendido/espera de cc de cada conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación en posición de espera. Vea la figura 14. a. Algunos sistemas 2104 Modelo TS4 tienen un conjunto de ventiladorfuente de alimentación y un conjunto de ventilador. El conjunto de ventilador no tiene interruptor de encendido/espera de cc. b. Un conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación puede tener su indicador de comprobación (CHK) encendido aunque su interruptor de encendido/ espera de cc esté en posición de espera. Eliminación de la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 Extraiga los cables de alimentación de la parte posterior del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. Vea la figura 13. 4. Siga los pasos siguientes para devolver la alimentación al sistema 2104 Modelo DS4: a. Vuelva a instalar los cables de alimentación . b. Posicione el interruptor de encendido/espera de cc de cada conjunto de ventilador-fuente de alimentación en posición de encendido. Puede configurar la secuenciación de arranque del motor del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. Para obtener má s información, vea las secciones sobre el conmutador de arranque automá tico de la unidad y el conmutador de modalidad de arranque del motor de retardo en el manual . Nota: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide 612 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000914 1 2 2 3. Extraiga los cables de alimentación de la toma de alimentación eléctrica y de la parte posterior del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. Vea la figura 14. 4. Realice los pasos siguientes para devolver la alimentación al sistema 2104 Modelo TS4: a. Vuelva a instalar los cables de alimentación . b. Posicione el interruptor de encendido/espera de cc de cada conjunto de ventilador y fuente de alimentación en la posición de encendido. Es posible configurar la secuenciación del motor de arranque del 2104 Modelo TS4. Para obtener má s información, vea las secciones sobre el interruptor de arranque automá tico de la unidad y el interruptor de modo de retardo de arranque del motor en el manual Nota: Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Service Guide. Figura 14. Eliminación de la alimentación de un sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 SC000207 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 613 SC000915 Avisos de peligro PELIGRO PELIGRO PELIGRO PELIGRO PELIGRO En el paso siguiente se van a extraer los cables de alimentación. Estos cables pueden tener corriente si la unidad de distribución de alimentación del bastidor o la unidad de fuente de alimentación ininterrumpida (UPS) aún se encuentran encendidas. (1) No enchufe ningún cable de alimentación en el conjunto de ventilador y fuente de alimentación hasta que el conjunto esté completamente en su lugar y sus tornillos estén completamente apretados. (3) Durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, no desconecte los cables de estaciones de pantalla, impresoras, teléfonos o protectores de estación para líneas de comunicaciones. (5) Una toma de alimentación eléctrica que no esté correctamente cableada podría dar lugar a un voltaje peligroso en las piezas metá licas del sistema o en los dispositivos que estén conectados al mismo. Es responsabilidad del cliente asegurarse de que la toma de alimentación esté correctamente cableada y conectada a tierra para evitar una descarga eléctrica. Durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, no desconecte los cables de estaciones de pantalla, impresoras, teléfonos o protectores de estación para líneas de comunicaciones. (4) No intente abrir las cubiertas del conjunto de ventilador y fuente de alimentación. (2) 614 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000916 Avisos de precaución PRECAUCIÓN: Es posible que esta unidad tenga dos cables de línea. Para suprimir toda la alimentación, desconecte ambos cables de línea. (1) PRECAUCIÓN: No desmonte la cubierta, no precisa servicio, no contiene piezas que se puedan reparar. (2) PRECAUCIÓN: Polo doble/Fusible neutro. (3) Figura 15. Etiqueta de precaución del cable de línea Figura 16. Etiqueta de precaución de la cubierta de la fuente de alimentación Figura 17. Etiqueta de precaución del fusible SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 615 SC000916A PRECAUCIÓN 32 Kg (70,5 lbs). Consulte los manuales. : Esta unidad pesa má s de (4) Figura 18. Etiqueta de peso del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 SC000220 Refer to manuals 32 Kg (70.5 lbs) Atención: Si existen datos almacenados en las unidades, etiquételas antes de extraerlas. Cuando sustituya las unidades, instale cada una de ellas en la misma bahía de unidad de la que la ha extraído. De no hacerlo de así, se puede producir una pérdida de datos. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) PRECAUCIÓN 2104 Modelo DS4 con 14 unidades y dos fuentes de alimentación, su peso total superará los 32 Kg (70,5 lbs). Deberá extraer seis unidades como mínimo del sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 antes de levantarlo o instalarlo en un bastidor o sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. Esto reducirá el peso total a menos de 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) y hará que el sistema . No hacerlo así puede producir lesiones. : Si se carga por completo un sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 pueda ser manejado con seguridad por dos personas 616 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices PRECAUCIÓN: Esta unidad pesa entre 32 Kg - 55 Kg (70,5 lbs - 121,2 lbs). (5) PRECAUCIÓN es necesaria para transportar, instalar y reubicar el producto cuando esté completamente lleno. Para transportar el producto con seguridad será n necesarias tres personas. No hacerlo así podría producir lesiones. En el caso de que la herramienta de levantamiento no esté disponible, deberá reducir el peso a 32 Kg o menos extrayendo todos los componentes pesados (unidades de disco duro y fuentes de alimentación) del producto. Sólo se necesitará n dos personas para transportar, instalar y reubicar el producto. : La herramienta de levantamiento del embalaje proporcionada (6) Figura 19. Etiqueta del peso del sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 SC000219 Atención: Si existen datos almacenados en las unidades, etiquételas antes de extraerlas. Cuando sustituya las unidades, instale cada una de ellas en la misma bahía de unidad de donde las ha extraido. No hacerlo así podría resultar en una pérdida de datos. > 18 Kg (37 lbs) > 32 Kg (70,5 lbs) 32 - 55 Kg (70.5 - 121.2 lbs) SC000917 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 617 SC000918 PRECAUCIÓN: Una condición de en espera viene indicada por el símbolo a la derecha de la CC justo encima del interruptor, SW1. Cuando conmute SW1 a la posición de la derecha justo debajo del símbolo de en espera, la alimentación de CA de la unidad no estará apagada. (7) PRECAUCIÓN: El estabilizador debe estar correctamente sujeto a la parte frontal inferior del bastidor para evitar que éste se vuelque hacia delante cuando se extraiga el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 del bastidor. No extraiga ni instale ninguna unidad si no existe un estabilizador sujeto al bastidor. (8) PRECAUCIÓN: El estabilizador debe estar correctamente sujeto a la parte frontal inferior del bastidor para evitar que éste se vuelque hacia delante cuando se instale el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 en el bastidor. No extraiga ni instale ninguna unidad si no existe un estabilizador sujeto al bastidor. (9) Figura 20. Ubicación de la condición de en espera SC000328 618 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000319 PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio vacío que albergaba al conjunto del ventilador. (10) PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio vacío que albergaba al conjunto del ventilador y de la fuente de alimentación. (11) PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio vacío que albergaba al conjunto de la tarjeta de interfaz SCSI. (12) PRECAUCIÓN: Este producto está equipado con un enchufe y un cable de alimentación de 3 hilos como medida de seguridad para el usuario. Utilice este cable de alimentación junto con una toma eléctrica correctamente conectada a tierra para evitar descargas eléctricas. (13) PRECAUCIÓN: No toque la toma de alimentación ni la toma de alimentación eléctrica con nada que no sean puntas de prueba antes de completar esta comprobación de seguridad. (14) PRECAUCIÓN: Si la lectura no es infinito, no continúe. Efectúe las correcciones necesarias en los cables antes de continuar. No conmute la ramificación del circuito CB hasta que finalice satisfactoriamente los pasos anteriores. (15) PRECAUCIÓN: No utilice las asas del ventilador o de los conjuntos del ventilador y de la fuente de alimentación para transportar el sistema 2104 Modelo Ds4. Estas asas no está n diseñadas para soportar el peso de la unidad. (16) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 619 SC000920 PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando empuje la unidad para colocarla totalmente en su sitio, la palanca se desplazará automá ticamente hacia su posición de cierre. Procure no pellizcarse los dedos entre la palanca y la unidad. (17) Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación de la línea principal se haya extraído del conjunto de ventilador y unidad de alimentación defectuoso antes de continuar. (18) No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio vacío situado sobre la unidad de alimentación y ventilación. (19) No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio vacío situado entre entre las unidades de alimentación. (20) Si el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 se instala en el bastidor de un sistema Modelo T00 o T42, deberá tener en cuenta también los avisos de seguridad de dicho bastidor antes de proceder a extraer el armazón de la unidad. Encontrará los avisos de seguridad en la sección dedicada a la instalación del sistema de la publicación SA38-0577, o en el siguiente sitio Web: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) Los sistemas 2104 Modelo DS4 y Modelo TS4 se han diseñado para que los instale el cliente y está n certificados como configurables por el cliente. Asegúrese de que el sistema o el bastidor en el que se vaya a instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 esté también diseñado y certificado como configurable por el cliente. De lo contrario, el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 o Modelo TS4 deberá instalarlo un técnico de sistemas. (22) PRECAUCIÓN: PRECAUCIÓN: PRECAUCIÓN: PRECAUCIÓN: PRECAUCIÓN: 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide, 620 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SC000921 PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca las manos ni herramientas en el espacio que albergaba el conjunto de la tarjeta. (23) PRECAUCIÓN: Se necesitan tres personas para levantar el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. No intente levantar el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 usted solo. No intente levartarlo sin ayuda de otras dos personas. (24) PRECAUCIÓN: No utilice las asas del ventilador o de los conjuntos del ventilador y de la fuente de alimentación para transportar el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. Estas asas no está n diseñadas para soportar el peso de la unidad. (25) El sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 está diseñado para que lo instale el cliente y está certificado como configurado por el cliente. Asegúrese de que el sistema o bastidor en el que se va a instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4 también esté diseñado y certificado para la configuración del cliente. Si no lo está , un CE deberá instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo DS4. (26) PRECAUCIÓN: PRECAUCIÓN: El sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 está diseñado para que lo instale el cliente y está certificado como configurado por el cliente. Asegúrese de que el sistema en el que se va a instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4 también esté diseñado y certificado para la configuración del cliente. Si no lo está , un CE deberá instalar el sistema 2104 Modelo TS4. (27) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 621 Swedish Upplysningar om säkerhet och miljö Säkerhetsanvisningar med översättning SCSVE901 Det här avsnittet innehåller följande information: Säkerhetsanvisningar med översättning Procedurer för säkerhetsinspektion av produkten Miljöanvisningar och annan miljöinformation Det här dokumentet innehåller säkerhetsinformation. Meddelanden som föregås av ordet Fara varnar för tillstånd eller procedurer som kan orsaka död eller allvarlig personskada. Meddelanden som föregås av ordet Varning varnar för tillstånd eller procedurer som kan orsaka personskada som varken är dödlig eller extremt hälsovådlig. Meddelanden som föregås av ordet Viktigt varnar för tillstånd eller procedurer som kan orsaka skada på datorer, utrustning, program eller data. Meddelandena är förtecknade i nummerordning efter ID, som står inom parentes efter varje meddelande. Följande exempel visar var ID-numren är placerade i meddelanden av typen Fara och Varning. FARA Ett eluttag som inte är korrekt installerat kan göra att det går livsfarlig spänning genom metalldelar i systemet eller produkter som är anslutna till systemet. Det är kundens ansvar att se till att alla eluttag är korrekt installerade och jordade. (1) VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i öppningen till det tomma utrymmet där fläkten var placerad. (1) 622 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Statisk elektricitet Procedurer för säkerhetsinspektion Inspektera racket SCSVE902 Viktigt: När du hanterar FRU-enheter (Field Replaceable Units) och andra datordelar ska du vidta följande försiktighetsåtgärder för att undvika skador av statisk elektricitet: Rör dig så lite som möjligt. När du rör dig kan statisk elektricitet byggas upp omkring dig. Var försiktig när du rör vid datorns delar. Håll i kortens kanter eller metallhölje. Rör aldrig vid frilagda kretsar. Förhindra att personer som inte är jordade rör vid datorns delar. Innan du installerar en ny del håller du dess antistatiska förpackning mot en omålad metalldel i 2104-enheten eller värdsystemet i minst 2 sekunder. På så sätt minskar du den statiska elektriciteten i förpackningen och i din egen kropp. Ta ut delen ur förpackningen och installera den omedelbart i 2104-enheten (modell DS4 eller TS4) utan att lägga ifrån dig delen. Om du måste lägga ifrån dig delen gör du så här: 1. Placera den antistatiska förpackningen på ett plant och jämnt underlag. 2. Lägg delen ovanpå den antistatiska förpackningen. Lägg inte delen direkt på en metallyta. I anvisningarna för säkerhetsinspektionen finns en beskrivning av hur du kontrollerar 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4. I installationshandboken till ditt rack finns mer information om hur du gör en säkerhetsinspektion. VARNING: Produkten 2104, modell DS4 och TS4, är utformad för att installeras av kunden och är certifierad som kundinstallerad. Kontrollera att den enhet (dator eller rack) där 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4 ska installeras också är utformad och certifierad för att installeras av kunden. I annat fall måste 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4 installeras av en servicetekniker. (22) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 623 Inspektera 2104 - modell DS4 eller modell TS4 Externa maskinkontroller Interna maskinkontroller SCSVE903 Utför följande kontroller av maskinens inre: 1. Kontrollera att inte några andra ändringar än IBMs egna har gjorts på maskinen. Om du hittar sådana ändringar skaffar du formuläret "Non-IBM Alteration Attachment Survey", nr R009, från IBM-återförsäljaren. Fyll i formuläret och lämna det till IBM-återförsäljaren. 2. Kontrollera maskinens inre skick och se efter om det finns tecken på metallföroreningar eller annan nedsmutsning vatten eller annan vätska brand rökskada 3. Se efter om det finns uppenbara mekaniska fel, t.ex. lösa komponenter. 4. Kontrollera att det inte finns förslitningar, sprickor eller klämskador på exponerade kablar och kontakter. Utför följande kontroller av maskinens utsida: 1. Kontrollera att det inte finns skador (lösa, skadade eller vassa kanter) på chassit. 2. Kontrollera nätkablarna och se efter att isoleringen inte är sliten eller skadad. 3. Se efter att inga ändringar gjorts som avviker från standard. Använd sunt förnuft när du bedömer säkerheten hos sådana ändringar. 4. Kontrollera att alla yttre luckor finns på plats och inte är skadade. 5. Förvissa dig om att alla spärrar och gångjärn fungerar som de ska. 6. Kontrollera att nätkabeln inte är skadad. 7. Se efter om det finns några slitna, skadade eller ihopklämda kablar. 8. Inspektera fläkt-/nätaggregatenheterna. Se efter att fästanordningarna för nätaggregatets hölje (skruvar eller nitar) inte har avlägsnats eller rubbats. 9. Kontrollera att den yttre signalkabeln inte är skadad. 10. Kontrollera kåpan och se efter att det inte finns några vassa kanter, skador eller förändringar som gör att enhetens inre delar exponeras. 11. Rätta till alla fel som du hittar. Utför följande säkerhetskontroller. 624 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Kontroll av säkerhetsetikett SCSVE904 Utför följande kontroll av säkerhetsetiketten: 1. Kontrollera att etiketten är fastsatt på 2104 modell DS4 eller modell TS4. Se figur 1. 2. Kontrollera att nätkabelns varningsetikett är fastsatt på nätaggregatet i 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4. Se figur 2. SC000274 Figur 1. 2104-etikett - modell DS4 eller modell TS4 Figur 2. Varningsetikett om nätkabel SC000325 VARNING: Enheten kan ha två nätkablar. Koppla ur båda nätkablarna så att all ström bryts. (1) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 625 SCSVE905 3. Kontrollera att varningsetiketten om nätaggregatets hölje är fastsatt på nätaggregatet i 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4. Se figur 3. 4. Kontrollera att varningsetiketten om säkring är fastsatt på nätaggregatet i 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4. Se figur 4. Figur 3. Varningsetikett om nätaggregat Figur 4. Varningsetikett om säkring SC000326 SC000327 VARNING: Avlägsna inte höljet. Försök inte reparera. Ingen av delarna kan repareras. (2) VARNING: Dubbelpolig/neutral säkring. (3) 626 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE905A 5. Kontrollera att viktetiketten är fastsatt på 2104 modell DS4. Se figur 5. VARNING: Enheten väger över 32 kg. Se handböckerna. (4) Figur 5. Viktetikett för 2104 modell DS4 SC000220 32 kg (se handböckerna) Viktigt: Om du har data lagrade i enheterna bör du märka enheterna innan du tar bort dem. När du sätter tillbaka enheterna installerar du dem i samma enhetsfack där de tidigare var installerade. I annat fall finns det risk för dataförluster. > 18 kg > 32 kg VARNING: Om 2104 modell DS4 är fullbestyckad med 14 enheter och två nätaggregat väger den över 32 kg. Du måste ta ut minst sex enheter ur 2104 modell DS4 innan du kan lyfta eller installera den i ett rack eller i 2104 modell Ts4. På så sätt minskar du vikten till under 32 kg, och 2104 modell DS4 kan utan risk hanteras av två personer. I annat fall finns det risk för skador. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 627 VARNING: Enheten väger mellan 32 och 55 kg. (5) Figur 6. Viktetikett för 2104 modell TS4 32 - 55 kg SC000219 6. Kontrollera att viktetiketten är fastsatt på 2104 modell TS4. Se figur 6. VARNING: Lyftredskapet av kartong (följer med) krävs för att flytta och installera produkten när den är fullbestyckad. Det behövs minst tre personer när den ska flyttas. I annat fall finns det risk för skador. Om lyftredskapet inte är tillgängligt måste du minska vikten till 32 kg eller mindre genom att ta bort alla tunga komponenter (diskenheter och nätaggregat) från produkten. Sedan krävs det bara två personer för att flytta och installera produkten. (6) Viktigt: Om du har data lagrade i enheterna bör du märka enheterna innan du tar bort dem. När du sätter tillbaka enheterna installerar du dem i samma enhetsfack där de tidigare var installerade. I annat fall finns det risk för dataförluster. > 18 kg > 32 kg SCSVE906 628 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE907 7. Kontrollera att etiketten om vänteläge är fastsatt på 2104 modell DS4 eller modell Ts4. Se figur 7. VARNING: Vänteläge anges av symbolen till höger om DC, direkt ovanför Sw1- omkopplaren. När du ställer SW1-omkopplaren i det högra läget (direkt under väntelägessymbolen) är växelströmmen till enheten inte avstängd. (7) Figur 7. Etikett - vänteläge SC000326 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 629 SCSVE908 Avsnittet innehåller anvisningar för kontroll av jordningen av 2104 modell DS4 eller modell TS4. Kontrollera jordningen av 2104 modell DS4 Så här kontrollerar du jordningen av 2104 modell DS4: 3. Viktigt: Vissa elektriska kretsar kan skadas om de externa SCSI-kablarna ansluts till 2104 modell DS4 medan jordningstestet utförs. Se till att inga externa SCSI-kablar är anslutna till kontakterna . 4. Så här kontrollerar du jordningen av 2104 modell DS4: a. Granska stickkontakterna som du kopplade bort från strömfördelningsenheten eller reservbatteriet i steg 2 och försäkra dig om att det tredje jordstiftet är i gott skick. b. Använd en ohmmeter och anslut den ena ledaren till chassit på 2104 modell DS4 och den andra ledaren till det tredje jordstiftet på stickkontakterna som du kopplade ur i steg 2. Avläsningen bör ge högst 0,1 ohm mellan jordstiftet och chassit. Figur 8. Nätkablar och SCSI-kontakter på 2104 modell DS4 Kontrollera jordningen av 2104 modell DS4 eller modell TS4 1. Se till att all strömförsörjning är bortkopplad från racket. Läs installationsanvisningarna för racket eller värdsystemet. 2. Kontrollera att nätkablarna är anslutna till vardera fläkt-/nätaggregatenheten. Se figur 8. Se också till att nätkablarnas motsatta ände är bortkopplade från strömfördelningsenheten och rackets reservbatteri. Läs installationsanvisningarna för racket eller värdsystemet. 2 1 SC000210 630 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE909 Om du arbetar med en 220 volts 2104 modell DS4 går du till steg 5. Om du arbetar med en -48 volts 2104 modell DS4 går du till steg 7. 5. Kontrollera ledningssammanhanget mellan chassit på 2104 modell DS4 och jordstift på strömkontakten på fläkt-/nätaggregatenheterna. Se figur 9. 6. Gå till steg 9. 7. Kontrollera ledningssammanhanget mellan chassit på 2104 modell DS4 och jordstiften 1 och 7 för varje nätkabelkontakt. Se figur 10. 8. Gå till steg 9. 9. Om en fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet inte har ledningssammanhang byter du ut den mot en ny. Se vidare avsnittet om fläkt-/nätaggregatenheter i servicehandboken till Expandable Storage Plus 2104 modell DS4 och modell TS4. Utför hela jordningstestet på nytt. Om alla fläkt-/nätaggregatenheter har ledningssammanhang, kanske felet beror på nätkabeln eller jordningen av värdsystemet. Figur 9. Jordstift (220 V 2104 modell DS4) Figur 10. Jordstift (-48 V 2104 modell DS4) 1 SC000329 Om jordningen är korrekt är jordningstestet klart. Om jordningen inte är korrekt kopplar du bort nätkablarna från fläkt-/nätaggregatenheten 2104 modell DS4. SC000330 Stift 6 Stift 1 Stift 12 Stift 7 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 631 SCSVE910 Om du arbetar med en 220 volts 2104 modell DS4 går du till steg 10. Om du arbetar med en -48 volts 2104 modell DS4, försöker du lokalisera felet med hjälp av installationsanvisningarna till racket eller värdsystemet. Utför hela jordningstestet på nytt. 10. Kontrollera nätkabelns ledningssammanhang. Om nätkabeln inte har ledningssammanhang byter du ut den mot en ny. Utför sedan hela jordningstestet på nytt. Om nätkabeln har ledningssammanhang försöker du lokalisera felet med hjälp av installationsanvisningarna för racket eller värdsystemet. Så här kontrollerar du jordningen av 2104 modell TS4: 2. Försäkra dig om att nätkablarnas motsatta ände inte är anslutna till eluttag. Koppla loss kablarna om så behövs. Kontrollera jordningen av 2104 modell TS4 1. Kontrollera att en nätkabel är ansluten till varje eluttag (1). Se figur 11. 1 Figur 11. Nätkablar och SCSI-kontakter (2104 modell TS4) SC000230 1 2 3 632 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE911 3. Viktigt: Vissa elektriska kretsar kan skadas om de externa SCSI-kablarna ansluts till 2104 modell TS4 medan jordningstestet utförs. Se till att inga externa SCSI-kablar är anslutna till SCSI-kontakterna . Se figur 11. 4. Kontrollera ledningssammanhanget mellan chassit på 2104 modell TS4 och jordstiftet på varje nätkabelkontakt. a. Kontrollera nätkablarna och se efter att den tredje jordledaren är i gott skick. b. Använd en mätare och kontrollera att jordledarens ledningssammanhang är högst 0,1 ohm mellan det externa jordstiftet och chassits jordning. 5. Om ledningssammanhanget är bra är jordningstestet klart. 6. Om jordningen inte är korrekt kopplar du bort nätkablarna från eluttagen. a. Testa varje nätkabels jordningssammanhang. b. Om det är fel på någon nätkabel byter du ut den mot en ny. c. Kontrollera ledningssammanhanget mellan chassit på 2104 modell TS4 och jordstift på strömkontakten på fläkt-/nätaggregatenheterna. Se figur 12. d Omfläkt-/nätaggregatenheten inte har ledningssammanhang byter du ut den mot en ny. (Se vidare avsnittet om fläkt-/nätaggregatenheter i servicehandboken till Expandable Storage Plus 2104 modell DS4 och modell TS4.) Gå till "Kontrollera jordningen av 2104 modell TS4" och utför hela jordningstestet på nytt enligt steg 1 till och med steg 6d. Figur 12. Jordstift (2104 modell TS4) 1 2 3 SC000331 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 633 SCSVE912 Figur 13. Koppla bort strömmen från 2104 modell DS4 Anm: Koppla inte bort strömmen från värdsystemet eller från 2104 modell DS4 annat än om det står i instruktionerna att du ska göra det, eller du behöver göra det av någon annan anledning. Så här kopplar du bort strömmen från 2104 modell DS4: 1. Kontrollera med kunden att alla operationer mellan 2104 modell DS4 och värdsystemet har stoppats. 2. Ställ likströmsomkopplaren på alla fläkt-/nätaggregatenheter i vänteläge. Se figur 13. Anm: a. Vissa versioner av 2104 modell DS4 har en fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet och en fläktenhet. Fläktenheten har inte någon likströmsomkopplare. b. På en fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet kan kontrollampan lysa trots att likströmsomkopplaren är satt i vänteläge. Koppla bort strömmen från 2104 modell DS4 eller modell TS4 1 Koppla bort strömmen från 2104 modell DS4 SC000206 634 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE913 3. FARA I följande steg kopplar du bort nätkablarna. Det går ström genom kablarna så länge rackets strömfördelnings- eller UPS-enhet (Uninterruptable Power Supply) inte stängts av. (1) 1 1 2 2 Anm: Koppla inte bort strömmen från värdsystemet eller från 2104 modell TS4 annat än om det står i instruktionerna att du ska göra det, eller du behöver göra det av någon annan anledning. Så här kopplar du bort strömmen från 2104 modell TS4: 1. Kontrollera med kunden att alla operationer mellan 2104 modell TS4 och värdsystemet har stoppats. 2. På baksidan av 2104 modell TS4 ställer du likströmsomkopplaren på alla fläkt-/nätaggregatenheter i vänteläge. Se figur 14. Anm: a. Vissa versioner av 2104 modell TS4 har en fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet och en fläktenhet. Fläktenheten har inte någon likströmsomkopplare. b. På en fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet kan kontrollampan lysa trots att likströmsomkopplaren är satt i vänteläge. Koppla bort strömmen från 2104 modell TS4 Koppla loss nätkablarna från baksidan av 2104 modell DS4. Se figur 13. 4. Så här kopplar du på strömmen igen till 2104 modell DS4: a. Anslut nätkablarna igen. b. Ställ varje fläkt-/nätaggregatenhets likströmsomkopplare i påslaget läge ("On"). Anm: Du kan konfigurera motorstartordningen för 2104 modell DS4. Mer information finns i avsnittet om omkopplare för autostart och fördröjd motorstart i servicehandboken till Expandable Storage Plus 2104 modell DS4 och modell TS4. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 635 SCSVE914 1 2 2 3. Koppla loss nätkablarna från eluttaget och från baksidan av 2104 modell TS4. Se figur 14. 4. Så här kopplar du på strömmen igen till 2104 modell TS4: a. Anslut nätkablarna igen. b. Ställ varje fläkt-/nätaggregatenhets likströmsomkopplare i påslaget läge ("On"). Anm: Du kan konfigurera motorstartordningen för 2104 modell TS4. Mer information finns i avsnittet om omkopplare för autostart och fördröjd motorstart i servicehandboken till Expandable Storage Plus 2104 modell DS4 och modell Ts4. Figur 14. Koppla bort strömmen från 2104 modell TS4 SC000207 636 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE915 Fara FARA FARA FARA FARA FARA I följande steg kopplar du bort nätkablarna. Det går ström genom kablarna så länge rackets strömfördelnings- eller UPS-enhet (Uninterruptable Power Supply) inte stängts av. (1) Anslut inte en nätkabel till fläkt-/nätaggregatenheten förrän enheten är helt installerad och tumskruvarna åtdragna. (3) Undvik att koppla bort kablar till bildskärmar, skrivare, telefoner eller åskskydd för kommunikationslinjer vid åskväder. (5) Ett felaktigt installerat eluttag kan göra metalldelar i systemet eller på anslutna enheter strömförande. Det är kundens ansvar att se till att alla eluttag är korrekt installerade och jordade. Undvik att koppla bort kablar till bildskärmar, skrivare, telefoner eller åskskydd för kommunikationslinjer vid åskväder. (4) Försök inte öppna fläkt-/nätaggregatenhetens kåpa. (2) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 637 SCSVE916 Varningsmeddelanden VARNING: Enheten kan ha två nätkablar. Koppla ur båda nätkablarna så att all ström bryts. (1) VARNING: Avlägsna inte höljet. Försök inte reparera. Ingen av delarna kan repareras. (2) VARNING: Dubbelpolig/neutral säkring. (3) Figur 15. Varningsetikett om nätkabel Figur 16. Varningsetikett om nätaggregat Figur 17. Figur 4. Varningsetikett om säkring SC000327 SC000326 SC000325 638 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE916A VARNING: Enheten väger över 32 kg. Se handböckerna. (4) Figur 18. Viktetikett för 2104 modell DS4 SC000220 32 kg (se handböckerna) Viktigt: Om du har data lagrade i enheterna bör du märka enheterna innan du tar bort dem. När du sätter tillbaka enheterna installerar du dem i samma enhetsfack där de tidigare var installerade. I annat fall finns det risk för dataförluster. > 18 kg > 32 kg VARNING: Om 2104 modell DS4 är fullbestyckad med 14 enheter och två nätaggregat väger den över 32 kg. Du måste ta ut minst sex enheter ur 2104 modell DS4 innan du kan lyfta eller installera den i ett rack eller i 2104 modell Ts4. På så sätt minskar du vikten till under 32 kg och 2104 modell DS4 kan utan risk hanteras av två personer. I annat fall finns det risk för skador. Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 639 VARNING: Enheten väger mellan 32 och 55 kg. (5) VARNING: Lyftredskapet av kartong (följer med) krävs för att flytta och installera produkten när den är fullbestyckad. Det behövs minst tre personer när den ska flyttas. I annat fall finns det risk för skador. Om lyftredskapet inte är tillgängligt måste du minska vikten till 32 kg eller mindre genom att ta bort alla tunga komponenter (diskenheter och nätaggregat) från produkten. Sedan krävs det bara två personer för att flytta och installera produkten. (6) Figur 19. Viktetikett för 2104 modell TS4 SC000219 Viktigt: Om du har data lagrade i enheterna bör du märka enheterna innan du tar bort dem. När du sätter tillbaka enheterna installerar du dem i samma enhetsfack där de tidigare var installerade. I annat fall finns det risk för dataförluster. > 18 kg > 32 kg 32 - 55 kg SCSVE917 640 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE918 VARNING: Vänteläge anges av symbolen till höger om DC, direkt ovanför Sw1- omkopplaren. När du ställer SW1-omkopplaren i det högra läget (direkt under väntelägessymbolen) är växelströmmen till enheten inte avstängd. (7) VARNING: Tippskyddet måste vara fäst vid rackets nedre framkant för att förhindra att racket tippar framåt när 2104 modell DS4 tagits ut ur racket. Ta inte bort eller installera enheter förrän ett tippskydd har fästs vid racket. (8) VARNING: Tippskyddet måste vara fäst vid rackets nedre framkant för att förhindra att racket tippar framåt när 2104 modell DS4 installeras i racket. Ta inte bort eller installera enheter förrän ett tippskydd har fästs vid racket. (9) Figur 20. Placering av etikett om vänteläge SC000328 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 641 SCSVE319 VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma utrymmet där fläkten var placerad. (10) VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma utrymmet där fläkt- /nätaggregatenheten var placerad. (11) VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma utrymmet där SCSI-kortet var placerat. (12) VARNING: Av säkerhetsskäl är produkten utrustad med en nätkabel med tre ledare och kontakt. Du undviker risken att datorns hölje blir strömförande vid en eventuell kortslutning genom att ansluta nätkabeln till ett skyddsjordat nätuttag. (13) VARNING: Rör inte vid eluttaget eller eluttagets täckplatta med något annat än testsonder innan du har genomfört hela säkerhetskontrollen. (14) VARNING: Om det avlästa värdet inte är oändligt ska du inte fortsätta. Gör de ändringar som behövs innan du fortsätter. Slå inte på kretsens strömbrytare förrän samtliga ovanstående steg har genomförts på rätt sätt. (15) VARNING: Lyft inte 2104 modell DS4 genom att ta tag i handtagen på fläkten eller fläkt- /nätaggregatenheten. Handtagen är inte tänkta att bära enhetens vikt. (16) 642 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices SCSVE920 VARNING: När du skjutit in enheten helt och hållet stängs spaken automatiskt. Var försiktig så att du inte klämmer fingrarna mellan spaken och enheten. (17) VARNING: Förvissa dig om att huvudströmkabeln har kopplats loss från den icke fungerande fläkt-/nätaggregatenhet innan du fortsätter. (18) VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma utrymmet ovanför fläkt- /nätaggregatenheten. (19) VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma utrymmet mellan nätaggregaten. (20) VARNING: Om 2104 modell DS4 installeras i ett rack av modell T00 eller T42 måste du också följa säkerhetsanvisningarna för dessa rack innan du börjar ta bort ramen. Säkerhetsanvisningarna finns i avsnittet om systeminstallation i 7014 Model T00 and T42 Rack Installation and Service Guide, SA38-0577 och på följande webbadress: www-1.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/library/hardware_docs/7014_t00.html (21) VARNING: Produkten 2104, modell DS4 och TS4, är utformad för att installeras av kunden och är certifierad som kundinstallerad. Kontrollera att den enhet (dator eller rack) där 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4 ska installeras också är utformad och certifierad för att installeras av kunden. I annat fall måste 2104 modell DS4 eller TS4 installeras av en servicetekniker. (22) Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 translations 643 SCSVE921 VARNING: Stoppa inte in händerna eller verktyg i det tomma uttrymme där kortet var placerat. (23) VARNING: Det krävs tre personer för att lyfta 2104 modell TS4. Försök inte lyfta 2104 modell TS4 själv. Försök inte att lyfta den utan att ha hjälp av två andra personer. (24) VARNING: Lyft inte 2104 modell TS4 genom att ta tag i handtagen på fläkten eller fläkt- /nätaggregatenheten. Handtagen är inte tänkta att bära enhetens vikt. (25) 2104 modell DS4 är utformad för att installeras av kunden och är certifierad som kundinstallerad. Kontrollera att den enhet (dator eller rack) där 2104 modell DS4 ska installeras också är utformad och certifierad för att installeras av kunden. I annat fall måste 2104 modell DS4 installeras av en servicetekniker. (26) VARNING: VARNING: 2104 modell TS4 är utformad för att installeras av kunden och är certifierad som kundinstallerad. Kontrollera att det system där 2104 modell TS4 ska installeras också är utformad och certifierad för att installeras av kunden. I annat fall måste 2104 modell TS4 installeras av en servicetekniker. (27) 644 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U. S. A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe on any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, N.Y. 10504–1785 U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2003 645 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: AIX IBM RS/6000 Eserver Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Electronic emission statements This section gives the electronic emission notices or statements for the United States and other countries. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada compliance statement Avis de conformite a la reglementation d’Industrie Canada: Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Chinese Class A warning statement Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. 646 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices European Community compliance statement This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards. This product is in conformity with the EU council directive 73/23/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits. This conformity is based on compliance with the following harmonized standard: EN60950. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication equipment. Attention: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Where shielded or special cables (for example, cables fitted with ferrites) are used in the test to make the product comply with the limits: Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized dealers. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. Germany compliance statement Zulassungsbescheinigung laut Gesetz ueber die elektromagnetische Vertraeglichkeit von Geraeten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995. Dieses Geraet ist berechtigt, in Uebereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitaetszeichen - CE - zu fuehren. Der Aussteller der Konformitaetserklaeung ist die IBM Deutschland. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2: Das Geraet erfuellt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 und EN 55022 Klasse A. Notices 647 EN 55022 Klasse A Geraete beduerfen folgender Hinweise: Nach dem EMVG:_|t¹| “Geraete duerfen an Orten, fuer die sie nicht ausreichend entstoert sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministeriums fuer Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes fuer Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen Stoerungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs.4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig. Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstoerungen verursachen. in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Massnahmen durchzufuehren und dafuer aufzukommen.” Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen, sind die Geraete wie in den Handbuechern angegeben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) class 1 statement Korean Government Ministry of Communication (MOC) statement Please note that this device has been approved for business purposes with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find that this is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for one with a non-business use. Taiwan class A compliance statement VS07171L 648 Expandable Storage Plus: 2104 Model DS4 and Model TS4 Translated Safety Notices Vos remarques sur ce document / Technical publication remark form Titre / Title : Bull ESCALA Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices Nº Reférence / Reference Nº : 86 X1 16M 00 Daté / Dated : November 2003 ERREURS DETECTEES / ERRORS IN PUBLICATION AMELIORATIONS SUGGEREES / SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT TO PUBLICATION Vos remarques et suggestions seront examinées attentivement. Si vous désirez une réponse écrite, veuillez indiquer ci-après votre adresse postale complète. Your comments will be promptly investigated by qualified technical personnel and action will be taken as required. If you require a written reply, please furnish your complete mailing address below. NOM / NAME : Date : SOCIETE / COMPANY : ADRESSE / ADDRESS : Remettez cet imprimé à un responsable BULL ou envoyez-le directement à : Please give this technical publication remark form to your BULL representative or mail to: BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE Technical Publications Ordering Form Bon de Commande de Documents Techniques To order additional publications, please fill up a copy of this form and send it via mail to: Pour commander des documents techniques, remplissez une copie de ce formulaire et envoyez-la à : BULL CEDOC ATTN / Mr. L. CHERUBIN 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE Phone / Téléphone : +33 (0) 2 41 73 63 96 FAX / Télécopie +33 (0) 2 41 73 60 19 E–Mail / Courrier Electronique : srv.Cedoc@franp.bull.fr Or visit our web sites at: / Ou visitez nos sites web à: http://www.logistics.bull.net/cedoc http://www–frec.bull.com http://www.bull.com CEDOC Reference # No Référence CEDOC Qty Qté CEDOC Reference # No Référence CEDOC Qty Qté CEDOC Reference # No Référence CEDOC Qty Qté _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [ _ _ ] [ _ _ ] : no revision number means latest revision / pas de numéro de révision signifie révision la plus récente NOM / NAME : Date : SOCIETE / COMPANY : ADRESSE / ADDRESS : PHONE / TELEPHONE : FAX : E–MAIL : For Bull Subsidiaries / Pour les Filiales Bull : Identification: For Bull Affiliated Customers / Pour les Clients Affiliés Bull : Customer Code / Code Client : For Bull Internal Customers / Pour les Clients Internes Bull : Budgetary Section / Section Budgétaire : For Others / Pour les Autres : Please ask your Bull representative. / Merci de demander à votre contact Bull. BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE 86 X1 16M 00 ORDER REFERENCE PLACE BAR CODE IN LOWER LEFT CORNER Utiliser les marques de découpe pour obtenir les étiquettes. Use the cut marks to get the labels. 86 A1 15EM 00 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices ESCALA 86 A1 15EM 00 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety Notices ESCALA 86 A1 15EM 00 Expandable Storage Plus 2104 Models DS4 and TS4 Translated Safety PL160R/T, PL260R/T and PL460R/T Service Guide ESCALA REFERENCE 86 A1 02FA 01 ESCALA PL160R/T, PL260R/T and PL460R/T Service Guide Hardware July 2008 BULL CEDOC 357 AVENUE PATTON B.P.20845 49008 ANGERS CEDEX 01 FRANCE REFERENCE 86 A1 02FA 01 The following copyright notice protects this book under Copyright laws which prohibit such actions as, but not limited to, copying, distributing, modifying, and making derivative works. Copyright © IBM, 2007-2008 Copyright © Bull SAS 2007-2008 Printed in France Trademarks and Acknowledgements We acknowledge the rights of the proprietors of the trademarks mentioned in this manual. All brand names and software and hardware product names are subject to trademark and/or patent protection. Quoting of brand and product names is for information purposes only and does not represent trademark misuse. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Bull will not be liable for errors contained herein, or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this material. Contents Safety and environmental notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii World Trade safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii German safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii Laser safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii Laser compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii Power and cabling information for NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System) GR-1089-CORE . . . . . .xiv Product recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv Battery return program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv About this publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvii How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvii Chapter 1. Starting a Service Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Bus, high-speed link (HSL/RIO/12X) isolation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Isolating a PCI bus problem while running AIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Isolating a PCI bus problem from the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Verifying a high-speed link, system PCI bus, or a multi-adapter bridge repair . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Analyzing a RIO/HSL/12X or PCI bus reference code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 DSA translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Card positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Fiber optic cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Status indications for RIO/HSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 RIO/HSL/12X connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Additional RIO/HSL FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Powering on and powering off an I/O expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 HSL loop configuration and status form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Installed features in a PCI bridge set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 RIO/HSL/12X link status diagnosis form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 HSL/RIO 12X Isolation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 CONSL01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 RIOIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Main task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 The ports on both ends of the failed link are in different system units on the loop . . . . . . . . . .29 The port on one end of the failed link is in a system unit and the port on the other end is in an I/O unit . .30 The ports on both ends of the failed link are in an I/O unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Cannot power on unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Manually detecting the failed link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Refresh the port status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 RIOIP06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 RIOIP08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 RIOIP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 RIOIP10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 RIOIP11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 RIOIP12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 RIOIP56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Multi-adapter bridge (MAB) isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 MABIP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 MABIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 MABIP05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 MABIP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 MABIP51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 iii MABIP52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 MABIP53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 MABIP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 MABIP55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Communication isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 COMIP01, COMPIP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Intermittent isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 INTIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 INTIP05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 INTIP07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 INTIP08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 INTIP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 INTIP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 INTIP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 INTIP18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 INTIP20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 INTIP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 I/O processor (IOP) isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 IOPIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 IOPIP13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 IOPIP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 IOPIP17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 IOPIP18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 IOPIP19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 IOPIP20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 IOPIP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 IOPIP22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 IOPIP23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 IOPIP25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 IOPIP26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 IOPIP27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 IOPIP28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 IOPIP29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 IOPIP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 IOPIP31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 IOPIP32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 IOPIP33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 IOPIP34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 IOPIP40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 IOPIP41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 LICIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 LICIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 LICIP04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 LICIP07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 LICIP08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 LICIP11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 How to find the cause code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 000A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 000B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 000C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 000D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 000E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 iv Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 0019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 001A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 001D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 001F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 0020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 0021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 0022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 0023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 0024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 0025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 0035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 0037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 0099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 LICIP12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 How to find the cause code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 000A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 000B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 000D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 000E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 002C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 002D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 002E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 002F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 0030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 0032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 0099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 LICIP13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 LICIP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 LICIP15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 LICIP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Logical partition (LPAR) isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 LPRIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Operations Console isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 OPCIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Power isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Cannot power on system unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Cannot power off system or SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Cannot power on SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 PWR1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 PWR1905 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Instructions for Models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, or 9408-M25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Contents v PWR1906 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 PWR1906 Instructions for 5094 and 5294 expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 PWR1907 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 PWR1908 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 PWR1908 instructions for 5088 or 0588 expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 PWR1909 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Instructions for 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7311-D11, 7311-D20 and 7314-G30 . . . . . . . . . . . .150 PWR1911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 PWR1917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 PWR1918 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 PWR1920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Router isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 RTRIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 RTRIP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 RTRIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 RTRIP05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 RTRIP06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 RTRIP07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 RTRIP08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 SAS isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 SIP3110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 SIP3111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 SIP3112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 SIP3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 SIP3120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 SIP3121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 SIP3130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 SIP3131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 SIP3132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 SIP3134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 SIP3140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 SIP3141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 SIP3142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 SIP3143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 SIP3144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 SIP3145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 SIP3146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 SIP3147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 SIP3148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 SIP3149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 SIP3150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 SIP3152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 SIP3153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Service processor isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 FSPSP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 FSPSP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 FSPSP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 FSPSP04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 FSPSP05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 FSPSP06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FSPSP07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FSPSP09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FSPSP10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FSPSP11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FSPSP12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 FSPSP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 FSPSP16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 FSPSP17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 FSPSP18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 FSPSP20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 FSPSP22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 vi Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) FSPSP23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 FSPSP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 FSPSP25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 FSPSP27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 FSPSP28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 FSPSP29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 FSPSP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 FSPSP31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 FSPSP32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 FSPSP33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 FSPSP34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 FSPSP35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 FSPSP38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 FSPSP42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 FSPSP45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 FSPSP46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 FSPSP47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 FSPSP48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 FSPSP49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 FSPSP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 FSPSP51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 FSPSP52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 FSPSP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 FSPSP55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 FSPSP63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 FSPSP64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 FSPSPC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 FSPSPD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Tape unit isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 TUPIP02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 TUPIP03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 TUPIP04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 TUPIP06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Tape unit self-test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Running the self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Interpreting the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Tape device ready conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Twinaxial workstation I/O processor isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 TWSIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Workstation adapter isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 WSAIP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Workstation adapter console isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Isolating problems on servers that run the AIX or Linux operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 MAP 0210: General problem resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Problems with loading and starting the operating system (AIX and Linux) . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Storage I/O card modes and jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 How to set or change the mode of an I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Mode jumper has been overridden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Mode jumper is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 SCSI service hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 General SCSI Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 High Availability or Multiple SCSI System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 SCSI-2 Single-Ended Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Determining Where to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 External SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 External SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus Probable Tripped PTC Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus Probable Tripped PTC Resistor Causes . . . . . . . . . . . .256 SCSI-2 Differential Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 External SCSI-2 Differential Adapter Bus PTC Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Contents vii SCSI-2 Differential Adapter Probable Tripped PTC Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Dual-Channel Ultra SCSI Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 64-bit PCI-X Dual Channel SCSI Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .259 MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 MAP 0030: Additional Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 MAP 0040: Intermittent Problem Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Purpose of this procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 MAP 0054: PCI-X SCSI Bus Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 MAP 0070: 888 sequence in operator panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 MAP 0220: Hot-Swap FRU problem resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 MAP 0230: Platform error problem resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 MAP 0260: System hangs during resource configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 MAP 0270: SCSI RAID problem resolution and verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 MAP 0280: Console and Keyboard Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 MAP 0285: Multipath I/O (MPIO) Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 MAP 0291: Missing Device or Bus Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 PFW1540: Problem isolation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 PFW1542: I/O problem isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure without an HMC attached . . .317 PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure when an HMC is attached . . .324 Collect serviceable events in Integrated Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Chapter 3. Locating FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Using location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Physical Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Chapter 4. Removing and replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 External cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Cache battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Replace the disk drive using AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Replace the disk drive using Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Prepare to remove the disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Remove the disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Replace the disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Replace the disk drive nonconcurrently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Rebuild data on a replacement disk drive using Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Disk unit backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Ethernet card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 GX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Media device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Memory DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 PCI adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Remove and replace a PCI adapter contained in a cassette in the system with the power on in AIX . . . .443 Remove and replace a PCI adapter contained in a cassette in the system with the power on in Linux . . . .457 Prerequisites for hot-plugging PCI adapters in Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Verify that the Linux, hot-plug PCI tools are installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 RAID enablement card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Auxiliary cache card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Slimline media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 viii Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) System backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Thermal power management device (TPMD) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Voltage regulator module pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Voltage regulator module - single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Vital product data (VPD) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Chapter 5. Verifying a repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Verifying the repair in AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Verifying the repair in Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Verifying a repair using an i5/OS system or logical partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Chapter 6. Closing a service call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Closing a service call using Integrated Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 Closing a service call using AIX or Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Activating and deactivating LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Deactivate a system attention LED or partition LED using the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Activate or deactivate identify LED using the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Deactivate a system attention LED or partition LED using the ASMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Activate or deactivate identify LED using the ASMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Chapter 7. Common Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Powering on and powering off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Determining a primary or alternative console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Determining if the system has logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Separating the 571F/575B card set and moving the cache directory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Determining which Processor is the Secondary Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 System Reference Code (SRC) Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 System reference code (SRC) address formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Hardware SRC formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Logical address format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 Using the Service Action Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Problems with noncritical resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 System Service Tools (SST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Work with communications trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Using the product activity log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Hexadecimal Product Activity Log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 More information from hexadecimal reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620 Reclaiming IOP cache storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Working with Storage Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636 Dedicated Service Tools (DST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Accessing Dedicated Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Selecting function 21 from the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Control panel function codes on the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Performing an IPL to DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Performing an alternate IPL to DST (type D IPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Start a service tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 IPL type, mode, and speed options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Printing the System Configuration List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Print the system configuration list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Details on the system bus, main storage, or processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Hardware Service Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Managing the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Accessing the ASMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Accessing the ASMI using a Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Accessing the ASMI using an ASCII terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Accessing the ASMI using the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Displaying error and event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Setting the system enclosure type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Setting the system identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Contents ix Viewing vital product data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Clearing all deconfiguration errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Managing dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 Performing dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 Performing a platform system or service processor dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653 Using the HMC to perform a system dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Using the control panel to perform a system dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654 Using the ASMI to perform a system dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Performing a service processor dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Using the HMC to perform a service processor dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Using the control panel to perform a service processor dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 Using the ASMI to perform a service processor dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 Copying a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656 Using an HMC to copy a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Using the AIX command line to copy a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Using the Linux command line to copy a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Using the IBM i5/OS service tools to copy a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Copying a platform system or SP dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Copying a main storage dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Reporting a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Using an HMC to report a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Using the AIX command line to report a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Using the Linux command line to report a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Using the i5/OS service tools to report a main storage or platform system or SP dump . . . . . . .660 Deleting a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Using an HMC to delete a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Using the AIX command line to delete a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Using the Linux command line to delete a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Using the i5/OS service tools to delete a dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Performing an IBM i5/OS main storage dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Using the HMC to perform an IBM i5/OS main storage dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Using the control panel to perform an IBM i5/OS main storage dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Performing a slow boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Using the HMC to perform a slow boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Using the control panel to perform a slow boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Using the ASMI menus to perform a slow boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666 Determining the primary or alternate console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Primary console workstation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 Find the primary console when the system is operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Find the primary console when the system power is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668 Resetting the service processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Resetting the managed system connection from the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Checking for a duplicate IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 Running the online diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672 Running the online diagnostics in service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673 Running the online diagnostics in service mode with an HMC attached . . . . . . . . . . . .673 Running the online diagnostics in service mode without an HMC attached . . . . . . . . . . .673 Running the online diagnostics in maintenance mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Running the online diagnostics in concurrent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674 Running the eServer stand-alone diagnostics from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 Running the eServer stand-alone diagnostics from CD on a server with an HMC attached . . . . . . .676 Selecting testing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Running the eServer stand-alone diagnostics from CD on a server without an HMC attached . . . . .677 Selecting testing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678 Running the eServer stand-alone diagnostics from a Network Installation Management server . . . . . .679 Concurrent PCI adapter removal and replacement using AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682 Concurrent PCI adapter removal and replacement using Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Prerequisites for hot-plugging PCI adapters in Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 Verify that the Linux, hot-plug PCI tools are installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689 x Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Chapter 8. Part Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Appendix. Accessibility features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Accessibility features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 IBM and accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Class A Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Terms and conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 Contents xi xii Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Safety and environmental notices Safety notices may be printed throughout this guide: v DANGER notices call attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. v CAUTION notices call attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition. v Attention notices call attention to the possibility of damage to a program, device, system, or data.World Trade safety information Several countries require the safety information contained in product publications to be presented in their national languages. If this requirement applies to your country, a safety information booklet is included in the publications package shipped with the product. The booklet contains the safety information in your national language with references to the U.S. English source. Before using a U.S. English publication to install, operate, or service this product, you must first become familiar with the related safety information in the booklet. You should also refer to the booklet any time you do not clearly understand any safety information in the U.S. English publications. German safety information Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet. Laser safety information IBM servers can use I/O cards or features that are fiber-optic based and that utilize lasers or LEDs. Laser compliance All lasers are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for class 1 laser products. Outside the U.S., they are certified to be in compliance with IEC 60825 as a class 1 laser product. Consult the label on each part for laser certification numbers and approval information. CAUTION: This product might contain one or more of the following devices: CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive, DVD-RAM drive, or laser module, which are Class 1 laser products. Note the following information: v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device. v Use of the controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.(C026) CAUTION: Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle. (C027) CAUTION: This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical instruments. (C028) © Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 xiii CAUTION: Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following information: laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. (C030) Power and cabling information for NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System) GR-1089-CORE The following comments apply to the IBM servers that have been designated as conforming to NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System) GR-1089-CORE: The equipment is suitable for installation in the following: v Network telecommunications facilities v Locations where the NEC (National Electrical Code) applies The intrabuilding ports of this equipment are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of this equipment must not be metallically connected to the interfaces that connect to the OSP (outside plant) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring. Note: All Ethernet cables must be shielded and grounded at both ends. The ac-powered system does not require the use of an external surge protection device (SPD). The dc-powered system employs an isolated DC return (DC-I) design. The DC battery return terminal shall not be connected to the chassis or frame ground. Product recycling and disposal This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml. Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y servicios de devolución de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de IBM http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml. Note: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and Norway. xiv Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local IBM representative. Battery return program This product may contain sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride, lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States, go to http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/batteryrecycle.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility. In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride, and other battery packs from IBM Equipment. For information on proper disposal of these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number listed on the battery available prior to your call. For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries. For the European Union: Safety and environmental notices xv Note: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local IBM representative. For California: Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials. This product, part, or both may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlorate substance. xvi Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) About this publication This publication provides service providers with maintenance information for IBM® System i™ (9407-M15 and 9408-M25) and System p™ 520 (8203-E4A). This publication includes start-of-call procedures, isolation procedures, and removal and replacement procedures. For information about the accessibility features of this product, for users who have a physical disability, see “Accessibility features,” on page 701. How to send your comments Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and highest quality information. If you have any comments about this publication, use the Feedback button at http://www.ibm.com/systems/infocenter. Alternatively, you can send your comments to pubsinfo@us.ibm.com. Be sure to include the name of the book, the form number of the book, and the specific location of the text you are commenting on (for example, a page number or table number). © Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 xvii xviii Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Chapter 1. Starting a Service Call A service call is a starting point for service actions. You should begin all service actions with this procedure. From this point, you will be guided to the appropriate information to help you perform the necessary steps to repair the server. Note: In this topic, control panel and operator panel are synonymous. Before beginning, record information to help you return the server to the same state that the customer typically uses, such as: v The IPL type that the customer typically uses for the server v The IPL mode that is used by the customer on this server v The way in which the server is configured or partitioned 1. Has problem analysis been performed using the procedures in Problem Analysis, SA76-0111? Yes No ? Perform problem analysis using the procedures in Problem Analysis, SA76-0111. 2. Is the failing server managed by a Hardware Management Console (HMC)? No Yes ? Continue with step 7 on page 2. 3. Is the failing server managed by Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM)? No Yes ? Go to “Collect serviceable events in Integrated Virtualization Manager” on page 333, and then return here and continue with next step. 4. Do you have a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU), location code, and an action plan to replace a failing FRU? © Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 1 No Yes ? Go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 5. Do you have an action plan to perform an isolation procedure? No Yes ? Go to Chapter 2, “Isolation Procedures,” on page 5. 6. Choose an action from the following symptom list: v You have a reference code but no action plan: go to Problem Analysis, SA76-0111. v There is a hardware problem that does not generate a reference code: use the Table of Contents to find an appropriate isolation procedure or contact your next level of support. v To check your server’s firmware level or to update it: see the system’s operation guide. v You have an Engineering Change (EC) or a hardware upgrade to apply: use the instructions provided with the change or upgrade. v You suspect a software problem: contact software support v To perform diagnostics or another service function: use the Table of Contents to locate the common service procedure.This ends the procedure. 7. Is the Hardware Management Console (HMC) connected and functional? Yes No ? Start the HMC and attach it to the server. If you experience a problem with the HMC, refer to the Service Guide for the Hardware Management Console Models 7042-CR4 and 7042-C06, SA76-0120. When the HMC is connected and functional, continue with the next step. 2 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 8. Perform the following steps from the HMC that is used to manage the server. During these steps, refer to the service data that was gathered earlier: 1. In the Navigation Area, open Service Management. 2. Select Manage Events. The Manage Serviceable Events - Select Serviceable Events panel will be displayed. 3. Select the status of Open. 4. Select all other selections to ALL and click OK. 5. Scroll through the list and verify that there is a problem with the status of Open to correspond with the customer’s reported problem.Do you find the reported problem, or an open problem near the time of the reported problem? Note: If you are unable to locate the reported problem, and there is more than one open problem near the time of the reported failure, use the earliest problem in the list. Yes No ? Go to step 4 on page 1. 9. Select the serviceable event you want to repair, and select Repair from the Selected menu. Follow the instructions displayed on the HMC. After you complete the repair procedure, the system automatically closes the serviceable event. This ends the procedure. Note: If the Repair procedures are not available, go to step 4 on page 1 Chapter 1. Starting a Service Call 3 4 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures Isolation procedures are used together with diagnostic programs that are part of server firmware. If a server is connected to an HMC, these procedures are available on the HMC. Use the HMC procedures to continue isolating the problem. If the server does not have an HMC and you are directed to perform an isolation procedure, the procedures documented here are needed to continue isolating a problem. “Bus, high-speed link (HSL/RIO/12X) isolation information” on page 7Symbolic FRUs, failing items, and bus isolation procedures use the terms “partition” and “logical partition” to indicate any single partition in a system that has multiple partitions. If the system you are working on does not have multiple partitions, then the terms refer to the primary partition. “HSL/RIO 12X Isolation Procedures” on page 27Use RIO/HSL/12X isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Multi-adapter bridge (MAB) isolation procedures” on page 41Use multi-adapter bridge (MAB) isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to the HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Communication isolation procedure” on page 47This topic contains the procedure necessary to isolate a communications failure. Please read and observe the following warnings when using this procedure. “Intermittent isolation procedures” on page 50These procedures help you to correct an intermittent problem. “I/O processor (IOP) isolation procedures” on page 60Use these procedures to isolate a failure in the multiple function I/O card. “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90Use this section to isolate licensed internal code (LIC) problems. “Logical partition (LPAR) isolation procedure” on page 120These procedures help you to identify logical partition (LPAR) configuration conditions and the associated corrective actions. “Operations Console isolation procedures” on page 124These procedures help you to isolate a failure with the Operations Console. “Power isolation procedures” on page 128Use power isolation procedures for isolating a problem in the power system. Use isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Router isolation procedures” on page 162These procedures serve as a guide to the correct isolation procedures from the reference code tables. “SAS isolation procedures” on page 166Use the following Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) isolation procedures if an HMC is not attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Service processor isolation procedures” on page 202Use service processor isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Tape unit isolation procedures” on page 219This topic contains the procedures necessary to isolate a failure in a tape device. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 5 “Isolating problems on servers that run the AIX or Linux operating systems” on page 245Use the procedures for AIX or Linux servers if there is not an HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “Collect serviceable events in Integrated Virtualization Manager” on page 333Use this procedure when using the Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM) to check for serviceable events on your system. 6 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Bus, high-speed link (HSL/RIO/12X) isolation information Symbolic FRUs, failing items, and bus isolation procedures use the terms “partition” and “logical partition” to indicate any single partition in a system that has multiple partitions. If the system you are working on does not have multiple partitions, then the terms refer to the primary partition. Read all safety notices below before servicing the system and while performing a procedure. Note: Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8Use this procedure if you are isolating a PCI bus problem from the HMC or while running AIX® or Linux®. “Verifying a high-speed link, system PCI bus, or a multi-adapter bridge repair” on page 9Use this procedure to verify a repair for the high-speed link, a system PCI bus, or for a multi-adapter bridge. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 7 “Analyzing a RIO/HSL/12X or PCI bus reference code” on page 11Use Word 7 of the reference code to determine the bus number, bus type, multi-adapter bridge number, multi-adapter bridge function number, and logical card number from the direct select address (DSA). “DSA translation” on page 12The Direct Select Address (DSA) may be coded in word 7 of the reference code. “Card positions” on page 12This information specifies card positions for the various server models. “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14Use this table to convert the RIO/HSL/12X loop number to port location labels. “Fiber optic cleaning procedures” on page 15Use the fiber optic cleaning kit and the fiber optic cleaning procedures in ?SY27-2604 Fiber Optic Cleaning Procedures? for all fiber channel connections such as those used in optical high speed link (HSL) connections or fibre channel attached devices. “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15A status indication for a RIO/HSL loop is identified in the reference code. “RIO/HSL/12X connection problems” on page 22The failing component is the RIO/HSL/12X connection “HSL loop configuration and status form” on page 25Use this HSL loop configuration and status form to record the status of the HSL ports in the loop. “Installed features in a PCI bridge set form” on page 25Use this form to record the PCI bridge set card positions, and multi-adapter bridge function numbers. “RIO/HSL/12X link status diagnosis form” on page 26Use this form to record the status of the RIO/HSL/12X links.PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC Use this procedure if you are isolating a PCI bus problem from the HMC or while running AIX or Linux. If you have an HMC, then this procedure should be performed from the HMC as part of the HMC directed service. If you do not have an HMC, then you should perform this procedure when directed by the maintenance package. Isolating a PCI bus problem while running AIX or Linux Can an IPL be run on the operating system? v No: Perform “MABIP52” on page 42. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Choose from the following: – If you are running AIX, go to “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672 to isolate the PCI bus failure with online diagnostics in concurrent mode. – If you are running Linux, go to “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672 to isolate the PCI bus failure with stand-alone diagnostics.This ends the procedure.Isolating a PCI bus problem from the HMC To isolate a PCI bus problem from the HMC, check the serviceable event view for the server for FRU part locations associated with the serviceable event, then continue with this procedure: 1. Did the serviceable event view provide the locations for the failing FRUs? Yes: Use those locations to exchange the given FRUs one at a time until the problem is resolved. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step. 8 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 2. Go to “DSA translation” on page 12 to determine the Direct Select Address (DSA). 3. Perform the following: a. Record the bus number value (BBBB) from the DSA and convert it to decimal format. b. Search for the decimal system bus number in the partition resources screens on the HMC. c. Record the frame or unit type and continue with the next step.4. Record the Cc value from the DSA. Is the Cc value greater than 00? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The multi-adapter bridge number and the multi-adapter function number have not been identified, and so the card slot cannot be identified using the DSA. Look in the HMC partition resources for non-reporting or non-operational hardware. That will indicate which cards in which positions need to be replaced. Refer to Finding part locations for the model you are working on for information about the multi-adapter bridge that controls those card slots. That multi-adapter bridge is also a FRU. This ends the procedure.5. Is the right-most character (c) F? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Only the multi-adapter bridge number has been identified. Record the multi-adapter bridge number (left-most character of Cc) for later use. Because the card slot cannot be identified with the DSA, refer to Finding part locations for the model you are working on for information about the multi-adapter bridge that controls the card slots. Consider all card slots controlled by the multi-adapter bridge to be FRUs. This ends the procedure.6. Refer to “Card positions” on page 12 and use the BBBB and Cc values that you recorded to identify the card position. Then return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure.Verifying a high-speed link, system PCI bus, or a multi-adapter bridge repair Use this procedure to verify a repair for the high-speed link, a system PCI bus, or for a multi-adapter bridge. Within this procedure, the terms ?system? and ?logical partition? are interchangeable when used individually. 1. Perform this procedure from the logical partition you were in when you were sent to this procedure, or from the HMC if this error was worked from the HMC. 2. If you previously powered off a system or logical partition, or an expansion unit during this service action, then you need to power it off again. 3. Install all cards, cables, and hardware, ensuring that all connections are tight. You can use the system configuration list to verify that the cards are installed correctly. 4. Power on any expansion unit, logical partition or system unit that was powered off during the service action. Is one of the following true? v If the system or a logical partition was powered off during the service action, does the IPL complete successfully to the IPL or does Install the System display? v If an expansion tower was powered off during the service action, does the expansion tower power on complete successfully? v If any IOP or IOA card locations were powered off using concurrent maintenance during the service action, do the slots power on successfully? v If you exchanged a FRU that should appear as a resource or resources to the system, such as an IOA, or I/O bridge, does the new FRU’s resource appear in HSM as operational? Yes: Continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 9 No: Verify that you have followed the power off, remove and replace, and power-on procedures correctly. When you are sure that you have followed the procedures correctly, then exchange the next FRU in the list. If there are no more FRUs to exchange, then contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 5. Does the system or logical partition have mirrored protection? Select Yes if you are not sure. No: Continue with the next step. Yes: From the Dedicated Service Tools (DST) display, select Work with disk units, and resume mirrored protection for all units that have a suspended status. 6. Choose from the following options: v If you are working from a partition, from the Start a Service Tool display, select Hardware service manager and look for the I/O processors that have a failed or missing status. v If you are working from a HMC, look at the CEC properties.a. Choose the I/O tab. b. Look for IOAs or IOPs that have a failed or missing status.Are all I/O processor cards operational?Note: Ignore any IOPs that are listed with a status of not connected. Yes: Go to step 10. No: Display the logical hardware resource information for the non-operational I/O processors. For all I/O processors and I/O adapters that are failing; record the bus number (BBBB), board (bb) and card information (Cc). Continue with the next step. 7. Perform the following: a. Return to the Dedicated Service Tools (DST) display. b. Display the Product Activity Log. c. Select All logs and search for an entry with the same bus, board, and card address information as the non-operational I/O processor. Do not include informational or statistical entries in your search. Use only entries that occurred during the last IPL. Did you find an entry for the SRC that sent you to this procedure? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 8. Did you find a B600 6944 SRC that occurred during the last IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: A different SRC is associated with the non-operational I/O processor. Go to the Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1 procedure and look up the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. 9. Is there a B600 xxxx SRC that occurred during the last IPL other than the B600 6944 and informational SRCs? Yes: Use the other B600 xxxx SRC to determine the problem. Go to the Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1 and look up the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. No: You connected an I/O processor in the wrong card position. Use the system configuration list to compare the cards. When you have corrected the configuration, go to the start of this procedure to verify the bus repair. This ends the procedure. 10. If in a partition, use the hardware service manager function to print the system configuration list. Are there any configuration mismatches? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.11. You have verified the repair of the system bus. 10 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. If for this service action only an expansion unit was powered off or only the concurrent maintenance function was used for an IOP or IOA, then continue with the next step. b. Otherwise, perform the following to return the system to the customer: 1) Power off the system or logical partition. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for details. 2) Select the operating mode with which the customer was originally running. 3) Power on the system or logical partition.12. If the system has logical partitions and the entry point SRC was B600 xxxx, then check for related problems in other logical partitions that could have been caused by the failing part. This ends the procedure. Analyzing a RIO/HSL/12X or PCI bus reference code Use Word 7 of the reference code to determine the bus number, bus type, multi-adapter bridge number, multi-adapter bridge function number, and logical card number from the direct select address (DSA). Physical card slot labels and card positions for PCI buses are determined by using the DSA and the appropriate system unit or I/O unit card positions. See “Card positions” on page 12 for details. Table 1. RIO/HSL/12X and PCI reference code analysis Word of the reference code Control panel function Panel function characters Format Description 1 11 1–8 B600 uuuu or B700 uuuu uuuu = unit reference code (69xx) 1 – extended reference code information 11 9–16 iiii Frame ID of the failing resource 1 – extended reference code information 11 17–24 ffff Frame location 1 – extended reference code information 11 25–32 bbbb Board position 2 12 1–8 MIGVEP62 or MIGVEP63 See Hardware SRC formats. 3 12 9–16 cccc cccc Component reference code 4 12 17–24 pppp pppp Programming reference code 5 12 25–32 qqqq qqqq Program reference code high order qualifier 6 13 1–8 qqqq qqqq Program reference code low order qualifier 7 13 9–16 BBBB Ccbb See “DSA translation” on page 12 8 13 17–24 TTTT MMMM Type (TTTT) and model (MMMM) of the failing item (if not zero) 9 13 25–32 uuuu uuuu Unit address (if not zero) Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 11 DSA translation The Direct Select Address (DSA) may be coded in word 7 of the reference code. This DSA is either a PCI system bus number or a RIO/HSL/12X loop number, depending on the type of error. With the following information, and the information in either the card position table (for PCI bus numbers) or the information in the loop-number-to-NIC-port table (for RIO/HSL/12X loop numbers), you can isolate a failing PCI bus or RIO/HSL/12X loop. Use the following instructions to translate the DSA: 1. Separate the DSA into the bus number, multi-adapter bridge number, and multi-adapter bridge function number. The DSA is of the form BBBB Ccxx, and separates into the following parts: v BBBB = bus number v C = multi-adapter bridge number v c = multi-adapter bridge function number v xx = not used2. Is the bus number less than 0684? Yes: The bus number is a PCI bus number in hexadecimal. Convert the number to decimal, and then continue with the next step. No: The bus number is a RIO/HSL/12X loop number in hexadecimal. Convert the number to decimal, and then go to step 4.3. Use one of the following guides to determine the type of system unit or expansion unit in which the bus is located: v If you are using a Hardware Management Console (HMC) interface, view the managed system’s properties on the HMC. v If you are using AIX or Linux, use the command line interface to determine the enclosure type. On the command line, type the following: lshwres -r io --rsubtype bus The result will be in the form: unit_phys_loc=Uxxxx.yyy.zzzzzzz,bus_id=a, ...... Find the bus ID ?a? entry that matches the decimal bus number you determined in step 2. Using the corresponding Uxxxx value, look up the unit model or enclosure type using the Unit Type and Locations table in Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335.4. Perform one of the following: v If you are working with a PCI bus number, refer to “Card positions” to search for the bus number, the multi-adapter bridge number, and the multi-adapter bridge function number that matches the system unit or I/O tower type where the bus is located. This ends the procedure. v If you are working with a RIO/HSL/12X loop number, refer to “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14 to determine the starting ports for the RIO/HSL/12X loop with the failed link. This ends the procedure. Card positions This information specifies card positions for the various server models. Use the table for the model you are working on: Table 2 on page 13: Card positions for models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 Table 3 on page 13: Card positions for 5095, 0595, and 7311-D20 expansion units Table 4 on page 13: Card positions for 7311-D11 and 5790 expansion units Table 5 on page 14: Card positions for 7314-G30 expansion unit 12 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 2. Card positions for models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 Bus number in DSA (hexadecimal/decimal) Item designated by the DSA Position label and PCI data width 200/512 Embedded SAS controller -P1 201/513 Embedded USB controller -P1 202/514 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C4 203/515 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C5 204/516 PCI-E IOA card -P1-C1 205/517 PCI-E IOA card -P1-C2 206/518 Auxiliary cache adapter -P1-C9 207/519 PCI-E IOA card -P1-C3 Table 3. Card positions for 5095, 0595, and 7311-D20 expansion units Bus number Multi-adapter bridge number in DSA Multi-adapter bridge function number in DSA Item designated by the DSA Position label and PCI data width xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 0 and 1 PCI IOP C01 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 2 and 3 PCI IOP or IOA card C02 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 4 and 5 PCI IOP or IOA card C03 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 6 and 7 IOA card C04 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 F Multi-adapter bridge CB1 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 Not used Not used C05 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 0 and 1 PCI IOP C06 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 2 and 3 PCI IOP or IOA card C07 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 6 and 7 IOA card C08 xxxx (assigned by LIC) 2 F Multi-adapter bridge CB1 Table 4. Card positions for 7311-D11 and 5790 expansion units Bus number in DSA (hexadecimal) Multi-adapter bridge number in DSA Multi-adapter bridge function number in DSA Item designated by the DSA Position label and PCI data width Lower PCI bus number 2 0 PCI IOA card -P1-C1 (64 bit) Lower PCI bus number 2 1 Lower PCI bus number 2 2 PCI IOA card -P1-C2 (64 bit) Lower PCI bus number 2 3 Lower PCI bus number 2 4 Unused Lower PCI bus number 2 5 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 13 Table 4. Card positions for 7311-D11 and 5790 expansion units (continued) Bus number in DSA (hexadecimal) Multi-adapter bridge number in DSA Multi-adapter bridge function number in DSA Item designated by the DSA Position label and PCI data width Lower PCI bus number 2 6 PCI IOA card -P1-C3 (64 bit) Lower PCI bus number 2 7 Lower PCI bus number 2 F Multi-adapter bridge -P1 Higher PCI bus number 2 0 PCI IOA card -P1-C4 (64 bit) Higher PCI bus number 2 1 Higher PCI bus number 2 2 PCI IOA card -P1-C5 (64 bit) Higher PCI bus number 2 3 Higher PCI bus number 2 4 Unused Higher PCI bus number 2 5 Higher PCI bus number 2 6 PCI IOA card -P1-C6 (64 bit) Higher PCI bus number 2 7 Higher PCI bus number 2 F Multi-adapter bridge -P1 Table 5. Card positions for 7314-G30 expansion unit Bus number Multi-adapter bridge number in DSA Multi-adapter bridge function number in DSA Item designated by the DSA Position label and PCI data width xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C1 (64 bit) xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C2(64 bit) xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C3(64 bit) xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C4(64 bit) xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C5(64 bit) xxxx (assigned by LIC) 0 0 PCI-X IOA card -P1-C6(64 bit) Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels Use this table to convert the RIO/HSL/12X loop number to port location labels. 14 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 6. Converting the loop number to port location labels for Model 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25. Loop number (hex / dec) Model FRU position RIO/HSL/12X port labels on system unit or processor tower 0686 / 1670 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 with RIO -P1-C8 -P1-C8-T1 -P1-C8-T2 0688 / 1672 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 with RIO -P1-C6 -P1-C6-T1 -P1-C6-T2 0781 / 1921 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 with 12X -P1-C8 -P1-C8-T1 -P1-C8-T2 0782 / 1922 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 with 12X -P1-C6 -P1-C6-T1 -P1-C6-T2 Fiber optic cleaning procedures Use the fiber optic cleaning kit and the fiber optic cleaning procedures in ?SY27-2604 Fiber Optic Cleaning Procedures? for all fiber channel connections such as those used in optical high speed link (HSL) connections or fibre channel attached devices. See Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. This ends the procedure. Status indications for RIO/HSL A status indication for a RIO/HSL loop is identified in the reference code. Use the table below to determine if the status indication requires a service action. Record the rightmost four characters of word 4 of the reference code. These characters are the program return code (PRC), which indicates the RIO/HSL status. The leftmost four characters of word 7 indicate the RIO/HSL loop number (in hexadecimal format). Table 7. Status indicated by the PRC PRC Indicated status 3204 A RIO error was detected, indicating that a RIO link failed. 1. To diagnose the error read through the transport manager flight recorder. 2. Check the failing link. If the link shows not to have failed, check the devices connected to either end of the link. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 15 Table 7. Status indicated by the PRC (continued) PRC Indicated status 3205 During IPL, LIC determined that the loop was not complete. v This is expected if there are no I/O units on the loop. v This error can also occur when an I/O unit, shared I/O unit, or another system on the loop did not complete powering on by the time this system’s LIC checked the loop for completeness. As a result, you may see this error in the serviceable event view you are working with. v When you find the same reference code logged from the same IPL against the same resource with a PRC of 3206 or 3208, the problem no longer exists. This can happen because the error was recovered when RIO/HSL hardware came on line, was properly configured, or the diagnostic code determined that there was not a problem based on the combination of machine types, features, configuration, and topology. In this case, you may close the problem entry. v In i5/OS®, this error may also appear in the serviceable event view if any I/O units were removed from the loop without deleting the RIO/HSL I/O bridge resources of those units from Hardware Service Manager (HSM). The service procedure identified with the reference code that sent you here will help you determine if the loop is functioning correctly or if service is required. v This error may also be caused by a problem in a rack, frame, or unit connected to the RIO/HSL loop if the problem prevents the unit from powering on or being detected by LIC. Follow the service procedures for this reference code. When necessary, you may be directed to work on other reference codes before returning to this procedure. 3206 During normal operation an RIO/HSL loop recovered its redundant path. The loop is now complete. 3208 During normal operation an RIO/HSL I/O bridge recovered a failed link on the loop. 3209 See “Indicated status for PRC 3209” below. 3210 An RIO/HSL link switched to a slower speed. The link is designed to run at a faster speed based on the link’s hardware and LIC levels at both ends. If there is a FRU list in the serviceable event view, use it to complete the repair action. If not, perform the following sections of this procedure below: 1. “Determining the RIO/HSL port label” on page 17 2. “Replacing the link’s failing end point FRUs” on page 21 (replace only the ?From Frame ID? end point FRU) Indicated status for PRC 3209 Recoverable CRC (cyclical redundancy check) errors have occurred on the loop. This error requires service action. An RIO/HSL cable or connection must be exchanged. Exchange only the cable that appears in the FRU list of this reference code in this document. If you are working from the serviceable event view, then only the FRU(s) required for this error will be displayed. Choose from the following scenarios: v If there is a serviceable event view entry with a cable FRU listed with a loop number, enclosure/unit ID, and port label identified with the cable FRU, then perform one of the following: – If the cable is optical, it is possible the optical connections need cleaning. You can choose either to clean the cable connections at each end without exchanging the cable, or to exchange the cable. – If the cable is copper, examine the screws that hold the connector at the end of the cable identified in the reference code or the first cable location listed in the serviceable event view entry. It is possible to get CRC errors when the connector screws are not tight. You can choose to tighten the cable connector screws without exchanging the cable only if they are loose. Otherwise, you must exchange the cable. – If neither of these actions resolves the problem, replace the FRUs in the serviceable event view one at a time. This ends the procedure. 16 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v If the serviceable event view entry does not list any cable FRUs, then exchange the failing items listed in the serviceable event view entry by following the normal service procedures for those FRUs. This will be the case when the RIO/HSL connection is embedded. This ends the procedure. v If the serviceable event view entry has cable FRU(s) listed, but the loop number, enclosure/unit ID, and port label are not all listed with the cable FRU, go to “Determining the RIO/HSL port label” below.Determining the RIO/HSL port label Retrieve and record the following information: v Loop number. The loop number is displayed in hexadecimal format as the four leftmost digits of word 7 in the reference code. Convert the loop number to decimal format using “DSA translation” on page 12. Record both the hexadecimal and decimal formats of the loop number. If the loop is an internal loop on a 515, 520, 525, or 570 (loops 0680, 0683, 0686, 0689 hexadecimal or 1664, 1667, 1670, 1673 decimal), then record ?Internal?. v Frame ID. The frame ID is displayed in hexadecimal format as the four leftmost digits of word 5 of the reference code. You must convert the frame ID to decimal format to match what is displayed in user interfaces and problem views. Record both the hexadecimal and decimal formats of the frame ID. If the frame ID is not zero, then translate the frame ID into the correct machine type, model, and serial number by performing the following: 1. Log on to SST/DST. Attention: Do not IPL to DST. 2. Select Hardware Service Manager. 3. Select Packaging resources. 4. Selecting Display details for each unit listed until the frame ID matches the ID you are working with. Once you find the matching frame ID, record the unit’s machine type, model, and serial number.Note: The frame has an ID of 0000 at this point in the procedure. A frame ID of zero is indicating the NIC/RIO controller in a system unit. v Port number indicator. The port number indicator is the four rightmost digits of word 5 of the reference code.Use the frame ID and port number indicator in the following table to determine the RIO/HSL port label. If you are referred to “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14, the failing item is in a system unit. You will need the RIO/HSL loop number to determine the FRU. The following tables provide hub, port, and location code information for each of the currently supported models. This data is used to determine which RIO loop to use for the B7006981. The asterisk in the ?Port indicator number? column indicates the leading port of the port pair. Table 8. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 515, 520, 525, and 550 Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 515, 520, and 525 1668 0 0* ?Internal? 1 ?Internal? 1669 2* P1-T4 3 P1-T3 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 17 Table 8. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 515, 520, 525, and 550 (continued) Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 550 1668 0 0* ?Internal? 1 ?Internal? 1669 2* P1-T12 3 P1-T11 1676 4 0 P1-C6-T2 (In an expansion card not-onboard) 1 P1-C6-T1 (In an expansion card not-onboard) Table 9. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 570 Model number Loop number CEC Hub Port indicator number Location code 570 1668 0 0 0* ?Internal? (Top CEC) 1 ?Internal? 1669 0 0 2* P1-T8 3 P1-T9 1676 0 4 0* P1-C7-T2 1 P1-C7-T1 570 1684 1 8 0* ?Internal? (Second down) 1 ?Internal? 1685 1 8 2* P1-T8 3 P1-T9 1692 1 12 0 P1-C7-T2 1 P1-C7-T1 570 1700 2 16 0* ?Internal? (Third down) 1 ?Internal? 1701 2 16 2* P1-T8 3 P1-T9 1708 2 20 0 P1-C7-T2 1 P1-C7-T1 570 1716 3 24 0* ?Internal? (Fourth down) 1 ?Internal? 1717 3 24 2* P1-T8 3 P1-T9 1724 3 28 0 P1-C7-T2 1 P1-C7-T1 18 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 10. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 575 Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 575 1668 0 0* ?Internal? 1 ?Internal? 1669 2* P1-T7 3 P1-T8 Table 11. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 590 and 595 Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 590 / 0595 1668 0 0* ?Internal? FSPA 1 ?Internal? 1669 0 2* P1-C1-T1 3 P1-C1-T2 1670 1 0* ?Internal? FSPB 1 ?Internal? 1671 1 2* P1-C3-T1 3 P1-C3-T2 1672 2 2* P1-C5-T1 3 P1-C5-T2 1674 3 2* P1-C6-T1 3 P1-C6-T2 1676 4 2* P1-C8-T1 3 P1-C8-T2 1678 5 2* P1-C9-T1 3 P1-C9-T2 1680 6 2* P1-C11-T1 3 P1-C11-T2 1682 7 2* P1-C13-T1 3 P1-C13-T2 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 19 Table 11. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 590 and 595 (continued) Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 590 / 0595 1684 8 0* ?Internal? FSB (Second node position) 1 ?Internal? 1685 8 2* P1-C1-T1 3 P1-C1-T2 1686 9 0* ?Internal? FSPA 1 ?Internal? 1687 9 2* P2-C3-T1 3 P2-C3-T1 1688 10 2* P2-C5-T1 (Optional card, no HSL) 3 P2-C5-T2 1690 11 2* P2-C6-T1 (Required empty airflow) 3 P2-C6-T2 1692 12 2* P2-C8-T1 3 P2-C8-T2 1694 13 2* P2-C9-T1 3 P2-C9-T2 1696 14 2* P2-C11-T1 3 P2-C11-T2 1698 15 2* P2-C13-T1 3 P2-C13-T2 590 / 0595 1700 16 2* P3-C1-T1 (Third position) 3 P3-C1-T2 1702 17 2* P3-C3-T1 3 P3-C3-T2 1704 18 2* P3-C5-T1 3 P3-C5-T2 1706 19 2* P3-C6-T1 3 P3-C6-T2 1708 20 2* P3-C8-T1 3 P3-C8-T2 1710 21 2* P3-C9-T1 3 P3-C9-T2 1712 22 2* P3-C11-T1 3 P3-C11-T2 1714 23 2* P3-C13-T2 3 P3-C13-T2 20 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 11. Determining which RIO/HSL port label to use on a 590 and 595 (continued) Model number Loop number Hub Port indicator number Location code 590 / 0595 1716 24 2* P4-C1-T1 3 P4-C1-T2 1718 25 2* P4-C3-T1 3 P4-C3-T2 1720 26 2* P4-C5-T1 3 P4-C5-T2 1722 27 2* P4-C6-T1 3 P4-C6-T2 1724 28 2* P4-C8-T1 3 P4-C8-T2 1726 29 2* P4-C9-T1 3 P4-C9-T2 1728 30 2* P4-C131-T1 3 P4-C11-T2 1730 31 2* P4-C13-T1 3 P4-C13-T2 Note: For 570, exchange the FRU on the correct unit (primary or secondary) by matching the serial number (if available in the FRU list on the serviceable event view) or by matching the loop number to the correct unit using “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14. Determining if the cable is the cause of the problem If there is a cable attached to the failing port: v If the cable is optical, it is possible the optical connections need cleaning. You can choose either to clean the cable connections at each end without exchanging the cable, or to exchange the cable. v If the cable is copper, examine the screws that hold the connector at the end of the cable identified in the reference code or the first cable location listed in the serviceable event view entry. It is possible to get CRC errors when the connector screws are not tight. You can choose to tighten the cable connector screws without exchanging the cable only if they are loose. Otherwise, you must exchange the cable. v If neither of these actions resolves the problem, replace the cable. Perform “RIOIP08” on page 34 to determine the frame ID and RIO/HSL port label of the other end of the cable you will be exchanging (if you do not already know). Does this correct the problem? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Continue with replacing the FRUs that the cable is connected to, starting with the FRU listed first.Replacing the link’s failing end point FRUs Use the following table to determine the end point FRUs on the ?From Frame ID? port. Replace the FRUs one at a time. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 21 If replacing the end point FRUs for the ?From Frame ID? port does not resolve the error, use the table below to replace the end point FRUs at the other end of the cable. Perform “RIOIP08” on page 34 to determine the system or I/O unit frame ID and RIO/HSL port label of the other end of the cable (if you do not already know). Table 12. End point FRUs Model Loop number (hexadecimal / decimal) End point FRUs 515, 520, 525, 570 0680 / 1664 The loop is embedded in the system unit planar. Exchange the system unit planar. 515, 520, 525, 570 0681 / 1665 For all port number values, the loop’s NIC/RIO controller is embedded in the system unit planar. Exchange the system unit planar. 570 0682 / 1666 For all port number values, the loop’s NIC/RIO controller is in the NIC/RIO controller card. Exchange the NIC/RIO controller. 570 0683 / 16670686 / 16700689 / 1673 The loop is embedded in the system unit planar. Exchange the system unit planar. Note: Exchange the FRU on the correct unit (primary or secondary) by matching the serial number (if available in the FRU list on the serviceable event view) or by matching the loop number to the correct unit using “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14. This ends the procedure. RIO/HSL/12X connection problems The failing component is the RIO/HSL/12X connection When a RIO/HSL cable is disconnected, it may result in a lost connection between the units even after the cable is reconnected. Attention: To fix this problem, you need to cycle power on the unit with the locked RIO/HSL connection (see “Powering on and powering off an I/O expansion unit” on page 24 below). This problem does not occur with 12X cables.Note: If question marks (???) appear at the end of the location code, then the port could not be determined. Use the location code associated with the other end of the cable. If question marks appear for both port locations, use the isolation procedures suggested in the reference code table for this SRC. 1. Choose from the following: v If you were sent to this procedure from another symbolic FRU, locate that FRU in Table 13 on page 23 to see the description of the RIO/HSL/12X FRU. Then continue with the next step for more information about the FRU. v If you are working with this symbolic FRU in the FRU list, the failing component is an RIO/HSL/12X connection. Diagnostic code could not determine what kind of hardware was involved. The RIO/HSL/12X hardware can be any of the following: – Cable – Embedded RIO/HSL/12X link in a FRU (a planar, for example) – RIO/HSL/12X interposer cardThe RIO/HSL/12X link is on or between the other FRU or FRUs listed for the reference code. Continue with the next step. 22 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 13. RIO/HSL symbolic FRUs RIO/HSL FRU Description HSL_OPT This is an optical RIO/HSL cable. When exchanging optical RIO/HSL cables, use the optical cleaning kit and procedures. See “Fiber optic cleaning procedures” on page 15 for details. If an interposer card is called for, be sure the interposer type matches the cable type (optical or copper). HSL1 There is a standard copper RIO/HSL cable at both ends (yellow connectors). HSL1_UN There is a standard copper RIO/HSL cable (yellow connector) at the detecting end, and an unknown connector type at the other end. HSL2 There is a copper HSL2/RIO-G cable at both ends (black connectors), but the length of the cable could not be sensed. HSL2_xx There is a copper HSL2/RIO-G cable at both ends (black connectors). Use the xx value to determine the cable length from this list: v HSL2_01 = 1 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_03 = 3 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_08 = 8 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_10 = 10 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_15 = 15 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_17 = 1.75 meter HSL2 cable v HSL2_25 = 2.5 meter HSL2 cable HSLH There is a hybrid RIO/HSL to HSL2/RIO-G cable (yellow connector at one end and black connector at the other end), but the length of the cable could not be sensed. HSL_IB This is an 12X cable (green connectors). HSLH_xx There is a hybrid RIO/HSL to HSL2/RIO-G cable (yellow connector at one end and black connector at the other end). Use the xx value to determine the cable length from this list: v HSLH_06 = 6 meter HSL/RIO to HSL2/RIO-G cable v HSLH_15 = 15 meter HSL/RIO to HSL2/RIO-G cable HSL_I There is a RIO/HSL interposer card for HSL/RIO cables (yellow connectors), HSL2/RIO-G cables (black connectors), or optical cables. The interposer card type could not be sensed. HSL_I2 HSL_I3 HSL_I4 There is a RIO/HSL interposer card for HSL/RIO cables (yellow connectors), HSL2/RIO-G cables (black connectors), or optical cables. Use the x value to determine the interposer card type from this list: v HSL_I2 = Copper HSL2/RIO-G interposer card for HSL2/RIO-G cable connectors (black) in the system unit backplane position C08 or C09 of machine type 9406 model 825. v HSL_I3 = Optical HSL/RIO interposer card for optical RIO/HSL cables in system unit backplane position C08 or C09 of machine type 9406 model 825. v HSL_I4 = HSL2/RIO-G interposer/riser card on a 7040-61D I/O unit in location -P1-Riser or -P2-(Riser). 2. Choose from the following options: v If you are working from the serviceable event view, the location code or FRU description in the view will help determine the actual RIO/HSL/12X hardware to exchange. Continue with the next step. v If you are not working from the serviceable event view, or the view does not have a location code or better FRU description, then determine the location code of other FRUs in the FRU list for the error. Then continue with the next step.3. Use the location code and the information from the preceding table to determine the machine type, model, or unit feature involved in the error. If necessary, use the location code for other FRUs listed in Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 23 the FRU list for this error to determine the failing RIO/HSL/12X connection and any related FRUs that are part of that connection. Use Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to find links to the locations information. Refer to the Parts Information chapter of the Service Guide for the failing machine type/model for part number information. Note: If you exchange all of the FRUs in the FRU list, but the problem still exists, contact your next level of support. You may be directed to exchange additional RIO/HSL/12X FRUs. “Additional RIO/HSL FRUs” has more information about RIO/HSL/12X FRUs on specific models and I/O units.Additional RIO/HSL FRUs The following are RIO/HSL/12X FRUs by model and/or unit type. For the model or unit type you are working on, there may be additional RIO/HSL/12X FRUs which were not listed in the FRU list of the error. Under the direction of your next level of support, you can try exchanging the additional FRUs. 1. In the following table, locate the unit type(s) on which you are working. Exchange the indicated RIO/HSL/12X loop connections (external or embedded) or RIO/HSL/12X interposer card. 2. Did the exchange correct the error? v Yes: The FRU you just replaced was the failing item. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. v No: Call your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Table 14. RIO/HSL/12X cable or connections. To find locations information, refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 or the service guide for the I/O enclosure. System model or unit type Description Location code 5094, 5096, 5294, 5296 HSL (optical) I/O bridge adapter Un-CB1-C10 5094, 5096, 5294, 5296 HSL I/O bridge card Un-CB1-C10 5094, 5096, 5294, 5296 HSL-2 I/O bridge adapter Un-CB1-C10 7311-D11, 5790 RIO/HSL adapter Un-P1-C7 0595, 5095 HSL (optical) I/O bridge adapter Un-P1-C5 7311-D20, 0595, 5095 RIO/HSL I/O bridge adapter Un-P1-C5 7311-D20, 0595, 5095 RIO/HSL-2 I/O bridge adapter Un-P1-C5 7314-G30, 5796 Dual-port 12X adapter Un-P1-C7 1519 Integrated xSeries Adapter Powering on and powering off an I/O expansion unit Follow these steps if you disconnected an RIO/HSL cable from an I/O expansion unit, and the RIO/HSL link on the unit did not recover when you reconnected the cable: 1. From the Hardware Service Manager screen, select Packaging hardware resources. 2. Select the frame that has just accidentally lost its RIO/HSL connection and select Concurrent maintenance. Then press Enter. 3. Select Power off domain. 4. After reconnecting the unit into the RIO/HSL loop, select Power on domain. 24 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) HSL loop configuration and status form Use this HSL loop configuration and status form to record the status of the HSL ports in the loop. Note: You may copy this form as necessary. HSL loop configuration and status worksheet for system _______________, Loop number ___________ Table 15. HSL loop configuration and status form HSL resource information Leading port information Trailing port information Resource type Resource name Frame ID Port number (or internal) Link status (operational or failed) Port number (or internal) Link status (operational or failed) Installed features in a PCI bridge set form Use this form to record the PCI bridge set card positions, and multi-adapter bridge function numbers. Note: You might find it helpful to copy this form as necessary. Table 16. Installed features in a PCI bridge set PCI bridge set card positions Multi-adapter bridge function number Record if IOP or IOA is installed. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 25 RIO/HSL/12X link status diagnosis form Use this form to record the status of the RIO/HSL/12X links. Column A (starting status) Column B Column C (column A is failed and column B is failed) Column D Column E (column B is failed and column D is failed) Resource with failing link Port info Port status Port status Port status First Frame ID ____ Card Position ____ Port # ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ Second Frame ID ____ Card Position ____ Port # ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _0 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ Port _1 (or internal) ____ 26 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) HSL/RIO 12X Isolation Procedures Use RIO/HSL/12X isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “CONSL01”Use this procedure to exchange the I/O processor (IOP) for the system or partition console of i5/OS. “RIOIP01” on page 28Use this procedure to isolate a failure in a RIO/HSL/12X loop using i5/OS service tools. “RIOIP06” on page 34Use HSM to examine the RIO/HSL/12X Loop to determine if other systems are connected to the loop. “RIOIP08” on page 34Starting with the unit ID and RIO/HSL/12X port for one end of an RIO/HSL/12X cable, determine the unit ID and port location for the other end. “RIOIP09” on page 35This procedure offers a description and service action for RIO/HSL/12X reference code B600 6982. “RIOIP10” on page 36Use this procedure to determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop is complete (with both primary and redundant paths functioning for each unit on the loop). “RIOIP11” on page 36Use this procedure to recover from a B7xx 6982 RIO/HSL/12X failure. “RIOIP12” on page 38Use this procedure to recover from a B7xx 6985 RIO/HSL/12X failure. “RIOIP56” on page 39Use this procedure to restore the RIO 12X link to optimal bandwidth.CONSL01 Use this procedure to exchange the I/O processor (IOP) for the system or partition console of i5/OS. 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? No: Go to step 6 on page 28. Yes: The HMC will be required for this procedure. Move to the HMC and continue with the next step only if the HMC is functional.2. Can the customer power off the partition at this time? Yes: Power off the partition from the operating system console or the HMC. Then, continue with the next step. No: The IOP controlling the partition’s console may be controlling other critical resources. The partition must be powered off to exchange this IOP. Perform this procedure when the customer is able to power off the partition. Then, continue with the next step.3. Perform the following to determine the unit machine type, model, and serial number where the console IOP is located and the location of the console IOP: a. From the Navigation Area of the HMC, select the Management Environment. b. Select and expand the HMC environment for this HMC. c. Select and expand Server and Partition. d. Select Server Management. e. Double-click the i5/OS partition you are working on. f. Select the Settings tab. g. Record the location of the load source IOP. The unit type, model, and serial number are the first three parts of the location code and are separated by periods. h. Continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 27 4. Record the frame type or feature by using the frame ID and system configuration listing or by locating the frame with that ID and recording the frame type or feature. 5. Perform the following to exchange the IOP in that card position: a. Go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and select the unit type and model that you recorded. b. Locate the card position in the FRU locations table and use the exchange procedure that is identified. c. Power on the partition. This ends the procedure.6. The problem is in the i5/OS partition of a system with one or more partitions that is not managed by an HMC. Use the table below to determine the location of the load source IOP and the appropriate exchange procedure. Model Load source IOP location Load source IOA location Link to locations information MMA -P1-C1 embedded SCSI in -P1 Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 This ends the procedure.RIOIP01 Use this procedure to isolate a failure in a RIO/HSL/12X loop using i5/OS service tools. Follow the steps in the “Main task” and you will be directed to the proper subtasks. Note: During this procedure, you will be disconnecting and reconnecting cables. If errors concerning missing resources (such as disk units and RIO/HSL/12X failures) occur, ignore them. Missing resources will report in again when the loop reinitializes. Main task 1. Were you sent here from a B600 xxxx reference code? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the serviceable event view and the system service documentation to search for a B700 xxxx reference code with the same last four characters reported at approximately the same time. If you find one, perform service on that reference code first, and when you close that problem, close this one as well. If you do not find one, continue with the next step.2. Before powering down any system unit or expansion unit, work with the customer to end all subsystems in all of the partitions using each partition’s console. 3. From the partition control panel, IPL the system or partition to Dedicated Service Tools (DST). Attention: Do not use function 21! 4. Are all system and expansion units on the loop powered on? Yes: Go to step 6. No: Continue with the next step.5. Perform the following: a. Power on all system and expansion units on the loop. If a frame cannot be powered on, perform the “Cannot power on unit” on page 33 subtask below, and then continue with step 6. b. Was the RIO/HSL/12X link error cleared up when the frames were powered back on? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.6. Perform the following: 28 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Access the Service Action Log (SAL) entry for this error; the field replaceable units (FRUs) should be listed there. Look for part numbers and descriptions for the FRUs containing the RIO/HSL/12X port for two frames. There should also be a FRU for the cable between them. The locations information for the FRUs is the location of the failed ports on the failed link. b. Record the loop number from the SAL (if it is displayed there in one of the FRU descriptions) or from the first four characters of word 7 of the reference code. Go to “Converting the loop number to RIO/HSL/12X port location labels” on page 14 to determine which RIO/HSL/12X cables on the system you are working with. Is this information in the SAL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below, and then continue with the next step of the main task.7. Is the cable connecting the failed ports an optical cable? No: Go to step 9. Yes: Continue with the next step.8. Perform the following: a. Clean the RIO/HSL/12X cable connectors and ports using the fiber optic cleaning kit and the fiber optic cleaning procedures in ?SY27-2604 Fiber Optic Cleaning Procedures?. b. To determine if cleaning the connectors and ports solved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.9. There are now three cases to consider. Continue with the appropriate subtask of this procedure: v “The ports on both ends of the failed link are in different system units on the loop.” v “The port on one end of the failed link is in a system unit and the port on the other end is in an I/O unit” on page 30. v “The ports on both ends of the failed link are in an I/O unit” on page 31.The ports on both ends of the failed link are in different system units on the loop 1. There may be failed hardware that will report a different error on the other system units. Perform the following: a. Resolve any other RIO/HSL/12X problems in the serviceable event view on the other system units. b. Perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Is the cable an optical RIO/HSL/12X cable? Yes: Go to step 4 on page 30. No: Continue with the next step.3. Perform the following: a. Verify that the cables are connected securely. For any cable that was loose, disconnect the cable at that end, wait 30 seconds, and reconnect the cable securely. If there are thumbscrews, you must tighten both thumb screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 29 b. If you disconnected and reconnected the cable at either end, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.4. Replace the cable between the two system unit ports on the failed link. To determine if replacing the cable resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.5. Exchange the FRU with the RIO/HSL/12X port in one of the system units. If you are working with a serviceable event view and the RIO/HSL/12X FRUs are listed, exchange the FRU corresponding to the first RIO/HSL/12X cable port listed. Otherwise, exchange the FRU that is quickest and easiest to replace). To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.6. Exchange the remaining FRU with the RIO/HSL/12X port on the other system unit. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.7. Use the procedure “RIO/HSL/12X connection problems” on page 22 to determine if there are any additional RIO/HSL/12X cable-related FRUs, such as interposer cards and internal ribbon cables, that may be on either unit. Did you exchange any additional RIO/HSL/12X FRUs? No: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.8. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure.The port on one end of the failed link is in a system unit and the port on the other end is in an I/O unit 1. Switch the two RIO/HSL/12X cables on the I/O unit with the failed port, so that each cable is connected to the port where the other cable was previously connected. Disconnect both cables at the same time, wait 30 seconds, and then reconnect the cables one at a time. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 2. Refresh the port status for the first failing resource by performing “Refresh the port status” on page 33 below. Then continue with the next step. 3. Is the port on the system unit that was failed now working? 30 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Exchange the RIO/HSL/12X bridge FRU in the I/O unit. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.4. Switch the cables back to their original positions by disconnecting both cables at the same time, waiting 30 seconds, and then reconnecting the cables one at a time. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 5. Exchange the cable between the two ports on the failed link. To determine if replacing the cable resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.6. Use the procedure “RIO/HSL/12X connection problems” on page 22 to determine if there are any additional RIO/HSL/12X cable-related FRUs, such as interposer cards and internal ribbon cables, that may be on either unit. Did you exchange any additional RIO/HSL/12X FRUs? No: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.7. Exchange the RIO/HSL/12X FRU that contains the failing port in the system unit. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.8. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure.The ports on both ends of the failed link are in an I/O unit 1. Switch the two RIO/HSL/12X cables on the first (or ?From?) cable’s I/O unit with the failed port so that each cable is connected to the port where the other cable was previously connected. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 2. Refresh the port status for the first failing resource by performing “Refresh the port status” on page 33 below. Then continue with the next step. 3. Is the port on the I/O unit on which you did not switch the cables now working? No: Go to step 5 on page 32 Yes: Exchange the RIO/HSL/12X I/O bridge card in the I/O unit where you just switched the cables. The continue with the next step. 4. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 31 No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step. 5. Switch the cables back to their original positions. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 6. Switch the two RIO/HSL/12X cables on the second (or ?To?) I/O unit with the failed port so that each cable is connected to the port where the other cable was previously connected. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 7. Refresh the port status for the first failing resource by performing “Refresh the port status” on page 33. Then continue with the next step. 8. Is the port on the I/O unit on which you did not switch cables now working? No: Go to step 10. Yes: Exchange the RIO/HSL/12X I/O bridge card in the I/O unit where you just switched the cables. Then continue with the next step. 9. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.10. Switch the cables back to their original positions. Attention: For copper cables with thumbscrews, you must fully connect the cable and tighten the connector’s screws within 30 seconds of when the cable makes contact with the port. Otherwise, the link will fail and you must disconnect and reconnect again. Also, if the connector screws are not tightened, errors will occur on the link and it will fail. 11. Exchange the RIO/HSL/12X cable between the two ports on the failed link. To determine if replacing the cable resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33, then return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.12. Use the procedure “RIO/HSL/12X connection problems” on page 22 to determine if there are any additional RIO/HSL/12X cable-related FRUs, such as interposer cards and internal ribbon cables, that may be on either unit. Did you exchange any additional RIO/HSL/12X FRUs? No: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.13. To determine if replacing the FRU resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” on page 33 below and return to this point. Did the ports you were working on have a status of ?failed?? No: Then the problem is fixed, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Call your next level of support for further instruction. This ends the procedure. 32 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Cannot power on unit 1. Work the errors related to powering on the unit(s), and then continue with the next step. If a unit still cannot be powered on, re-cable the RIO/HSL/12X loop without the I/O units and system units that cannot be powered on, allowing the loop to be complete (no disconnected cables). 2. To determine if re-cabling the loop resolved the problem, perform “Manually detecting the failed link” below and return to this point.Manually detecting the failed link 1. Get the loop number from the reference code if you do not already have it. The loop number is a hexadecimal number in word 7 of the reference code. v If you are working from the Product Activity Log (PAL®), then the loop number is the 4 leftmost characters of the DSA in word 7 (BBBB). The loop number is in hexadecimal. Convert the hexadecimal loop number to decimal format before continuing with this procedure. v If you are working from the Service Action Log (SAL), the loop number should be displayed in the FRU description area in decimal format. 2. Sign on to SST or DST (if you have not already done so). Select Start a service tool ? Hardware service manager ? Logical hardware resources ? High-speed link (HSL) resources. 3. Select Resources associated with loop for the RIO/HSL/12X loop with the failed link. The RIO/HSL/12X bridges will be displayed under the loop. 4. Select Display detail for the loop with the failed link. 5. Record the name of the NIC/RIO controller resource you are starting from on the display. You will need to know this name to determine if you have followed the loop around and back to this resource. 6. If the leading port does not have a status of ?failed?, select Follow leading port until a leading port with a ?failed? status is found, or the display is showing information for the starting NIC/RIO resource you recorded. Did you find a leading port with a status of ?failed?? No: The loop is functioning properly. Return to the subtask that sent you here. Yes: Record the resource name at the leading port with a ?failed? status, and the type, model, and serial number for the resource with the failed status. Continue with the next step. 7. Select Follow leading port one more time and note all the information for the resource name with a failed trailing port. 8. Select Display system information and note the power controlling system’s type, model, and serial number (and name, if available). This info may be needed for FRU replacement at a later time. 9. Select Cancel twice to return to the previous screen. 10. Go to each resource name (found above) and select Associated packaging resource(s). This gives the description of the failing item and the unit ID. 11. Select Display detail to find the part number and location associated with the possible failing item. Then return to the step that sent you here.Refresh the port status 1. Wait one minute, and then sign on to SST or DST (if you have not already done so). 2. Select Start a service tool ? Hardware service manager ? Logical hardware resources ? High-speed link (HSL) resources. 3. Move the cursor to the RIO/HSL/12X loop that you want to examine and select Display detail ? Include non-reporting resources. 4. If the display is not already showing the ports for one of the units you are working on, then select Follow leading port. Continue to select Follow leading port until the display is showing the ports for one of the units you are working on. Note the status of the port you were working on. Select Follow leading port until the display is showing the ports for the other unit you are working on, and note the status of the port you were working on. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 33 5. Select Cancel ? Refresh ? Display detail for the failing resource you are checking. Note any change in the status for the resource. Then return to the step that sent you here.RIOIP06 Use HSM to examine the RIO/HSL/12X Loop to determine if other systems are connected to the loop. 1. Sign on to SST or DST (if you have not already done so). 2. Select Start a service tool ? Hardware service manager ? Logical hardware resources ? High-speed link (HSL) resources. 3. Move the cursor to the RIO/HSL/12X loop that you want to examine, and select Resources associated with loop. 4. Search for Remote RIO/HSL/12X NICs on the loop. Are there any Remote RIO/HSL/12X NICs on the loop? Yes: You have determined that there are other systems connected to this loop. This ends the procedure. No: You have determined that there are not any other systems connected to this loop. This ends the procedure.RIOIP08 Starting with the unit ID and RIO/HSL/12X port for one end of an RIO/HSL/12X cable, determine the unit ID and port location for the other end. 1. Sign on to SST or to DST if you have not already done so. 2. Select Start a Service Tool ? Hardware Service Manager ? Logical Hardware Resources ? High Speed Link (HSL) Resources. 3. Move the cursor to the RIO/HSL/12X loop that you want to examine, and select Resources associated with loop ? Include non-reporting resources. The display that appears shows the loop resource and all the ?HSL I/O Bridge? and all the ?Remote HSL NIC? resources connected to the loop. 4. Perform the following for each of the HSL I/O Bridge resources listed until you are directed to do otherwise. a. Move the cursor to the HSL I/O Bridge resource and select Associated packaging resource(s). b. Compare the unit ID on the display with the unit ID (in hexadecimal format) that you started with. Are the unit IDs the same? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Cancel to return to the Logical Hardware Associated with HSL Loops display. Repeat this for each HSL I/O Bridge under the loop, until you are directed to do otherwise.5. Perform the following: a. Select Associated logical resource(s). b. Move the cursor to the HSL I/O Bridge resource and select Display detail. c. Examine the Leading port and Trailing port information. Search the display for the RIO/HSL/12X port location label that you recorded prior to starting this procedure. If the label is part of the information for the Leading port, then select Follow leading port. If the label is part of the information for the Trailing port, then select Follow trailing port. d. Perform the step below that matches the function you selected in the previous step: v If you selected Follow leading port, then examine the display for the Trailing port information. Record, on the worksheet that you are using, the RIO/HSL/12X port location label shown on the ?Trailing port from previous resource? line. Record this information as the ?To HSL Port Label?. v If you selected Follow trailing port, then examine the display for the Leading port information. Record, on the worksheet that you are using, the RIO/HSL/12X port location label on the ?Leading port to next resource? line. Record this information as the?To HSL Port Label?. 34 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) e. Record the ?Link type? (Copper or Optical) on the worksheet that you are using in the field describing the cable type. f. Select Cancel ? Cancel ? Cancel to return to the Logical Hardware Associated With HSL Loops? display. g. Record the resource name on the display. h. Move the cursor to the resource with the resource name you recorded in step 5g. i. Select Associated packaging resource(s). j. Record the unit ID. k. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure.RIOIP09 This procedure offers a description and service action for RIO/HSL/12X reference code B600 6982. Note: A fiber optic cleaning kit may be required for optical RIO/HSL/12X connections.Note: This reference code can occur on an RIO/HSL/12X loop when an I/O expansion unit on the loop is powered off for a concurrent maintenance action. 1. Is the reference code in the Service Action Log (SAL) or serviceable event view you are using? Yes: There is a connection failure on an RIO/HSL/12X link. A B600 6984 reference code may also appear in the Product Activity Log (PAL) or error log view you are using. Both reference codes are reporting the same problem. Continue with the next step. No: The reference code is only informational, and requires no service action. This ends the procedure.2. Multiple B600 6982 errors may occur due to retry and recovery activity. Is there a B600 6985 with ?xxxx 3206? in word 4 logged after all B600 6982 errors for the same RIO/HSL/12X loop in the PAL? Yes: The recovery efforts were successful. Close all of the B600 6982 entries for the same loop in the SAL. No service is required. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.3. Is there a B600 6987 reference code in the SAL, or serviceable event view you are using, logged at about the same time? Yes: Close this problem and work the B600 6987. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.4. Is there a B600 6981 reference code in the SAL, or serviceable event view you are using, logged at approximately the same time? Yes: Go to step 9 on page 36. No: Continue with the next step.5. Perform “RIOIP06” on page 34 to determine if this loop connects to any other systems and then return here. Note: The loop number can be found in the SAL in the description for the HSL_LNK FRU. Is this loop connected to other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9 on page 36.6. Check for RIO/HSL/12X failures in the serviceable event views on the other systems. RIO/HSL/12X failures are indicated by entries with RIO/HSL/12X I/O bridge and Network Interface Controller (NIC) resources. Ignore B600 6982 and B600 6984 entries. Are there RIO/HSL/12X failures on other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9 on page 36. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 35 7. Repair the problems on the other systems and return to this step. After making repairs on the other systems check the PAL of this system. Is there a B600 6985 reference code, with this loop’s resource name, that was logged after the repairs you made on the other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9.8. For the B600 6985 reference code you found, use “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15 to determine if the loop is now complete. Is the loop complete? Yes: The problem has been resolved. Use “RIOIP01” on page 28 to verify that the loop is now working properly. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.9. The FRU list displayed in the SAL, or serviceable event view you are using, may be different from the failing item list given here. Use the FRU list in the serviceable event view if it is available. Does the reference code appear in the serviceable event view with HSL_LNK or HSLxxxx listed as a symbolic FRU? Yes: Perform “RIOIP01” on page 28. This ends the procedure. No: Exchange the FRUs in the serviceable event view according to their part action codes. This ends the procedure.RIOIP10 Use this procedure to determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop is complete (with both primary and redundant paths functioning for each unit on the loop). 1. Is the system managed by a Hardware Management Console? Yes: Continue with the next step No: Go to step 3.2. The RIO/HSL/12X loop number found in the first 4 characters of word 7 of the SRC that sent you here is in hexadecimal. Convert this number to decimal. Locate the decimal loop number’s information in the RIO/HSL/12X Topology screen on the HMC. Are all links in this loop operational? Yes: The RIO/HSL/12X loop recovered. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. No: The RIO/HSL/12X loop did not recover. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure.3. Search in Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) for a B700 6985 informational SRC logged after the RIO/HSL/12X SRC you are working on. Did you find a B7000 6985 SRC? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The status of the RIO/HSL/12X loop is unknown. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure.4. Compare the first half of word 7 in the B700 6985 informational log to the value that caused you to be sent to this procedure. Are the two values the same? Yes: The RIO/HSL/12X loop recovered. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. No: The status of the RIO/HSL/12X loop is unknown. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure.RIOIP11 Use this procedure to recover from a B7xx 6982 RIO/HSL/12X failure. 1. Record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10.” 2. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? 36 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Continue with the next step Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. 3. Work with the customer to determine if a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the RIO/HSL/12X loop has powered down normally. 4. Was a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the loop powered down normally? No: Go to 6. Yes: The loop remains in a failed state until all processor enclosures and I/O enclosures on the loop are powered on and functioning. Work with the customer to determine if all the powered down enclosures on the loop can be powered on. After all enclosures on the loop are powered on, continue with the next step. 5. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. 6. Search for a serviceable event with a 1xxx xxxx SRC logged at approximately the same time and with one or more FRUs in the same unit as those in the FRU list for the SRC you are currently working. 7. Did you find a serviceable event with a 1xxx xxxx SRC? No: Go to 9 Yes: Work to resolve the problem. After you have repaired that error, the RIO/HSL/12X loop may be recovered. After you finish working on the problem, return to this procedure and check to determine if correcting that problem also corrected the RIO/HSL/12X error. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. 8. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. 9. In the serviceable event view, search for a B700 6981 error logged at approximately the same time and on the same RIO/HSL/12X loop (the first four characters of word 7 are the same). 10. Did you find a serviceable event with a B700 6981 SRC at approximately the same time and on the same RIO/HSL/12X loop? No: Go to 12. Yes: Work to resolve the problem. After you have repaired that error, the RIO/HSL/12X loop may be recovered. After you finish working on the problem, return to this procedure and check to determine if correcting that problem also corrected the RIO/HSL/12X error. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36.11. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure.12. Using the FRU list that you are working with for this SRC, exchange one FRU at a time. After you exchange each FRU, determine if the loop has recovered.To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. After the loop recovers or after you have exchanged all the FRUs, continue with the next step. To replace a FRU, refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 13. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 37 RIOIP12 Use this procedure to recover from a B7xx 6985 RIO/HSL/12X failure. 1. Work with the customer to determine if a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the RIO loop has powered down normally. 2. Was a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the loop powered down normally? No: Go to 4. Yes: The loop remains in a failed state until all processor enclosures and I/O enclosures on the loop are powered on and functioning. Work with the customer to determine if all the powered down enclosures on the loop can be powered on. After all processor enclosures and I/O enclosures on the loop are powered on, check to determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop is complete. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. 3. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. 4. In the serviceable event view, search for a serviceable event with a 1xxx xxxx SRC logged at approximately the same time and with one or more FRUs in the same enclosure as those in the FRU list for the SRC you were currently working with. 5. Did you find a serviceable event with a 1xxx xxxx SRC? No: Go to 7 Yes: Work to resolve the problem. After you have repaired that error, the RIO/HSL/12X loop may be recovered. After you finish working on the problem, return to this procedure and check to determine if correcting that problem also corrected the RIO/HSL/12X error. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. 6. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No:: Continue with the next step. Yes:: Close the problem. This ends the procedure. 7. In the serviceable event view, search for a B700 6981 or B700 6986 error logged at approximately the same time and on the same RIO/HSL/12X loop (the first four characters of word 7 are the same). 8. Did you find a B700 6981 or a B700 6986 error logged at approximately the same time and on the same RIO/HSL/12X loop?. No: Go to step 10. Yes: Work to resolve the problem. After you have repaired that error, the RIO/HSL/12X loop may be recovered. After you finish working on the problem, return to this procedure and check to determine if correcting that problem also corrected the RIO/HSL/12X error. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. 9. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure.10. Search for a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the RIO/HSL/12X loop that has not powered up as expected. 11. Did you find a processor enclosure or I/O enclosure on the RIO/HSL/12X loop that has not powered up as expected? No: Go to 13 on page 39. Yes: Go to “Cannot power on SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit” on page 136 and work that power symptom. Use the first half of word 7 to determine the loop number for later use. After you have repaired that error, the RIO/HSL/12X loop may be recovered. After you finish working 38 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) that power symptom, return to this procedure and check to determine if correcting that problem also corrected the RIO/HSL/12X error. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36.12. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure.13. Using the FRU list that you are working with for this SRC, exchange one FRU at a time. After you exchange each FRU, determine if the loop has recovered. To determine if the RIO/HSL/12X loop has recovered, record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC and perform “RIOIP10” on page 36. After the loop recovers or after you have exchanged all the FRUs, continue with the next step. To replace a FRU, refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 14. Did the RIO/HSL/12X loop recover? No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: Close the problem. This ends the procedure.RIOIP56 Use this procedure to restore the RIO 12X link to optimal bandwidth. 1. Record the RIO/HSL/12X loop number in the first four characters of word 7 of this SRC. The loop number is in hexadecimal format and must be converted to decimal. 2. Is the system managed by a Hardware Management Console? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 6 on page 40.3. Perform the following from the Hardware Management Console: a. Select the system you are working on. b. Navigate to Hardware (information) and expand it. c. Select View RIO -12X Topology. d. In the current topology area, scroll until you find the data for the RIO/HSL/12X decimal loop number you identified in step 1.Is the link width 12X? Yes: The RIO 12X cable connection is now operating at the optimal bandwidth. No further action is required. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.4. Unplug both ends of the cable indicated in the FRU list for at least 30 seconds and then reconnect it. Refresh the View RIO-12X Topology view on the Hardware Management Console and verify that the width is now 12X for the decimal loop number you identified in step 1. Is the link width 12X? Yes: The RIO 12X cable connection is now operating at the optimal bandwidth. No further action is required. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.5. Replace the cable. Refresh the View RIO-12X Topology view on the Hardware Management Console and verify that the width is now 12X for the decimal loop number you identified in step 1. Is the link width 12X? Yes: The RIO 12X cable connection is now operating at the optimal bandwidth. No further action is required. This ends the procedure. No: Continue replacing the items in the FRU list until the problem is resolved. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 39 6. Unplug both ends of the cable indicated in the FRU list for at least 30 seconds and then reconnect the cable. It is not possible to concurrently verify that the RIO 12X link has been restored to optimal bandwidth. If the same SRC occurs for this RIO 12X link after the next IPL, the problem has not been resolved. Replace the cable and check for the error condition after the next IPL. Continue replacing the items in the FRU list, and perform an IPL the system each time until the problem has been resolved. This ends the procedure. 40 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Multi-adapter bridge (MAB) isolation procedures Use multi-adapter bridge (MAB) isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to the HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “MABIP02”Use this procedure to resolve a problem with a multi-adapter bridge. “MABIP03”Use this procedure to isolate a failing PCI adapter under a multi-adapter bridge. “MABIP05”Use this procedure to reset an IOP. “MABIP50” on page 42Use this procedure to isolate a failing PCI I/O adapter under a multi-adapter bridge. “MABIP51” on page 42Use this procedure to resolve a problem with a multi-adapter bridge. “MABIP52” on page 42This procedure will isolate a failing PCI adapter from a reference code when an IPL is not successful on the system or logical partition. “MABIP53” on page 43Use this procedure to determine a card position when no location is given for a PCI adapter FRU. “MABIP54” on page 43Use this procedure to isolate the failing PCI I/O adapter from a reference code with a Direct Select Address when the serviceable event view does not indicate a location for the PCI adapter. “MABIP55” on page 43Use this procedure to isolate a failing I/O adapter.MABIP02 Use this procedure to resolve a problem with a multi-adapter bridge. Perform “MABIP51” on page 42. MABIP03 Use this procedure to isolate a failing PCI adapter under a multi-adapter bridge. Perform “MABIP50” on page 42. MABIP05 Use this procedure to reset an IOP. Attention: When the IOP reset is performed, all resources controlled by the IOP will be reset. Perform this procedure only if the customer has verified that the IOP reset can be performed at this time. 1. Go to the SST/DST display in the partition which reported the problem. Use STRSST if i5/OS is running; use function 21 if STRSST does not work; or IPL the partition to DST. 2. On the Start Service Tools Sign On display, type in a user ID with service authority and password. 3. Select Start a service tool ? Hardware service manager ? Logical hardware resources ? System bus resources. 4. Page forward until you find the IOP that you want to reset. For help in identifying the IOP from the Direct Select Address (DSA) in the reference code, see “DSA translation” on page 12. 5. Verify that the IOP are correct by matching the resource name(s) on the display with the resource name(s) in the Service Action Log (SAL) for the problem you are working on. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 41 6. Move the cursor to the IOP that you want to reset, and select I/O Debug ? Reset IOP ? IPL IOP.This ends the procedure.MABIP50 Use this procedure to isolate a failing PCI I/O adapter under a multi-adapter bridge. Go to “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8 to isolate a PCI bus problem from AIX, Linux, or the HMC MABIP51 Use this procedure to resolve a problem with a multi-adapter bridge. Go to “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8 to isolate a PCI bus problem from AIX, Linux, or the HMC MABIP52 This procedure will isolate a failing PCI adapter from a reference code when an IPL is not successful on the system or logical partition. Attention: The removal and replacement procedure of all FRUs in this procedure are performed using dedicated maintenance (partition powered off). If not, the problem cannot be fixed. 1. Determine the PCI bridge set (multi-adapter bridge domain) by performing the following: a. Record the bus number (BBBB), the multi-adapter bridge number (C) and the multi-adapter bridge function number (c) from the Direct Select Address (DSA) in word 7 of the reference code. See “DSA translation” on page 12 for help in determining these values. b. Use the bus number that you recorded and the System Configuration Listing (or ask the customer) to determine what frame the bus is in. c. Record the frame type where the bus is located. d. Use the System Configuration Listing, the card position table for the frame type that you recorded, the bus number, and the multi-adapter bridge number to determine the PCI bridge set where the failure occurred. The PCI bridge set is the group of card positions controlled by the same multi-adapter bridge on the bus that you recorded. e. Use the card position table to record the PCI bridge set card positions. f. Examine the PCI bridge set in the frame, and record all the positions with IOA cards installed in them.2. Perform the following: a. Power off the partition. b. Remove all the IOA cards in the PCI bridge set identified in step 1. Be sure to record the card position of each IOA so that you can reinstall it in the same position later. To determine the removal and replacement procedures for the IOAs, go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. c. Power on the partition. Does the reference code or failure that sent you to this procedure occur? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The problem is the multi-adapter bridge. Continue with step 4 on page 43.3. Reinstall one of the IOAs and power on the partition. Does the reference code or failure that sent you to this procedure occur? Yes: The IOA that you just installed is the failing FRU. Replace the IOA.This ends the procedure. No: 42 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v If a different SRC occurs, return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1 and follow the service procedures for the new reference code. This ends the procedure. v If no SRC occurs and there are more IOAs to install, power off the partition and repeat this step. v If no SRC occurs and there are no more IOAs to install, the problem is intermittent; contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 4. Power off the partition. Determine which FRU contains the multi-adapter bridge. Locate the card position table for the frame type that you recorded. Perform the following: a. Using the multi-adapter bridge number that you recorded, search for the multi-adapter bridge function number ?F? in the card position table to determine the card position of the multi-adapter bridge’s FRU. b. Exchange the multi-adapter bridge’s FRU at the card position that you determined for it. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to determine the correct removal and replacement procedure. c. Install all IOAs in their original positions. d. Power on the partition.Does the reference code or failure that sent you to this procedure occur? No: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. Yes: Call your next level of support. This ends the procedure.MABIP53 Use this procedure to determine a card position when no location is given for a PCI adapter FRU. Go to “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8 to isolate a PCI bus problem from AIX, Linux, or the HMC. MABIP54 Use this procedure to isolate the failing PCI I/O adapter from a reference code with a Direct Select Address when the serviceable event view does not indicate a location for the PCI adapter. Go to “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8 to isolate a PCI bus problem from AIX, Linux, or the HMC. MABIP55 Use this procedure to isolate a failing I/O adapter. Attention: This procedure is for use with i5/OS only. Go to “PCI bus isolation using AIX, Linux, or the HMC” on page 8 to isolate a PCI bus problem from AIX, Linux, or the HMC. 1. If the system is not IPLed, will it IPL to DST? Option Description Yes No From the SAL display for the reference code, record the count. Continue with the next step. Perform “MABIP54.” This ends the procedure. 2. Go to the SST/DST display in the partition which reported the problem. Use STRSST if i5/OS is running; use function 21 if STRSST does not work; or IPL the partition to DST. 3. On the Start Service Tools Sign On display, type in a user ID with QSRV authority and password. 4. Select Start a service tool > Hardware service manager > Logical hardware resources > System bus resources. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 43 5. Is there a resource name logged in the SAL entry? No Yes Continue with the next step. Go to step 12 6. Do you have a location for the I/O processor? Option Description No Yes Record the Direct Select Address (DSA), word 7 of the reference code, from the SAL display. Then continue with the next step. Go to step 10. 7. Return to the HSM System bus resources display. 8. Locate the I/O processor by performing the following: a. Select Display detail. b. Compare the DSA with the bus, card, and board information for the IOP. Note: The card information on the HSM display is in decimal format. You must convert the decimal card information to hexadecimal format to match the DSA format. c. Repeat this step until you find the IOP with the same DSA. 9. Select Cancel, and then go to step 13. 10. Locate the I/O processor in HSM by performing the following for each IOP: a. Select Associated packaging resource(s) > Display detail. b. Repeat until you find the IOP with the same location.11. Select Cancel > Cancel and go to step 13. 12. Page forward until you find the multi-adapter bridge and IOP where the problem exists. Verify that the multi-adapter bridge and IOP are correct by matching the resource name(s) on the display with the resource name(s) in the SAL for the problem you are working on. 13. For the IOP you are working on, select Resources associated with IOP (if the I/O adapters are not already displayed). 14. If there is an IOA that is listed in any state other than ?operational?, then perform steps 15 through 18 on page 45, starting with the disabled IOA by moving the cursor to the disabled IOA. Otherwise, move the cursor to the first IOA that is assigned to the IOP. 15. Select Associated packaging resource(s) > Concurrent maintenance > Power off domain. Record the unit ID of the slot you are powering off. Did the domain power off successfully? 44 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Yes No Perform “MABIP05” on page 41 and then return here and continue with the next step. Choose from the following options: v If only one IOA was listed as failing, power down the system and replace the IOA. Re-IPL the system. If a different reference code occurred, perform problem analysis and work that reference code. If there was no reference code, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. v If there were multiple failed IOAs and concurrent maintenance did not work on one, then move to the next failed IOA and repeat steps 15 on page 44 through 18. v If concurrent maintenance does not work for multiple failed IOAs, this procedure will not be able to identify a failing I/O adapter. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. v 16. Did the IOP reset and IPL successfully? Yes No Check for the same failure that sent you to this procedure. Check the system control panel, the SAL for the partition that reported the problem, or the Work with partition status display for the partition that reported the problem. In the SAL, the count will increase if the reference code occurred again. Continue with the next step. This procedure will not be able to identify a failing I/O adapter. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. 17. Did the same reference code occur after the IOP was reset and IPL’d? Yes No Perform the following: 1. Go to the Hardware Service Manager display. 2. Go to Packaging Hardware Resources. 3. Power on the IOA by selecting Power on domain. 4. Reassign the IOA to the IOP 5. Return to the HSL resource display, showing the IOP and associated resources. 6. Continue with the next step. Go to step 19. 18. Is there any other IOA, assigned to the IOP, that you have not already powered off and on? Header Header Move the cursor to another IOA assigned to the IOP, choosing IOAs with a status of ?unknown? or ?disabled? before moving on to IOAs with a status of ?operational?. Go to step 15 on page 44. Go to step 21 on page 46. 19. The failing IOA is located. Exchange the I/O adapter that you just powered off. Use the location you recorded in step 15 on page 44 to locate the IOA. 20. Power on the IOA that you just exchanged. Does the same reference code that sent you to this procedure still occur? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 45 Yes No The IOA is not the failing item. Remove the IOA and reinstall the original IOA. Continue with the next step. You have exchanged the failing IOA. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. 21. No failing IOAs were identified. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. 46 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Communication isolation procedure This topic contains the procedure necessary to isolate a communications failure. Please read and observe the following warnings when using this procedure. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “COMIP01, COMPIP1”This procedure helps you to isolate problems with the communications input/output adapter (IOA) or input/output processor (IOP).COMIP01, COMPIP1 This procedure helps you to isolate problems with the communications input/output adapter (IOA) or input/output processor (IOP). Please read and observe the danger notices in “Communication isolation procedure” before proceeding with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 47 2. To determine which communications hardware to test, use the SRC from the problem summary form, or problem log, For details on line description information, see the Starting a Trace section of “Work with communications trace” on page 611. 3. Perform the following: a. Vary off the resources. b. On the Start a Service Tool display, select Hardware service manager ? Logical hardware resources ? System bus resources ? Resources associated with IOP for the attached IOPs in the list until you display the suspected failing hardware. c. Select Verify on the hardware you want to test. The Verify option may be valid on the IOP, IOA, or port resource. When it is valid on the IOP resource, any replaceable memory will be tested. Communications IOAs are tested by using the Verify option on the port resource.4. Run the IOA/IOP test(s). This may include any of the following: v Adapter internal test v Adapter wrap test (requires adapter wrap plug - available from your hardware service provider). v Processor internal test v Memory test v System port test Does the IOA/IOP test(s) complete successfully? No: The problem is in the IOA or IOP. If a verify test identified a failing memory module, replace the memory module. On multiple card combinations, exchange the IOA card before exchanging the IOP card. Exchange the failing hardware. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. This ends the procedure. Yes: The IOA/IOP is good. Do NOT replace the IOA/IOP. Continue with the next step.5. Before running tests on modems or network equipment, the remaining local hardware should be verified Since the IOA/IOP test(s) have completed successfully, the remaining local hardware to be tested is the external cable. Is the IOA adapter type 2838, with a UTP (unshielded twisted pair) external cable? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8.6. Is the RJ-45 connector on the external cable correctly wired according to the EIA/TIA-568A standard? That is, -Pins 1 and 2 using the same twisted pair, -Pins 3 and 6 using the same twisted pair, -Pins 4 and 5 using the same twisted pair, -Pins 7 and 8 using the same twisted pair. Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Replace the external cable with correctly wired cable. This ends the procedure.7. Do the Line Speed and Duplex values of the line description (DSPLINETH) match the corresponding values for the network device (router, hub or switch) port? No: Change the Line Speed and/or Duplex value for either the line description or the network device (router, hub or switch) port. This ends the procedure. Yes: Go to step 9 on page 49.8. Is the cable wrap test option available as a Verify test option for the hardware you are testing? v Yes: Verify the external cable by running the cable wrap test. A wrap plug is required to perform the test. This plug is available from your hardware service provider. Does the cable wrap test complete successfully? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem is in the cable. Exchange the cable. This ends the procedure. 48 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v No: The communications IOA/IOP is not the failing item. One of the following could be causing the problem. – External cable. – The network. – Any system or device on the network – The configuration of any system or device on the network. – Intermittent problems on the network. – A new SRC - perform problem analysis or ask your next level of support for assistance. Work with the customer or your next level of support to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.9. All the local hardware is good. This completes the local hardware verification. The communications IOA/IOP and/or external cable is not the failing item. One of the following could be causing the problem: v The network v Any system or device on the network v The configuration of any system or device on the network v Intermittent problems on the network v A new SRC - perform problem analysis or ask your next level of support for assistance Work with the customer or your next level of support to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 49 Intermittent isolation procedures These procedures help you to correct an intermittent problem. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)Use these procedures to correct an intermittent problem, if other problem analysis steps or tables sent you here. Only perform the procedures that apply to your system. Read all safety procedures before servicing the system. Observe all safety procedures when performing a procedure. Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion unit where the FRU is located. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). Use the procedure below to identify intermittent problems and the associated corrective actions. “INTIP03” on page 52Use this procedure to isolate problems with external noise on AC voltage lines. “INTIP05” on page 53Use this procedure to isolate problems with external noise on twinaxial cables. 50 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “INTIP07” on page 53Use this procedure to lessen the effects of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference, or EMI) on the system. “INTIP08” on page 54Use this procedure to ensure that the system is electrically grounded correctly. “INTIP09” on page 55Use this procedure to check the AC electrical power for the system. “INTIP14” on page 57Use this procedure to isolate problems with station protectors. “INTIP16” on page 57Use this procedure when you need to copy a main storage dump to give to your next level of support. “INTIP18” on page 57Use this procedure to determine if one or more PTFs are available to correct this specific problem. “INTIP20” on page 57Use this procedure to analyze system performance problems. “INTIP24” on page 58Use this procedure to collect data when the service processor reports a suspected intermittent problem. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 51 INTIP03 Use this procedure to isolate problems with external noise on AC voltage lines. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)Electrical noise on incoming ac voltage lines can cause various system failures. The most common source of electrical noise is lightning. 1. Ask the customer if an electrical storm was occurring at the time of the failure to determine if lightning could have caused the failure. Could lightning have caused the failure? No: Go to step 3 on page 53. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Determine if lightning protection devices are installed on the incoming ac voltage lines where they enter the building. There must be a dedicated ground wire from the lightning protection devices to earth ground. Are lightning protection devices installed? Yes: Continue with the next step. 52 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Lightning may have caused the intermittent problem. Recommend that the customer install lightning protection devices to prevent this problem from recurring. This ends the procedure.3. Have an installation planning representative perform the following: a. Connect a recording ac voltage monitor to the incoming ac voltage lines of the units that contain the failing devices with reference to ground. b. Set the voltage monitor to start recording at a voltage slightly higher than the normal incoming ac voltage.Does the system fail again with the same symptoms? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.4. Look at the recording and see if the voltage monitor recorded any noise when the failure occurred. Did the monitor record any noise when the failure occurred? Yes: Review with the customer what was happening external to the system when the failure occurred. This may help you to determine the source of the noise. Discuss with the customer what to do to remove the noise or to prevent it from affecting the server. This ends the procedure. No: Perform the next intermittent isolation procedure listed in the Isolation procedure column. This ends the procedure.INTIP05 Use this procedure to isolate problems with external noise on twinaxial cables. Electrical noise on twinaxial cables that are not installed correctly may affect the twinaxial workstation I/O processor card. Examples of this include open shields on twinaxial cables, and station protectors that are not being installed where necessary. Check for the following on the system: v There must be no more than 11 connector breaks in a twinaxial cable run. v Station protectors must be installed (in pairs) where a cable enters or leaves a building. v There can only be two station protectors for each twinaxial run. v There is a maximum of seven devices (with addresses 0-6) for each cable run. v There is a maximum cable length of 1524 meters (5000 feet) for each port. v All cable runs must be ended (terminated). v Disconnect all twinaxial cables that are not used. v Remove any cause of electrical noise in the twinaxial cables. v All workstations must be grounded.This ends the procedure. INTIP07 Use this procedure to lessen the effects of electrical noise (electromagnetic interference, or EMI) on the system. 1. Ensure that air flow cards are installed in all adapter card slots that are not used. 2. Keep all cables away from sources of electrical interference, such as ac voltage lines, fluorescent lights, arc welding equipment, and radio frequency (RF) induction heaters. These sources of electrical noise can cause the system to become powered off. 3. If you have an expansion unit, ensure that the cables that attach the system unit to the expansion unit are seated correctly. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 53 Note: If the failures occur when people are close to the system or machines that are attached to the system, the problem may be electrostatic discharge (ESD). 4. Have an installation planning representative use a radio frequency (RF) field intensity meter to determine if there is an unusual amount of RF noise near the server. You also can use it to help determine the source of the noise. This ends the procedure.INTIP08 Use this procedure to ensure that the system is electrically grounded correctly. 1. Have an installation planning representative or an electrician (when necessary), perform the following steps. 2. Power off the server and the power network branch circuits before performing this procedure. 3. Ensure the safety of personnel by making sure that all electrical wiring in the United States meets National Electrical Code requirements. 4. Check all system receptacles to ensure that each one is wired correctly. This includes receptacles for the server and all equipment that attaches to the server, including workstations. Do this to determine if a wire with primary voltage on it is swapped with the ground wire, causing an electrical shock hazard. 5. For each unit, check continuity from a conductive area on the frame to the ground pin on the plug. Do this at the end of the mainline ac power cable. The resistance must be 0.1 ohm or less. 6. Ground continuity must be present from each unit receptacle to an effective ground. Therefore, check the following: v The ac voltage receptacle for each unit must have a ground wire connected from the ground terminal on the receptacle to the ground bar in the power panel. v The ground bars in all branch circuit panels must be connected with an insulated ground wire to a ground point, which is defined as follows: – The nearest available metal cold water pipe, only if the pipe is effectively grounded to the earth (see National Electric Code Section 250-81, in the United States). – The nearest available steel beams in the building structure, only if the beam is effectively grounded to the earth. – Steel bars in the base of the building or a metal ground ring that is around the building under the surface of the earth. – A ground rod in the earth (see National Electric Code Section 250-83, in the United States).Note: For installations in the United States only, by National Electrical Code standard, if more than one of the preceding grounding methods are used, they must be connected together electrically. See National Electric Code Section 250, for more information on grounding. v The grounds of all separately derived sources (uninterruptable power supply, service entrance transformer, system power module, motor generator) must be connected to a ground point as defined above. v The service entrance ground bar must connect to a ground point as defined above. v All ground connections must be tight. v Check continuity of the ground path for each unit that is using an ECOS tester, Model 1023-100. Check continuity at each unit receptacle, and measure to the ground point as defined above. The total resistance of each ground path must be 1.0 ohm or less. If you cannot meet this requirement, check for faults in the ground path. v Conduit is sometimes used to meet wiring code requirements. If conduit is used, the branch circuits must still have a green (or green and yellow) wire for grounding as stated above. Note: The ground bar and the neutral bar must never be connected together in branch circuit power panels. 54 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) The ground bar and the neutral bar in the power panels that make up the electrical power network for the server must be connected together. This applies to the first electrically isolating unit that is found in the path of electrical wiring from the server to the service entrance power panel. This isolating unit is sometimes referred to as a separately derived source. It can be an uninterruptable power supply, the system power module for the system, or the service entrance transformer. If the building has none of the above isolating units, the ground bar and the neutral bar must be connected together in the service entrance power panel. 7. Look inside all power panels to ensure the following: v There is a separate ground wire for each unit. v The green (or green and yellow) ground wires are connected only to the ground bar. v The ground bar inside each power panel is connected to the frame of the panel. v The neutral wires are connected only to the neutral bar. v The ground bar and the neutral bar are not connected together, except as stated in step 6 on page 54. 8. For systems with more than one unit, ensure that the ground wire for each unit is not connected from one receptacle to the next in a string. Each unit must have its own ground wire, which goes to the power source. 9. Ensure that the grounding wires are insulated with green (or green and yellow) wire at least equal in size to the phase wires. The grounding wires also should be as short as possible. 10. If extension-mainline power cables or multiple-outlet power strips are used, make sure that they must have a three-wire cable. One of the wires must be a ground conductor. The ground connector on the plug must not be removed. This applies to any extension mainline power cables or multiple-outlet power strips that are used on the server. It also applies for attaching devices such as personal computers, workstations, and modems. Note: Check all extension-mainline power cables and multiple-outlet power strips with an ECOS tester and with power that is applied. Ensure that no wires are crossed (for example, a ground wire crossed with a wire that has voltage on it).This ends the procedure.INTIP09 Use this procedure to check the AC electrical power for the system. 1. Have an installation planning representative or an electrician (when necessary), perform the following steps. 2. Power off the server and the power network branch circuits before performing this procedure. 3. To ensure the safety of personnel, all electrical wiring in the United States must meet National Electrical Code requirements. 4. Check ALL system receptacles to ensure that each is wired correctly. This includes receptacles for the server and all equipment that attaches to the server, including workstations. Do this to determine if a wire with primary voltage on it has been swapped with the ground wire, causing an electrical shock hazard. 5. When three-phase voltage is used to provide power to the server, correct balancing of the load on each phase is important. The units should be connected so that all three phases are used equally. 6. The power distribution neutral must return to the ?separately derived source? (uninterruptable power supply, service entrance transformer, system power module, motor generator) through an insulated wire that is the same size as the phase wire or larger. 7. The server and its attached equipment should be the only units that are connected to the power distribution network that the server gets its power. 8. The equipment that is attached to the server, such as workstations and printers, must be attached to the power distribution network for the server when possible. 9. Check all circuit breakers in the network that supply ac power to the server as follows: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 55 v Ensure that the circuit breakers are installed tightly in the power panel and are not loose. v Feel the front surface of each circuit breaker to detect if it is warm. A warm circuit breaker may be caused by: – The circuit breaker that is not installed tightly in the power panel. – The contacts on the circuit breaker that is not making a good electrical connection with the contacts in the power panel. – A defective circuit breaker. – A circuit breaker of a smaller current rating than the current load which is going through it. – Devices on the branch circuit which are using more current than their rating.10. Equipment that uses a large amount of current, such as: Air conditioners, copiers, and FAX machines, should not receive power from the same branch circuits as the system or its workstations. Also, the wiring that provides ac voltage for this equipment should not be placed in the same conduit as the ac voltage wiring for the server. The reason for this is that this equipment generates ac noise pulses. These pulses can get into the ac voltage for the server and cause intermittent problems. 11. Measure the ac voltage to each unit to ensure that it is in the normal range. Is the voltage outside the normal range? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Contact the customer to have the voltage source returned to within the normal voltage range.12. The remainder of this procedure is only for a server that is attached to a separately derived source. Some examples of separately derived sources are an uninterruptable power supply, a motor generator, a service entrance transformer, and a system power module. The ac voltage system must meet all the requirements that are stated in this procedure and also all of the following: Notes: a. The following applies to an uninterruptable power supply, but it can be used for any separately derived source. b. System upgrades must not exceed the power requirements of your derived source.The uninterruptable power supply must be able to supply the peak repetitive current that is used by the system and the devices that attach to it. The uninterruptable power supply can be used over its maximum capacity if it has a low peak repetitive current specification, and the uninterruptable power supply is already fully loaded. Therefore, a de-rating factor for the uninterruptable power supply must be calculated to allow for the peak-repetitive current of the complete system. To help you determine the de-rating factor for an uninterruptable power supply, use the following: Note: The peak-repetitive current is different from the ?surge? current that occurs when the server is powered on. The de-rating factor equals the crest factor multiplied by the RMS load current divided by the peak load current where the: v Crest factor is the peak-repetitive current rating of the uninterruptable power supply that is divided by the RMS current rating of the uninterruptable power supply. If you do not know the crest factor of the uninterruptable power supply, assume that it is 1.414. v RMS load current is the steady state RMS current of the server as determined by the power profile. v Peak load current is the steady state peak current of the server as determined by the power profile. For example, if the de-rating factor of the uninterruptable power supply is calculated to be 0.707, then the uninterruptable power supply must not be used more than 70.7% of its kVA-rated 56 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) capacity. If the kVA rating of the uninterruptable power supply is 50 kVA, then the maximum allowable load on it is 35.35 kVA (50 kVA multiplied by 0.707). When a three-phase separately derived source is used, correct balancing of the load as specified in step 5 on page 55 is critical. If the load on any one phase of an uninterruptable power supply is more than the load on the other phases, the voltage on all phases may be reduced. 13. If the system is attached to an uninterruptable power supply or motor generator, then check for the following: v The system and the attached equipment should be the only items that are attached to the uninterruptable power supply or motor generator. Equipment such as air conditioners, copiers, and FAX machines should not be attached to the same uninterruptable power supply, or motor generator that the system is attached. v The system unit console and the Electronic Customer Support modem must get ac voltage from the same uninterruptable power supply or motor generator to which the system is attached. This ends the procedure.INTIP14 Use this procedure to isolate problems with station protectors. Station protectors must be installed on all twinaxial cables that leave the building in which the server is located. This applies even if the cables go underground, through a tunnel, through a covered outside hallway, or through a skyway. Station protectors help prevent electrical noise on these cables from affecting the server. 1. Look at the Product Activity Log to determine what workstations are associated with the failure. 2. Determine if station protectors are installed on the twinaxial cables to the failing workstations. Are station protectors installed on the twinaxial cables to the failing workstations? Yes: Perform the next intermittent isolation procedure listed in the Isolation procedure column. This ends the procedure. No: You may need to install station protectors on the twinaxial cables to the failing workstations. This ends the procedure.INTIP16 Use this procedure when you need to copy a main storage dump to give to your next level of support. For some problems, performing a dump of main storage helps to analyze the problem. The data on the dump is analyzed by support personnel to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it. 1. Copy the main storage dump to tape. See “Copying a dump” on page 656. 2. Ask your next level of support to determine for assistance. This ends the procedure.INTIP18 Use this procedure to determine if one or more PTFs are available to correct this specific problem. 1. Ensure that all PTFs that relate to the problem have been installed. Note: Ensure that the latest platform LIC fix has been installed before you exchange a service processor. 2. Contact your next level of support for more information. This ends the procedure.INTIP20 Use this procedure to analyze system performance problems. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 57 1. Look in the Product Activity Log, ASM log, or HMC to determine if any hardware errors occurred at the same time that the performance problem occurred. Did any hardware problems occur at the same time that the performance problem occurred? Yes: Perform problem analysis and correct the hardware errors. This ends the procedure. No: The performance problems are not related to hardware. Continue with the next step.2. Perform the following steps: a. Ask the customer if they have asked software support for any software PTFs that relate to this problem. b. Recommend that the customer install a cumulative PTF package if they have not done so in the past three months. c. Inform the customer that performance could possibly be improved by having Software Support analyze the conditions. d. Inform the customer that your service provider has performance tools. Contact Software Support for more information. This ends the procedure.INTIP24 Use this procedure to collect data when the service processor reports a suspected intermittent problem. It is important that you collect data for this problem so that the problem can be corrected. Use this procedure to collect the data. There are several ways the system can display the SRC. Follow the instructions for the correct display method, defined as follows: v If this SRC is displayed in the Product Activity Log or ASM log, then record all of the SRC data words, save all of the error log data, and contact your next level of support to submit an APAR. v If the control panel is displaying SRC data words scrolling automatically through control panel functions 11, 12 and 13, and the control panel user interface buttons are not responding, then perform “FSPSP02” on page 206 instead of using this procedure. v If the SRC is displayed at the control panel, and the control panel user interface buttons respond normally, then record all of the SRC words.Do not perform an IPL until you perform a storage dump of the service processor. To get a storage dump of the service processor, perform the following: 1. Record the complete system reference code (SRC) (functions 11 through 20). 2. Perform a service processor dump. See “Performing dumps” on page 653. 3. Is a display shown on the console? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The problem is not intermittent. Choose from the following options: – If you were sent here from another procedure, return there and follow the procedure for a problem that is not intermittent. – If the problem continues, replace the service processor hardware. This ends the procedure.4. The problem is intermittent. Copy the IOP dump to tape. See “Performing dumps” on page 653. 5. Complete the IPL. 6. Determine if there are available program temporary fixes (PTFs) for this problem. 7. If a PTF is found, apply the PTF. Then, return here and answer the following question. Did you find and apply a PTF for this problem? v Yes: This ends the procedure. v No: Record the following information, and contact your next level of support. – The complete SRC you recorded in this procedure 58 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) – The service processor dump to tape you obtained in step 4 on page 58. – All known system symptoms: - How often the intermittent problem occurs - System environment (IPL, certain applications) - If necessary, other SRCs that you suspect relate to the problem– Information needed to write an LICTR. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 59 I/O processor (IOP) isolation procedures Use these procedures to isolate a failure in the multiple function I/O card. Please read all safety procedures before servicing the system. Attention: Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the field replaceable unit (FRU) is located before removing, exchanging, or installing a FRU. Attention: Disconnecting the J15 and J16 cables will not prevent the system unit from powering on. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “IOPIP01” on page 62Use this procedure to perform an IPL to dedicated service tool (DST) to determine if the same reference code occurs. “IOPIP13” on page 64Use this procedure to isolate problems on the interface between the I/O card and the storage devices. 60 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “IOPIP16” on page 66Use this procedure to isolate failing devices that are identified by FI codes FI01105, FI01106, and FI01107. “IOPIP17” on page 69Use this procedure to isolate problems that are associated with SCSI bus configuration errors and device task initialization failures. “IOPIP18” on page 71Use this procedure to isolate problems that are associated with SCSI bus configuration errors and device task initialization failures. “IOPIP19” on page 72You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9010, 9011, or 9013. “IOPIP20” on page 73Use this procedure to isolate the problem when two or more devices are missing from a disk array. “IOPIP21” on page 75Use this procedure to determine the failing disk unit when, a disk unit is not compatible with other disk units in the disk array, or when a disk unit has failed. If the URC is 9025 or 9030, the disk array is running, but it might not be protected. “IOPIP22” on page 75Use this procedure to gather error information and contact your next level of support. “IOPIP23” on page 76You were sent to this procedure from a unit reference code (URC) 9050. “IOPIP25” on page 76Use this procedure to isolate the problem when a device attached to the I/O card has functions that are not given support on the I/O card. “IOPIP26” on page 78Use this procedure to correct the problem when the I/O card recognizes that the attached disk unit must be initialized and formatted. “IOPIP27” on page 79I/O card cache data exists for a missing or failed device. “IOPIP28” on page 81You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9052. “IOPIP29” on page 81The failing item is in a migrated tower. “IOPIP30” on page 81Use this procedure to correct the problem when the system cannot find the required cache data for the attached disk units. “IOPIP31” on page 84Cache data associated with the attached devices cannot be found. “IOPIP32” on page 86You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9011. “IOPIP33” on page 87 The I/O processor card detected a device configuration error. The configuration sectors on the device may be incompatible with the current I/O processor card. “IOPIP34” on page 87You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9027. “IOPIP40” on page 88Use this procedure to isolate the problem when a storage I/O adapter is connected to an incompatible or non-operational auxiliary cache I/O adapter. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 61 “IOPIP41” on page 89Use this procedure to correct the problem when an auxiliary cache I/O adapter is not connected to a storage I/O adapter or when an auxiliary cache I/O adapter is connected to an incompatible or non-operational storage I/O adapter.IOPIP01 Use this procedure to perform an IPL to dedicated service tool (DST) to determine if the same reference code occurs. If a new reference code occurs, more analysis may be possible with the new reference code. If the same reference code occurs, you are instructed to exchange the failing items. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593, before continuing with this procedure. 2. Was the IPL performed from disk (Type A or Type B)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 5. 3. Perform the following: a. Ensure that the IPL media is the correct version and level that are needed for the system model. b. Ensure that the media is not physically damaged. c. Choose from the following options to clean the IPL media: v If it is cartridge type optical media (for example, DVD), do not attempt to clean the media. v If it is non-cartridge type media (for example, CD-ROM), wipe the disc in a straight line from the inner hub to the outer rim. Use a soft, lint-free cloth or lens tissue. Always handle the disc by the edges to avoid finger prints. v If it is tape, clean the recording head in the tape unit. Use the correct Cleaning Cartridge Kit provided by your service provider. 4. Perform a Type D IPL in Manual mode. Does a system reference code (SRC) appear on the control panel? v No: Go to step 8 on page 63. v Yes: Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: You cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure. Refer to the reference code list. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure. No: A different SRC occurred. Use the new SRC to correct the problem. See Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure. 5. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 10 on page 63. 6. Does either the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear on the console? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Select option 5, press F11, then press Enter to display the details. Then, choose from the following options: – If all of the reference codes are 0000, go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. – If any of the reference codes are not 0000, go to step 10 on page 63, and use the reference code that is not 0000. 62 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Note: Use the characters in the Type column to find the correct reference code table. 7. Look at the product activity log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem cannot be isolated any more. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items. Start with the highest probable cause of failure in the failing item list for this reference code. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure. 8. Does either the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear on the console? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Look at the product activity log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem is corrected. This ends the procedure. 9. Select option 5, press F11, then press Enter to display the details. Then, choose from the following options: v If all of the reference codes are 0000, go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. v If any of the reference codes are not 0000, continue with the next step and use the reference code that is not 0000. Note: Use the characters in the Type column to find the correct reference code table.10. Record the SRC. Are the SRC and unit reference code (URC) the same ones that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Use the new SRC or reference code to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.11. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system or expansion tower. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588. b. Exchange the FRUs in the failing item list for the SRC you have now. Start with the highest probable cause of failure in the failing item column in the reference code list. Perform the remaining steps of this procedure after you exchange each FRU until you determine the failing FRU.Note: If you exchange a disk unit, do not attempt to save customer data until instructed to do so in this procedure.12. Power on the system or the expansion unit. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 15 on page 64.13. Does either the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear on the console? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Look at the product activity log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: The last FRU you exchanged was failing. Note: Before exchanging a disk unit, you should attempt to save customer data. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 63 This ends the procedure.14. Select option 5, press F11, then press Enter to display the details. Then, choose from the following options: v If all of the reference codes are 0000, go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. v If any of the reference codes are not 0000, go to step 10 on page 63, and use the reference code that is not 0000. Note: Use the characters in the Type column to find the correct reference code table.15. Record the SRC on the Problem summary form. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? v Yes: The last FRU you exchanged is not the failing FRU. Go to step 11 on page 63 to continue FRU isolation. v No: Is the SRC B100 4504 or B100 4505 and have you exchanged disk unit 1 in the system unit, or are all the reference codes on the console 0000? – Yes: The last FRU you exchanged was failing. This ends the procedure. Note: Before exchanging a disk unit, you should attempt to save customer data. – No: Use the new SRC or reference code to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.IOPIP13 Use this procedure to isolate problems on the interface between the I/O card and the storage devices. The unit reference code (part of the SRC that sent you to this procedure) indicates the SCSI bus that has the problem: Unit reference code (URC) SCSI bus 3100 0 3101 1 3102 2 3103 3 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593. 2. Were you performing an IPL from removable media (IPL type D) when the error occurred? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Exchange the FRUs in the failing item list for the reference code that sent you to this procedure. This ends the procedure. 3. Perform the following steps: a. Look in the service action log (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609) for other errors logged at or around the same time as the 310x SRC. b. If no entries appear in the service action log, use the product activity log (see “Using the product activity log” on page 617). c. Use the other SRCs to correct the problem before performing an IPL. d. Contact your next level of support as necessary for assistance with SCSI bus problem isolation. e. If the problem is not corrected, continue with the next step. 4. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? 64 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 7. 5. Does one of the following displays appear on the console? v Disk Configuration Error Report v Disk Configuration Attention Report v Disk Configuration Warning Report v Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status v Display Load-Source Failure – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: Look at the product activity log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617for details. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: You cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure see the failing item list for this reference code. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 topic to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure. 6. Are all of the reference codes 0000? On some of the displays, you must press F11 to display reference codes. v No: Continue with the next step. Use the reference code that is not 0000. v Yes: Go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. This ends the procedure. 7. Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Record the SRC. Then use the SRC description to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. 8. Perform the following: a. Power off the system or the expansion tower. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for details. b. Find the I/O card identified in the failing item list. c. Remove the I/O card and install a new I/O card. This item has the highest probability of being the failing item. d. Power on the system or the expansion tower.Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 12 on page 66. 9. Does one of the following displays appear on the console? v Disk Configuration Error Report v Disk Configuration Attention Report v Disk Configuration Warning Report v Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status v Display Load-Source Failurev Yes: Does the Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status display appear on the console? Note: On some of these displays, you must press F11 to display reference codes. – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: Are all of the reference codes 0000? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 65 - No: Go to step 12 using the reference code that is not 0000. - Yes: Go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. This ends the procedure.v No: Go to step 11.10. Is the reference code the same one that sent you to this procedure? v No: Either a new reference code occurred, or the reference code is 0000. There may be more than one problem. The original I/O card may be failing, but it must be installed in the system to continue problem isolation. Install the original I/O card by doing the following: a. Power off the system or the expansion tower. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for details. b. Remove the I/O card you installed in step 8 on page 65 and install the original I/O card. Note: Do not power on the system or the expansion unit now. A device connected to the I/O card could be the failing item. Go to “IOPIP16,” step (9) to continue isolating the problem. This ends the procedure.v Yes: Go to step 13.11. Look at the product activity log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The I/O card, which you removed in step 8 on page 65, is the failing item. This ends the procedure.12. Is the SRC or reference code the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Record the SRC. Then use the SRC description to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.13. The original I/O card is not the failing item. Install the original I/O card by doing the following: a. Power off the system or the expansion tower. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for details. b. Remove the I/O card you installed in step 8 on page 65 of this procedure and install the original I/O card. Note: Do not power on the system or the expansion unit now.A device connected to the I/O card could be the failing item. Go to “IOPIP16,” step (9) to continue isolating the problem. This ends the procedure.IOPIP16 Use this procedure to isolate failing devices that are identified by FI codes FI01105, FI01106, and FI01107. During this procedure, you will remove devices that are identified by the FI code, and then you will perform an IPL to determine if the symptoms of the failure have disappeared, or changed. You should not remove the load-source disk until you have shown that the other devices are not failing. Removing the load-source disk can change the symptom of failure, although it is not the failing unit. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Use the Hardware Service Manager (HSM) verify function (use DST or SST), and verify that all tape and optical units attached to the SCSI bus (identified by FI01105, FI01106, or FI01107) are operating correctly. See Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557 for details. Note: Do not IPL the system to get to DST. 3. Choose from the following options: 66 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v If verification was successful for all tape and optical units, then go to step 5. v If any tape or optical device could not be verified, or if it failed verification, then exchange the failing item. See the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and continue with the next step. 4. Use the Hardware Service Manager (HSM) verify function (use SST or DST) and verify that the exchanged item is operating correctly. See Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557 for details. Was the verification successful? No: Replace the exchanged device with the original. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and continue with the next step. Yes: The newly exchanged tape or optical device was the failing item. This ends the procedure. 5. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 8. 6. Does one of the following displays appear on the console? v Disk Configuration Error Report v Disk Configuration Attention Report v Disk Configuration Warning Report v Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status v Display Load-Source Failure Note: On some of these displays, you must press F11 to display reference codes. The characters under Type are the same as the 4 leftmost characters of word 1. The characters under Reference Code are the same as the 4 rightmost characters of word 1. – No: Continue with the next step. – Yes: Are all of the reference codes 0000? No: Go to step 8, and use the reference code that is not 0000. Yes: Go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. This ends the procedure. 7. Look at the Product Activity Log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is a reference code logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: You cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original reference code and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for additional details. This ends the procedure. 8. Is the SRC or reference code the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Record the SRC or reference code. Then, use the SRC or reference code to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. 9. Isolate the failing device by doing the following: a. Power off the system or the expansion unit if it is powered on. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588. b. Go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to find the devices identified by FI code FI01105, FI01106, or FI01107 in the failing item list. c. Disconnect one of the devices that are identified by the FI code, other than the load-source disk unit. Note: The tape, or optical units should be the first devices to be disconnected, if they are attached to the SCSI bus identified by FI01105, FI01106, or FI01107. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 67 d. Go to step 11.10. Continue to isolate the possible failing items by doing the following: a. Power off the system or the expansion unit. See Powering on and powering off. b. Disconnect the next device that is identified by FI codes FI01105, FI01106, or FI01107 in the FRU list. See the note in step 9 on page 67. Do not disconnect disk unit 1 (load-source disk) until you have disconnected all other devices and the load-source disk is the last device that is identified by these FI codes.11. Power on the system or the expansion tower. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 14.12. Does one of the following displays appear on the console? v Disk Configuration Error Report v Disk Configuration Attention Report v Disk Configuration Warning Report v Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status v Display Load-Source Failure Note: On some of these displays, you must press F11 to display reference codes. The characters under Type are the same as the 4 leftmost characters of word 1. The characters under Reference Code are the same as the 4 rightmost characters of word 1. – Yes: Go to step 14. – No: Look at the Product Activity Log. See “Using the product activity log” on page 617 for details. Is a reference code logged as a result of this IPL? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 14.13. You are here because the IPL completed successfully. The last device you disconnected is the failing item. Is the failing item a disk unit? No: Exchange the failing item and reconnect the devices you disconnected previously. See the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. This ends the procedure. Yes: Exchange the failing FRU. Before exchanging a disk drive, you should attempt to save customer data. This ends the procedure.14. Is the SRC or reference code the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Record the SRC or reference code on the Problem summary form. Then go to step 16.15. The last device you disconnected is not failing. Have you disconnected all the devices that are identified by FI codes FI01105, FI01106, or FI01107 in the FRU list? No: Leave the device disconnected and return to step 10 to continue isolating the possible failing items. Yes: Replace the device backplane or backplanes associated with the devices you removed in the earlier steps. If the device backplane does not fix the problem, then you cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for additional information. This ends the procedure.16. Is the SRC B1xx 4504, and have you disconnected the load-source disk unit? (The load-source disk unit is disconnected by disconnecting disk unit 1.) 68 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Does one of the following displays appear on the console, and are all reference codes 0000? – Disk Configuration Error Report – Disk Configuration Attention Report – Disk Configuration Warning Report – Display Unknown Mirrored Load-Source Status – Display Load-Source Failure Note: On some of these displays, you must press F11 to display reference codes. The characters under Type are the same as the 4 leftmost characters of word 1. The characters under Reference Code are the same as the 4 rightmost characters of word 1. Yes: Continue with the next step. No: A new SRC or reference code occurred. Perform problem analysis and correct the problem. This ends the procedure.17. The last device you disconnected may be the failing item. Exchange the last device you disconnected. See the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. Note: Before exchanging a disk drive, you should attempt to save customer data. Was the problem corrected by exchanging the last device you disconnected? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: This ends the procedure.18. Reconnect the devices you disconnected previously in this procedure. 19. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure. Do not exchange the FRU that you exchanged in this procedure. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure.IOPIP17 Use this procedure to isolate problems that are associated with SCSI bus configuration errors and device task initialization failures. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Were you performing an IPL from removable media (IPL type D) when the error occurred? v Yes: Exchange the FRUs in the failing item list for the reference code that sent you to this procedure. v No: Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 5 on page 70.3. Does either the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear on the console? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Does one of the following messages appear in the list? – Missing disk units in the configuration – Missing mirror protection disk units in the configuration – Device parity protected units in exposed mode. - No: Continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 69 - Yes: Select option 5, press F11, then press Enter to display the details. Then, choose from the following options: v If all of the reference codes are 0000, go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. v If any of the reference codes are not 0000, go to step 5, and use the reference code that is not 0000. Note: Use the characters in the Type column to find the correct reference code table.4. Look at the product activity log. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: You cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure (see the failing item list for this reference code in the (System Reference Codes)) topic. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see (Failing items) to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure.5. Record the SRC. Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? v No: A different SRC or reference code occurred. Use the new SRC or reference code to perform problem analysis and correct the problem. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Determine the device unit reference code (URC) from the SRC. If the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appears on the console, the device URC is displayed under Reference Code. This is on the same line as the missing device. Is the device unit reference code 3020, 3021, 3022, or 3023? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 7.6. A unit reference code of 3020, 3021, 3022, or 3023 indicates that there is a problem on an I/O card SCSI bus. The problem can be caused by a device that is attached to the I/O card that: v Is not supported. v Does not match system configuration rules. For example, there are too many devices that are attached to the bus. v Is failing. Perform the following: a. Look at the characters on the control panel Data display or the Problem Summary Form for characters 9 - 16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3). Use the format BBBB-Cc-bb (BBBB = bus, Cc = card, bb = board) to determine the card slot location for the I/O card (see (Locations and addresses)). b. The unit reference code indicates the SCSI bus that has the problem: URC SCSI Bus 3020 0 3021 1 3022 2 3023 3 c. To find the bus and device locations, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. d. Find the printout that shows the system configuration from the last IPL and compare it to the present system configuration. Note: If configuration is not the problem, a device on the SCSI bus may be failing. e. If you need to perform isolation on the SCSI bus, go to “IOPIP16” on page 66. This ends the procedure.7. The possible failing items are FI codes FI01105 (90%) and FI01112 (10%). Find the device unit address from the SRC (see “The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description” on page 601). Use this 70 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) information to find the physical location of the device. Record the type and model numbers to determine if the addressed I/O card supports this device. Is the device given support on your system? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Exchange the device. b. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does this correct the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.8. Perform the following steps: a. Remove the device. b. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640.Does this correct the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.IOPIP18 Use this procedure to isolate problems that are associated with SCSI bus configuration errors and device task initialization failures. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does an SRC appear on the control panel? v Yes: Go to step 5 on page 72. v No: Does either the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear on the console? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 4.3. Does one of the following messages appear in the list? v Missing disk units in the configuration v Missing mirror protection disk units in the configuration v Device parity protected units in exposed mode. – No: Continue with the next step. – Yes: Select option 5, press F11, and then press Enter to display the details. Choose from the following options: - If all of the reference codes are 0000, go to “LICIP11” on page 96 and use cause code 0002. - If any of the reference codes are not 0000, go to step 5 on page 72, and use the reference code that is not 0000. Note: Use the characters in the Type column to find the correct reference code table.4. Look at the product activity log (see (Log) for details). Is an SRC logged as a result of this IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: You cannot continue isolating the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure in the failing item column in the reference Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 71 code list. If the failing item list contains FI codes, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335to help determine part numbers and location in the system. This ends the procedure.5. Record the SRC. Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: A different SRC or reference code occurred. Use the new SRC or reference code to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.6. Determine the device unit reference code (URC) from the SRC. If the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appears on the console, the device URC is displayed under Reference Code. This is on the same line as the missing device. Is the device unit reference code 3020? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: A device reference code of 3020 indicates that a device is attached to the addressed I/O card. Either it is not supported, or it does not match system configuration rules. For example, there are too many devices that are attached to the bus. Perform the following steps: a. Find the printout that shows the system configuration from the last IPL and compare it to the present system configuration. b. Use the unit address and the physical address in the SRC to help you with this comparison. c. If configuration is not the problem, a device on the SCSI bus may be failing. Use FI code FI00884 in the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 table to help find the failing device. d. If you need to perform isolation on the SCSI bus, go to “IOPIP16” on page 66. This ends the procedure.7. The possible failing items are FI codes FI01105 (90%) and FI01112 (10%). Find the device unit address from the SRC. Use this information to find the physical location of the device. Record the type and model numbers to determine if the addressed I/O card supports this device. Is the device given support on your system? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following steps: a. Exchange the device. b. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does this correct the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.8. Perform the following steps: a. Remove the device. b. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640.Does this correct the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.IOPIP19 You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9010, 9011, or 9013. Contact your next level of support for assistance. 72 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) IOPIP20 Use this procedure to isolate the problem when two or more devices are missing from a disk array. You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9020 or 9021. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593, before continuing with this procedure. 2. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. 3. Have any other I/O card or device SRCs (other than a 902F SRC) occurred at about the same time as this error? v Yes: Use the other I/O card or device SRCs to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. v No: Has the I/O card, or have the devices been repaired or reconfigured recently? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: Contact your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 4. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here and view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a present address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0. Note: There might be more than one Product Activity Log entry with the same Log ID. Access any additional entries by pressing the enter key from the ?Display Detail Report for Resource? screen. View the ?Additional Information? for each entry to record the formatted log information. For example: There might be an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log if there are more than 10 disk units in the array. b. Continue with step 6. 5. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a present address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0. Note: There might be an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log if there are more than 10 disk units in the array. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information for these additional disk units, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. 6. There are three possible ways to correct the problem: a. Find the missing devices and install them in the correct physical locations in the system. If you can find the missing devices and want to continue with this repair option, then continue with the next step. b. Stop the disk array that contains the missing devices. Attention: Customer data might be lost. If you want to continue with this repair option, go to step 8 on page 74. c. Initialize and format the remaining members of the disk array. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 73 Attention: Customer data will be lost. If you want to continue with this repair option, go to step 9. 7. Perform the following: a. Install the missing devices in the correct locations in the system. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. b. Power on the system. See Powering on and powering off.Does the IPL complete successfully? No: You have a new problem. Perform problem analysis and correct the problem. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure. 8. You have chosen to stop the disk array that contains the missing devices. Attention: Customer data might be lost. Perform the following: a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a Type D IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Work with disk configuration ? Work with device parity protection. Then, continue with the next step.c. Select Stop device parity protection. d. Follow the on-line instructions to stop device parity protection. e. Perform an IPL from disk.Does the IPL complete successfully? No: You have a new problem. Perform problem analysis and correct the problem.This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure. 9. You have chosen to initialize and format the remaining members of the disk array. Perform the following steps: Attention: Customer data will be lost. a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a Type D IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures, and continue with the next step.10. Select Initialize and format disk unit. 11. Follow the online instructions to format and initialize the disk units. 12. Perform an IPL from disk. Does the IPL complete successfully? No: You have a new problem. Perform problem analysis and correct the problem. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure. 74 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) IOPIP21 Use this procedure to determine the failing disk unit when, a disk unit is not compatible with other disk units in the disk array, or when a disk unit has failed. If the URC is 9025 or 9030, the disk array is running, but it might not be protected. You were sent to this procedure from a unit reference code (URC) of 9025, 9030, or 9032. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Is the device location information for this SRC available in the service action log (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609 for details)? Yes: Exchange the disk unit. No: Continue with the next step.3. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640.4. Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. b. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the I/O card address.Note: There may be more than one entry with the same Log ID. Entries with the same Log ID may be accessed by pressing the Enter key from the ?Display Detail Report for Resource? screen. Example: There may be a device specific SRC and/or an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log. The xxxx902F SRC will occur if there are more than 10 disk units in the array. c. Continue with the next step.5. Perform the following steps: a. Return to the SST or DST main menu. b. Select Work with disk units ? Display disk configuration ? Display disk configuration status. c. On the Display disk configuration status display, look for the devices attached to the I/O card that is identified in step 4. d. Find the device that has a status of ?DPY/Unknown? or ?DPY/Failed?. This is the device that is causing the problem. Show the device address by selecting Display Disk Unit Details ? Display Detailed Address. Record the device address. e. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit and find the following: v The card slot that is identified by the I/O card direct select address v The disk unit location that is identified by the device addressHave you determined the location of the I/O card and disk unit that is causing the problem? Yes: Exchange the disk unit that is causing the problem. This ends the procedure. No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.IOPIP22 Use this procedure to gather error information and contact your next level of support. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593, before continuing with this procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 75 2. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.3. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here and view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. Record all the information. Note: There may be more than one Product Activity Log entry with the same Log ID. Access any additional entries by pressing the Enter key from the ?Display Detail Report for Resource? screen. View the ?Additional Information? for each entry to record the formatted log information. Example: There may be an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log if there are more than 10 disk units in the array. b. Continue with step 5.4. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record all the information. Then continue with the next step. Note: There may be an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log if there are more than 10 disk units in the array. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information for these additional disk units, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. 5. Ask your next level of support for assistance. Note: Your next level of support may require the error information you recorded in the previous step.This ends the procedure.IOPIP23 You were sent to this procedure from a unit reference code (URC) 9050. If the failing item is in a migrated tower, use the (Migrated Expansion Tower Problem Analysis, Repair and Parts) manual on the V5R1 Supplemental Manuals web site to fix the problem. Otherwise, contact your next level of support for assistance. IOPIP25 Use this procedure to isolate the problem when a device attached to the I/O card has functions that are not given support on the I/O card. You were sent to this procedure from URC 9008. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593, before continuing with this procedure. 2. Have any other I/O card or device SRCs occurred at about the same time as this error? v Yes: Use the other I/O card or device SRCs to correct the problem. See the system reference codes. This ends the procedure. v No: Has the I/O card, or have the devices been repaired or reconfigured recently? – Yes: Continue with the next step. 76 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) – No: Contact your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.3. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.4. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v No: Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the I/O card address. Then, view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. Record the addresses that are not 0000 0000 for all devices listed. Continue with the next step. v Yes: Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the I/O Card is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: – BBBB = hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D – Cc = hexadecimal offset 51 – bb = hexadecimal offset 4F The unit address of the I/O card is hexadecimal offset 18C through 18F. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record the addresses that are not 0000 0000 for all devices listed. Continue with the next step.5. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit. Then find the following: v The card slot that is identified by the I/O card direct select address (DSA) and unit address. If there is no IOA with a matching DSA and unit address, the IOP and IOA are one card. Use the IOP with the same DSA. v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addresses. Have you determined the location of the I/O card and the devices that are causing the problem? v No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Have one or more devices been moved to this I/O card from another I/O card? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.6. Is the I/O card capable of supporting the devices attached, or is it in the correct mode to support the devices attached? Note: For information on I/O card modes, see “Storage I/O card modes and jumpers” on page 250. v No: Remove the devices from the I/O card. Note: You can remove disk units without installing another disk unit, and the system continues to operate.This ends the procedure. v Yes: Do you want to continue using these devices with this I/O card? Yes: Continue with the next step.v No: Either change the I/O card mode or remove the devices from the I/O card. This ends the procedure.7. Initialize and format the disk units by performing the following steps: Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 77 a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a Type D IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. Then continue with the next step.c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This may take 30 minutes or longer. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.IOPIP26 Use this procedure to correct the problem when the I/O card recognizes that the attached disk unit must be initialized and formatted. You were sent to this procedure from URC 9092. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Have any other I/O card or device SRCs occurred at about the same time as this error? v Yes: Use the other I/O card or device SRCs to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. v No: Has the I/O card, or have the devices been repaired or reconfigured recently? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Contact your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.3. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640 for details. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.4. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. b. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the I/O card address. c. Then view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. d. Record the addresses that are not 0000 0000 for all devices listed. e. Continue with step 6 on page 79.5. Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the I/O card is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: v BBBB = hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D v Cc = hexadecimal offset 51 v bb = hexadecimal offset 4F The unit address of the I/O card is hexadecimal offset 18C through 18F.b. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record the addresses that are not 0000 0000 for all devices listed. c. Continue with the next step. 78 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 6. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit. Then find the following: v The card slot that is identified by the I/O card direct select address (DSA) and unit address. If there is no IOA with a matching DSA and unit address, the IOP and IOA are one card. Use the IOP with the same DSA. v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addresses. Have you determined the location of the I/O card and the devices that are causing the problem? v No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Have one or more devices been moved to this I/O card from another I/O card? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.7. Do you want to continue using these devices with this I/O card? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Remove the devices from the I/O card. Note: You can remove disk units without installing another disk unit, and the system continues to operate.This ends the procedure.8. Initialize and format the disk units by performing the following steps: Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a Type D IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. Then continue with the next step.c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This may take 30 minutes or longer. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.IOPIP27 I/O card cache data exists for a missing or failed device. You were sent to this procedure from a unit reference code (URC) of 9051. Note: For some storage I/O adapters, the cache card is integrated and not removable. Having I/O card cache data for a missing or failed device might be caused by the following conditions: v One or more disk units have failed on the I/O card. v The cache card of the I/O card was not cleared before it was shipped as a MES to the customer. In addition, the service representative moved devices from the I/O card to a different I/O card before performing a system IPL. v The cache card of the I/O card was not cleared before it was shipped to the customer. In addition, residual data was left in the cache card for disk units that manufacturing used to test the I/O card. v The I/O card and cache card were moved from a different system or a different location on this system after an abnormal power off. v One or more disk units were moved either concurrently, or they were removed after an abnormal power off. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 79 CAUTION: Any Function 08 power down (including from a D-IPL) is an abnormal power off. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. 3. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. b. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the I/O card address. c. Then view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. Record the device types and serial numbers for those devices that show a unit address of 0000 0000. d. Continue with step 5. 4. Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the I/O card is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: v BBBB = hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D. v Cc = hexadecimal offset 51 v bb = hexadecimal offset 4F The unit address of the I/O card is hexadecimal offset 18C through 18F. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. In order to interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. b. Record the device types and serial numbers for those devices that show a unit address of 0000 0000. c. Continue with the next step. 5. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit. Find the card slot that is identified by the I/O card direct select address (DSA) and unit address. If there is no IOA with a matching DSA and unit address, the IOP and IOA are one card. Use the IOP with the same DSA. 6. Choose from the following options: v If the devices from step 3 of this procedure have never been installed on this system, continue with the next step. v If the devices are not in the current system disk configuration, go to step 9 on page 81. v Otherwise, the devices are part of the system disk configuration; go to step 11 on page 81. 7. Choose from the following options: v If this I/O card and cache card were moved from a different system, continue with the next step. v Otherwise, the cache card was shipped to the customer without first being cleared. Perform the following: a. Make a note of the serial number, the customer number, and the device types and their serial numbers. These were found in step 3. b. Inform your next level of support. 80 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) c. Then go to step 10 to clear the cache card and correct the URC 9051 problem. 8. Install both the I/O card and the cache cards back into their original locations. Then re-IPL the system. There could be data in the cache card for devices in the disk configuration of the original system. After an IPL to DST and a normal power off on the original system, the cache card will be cleared. It is then safe to move the I/O card and the cache card to another location. 9. One or more devices that are not currently part of the system disk configuration were installed on this I/O card. Either they were removed concurrently, they were removed after an abnormal power off, or they have failed. Continue with the next step. 10. Use the Reclaim IOP cache storage procedure to clear data from the cache for the missing or failed devices as follows: a. Perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Reclaim the cache adapter card storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636.11. Choose from the following options: v If this I/O card and cache card were moved from a different location on this system, go to step 8. v If the devices from step 3 on page 80 of this procedure are now installed on another I/O card, and they were moved there before the devices were added to the system disk configuration, go to step 7 on page 80. (On an MES, the disk units are sometimes moved from one I/O card to another I/O card. This problem will result if manufacturing did not clear the cache card before shipping the MES.) v Otherwise, continue with the next step.12. One or more devices that are currently part of the system disk configuration are either missing or failed, and have data in the cache card. Consider the following: v The problem may be because devices were moved from the I/O card concurrently, or they were removed after an abnormal power off. If this is the case, locate the devices, power off the system and install the devices on the correct I/O card. v If no devices were moved, look for other errors logged against the device, or against the I/O card that occurred at approximately the same time as this error. Continue the service action by using these system reference codes.IOPIP28 You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9052. If the failing item is in a migrated tower, use the (Migrated Expansion Tower Problem Analysis, Repair and Parts) manual on the V5R1 Supplemental Manuals web site to fix the problem. Otherwise, contact your next level of support for assistance. IOPIP29 The failing item is in a migrated tower. You were sent to this procedure from URC 9012. Perform SDIOP-PIP29 in the (Migrated Expansion Tower Problem Analysis, Repair and Parts) manual on the V5R1 Supplemental Manuals web site . IOPIP30 Use this procedure to correct the problem when the system cannot find the required cache data for the attached disk units. You were sent to this procedure from URC 9050. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 81 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Did you just exchange the storage input/output (I/O) adapter as a result of a failure? No: Continue with step 13 on page 83. Yes: Continue with the next step. 3. Are you working with a 571F/575B card set? No: Go to step 5. Yes: Continue with the next step. 4. Remove the 571F/575B card set. Create a new card set with the following: Note: Label all parts (both original and new) before moving them. v The new replacement 571F storage IOA. v The cache directory card from the original 571F storage IOA. v The original 575B auxiliary cache adapter.See “Separating the 571F/575B card set and moving the cache directory card” on page 594. v Ensure that the SCSI cable and the battery power cable on the top edge of the storage side of the card are connected to the top edge of the auxiliary cache side of the card. v Reinstall this card set into the system and go to step 6. 5. Remove the I/O adapter. Install the new replacement storage I/O adapter with the following parts installed on it: Note: Label all parts (both old and new) before moving them. v The cache directory card from the original storage I/O adapter. On adapters with removable cache cards, the cache directory card will move with the removable cache card. v The removable cache card from the original storage I/O adapter (this applies to only the 571E and some 2780 I/O adapters).See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for information on removing and replacing parts.. v If the I/O adapter is attached to an auxiliary cache I/O adapter, ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the new replacement storage I/O adapter is connected to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. For a list of auxiliary cache I/O adapters, see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. 6. Did the 9050 SRC that sent you to this procedure occur on a type-D IPL? Yes: Perform a type-D IPL and continue with the next step. No: Continue with the next step. 7. Has a new 9010 or 9050 SRC occurred in the Service Action Log or Product Activity Log? No: Go to step 10. Yes: Continue with the next step. 8. Was the new SRC 9050? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 9. The new SRC was 9010. Reclaim the cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Note: When an auxiliary cache I/O adapter that is connected to the storage I/O adapter logs a 9055 SRC in the Product Activity Log, the reclaim does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the reclaim does result in lost sectors, and the system operator might want to restore data from the most recent saved tape after you complete the repair. 10. Are you working with a 571F/575B card set? No: Go to step 12 on page 83. 82 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Yes: Continue with the next step.11. Remove the 571F/575B card set. Create a new card set with the following: v The new 571F storage IOA v The cache directory card from the new 571F storage IOA v The new 575B auxiliary cache adapterSee “Separating the 571F/575B card set and moving the cache directory card” on page 594. v Ensure that the SCSI cable and the battery power cable on the top edge of the storage side of the card are connected to the top edge of the auxiliary cache side of the card. v Reinstall this card set into the system. This ends the procedure.12. Remove the I/O adapter. Install the new replacement storage I/O adapter that has the following parts installed on it: v The cache directory card from the new storage I/O adapter. On adapters with removable cache cards, the cache directory card will move with the removable cache card. v The removable cache card from the new storage I/O adapter (this applies to only the 571E and some 2780 I/O adapters).See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. v If the I/O adapter is attached to an auxiliary cache I/O adapter, ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the new replacement storage I/O adapter is connected to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. For a list of auxiliary cache I/O adapters, see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691.This ends the procedure 13. Identify the affected disk units using information in the Product Activity Log. Access SST/DST by doing one of the following: v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.14. Did you perform a D IPL to get to DST? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here, then view Additional Information to record the formatted log information. The Device Errors detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, and serial number are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the controller type and serial number for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.Note: You might find more than one Product Activity Log entry with the same Log ID. Access any additional entries by pressing Enter from the Display Detail Report for Resource screen. View Additional Information for each entry, and record the formatted log information. For example: You might find an entry for an xxxx902F SRC in the Product Activity Log when the array includes more than 10 disk units. b. Continue with step 16 on page 84.15. A formatted display of hexadecimal information for Product Activity Log entries is not available. To interpret the hexadecimal information, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Device Errors detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, and serial number are provided for up Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 83 to three disk units. Additionally, the controller type and serial number for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.Note: You might find an entry for an xxxx902F SRC entry in the Product Activity Log when the array includes more than 10 disk units. To interpret the hexadecimal information for these additional disk units, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. 16. Has the I/O card or have the devices been repaired or reconfigured recently? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Contact your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.17. You can use one of the following repair options to correct the problem: v Reunite the adapter and disk units identified in previous steps so that the cache data can be written to the disk units. If you can find the devices and adapters and want to continue with this repair option, then continue with the next step. v If the data for the disk units identified in previous steps is not needed on this or any other system, initialize and format these disk units. Attention: This repair option causes a loss of customer data. If you want to continue with this repair option, go to step 19.18. Perform the following: a. Restore the adapter and disk units back to their original configuration. For more information, see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. After the system writes cache data to the disk units and you power off the system normally, you can move the adapter and disk units to another location. b. Power on the system. For more information, see Powering on and powering off. Does the IP complete successfully? No: Perform problem analysis to correct the new problem. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.19. You have chosen to initialize and format the identified disk units. Perform the following steps: Attention: Performing the following steps causes a loss of customer data. a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. For more information, see “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a Type D IPL? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Select Work with disk unit recovery > Disk unit problem recovery procedures, then continue with the next step.20. Select Initialize and format disk unit. 21. Follow the online instructions to format and initialize the disk units. 22. Perform an IPL from disk. Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Perform problem analysis and correct the new problem. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.IOPIP31 Cache data associated with the attached devices cannot be found. You were sent to this procedure from URC 9010. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Has the system been powered off for several days? 84 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v No: Go to step 4. v Yes: The cache battery pack may be depleted. Do NOT replace the I/O adapter or the cache battery pack. Reclaim the cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Then continue with the next step. Note: When an auxiliary cache I/O adapter connected to the storage I/O adapter logs a 9055 SRC in the Product Activity Log, the Reclaim does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the Reclaim does result in lost sectors, and the system operator may want to restore data from the most recent saved tape after you complete the repair. 3. Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure. 4. Are you working with a 571F/575B card set? No: Go to step 6. Yes: Continue with the next step. 5. Remove the 571F/575B card set. Create a new card set with the following: Note: Label all parts (both original and new) before moving them. v The new replacement 571F storage IOA v The cache directory card from the original 571F storage IOA v The original 575B auxiliary cache adapterSee “Separating the 571F/575B card set and moving the cache directory card” on page 594. v Ensure that the SCSI cable and the battery power cable on the top edge of the storage side of the card are connected to the top edge of the auxiliary cache side of the card. v Reinstall this card set into the system and go to step 7. 6. Remove the I/O adapter. Install the new replacement storage I/O adapter with the following parts installed on it: Note: Label all parts (both old and new) before moving them. v The cache directory card from the original storage I/O adapter. On adapters with removable cache cards, the cache directory card will move with the removable cache card. v The removable cache card from the original storage I/O adapter (this applies to only the 571E and some 2780 I/O adapters).See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. v If the I/O adapter is attached to an auxiliary cache I/O adapter, ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the new replacement storage I/O adapter is connected to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. For a list of auxiliary cache I/O adapters, see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. 7. Did the 9010 SRC that sent you to this procedure occur on a type-D IPL? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Perform a type-D IPL and continue with the next step. 8. Has a new 9010 or 9050 SRC occurred in the Service Action Log? No: Go to step 11 on page 86. Yes: Continue with the next step. 9. Was the new SRC 9050? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.10. The new SRC was 9010. Reclaim the cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 85 Note: When an auxiliary cache I/O adapter that is connected to the storage I/O adapter logs a 9055 SRC in the Product Activity Log, the reclaim does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the reclaim does result in lost sectors, and the system operator might want to restore data from the most recent saved tape after you complete the repair. 11. Are you working with a 571F/575B card set? No: Go to step 13. Yes: Continue with the next step.12. Remove the 571F/575B card set. Create a new card set with the following: v The new 571F storage IOA v The cache directory card from the new 571F storage IOA v The new 575B auxiliary cache adapterSee “Separating the 571F/575B card set and moving the cache directory card” on page 594. v Ensure that the SCSI cable and the battery power cable on the top edge of the storage side of the card are connected to the top edge of the auxiliary cache side of the card. v Reinstall this card set into the system.This ends the procedure. 13. Remove the I/O adapter. Install the new replacement storage I/O adapter that has the following parts installed on it: v The cache directory card from the new storage I/O adapter. On adapters with removable cache cards, the cache directory card will move with the removable cache card. v The removable cache card from the new storage I/O adapter (this applies to only the 571E and some 2780 I/O adapters).See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. v If the I/O adapter is attached to an auxiliary cache I/O adapter, ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the new replacement storage I/O adapter is connected to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. For a list of auxiliary cache I/O adapters, see the Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691.This ends the procedureIOPIP32 You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9011. Attention: There is data in the cache of this I/O card, that belongs to devices other than those that are attached. Customer data may be lost. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Did you just exchange the storage I/O adapter as a result of a failure? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Reclaim the cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Does the IPL complete successfully? No: You have a new problem. Perform problem analysis and correct the problem. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.3. Have the I/O cards been moved or reconfigured recently? v No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Perform the following steps: 86 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Power off the system. See Powering on and powering off for details. b. Restore all I/O cards to their original position. c. Select the IPL type and mode that are used by the customer. d. Power on the system. Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.IOPIP33 The I/O processor card detected a device configuration error. The configuration sectors on the device may be incompatible with the current I/O processor card. You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9001. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to (Determine if the system has logical partitions) before continuing with this procedure. 2. Has the I/O adapter been replaced with a different type of I/O adapter, or have the devices been moved from a different type of I/O adapter to this one? v No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Does the disk unit contain data that needs to be saved? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Initialize and format the disk units. Attention: Any data on the disk unit will be lost. Perform the following:a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Did you get to DST with a type D IPL? v No: Select Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. Then, continue with the next step. v Yes: Continue with the next step.d. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display will show that the status is complete. This may take 30 minutes or longer. e. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.4. The disk unit contains data that needs to be saved. v If the I/O adapter has been replaced with a different type of I/O adapter, reinstall the original I/O adapter. Then continue with the next step. v If the disk units have been moved from a different type of I/O adapter to this one, return the disk units to their original I/O adapter. Then continue with the next step.5. Stop parity protection on the disk units, and power down the system normally with the I/O adapter in an operational state. The I/O adapter or disk units can now be returned to the configuration at the beginning of this procedure. This ends the procedure.IOPIP34 You were sent to this procedure from unit reference code (URC) 9027. The I/O processor card detected that an array is not functional due to the present hardware configuration. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 87 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to (Determine if the system has logical partitions) before continuing with this procedure. 2. Has the I/O adapter been replaced with a different I/O adapter, or have the devices been moved from a different I/O adapter to this one? v No: Perform (IOPIP22). This ends the procedure. v Yes: Perform the following:a. Power off the system. See (Power on/off the system and logical partitions). b. Restore all I/O cards or devices to their original position. c. Power on the system.3. Does the IPL complete successfully? v No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. v Yes: This ends the procedure.IOPIP40 Use this procedure to isolate the problem when a storage I/O adapter is connected to an incompatible or non-operational auxiliary cache I/O adapter. Perform the following: 1. Are you working on a 571F/575B combination storage and auxiliary cache IOA card set (uses two card slot locations)? v Yes: Continue with step 2. v No: Continue with step 3.2. Find the location of the card. v Use the location displayed in the Service Action Log. If the Service Action Log does not have a location, determine the address of the I/O adapter. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. v The location identified is for the 571F side of the card set.You must configure both the 571F and the 575B in the same partition. Are both the 571F side of the card set and the 575B side of the card set configured in the same partition? v Yes: Replace the entire card set. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. This ends the procedure. v No: Change the configuration so that the same partition controls both cards in the card set. This ends the procedure.3. Ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the storage I/O adapter is connected to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. Do the following: a. Use the location of the storage I/O adapter displayed in the Service Action Log. If the Service Action Log does not have a location, determine the address of the storage I/O adapter. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. b. Determine the location of the storage I/O adapter. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. c. Ensure that the SCSI cable on the last port of the storage I/O adapter is properly connected to an auxiliary cache I/O adapter. d. Ensure that both the auxiliary cache I/O adapter and the storage I/O adapter are in the same partition. e. Ensure that the slot power indicator is lit for the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. If it is not, use concurrent maintenance to power on the slot.4. Ensure that the auxiliary cache I/O adapter is supported for the storage I/O adapter to which it is connected. See the PCI adapter installation instructions for information about which adapters are compatible. 88 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 5. Replace the SCSI cable on the last port of the storage I/O adapter that connects to the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. See Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691 for cable part number information. If this does not fix the problem, replace the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. This ends the procedure.IOPIP41 Use this procedure to correct the problem when an auxiliary cache I/O adapter is not connected to a storage I/O adapter or when an auxiliary cache I/O adapter is connected to an incompatible or non-operational storage I/O adapter. Perform the following: 1. Are you working on a 571F/575B combination storage and auxiliary cache IOA card set (uses two card slot locations)? v Yes: Continue with step 2. v No: Continue with step 3.2. Find the location of the card. v Use the location displayed in the Service Action Log. If the Service Action Log does not have a location, determine the address of the I/O adapter. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. v The location identified is for the 575B side of the card set.You must configure both the 571F and the 575B in the same partition. Are both the 571F side of the card set and the 575B side of the card set configured in the same partition? v Yes: Replace the entire card set. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for the model you are working on. This ends the procedure. v No: Change the configuration so that the same partition controls both cards in the card set. This ends the procedure.3. Ensure that the SCSI cable of the auxiliary cache I/O adapter is connected to the last port of the storage I/O adapter. Do the following: a. Use the location of the auxiliary cache I/O adapter displayed in the Service Action Log. If the Service Action Log does not have a location, determine the address of the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. b. Determine the location of the auxiliary cache I/O adapter. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for the model you are working on. c. Ensure that the SCSI cable of the auxiliary cache I/O adapter is properly connected to the last port of the storage I/O adapter. d. Ensure that both the auxiliary cache I/O adapter and the storage I/O adapter are in the same partition. e. Ensure that the slot power indicator is lit for the storage I/O adapter. If it is not, use concurrent maintenance to power on the slot.4. Did you just replace the auxiliary cache I/O adapter because of a failure and did the new replacement auxiliary cache I/O adapter log a 9073 URC? v Yes: The SCSI bus on the storage I/O adapter may be disabled as a result of the initial failure. Use Hardware Service Manager to re-IPL the storage I/O adapter that is connected to the new replacement auxiliary cache I/O adapter. This ends the procedure. v No: Continue with the next step.5. Ensure that the auxiliary cache I/O adapter is supported for the storage I/O adapter to which it is connected. See the PCI adapter installation instructions for information about which adapters are compatible. 6. Replace the SCSI cable that connects the auxiliary cache I/O adapter to the storage I/O adapter. See Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691 for cable part number information. If this does not fix the problem, replace the storage I/O adapter. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 89 Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures Use this section to isolate licensed internal code (LIC) problems. Please read and observe all safety procedures before servicing the system and while preforming a procedure. Attention: Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the FRU is located before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “LICIP01” on page 91Licensed Internal Code detected an IOP programming problem. “LICIP03” on page 92Dedicated service tools (DST) found a permanent program error, or a hardware failure occurred. “LICIP04” on page 93The initial program load (IPL) service function ended. “LICIP07” on page 93The system detected a problem while communicating with a specific I/O processor. 90 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “LICIP08” on page 96Licensed Internal Code detected an operating system program problem. “LICIP11” on page 96Use this procedure to isolate a system STARTUP failure in the initial program load (IPL) mode. “LICIP12” on page 107Use this procedure to isolate an Independent Auxiliary Storage Pool (IASP) vary on failure. “LICIP13” on page 111A disk unit seems to have stopped communicating with the system. “LICIP14” on page 116Licensed Internal Code detected a card slot test failure. “LICIP15” on page 117Use this procedure to help you recover from an initial program load (IPL) failure. “LICIP16” on page 119Use this procedure to identify an adapter that is operational but is not located in the same partition as its associated adapter.LICIP01 Licensed Internal Code detected an IOP programming problem. You will need to gather data to determine the cause of the problem. If using OptiConnect, and the IOP is connected to another system, then collect this information from both systems. Read the “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Is the system operational: Did the SRC come from the Service Action Log, Product Activity Log, problem log, or system operator message? v No: Go to step 9 on page 92. v Yes: Is this a x6xx5121 SRC? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 4. 3. If the IOP has DASD attached to it, then the IOP dump is in SID87 (or SID187 if the DASD is mirrored). Copy the IOP dump. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. 4. Print the Product Activity Log, including any IOP dumps, to removable media for the day which the problem occurred. Select the option to obtain HEX data. 5. Use the ?Licensed Internal Code log? service function under DST/SST to copy the LIC log entries to removable media for the day that the problem occurred. 6. Copy the system configuration list. See “Printing the System Configuration List” on page 643. 7. Provide the dumps to Service Support. 8. Check the Logical Hardware Resource STATUS field using Hardware Service Manager. If the status is not Operational then IPL the IOP using the I/O Debug option. Ignore resources with a status of not connected. To IPL a failed IOP, the following command can be used: VRYCFG CFGOBJ(XXXX) CFGTYPE(*CTL) STATUS(*RESET) or use DST/SST Hardware Service Manager. If the IPL does not work: v Check the Service Action Log for new SRC entries. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. Use the new SRC and perform problem analysis to correct the problem. v If there are no new SRCs in the Service Action Log, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 91 9. Has the system stopped but the DST console is still active: Did the SRC come from the Main Storage Dump manager screen on the DST console? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 15.10. Complete a Problem Summary Form using the information in words 1-9 from the control panel, or from the DST Main Storage Dump screen. 11. The system has already taken a partial main storage dump for this SRC and automatically re-IPLed to DST. 12. Copy the main storage dump to tape. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. 13. When the dump is completed, the system will re-IPL automatically. Sign on to DST or SST. Obtain the data in steps 3 on page 91, 4 on page 91, 5 on page 91, and 6 on page 91. 14. Provide the dumps to Service Support. This ends the procedure. 15. Has the system stopped with an SRC at the control panel? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 2 on page 91.16. Complete a Problem Summary Form using the information in words 1-9 from the control panel, or from the DST Main storage dump screen. 17. Do NOT power off the system. Perform a manual IPL to DST, and start the Main storage dump manager service function. 18. Copy the main storage dump to tape. 19. Obtain the data in steps 3 on page 91, 4 on page 91, 5 on page 91, and 6 on page 91. 20. Re-IPL the system. 21. Has the system stopped with an SRC at the control panel? Yes: Using the new SRC, perform problem analysis to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. No: Provide the dumps to Service Support. This ends the procedure.LICIP03 Dedicated service tools (DST) found a permanent program error, or a hardware failure occurred. Read the danger notices in the “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Does URC 50FF occur? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 4.3. Perform a main storage dump, then perform an IPL by doing the following: a. Perform a main storage dump. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. b. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. c. When the IPL has completed, the system console should be at the DST display. Go to step 7 on page 93. If the DST display does not appear on the system console, contact your next level of support.4. Perform a main storage dump, then perform an IPL by doing the following: a. Perform a main storage dump. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. b. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640.Does a display appear? 92 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 7.5. If the problem is in the logical partition, exchange the first workstation I/O processor card on bus 1. See Removing and Replacing FRUs. 6. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Is the IPL or Install the System display shown? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Ask your next level of support for assistance and report the problem. This ends the procedure.7. Copy the main storage dump to removable media. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. 8. Report a Licensed Internal Code problem to your next level of support. This ends the procedure.LICIP04 The initial program load (IPL) service function ended. Dedicated service tools (DST) was in the disconnected status or lost communications with the IPL console because of a console failure and could not communicate with the user. Read the danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Select function 21 (Make DST Available) on the control panel and press Enter to start DST again. Does the DST Sign On display appear? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following steps (see “Dedicated Service Tools (DST)” on page 637 for details): a. Select Start a Service Tool ? Licensed Internal Code log. b. Perform a dump of the Licensed Internal Code log to tape. See “Start a service tool” on page 642 for details. c. Return here and continue with the next step.3. Perform a main storage dump. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636 for details. 4. Copy the main storage dump to removable media. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636 for details. 5. Report a Licensed Internal Code problem to your next level of support. This ends the procedure.LICIP07 The system detected a problem while communicating with a specific I/O processor. The problem could be caused by Licensed Internal Code, the I/O processor card, or by bus hardware. Read the danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Did a previous procedure have you power off the system, perform an IPL in Manual mode, and is the system in Manual mode now? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system. See “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for details. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 93 b. Select Manual mode on the control panel. See “IPL type, mode, and speed options” on page 642 for details. c. Power on the system. d. Continue with the next step. 3. Does the SRC that sent you to this procedure appear on the control panel? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Use the information in the SRC to determine the card direct select address. If the SRC is B6006910, you can use the last 8 characters of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) to find the card direct select address in BBBBCcbb format. BBBB Bus number Cc Card direct select address bb board address Go to step 11 on page 95. 4. Does the console display indicate a problem with missing disks? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 6. 5. Perform the following steps: a. Go to the DST main menu. b. On the DST sign-on display, enter the DST full authority user ID and password. See “Dedicated Service Tools (DST)” on page 637 for details. c. Select Start a service tool ? Hardware service manager. d. Check for the SRC in the service action log. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. Did you find the same SRC that sent you to this procedure? v Yes: Note the date and time for that SRC. Go to the Product Activity Log and search all logs to find the same SRC. When you have found the SRC, go to step 9 on page 95. v No: Perform the following steps: 1) Return to the DST main menu. 2) Perform an IPL and return to the Display Missing Disk Units display. 3) Go to “LICIP11” on page 96. This ends the procedure. 6. Does the SRC that sent you to this procedure appear on the console or on the alternative console? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Does the IPL complete successfully to the IPL or Install the System display? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: A different SRC occurred. Use the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. 7. Perform the following: a. Use the full-authority password to sign on to DST. b. Search All logs in the product activity log looking for references of SRC B600 5209 and the SRC that sent you to this procedure. Note: Search only for SRCs that occurred during the last IPL.Did you find B600 5209 or the same SRC that sent you to this procedure? v Yes: Go to step 10 on page 95. v No: Did you find a different SRC than the one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem appears to be intermittent. Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 8. Use the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. 94 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 9. Use F11 to move through alternative views of the log analysis displays until you find the card position and frame ID of the failing IOP associated with the SRC. Was the card position and frame ID available, and did this information help you find the IOP? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 12.10. Perform the following steps: a. Display the report for the log entry of the SRC that sent you to this procedure. b. Display the additional information for the entry. c. If the SRC is B6006910, use characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) to find the card direct select address in BBBBCcbb format. BBBB Bus number Cc Card direct select address bb board address 11. Use the BBBBCcbb information and refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to determine the failing IOP and its location. 12. Go to “MABIP55” on page 43 to isolate an I/O adapter problem on the IOP you just identified. If this fails to isolate the problem, return here and continue with the next step. 13. Is the I/O processor card you identified in step 9 or step 11 the CFIOP? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following steps: a. Exchange the failing CFIOP card. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. Note: You will be prompted for the system serial number. Ignore any error messages regarding system configuration that appear during the IPL. b. Go to step 16.14. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system. b. Remove the IOP card. c. Power on the system.Does the SRC that sent you to this procedure appear on the control panel or appear as a new entry in the service action log or product activity log? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system. b. Install the IOP card you just removed. c. Replace the I/O backplane (Un-P1). This ends the procedure.15. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system. b. Exchange the failing IOP card.16. Power on the system. Does the SRC that sent you to this procedure appear on the control panel, on the console, or on the alternative console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 18 on page 96.17. Does a different SRC appear on the control panel, on the console, or on the alternative console? v Yes: Use the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure. v No: On the IPL or Install the System display, check for the SRC in the service action log. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609 for details. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 95 Did you find the same SRC that sent you to this procedure? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.18. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system. b. Remove the IOP card you just exchanged and install the original card. c. Go to (Bus-PIP1). This ends the procedure.19. Ask your next level of support for assistance and report a Licensed Internal Code problem. You may be asked to verify that all PTFs have been applied. If you are asked to perform the following, see the following: v Copy the main storage dump from disk to tape or diskette, see “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. v Print the product activity log, see “Using the product activity log” on page 617. v Copy the IOP storage dump to removable media, see “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. This ends the procedure.LICIP08 Licensed Internal Code detected an operating system program problem. Read the danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does the same SRC occur? v Yes: Go to step 5. v No: Does the same URC appear on the console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 4.3. Does a different SRC occur, or does a different URC appear on the console? v Yes: Use the new SRC or reference code to correct the problem. If the procedure for the new SRC sends you back to this procedure, then continue with the next step. This ends the procedure. v No: Select Perform an IPL on the IPL or Install the System display to complete the IPL. Is the problem intermittent? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.4. Copy the main storage dump to removable media. See “Working with Storage Dumps” on page 636. 5. Report a Licensed Internal Code problem to your next level of support. This ends the procedure.LICIP11 Use this procedure to isolate a system STARTUP failure in the initial program load (IPL) mode. Ensure you have read the danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. 96 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) How to find the cause code 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593. 2. Were you given a cause code by another procedure? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the cause code given by the other procedure. Then, go to step 4.3. Look at the Data display characters in word 3. You can obtain these characters by either: v Looking at word 3 on the Problem summary form that was filled out earlier. v Selecting characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3).4. The 4 leftmost characters of word 3 represent the cause code. Select the cause code to go to the correct isolation instructions: “0001” “0010” on page 103 “0020” on page 105 “0031” on page 106 “0002” “0011” on page 103 “0021” on page 105 “0033” on page 106 “0004” on page 100 “0012” on page 103 “0022” on page 105 “0034” on page 106 “0005” on page 101 “0015” on page 103 “0023” on page 105 “0035” on page 107 “0006” on page 101 “0016” on page 103 “0024” on page 105 “0037” on page 107 “0007” on page 101 “0017” on page 103 “0025” on page 106 “0099” on page 107 “0008” on page 101 “0018” on page 103 “0026” on page 106 “0009” on page 101 “0019” on page 103 “0027” on page 106 “000A” on page 101 “001A” on page 104 “000B” on page 102 “001C” on page 104 “000C” on page 102 “001D” on page 104 “000D” on page 102 “001E” on page 104 “000E” on page 102 “001F” on page 104 0001 Disk configuration is missing. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition (see “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640). Does the Disk Configuration Error Report display appear? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The IPL completed successfully. This ends the procedure.2. Is Missing Disk Configuration information displayed? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 1 on page 98 for cause code 0002.3. On the Missing Disk Configuration display, perform the following: a. Select option 5 ? Display Detailed Report ? Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Recover Configuration. b. Follow the instructions on the display. After the disk configuration is recovered, the system automatically performs an IPL. This ends the procedure.0002 Disk units are missing from the disk configuration. Data from the control panel can be used to find information about the missing disk unit. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 97 1. Did you enter this procedure because all the devices listed on the Display Missing Units display (reached from the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display) have a reference code of 0000? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 20 on page 100. 2. Have you installed a new disk enclosure in a disk unit and not restored the data to the disk unit? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Ignore SRC A600 5090. Continue with the disk unit exchange recovery procedure. This ends the procedure. 3. Use words 1-9 from the information recorded on the Problem summary form to determine the disk unit that is missing from the configuration: v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (word 4) contain the IOP direct select address. v Characters 1-8 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 6) contains the disk unit type, level and model number. v Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) contains the disk unit serial number. Note: For 2105 and 2107 disk units, the 5 rightmost characters of word 7 contain the disk unit serial number. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) contains the number of missing disk units. Are the problem disk units 432x, 433x, 660x, 671x, or 673x disk units? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 5. 4. Attempt to get all devices attached to the MSIOP to Ready status by performing the following: a. The MSIOP address (MSIOP Direct Select Address) to use is characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (word 4). b. Verify the following and correct if necessary before continuing with step 10 on page 99. v All cable connections are made correctly and are tight. v All storage devices have the correct signal bus address, as indicated in the system configuration list. v All storage devices are powered on and ready. 5. Did you enter this procedure because there was an entry in the Service Action Log which has the reference code B6005090? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 10 on page 99. 6. Are customer jobs running on the system now? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Ensure that the customer is not running any jobs before continuing with this procedure. Then go to step 10 on page 99. 7. Select System Service Tools (SST) ? Work with disk units ? Display disk configuration ? Display disk configuration status. Are any disk units missing from the configuration (indicated by an asterisk *)? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure. 8. Do all of the disk units that are missing from the configuration have a status of ?Suspended?? Yes: Continue with the next step. 98 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Ensure that the customer is not running any jobs before continuing with this procedure. Then go to step 10. 9. Use the Service Action Log to determine if there are any entries for the missing disk units (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609). Are there any entries in the Service Action Log for the missing disk units that were logged since the last IPL? Yes: Use the information in the Service Action Log, and look up the reference code to read its description.). Perform the action indicated for the unit reference code. This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 21 on page 100.10. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition (see “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640). Does the Disk Configuration Error Report, the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appear? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The IPL completed successfully. This ends the procedure.11. Does one of the following messages appear in the list? v Missing disk units in the configuration v Missing mirror protected disk units in the configuration Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 16.12. Select option 5. Do the missing units have device parity protected status? (Device parity protection status is indicated by ?DPY/? as the first four characters of the status.) Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 14.13. Is the status DPY/Active? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Use the Service Action Log to determine if there are any entries for the missing disk units or the IOA/IOP controlling them. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609 for details. This ends the procedure.14. Press F11, and press Enter to display the details. Do all of the disk units listed on the display have a reference code of 0000? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Use the disk unit reference code shown on the display and look up the reference code.. Perform the action indicated for the unit reference code. This ends the procedure.15. Do all of the IOPs or devices listed on the display have a reference code of 0000? No: Use the IOP reference code shown on the display and look up the reference code.. Perform the action indicated for the reference code. This ends the procedure. Yes: Go to step 20 on page 100.16. Does the following message appear in the list: Unknown load-source status? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 18.17. Select option 5, press F11, and then press Enter to display the details. Does the Assign Missing Load Source Disk display appear? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Press Enter to assign the missing load-source disk unit. This ends the procedure.18. Does the following message appear in the list? Load source failure Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The IPL completed successfully. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 99 19. Select option 5, press F11, and then press Enter to display the details. 20. The number of failing disk unit facilities (actuators) is the number of disk units displayed. A disk unit has a Unit number greater than zero. Find the failing disk unit by type, model, serial number, or address displayed on the console. 21. Is there more than one failing disk device attached to the IOA or MSIOP? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 24.22. Use the SAL to determine if there are any entries that occurred around the time of the A6xx/B6xx 5090 SRC (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609). Are there any such entries? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the information in the SAL and look up the reference code.). Perform the action indicated for the unit reference code. This ends the procedure.23. Are all the disk devices that are attached to the IOA or MSIOP failing? (If the disk units are using mirrored protection, select Display Disk Status to find out.) No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 25.24. Look up the SRC listed below for the specific disk unit and exchange the FRUs shown one at a time. Then return here and answer the question below the listed disk units. Disk Unit SRC to look up 2105 21053002 2107 21073002 432x 432x3002 433x 433x3002 660x 660x3002 671x 671x3002 673x 673x3002 Did the disk unit service information correct the problem? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: This ends the procedure.25. Exchange the IOA or MSIOP (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). If exchanging the IOA or MSIOP did not correct the problem, use the original SRC and exchange the failing items, starting with the highest probable cause of failure. If the failing item list contains FI codes, Look up the FI code to help determine parts and locations. This ends the procedure.0004 Some disk units are unprotected but configured into a mirrored ASP. These units were originally DPY protected but protection was disabled. Perform the following: 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? Yes: Select DST by performing the HMC action for Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Control panel function codes on the HMC” on page 638 ). Then continue with the next step. No: Select DST using Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Selecting function 21 from the control panel” on page 638 in “Service functions” on page 652). Then continue with the next step.2. Select Work with disk units and take the actions to protect the system. 100 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) If you do not know what actions to take, select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. When the Disk configuration error report appears, the recovery actions are listed in the Help text for the error message ?Unprotected disk units in a mirrored ASP?. This ends the procedure.0005 A disk unit using parity protection is operating in exposed mode. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Choose from the following options: v If the same reference code appears, ask your next level of support for assistance. v If no reference code appears and the IPL completes successfully, the problem is corrected. v If a different reference code appears, use it to perform problem analysis and correct the new problem. This ends the procedure.0006 There are new devices attached to the system that do not have Licensed Internal Code installed. Ask your next level of support for assistance. 0007 Some of the configured disk units have device parity protection disabled when the system expected device parity protection to be enabled. 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? Yes: Select DST by performing the HMC action for Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Control panel function codes on the HMC” on page 638). Then continue with the next step. No: Select DST using Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Selecting function 21 from the control panel” on page 638 in “Service functions” on page 652). Then continue with the next step.2. Correct the problem by doing the following: a. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Correct device parity protection. b. Follow the online instructions. This ends the procedure.0008 A disk unit has no more alternate sectors to assign. 1. Determine the failing unit by type, model, serial number or address given in words 4-7. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. 2. See the service information for the specific storage device. Use the disk unit reference code listed below for service information entry. 432x 102E, 433x 102E, 660x 102E, 671x 102E, 673x 102E ( Look up a reference code.).This ends the procedure.0009 The procedure to restore a disk unit from the tape unit did not complete. Continue with the disk unit exchange recovery procedure. 000A There is a problem with a disk unit subsystem. As a result, there are missing disk units in the system. Perform the following: 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? Yes: Select DST by performing the HMC action for Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Control panel function codes on the HMC” on page 638). Then continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 101 No: Select DST using Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Selecting function 21 from the control panel” on page 638 in “Service functions” on page 652). Then continue with the next step.2. On the Service Tools display, select Start a Service Tool ? Product activity log ? Analyze log. 3. On the Select Subsystem Data display, select the option to view All Logs. Note: You can change the From: and To: Dates and Times from the 24-hour default if the time that the customer reported having the problem was more than 24 hours ago. 4. Use the defaults on the Select Analysis Report Options display by pressing Enter. 5. Search the entries on the Log Analysis Report display for system reference codes associated with the missing disk units. 6. Go to Reference codes to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.000B Some system IOPs require cache storage be reclaimed. 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? Yes: Select DST by performing the HMC action for Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Control panel function codes on the HMC” on page 638). Then continue with the next step. No: Select DST using Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Selecting function 21 from the control panel” on page 638 in “Service functions” on page 652). Then continue with the next step.2. Reclaim the cache adapter card storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Note: The system operator may want to restore data from the most recent saved tape after you complete the repair. This ends the procedure.000C One of the mirror protected disk units has no more alternate sectors to assign. 1. Determine the failing unit by type, model, serial number or address given in words 4-7. See “System Reference Code (SRC) Information” on page 601. 2. See the service information for the specific storage device. Use the disk unit reference code listed below for service information entry. 432x 102E, 433x 102E, 660x 102E, 671x 102E, 673x 102E ( Look up a reference code.). This ends the procedure.000D The system disk capacity has been exceeded. For more information about disk capacity, see iSeries Handbook, GA19-5486-20. 000E Start compression failure. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Correct the problem by doing the following: a. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Recover from start compression failure. b. Follow the on-line instructions. This ends the procedure. 102 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 0010 The disk configuration has changed. The operating system must be installed again, and all customer data must be restored. 1. Select Manual mode on the control panel. 2. Perform an IPL to reinstall the operating system. 3. The customer must restore all data from the latest system backup. This ends the procedure.0011 The serial number of the control panel does not match the system serial number. 1. Select Manual mode on the control panel. 2. Perform an IPL. You will be prompted for the system serial number. This ends the procedure.0012 The operation to write the vital product data (VPD) to the control panel failed. Exchange the multiple function I/O processor card. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for the model you are working on for the location of the card and a link to the remove and replace procedure. 0015 The mirrored load-source disk unit is missing from the disk configuration. Go to step 1 on page 98 for cause code 0002. 0016 A mirrored protected disk unit is missing. Wait six minutes. If the same reference code appears, go to step 1 on page 98 for cause code 0002. 0017 One or more disk units have a lower level of mirrored protection than originally configured. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Review the detailed display, which shows the new and the previous levels of mirrored protection. This ends the procedure.0018 Load-source configuration problem. The load-source disk unit is using mirrored protection and is configured at an incorrect address. Ensure that the load-source disk unit is in device location 1. 0019 One or more disk units were formatted incorrectly. The system will continue to operate normally. However, it will not operate at optimum performance. To repair the problem, perform the following: 1. Record the unit number and serial number of the disk unit that is formatted incorrectly. 2. Sign on to DST. See “Accessing Dedicated Service Tools” on page 637. 3. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit configuration ? Remove unit from configuration. 4. Select the disk unit you recorded earlier in this procedure. 5. Confirm the option to remove data from the disk unit. This step may take a long time because the data must be moved to other disk units in the auxiliary storage pool (ASP). 6. When the remove function is complete, select Add unit to configuration. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 103 7. Select the disk unit you recorded earlier in this procedure. 8. Confirm the add. The disk unit is formatted during functional operation. This ends the procedure.001A The load-source disk unit data is down-level. The load-source disk unit is mirror protected. The system is using the load-source disk unit that does not have the current level of data. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Does the Disk Configuration Error Report display appear? No: The system is now using the correct load-source. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Does a ?Load source failure? message appear in the list? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The system is now using the correct load-source. This ends the procedure.3. Select option 5, press F11, and then press Enter to display details. The load-source type, model, and serial number information that the system needs is displayed on the console. Is the load-source disk unit (displayed on the console) attached to an MSIOP that cannot be used for a load-source? Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. No: The load-source disk unit is missing. Go to step 1 on page 98 for cause code 0002.001C The disk units that are needed to update the system configuration are missing. Perform an IPL by doing the following: 1. Select Manual mode on the control panel. 2. Perform an IPL. Use the IPL information to determine the cause of the problem. This ends the procedure.001D 1. Is the Disk Configuration Attention Report, or the Disk Configuration Warning Report displayed? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.2. On the Bad Load Source Configuration message line, select 5, and press Enter to rebuild the load-source configuration information. If there are other types of warnings, select option 5 on the warnings, and correct the problem. This ends the procedure.001E The load-source data must be restored. 001F Licensed Internal Code was installed on the wrong disk unit of the load-source mirrored pair. The system performed an IPL on a load source that may not contain the same level of Licensed Internal Code that was installed on the other load source. The type, model, and address of the active device are displayed in words 4-7 of the SRC. Choose from the following options: 104 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 1. If the load-source disk unit in position 1 contains the correct level of Licensed Internal Code, perform the following: a. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. Is the Disk Configuration Attention Report or Disk Configuration Warning Report displayed? Yes: Select option 5 on the Incorrect Licensed Internal Code Install message line. When the Display Incorrect Licensed Internal Code Install display appears on the console, press Enter. No: The system is now using the correct load source. This ends the procedure.2. If the load-source disk unit in position 1 of the system unit does not contain the correct level of Licensed Internal Code, restore the Licensed Internal Code to the disk unit in position 1 of the system unit. This ends the procedure.0020 The system appears to be a one disk unit system. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 0021 The system password verification failed. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. When prompted, enter the correct system password. If the correct system password is not available perform the following: a. Select Bypass the system password. b. Have the customer contact the marketing representative immediately to order a new system password from your service provider. This ends the procedure.0022 A different compression status was expected on a reporting disk unit. Accept the warning. The reported compression status will be used as the current compression status. 0023 There is a problem with a disk unit subsystem. As a result, there are missing disk units in the system. The system is capable of IPLing in this state. 1. Is the system managed by an HMC? Yes: Select DST by performing the HMC action for Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Control panel function codes on the HMC” on page 638). Then continue with the next step. No: Select DST using Function 21 for the failing partition (see “Selecting function 21 from the control panel” on page 638 in “Service functions” on page 652). Then continue with the next step.2. On the Service Tools display, select Start a Service Tool ? Product activity log ? Analyze log. 3. On the Select Subsystem Data display, select the option to view All Logs. Note: You can change the From: and To: Dates and Times from the 24-hour default if the time that the customer reported having the problem was more than 24 hours ago. 4. Use the defaults on the Select Analysis Report Options display by pressing Enter. 5. Search the entries on the Log Analysis Report display for system reference codes associated with the missing disk units. 6. Go to the Reference codes topic and use the SRC information to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.0024 The system type or system unique ID needs to be entered. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 105 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. When prompted, enter the correct system type or system unique ID. This ends the procedure.0025 Hardware Resource Information Persistence disabled. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Contact your next level of support for instructions on how to enable the Hardware Resource Information Persistence function. This ends the procedure.0026 A disk unit is incorrectly configured for an LPAR system. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST for the failing partition. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. On the Service Tools display, select Start a Service Tool ? Product activity log ? Analyze log. 3. On the Select Subsystem Data display, select the option to view All Logs. Note: You can change the From: and To: Dates and Times from the 24-hour default if the time that the customer reported having the problem was more than 24 hours ago. 4. Use the defaults on the Select Analysis Report Options display by pressing Enter. 5. Search the entries on the Log Analysis Report display for system reference codes (B6xx 53xx) that are associated with the error. 6. Using the SRC information, look up the reference code. and use the information to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.0027 The user ASP has overflowed. Contact your next level of support. 0031 A problem was detected with the installation of Licensed Internal Code service displays. The cause may be defective media, the installation media being removed too early, a device problem or a Licensed Internal Code problem. v Ask your next level of support for assistance. Characters 13-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (4 rightmost characters of word 3) contain information regarding the install error. v If the customer does not require the service displays to be in the national language, you may be able to continue by performing another system IPL. This ends the procedure.0033 System model not supported. This model of hardware does not support the System Licensed Internal Code version and release that is being used. Use a supported version and release of the System Licensed Internal Code. 0034 Insufficient main storage capacity. There is not enough main storage capacity. For details about how much more capacity is required, see the ?Insufficient Main Storage Capacity? screen, which is displayed when the system is IPLed in manual mode. Typically, this error occurs when you have moved memory between logical partitions, and one partition no longer has a sufficient amount of main storage. 106 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 0035 Data from a User ASP has overflowed into the System ASP (ASP 1). There is not enough free space in the User ASP to move the overflowed data from the System ASP back into the User ASP. The system will continue to run in this condition, but if a disk failure in the System ASP causes the System ASP to be cleared, the data in the User ASP will also be cleared out. You should delete some files or objects from the User ASP so that enough free space exists in the User ASP to allow the data that is overflowed into the System ASP to be moved back. 0037 One or more functional connections to a disk unit in a multi-path environment have not been detected. The connections to the disk unit were established by running ESS Specialist. If you use the server in this state, you may cause a loss of data. You must ensure that all of the functional connections are still established between the disk and the Input/Output Adapters (IOAs) attached to this server and this logical partition. If there is an IOA which has a connection to the disk unit that has been moved to a different logical partition or different server, you should not continue with the IPL. Notify your next level of support. 0099 A Licensed Internal Code program error occurred. Ask your next level of support for assistance. LICIP12 Use this procedure to isolate an Independent Auxiliary Storage Pool (IASP) vary on failure. Message CPDB8E0 occurred if the user attempted to vary on the IASP. Read the Danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. How to find the cause code 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Were you given a cause code by another procedure? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the cause code given by the other procedure. Then go to step 4.3. Look at the characters in word 3. You can obtain these characters by doing the following: a. On the command line, enter the Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command. If you cannot get to SST, use function 21 to get to DST. Do not IPL the system to get to DST. b. On the Start Service Tools Sign On display, type in a User ID with service authority and password. c. Select Start a Service Tool ? Hardware Service Manager ? Work with service action log. d. On the Select Timeframe display, change the From: Date and Time to a date and time prior to when the user attempted to vary on the IASP. e. Search for a B6005094 system reference code that occurred at the time the user attempted to vary on the IASP. Display the failing item information for this entry. f. Select the function key for Additional details. g. The 4 leftmost characters of word 3 is the cause code to be used in this procedure.4. Find the cause code below: “0002” on page 108 “000A” on page 110 “002C” on page 110 “0030” on page 111 “0004” on page 109 “000B” on page 110 “002D” on page 111 “0032” on page 111 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 107 “0007” on page 109 “000D” on page 110 “002E” on page 111 “0099” on page 111 “0009” on page 110 “000E” on page 110 “002F” on page 111 0002 Disk units are missing from the IASP disk configuration. 1. Have you installed a new disk enclosure in a disk unit and not restored the data to the disk unit? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Ignore SRC A600 5094. Continue with the disk unit exchange recovery procedure. This ends the procedure. 2. Use words 1-9 from the information in the Service Action Log to determine the disk unit that is missing from the configuration: v Word 4 contains the IOP direct select address. v Word 5 contains the unit address. v Word 6 contains the disk unit type, level and model number. v Word 7 contains the disk unit serial number. v Word 8 contains the number of missing disk units. Are the problem disk units 432x, 660x, or 671x Disk Units? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Attempt to get all devices attached to the IOP to Ready status by performing the following: a. The IOP address (IOP Direct Select Address) to use is Word 4. b. Verify the following, and correct if necessary: – Ensure all cable connections are made correctly and are tight. – Ensure the configuration within the device is correct. – Ensure all storage devices are powered on and ready.c. Continue with the next step. 3. Perform the following: Select System Service Tools (SST) ? Work with disk units ? Display disk configuration ? Display disk configuration status. Are any disk units missing-indicated with an asterisk (*)- from the IASP configuration? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure. 4. Use the Service Action Log to determine if there are any entries other than B6xx 5094 for the missing disk units or the IOA or IOP that is controlling them. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. Are there any entries in the Service Action Log other than B6xx 5094 for the missing disk units or the IOA or IOP that is controlling them? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the information in the Service Action Log to solve the problem. See “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. This ends the procedure. 5. Did you enter this procedure because there was a B6xx 5094 cause code of 0030? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Work with the customer to recover the unknown configuration source disk unit. Use a workstation with System i Navigator installed to select the disk pool with the problem, and then select Recover unknown configuration source for this disk pool. This ends the procedure. 108 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 6. Use Hardware Service Manager to display logical resources connected to the IOP. See “Hardware Service Manager” on page 644. 7. Is every device attached to the IOP failing? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Are all of the disk units that are attached to one IOA missing? – No: Continue with the next step. – Yes: Exchange the IOA. Use the IOP direct select address and the first character of the unit address from step 2 on page 108 to find the location. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. This ends the procedure. 8. Is there more than one storage IOA attached to the IOP? v Yes: Exchange the IOP. Use the IOP direct select address from step 2 on page 108 to find the location. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. This ends the procedure. v No: Go to step 10. 9. Go to the service information for the specific disk unit that is listed below and perform the action indicated. Then return here and answer the following question. v 2105 Disk Units: Use SRC 3002 exchange the FRUs shown one at a time. v 432x, 660x, 671x Disk Units: Use SRC 3002 and exchange the FRUs shown one at a time. Did the disk unit service information correct the problem? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: This ends the procedure.10. Perform the following: a. Exchange the IOA. Use the IOP direct select address and the first character of the unit address from step 2 on page 108 to find the location. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. b. If exchanging the IOA does not correct the problem, exchange the IOP. Use the IOP direct select address from step 2 on page 108 to find the location. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. c. If exchanging the IOP does not correct the problem, exchange the failing items in the following FRU list starting with the first item in the list. 1) FI01140 2) System backplane 3) FI00580 4) AJDG301This ends the procedure.0004 Some disk units are unprotected but configured into a mirrored IASP. These units were originally DPY protected but protection was disabled. Direct the customer to take the actions necessary to start protection on these disk units. This ends the procedure. 0007 Some of the configured disk units have device parity protection disabled when the system expected device parity protection to be enabled. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Correct the problem by doing the following: a. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Correct device parity protection mismatch. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 109 b. Follow the on-line instructions. This ends the procedure.0008 A disk unit has no more alternate sectors to assign. 1. Determine the failing unit by type, model, serial number or address given in words 4-7. See The System Reference Code (SRC) Format Description. 2. See the service information for the specific storage device. Use the disk unit reference code listed below for service information entry. 432x 102E, 660x 102E, 671x 102E This ends the procedure.0009 The procedure to restore a disk unit from the tape unit did not complete. Continue with the disk unit exchange recovery procedure. This ends the procedure. 000A There is a problem with a disk unit subsystem. As a result, there are missing disk units in the system. Use the Service Action Log to find system reference codes associated with the missing disk units by changing the From: Date and Time on the Select Timeframe display to a date and time prior to when the user attempted to vary on the IASP. For information on how to use the Service Action Log, see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609. This ends the procedure. 000B Some system IOPs require cache storage be reclaimed. 1. Start SST. 2. Reclaim the cache adapter card storage by performing the following: a. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Reclaim IOP Cache Storage. b. Follow the on-line instructions to reclaim cache storage. c. After you complete the repair, the system operator may want to restore data from the most recently saved tape. This ends the procedure.000D The system disk capacity has been exceeded. For more information about disk capacity, see the iSeries Handbook. This ends the procedure. 000E Start compression failure. 1. Select Manual mode and perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 2. Correct the problem by doing the following: a. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Recover from start compression failure. b. Follow the on-line instructions. This ends the procedure.002C A Licensed Internal Code program error occurred. Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 110 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 002D The IASP configuration source disk unit data is down-level. The system is using the IASP configuration source disk unit that does not have the current level of data. Work with the customer to recover the configuration. On a workstation with System i Navigator installed, select the disk pool with the problem, and then select Recover configuration. This ends the procedure. 002E The Independent ASP is assigned to another system or a Licensed Internal Code program error occurred. Work with the customer to check other systems to determine if the Independent ASP has been assigned to it. If the Independent ASP has not been assigned to another system, ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 002F The system version and release are at a different level than the IASP version and release. The system version and release must be upgraded to be the same as the system version and release in which the IASP was created. This ends the procedure. 0030 The mirrored IASP configuration source disk unit has a disk configuration status of unknown and is missing from the disk configuration. Go to step 1 on page 108 for cause code 0002. 0032 A Licensed Internal Code program error occurred. Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 0099 A Licensed Internal Code program error occurred. Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. LICIP13 A disk unit seems to have stopped communicating with the system. The system has stopped normal operation until the cause of the disk unit failure is found and corrected. Ensure you have read the Danger notices in “Licensed internal code (LIC) isolation procedures” on page 90 before continuing with this procedure. If the disk unit that stopped communicating with the system has mirrored protection active, normal operation of the system stops for one to two minutes. Then the system suspends mirrored protection for that disk unit and continues normal operation. Note: Do not power off the system or partition using the white button, function 08, ASMI, or HMC immediate power-off when performing this procedure. If this procedure or other isolation procedures referenced by this procedure direct you to IPL or power off the system, Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 111 v perform a partition main storage dump (see “Performing dumps” on page 653), or v if additional dump information is not needed, perform a function 03 IPL or restart the system or partition using the HMC. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Was a problem summary form completed for this problem? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Use the problem summary form information and go to step 4. 3. Fill out a Problem Reporting Form ... completely with the instructions provided. 4. Recovery from a device command time-out may have caused the communications loss condition (indicated by an SRC on the control panel or in the HMC). This communications loss condition has the following symptoms: v The A6xx SRC does not increment within two minutes. v The system continues to run normally after it recovers from the communications loss condition and the reference code is cleared from the control panel. Does the communication loss condition have the above symptoms? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 7. 5. Verify that all Licensed Internal Code PTFs have been applied to the system. Apply any Licensed Internal Code PTFs that have not been applied to the system. Does the intermittent condition continue? Yes: Print all product activity logs. Print the LIC logs with a major code of 1000. Provide this information to your next level of support. This ends the procedure. No: This ends the procedure. 6. Is the storage hosted by another partition? Yes: Contact your next level of support. No: Continue with the next step. 7. A manual reset of the IOP may clear the attention reference code. Perform the following: If you are working from the control panel: a. Select Manual mode on the control panel. b. Select Function 25 and press Enter. c. Select Function 26 and press Enter. d. Select Function 67 and press Enter to reset the IOP. e. Wait 10 minutes. f. Select Function 25 and press Enter to disable the service functions on the control panel.If you are working from the HMC: a. These need to be updated for the new HMC UI.... b. In the Navigation Area, open the Service Applications folder. c. Select Service Focal Point. d. In the contents area, select Service Utilities. e. In the Service Utilities window, select the system you are working on. f. Select Selected ? Operator Panel Service Functions. g. Select the logical partition, and then select Partition Functions. h. Select Disk Unit IOP Reset/Reload (67). i. Wait 10 minutes. 112 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Did the reset successfully clear the control panel SRC or HMC panel value and can commands be entered on the partition console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Look for a Service Action Log (SAL) entry since the last IPL, and use it to fix the problem (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609). If a B6xx 5090 SRC occurred since the last IPL, look for other SRC entries and take action on them first. This ends the procedure. 8. Is the SRC the same reference code that sent you here? Yes: The same reference code occurred. Continue with the next step. No: Collect all words of the reference code and perform, problem analysis to resolve the new problem. This ends the procedure. 9. Powering off and powering on the affected IOP domain may clear the attention reference code. Perform the following: If you are working from the control panel: a. Select Manual mode on the control panel. b. Select Function 25 and press Enter. c. Select Function 26 and press Enter. d. Select Function 68 and press Enter to power off the domain. e. After the domain has been powered off or 10 minutes have passed, select Function 69 and press Enter to power on the domain. f. Wait 10 minutes. g. Select Function 25 and press Enter to disable the service functions on the control panel.If you are working from the HMC: a. In the Navigation Area, open the Service Applications folder. b. Select Service Focal Point. c. In the contents area, select Service Utilities. d. In the Service Utilities window, select the system you are working on. e. Select Selected ? Operator Panel Service Functions. f. Select the logical partition, and then select Partition Functions. g. Select Power off domain (68). h. After the domain has been powered off or 10 minutes have passed, select Power on domain (69). i. Wait 10 minutes.Did this successfully clear the control panel SRC or HMC panel value, and can commands be entered on the partition console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Look for a SAL entry since the last IPL, and use it to fix the problem (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609). If a B6xx 5090 SRC occurred since the last IPL, look for other SRC entries and take action on them first. This ends the procedure.10. Is the SRC the same reference code that sent you here? Yes: The same reference code occurred. Continue with the next step. No: Collect all words of the reference code and perform problem analysis to resolve the new problem. This ends the procedure.11. Perform a main storage dump, then perform an IPL by performing the following: If you are working from the control panel: a. Select Manual mode on the control panel. b. Select Function 22 and press Enter to dump the main storage to the load-source disk unit. c. Wait for SRC A100 300x to occur, indicating that the dump is complete. d. Then perform an IPL to DST (see “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 113 If you are working from the HMC: a. In the Navigation Area, open Server and Partition. b. Select Server Management. c. In the contents area, open the server on which the logical partition is located. d. Select Partitions. e. Right-click the logical partition profile and select Restart Partition. f. In the Restart Partition window, select the Dump restart option. Does a different SRC occur, or does a display appear on the console showing reference codes? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Perform problem analysis to correct the new problem. This ends the procedure.12. Does the same reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The problem is intermittent. Perform the following: a. Print the system product activity log for the magnetic storage subsystem and print the LIC logs with a major code of 1000. b. Copy the main storage dump to removable media (see “Managing dumps” on page 653). c. Contact your next level of support and provide them with this information. This ends the procedure.13. Are characters 7-8 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (2 rightmost characters of word 2) equal to 13 or 17? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 16.14. Use the word 1 through 9 information recorded on the Problem summary form to determine the disk unit that stopped communicating with the system: v Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3) contain the IOP direct select address. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (word 4) contains the unit address. v Characters 1-8 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 6) may contain the disk unit type, level and model number. v Characters 13-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (4 rightmost characters of word 7) may contain the disk unit reference code. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) may contain the disk unit serial number. Note: For 2105 and 2107 disk units, characters 4-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (5 rightmost characters of word 8) contain the disk unit serial number.15. Is the disk unit reference code 0000? v No: Using the information from step 14, find the table for the indicated disk unit type. Perform problem analysis for the disk unit reference code. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Perform the following steps: a. Determine the IOP type by using characters 9-12 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (4 leftmost characters of word 9). b. Find the unit reference code table for the IOP type. Determine the unit reference code by using characters 13-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (4 rightmost characters of word 9). c. Perform problem analysis for the unit reference code. This ends the procedure.16. Are characters 7-8 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (the two rightmost characters of word 2) equal to 27? 114 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 20.17. Use the word 1 through 9 information recorded on the Problem summary form to determine the disk unit that stopped communicating with the system: v Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3) contain the IOP direct select address. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (word 4) contains the disk unit address v Characters 9-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (word 5) contains the disk unit type, level and model number. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) contains the disk unit serial number. Note: For 2105 and 2107 Disk Units, characters 4-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (5 rightmost characters of word 8) contain the disk unit serial number. v Characters 13-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (4 rightmost characters of word 9) contain the disk unit reference code.18. Is the disk unit reference code 0000? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Find the table for the indicated disk unit type. Then find unit reference code (URC) 3002 in the table, and exchange the FRUs for that URC, one at a time. Note: Do not perform any other isolation procedures that are associated with URC 3002.This ends the procedure.19. Are characters 9-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 9) B6xx 51xx? Yes: Using the B6xx table, perform problem analysis for the 51xx unit reference code. This ends the procedure. No: Using the information from step 17, find the table for the indicated disk unit type. Perform problem analysis for the disk unit reference code. This ends the procedure.20. Are the 2 rightmost characters of word 2 on the Problem summary form equal to 62? No: Use the information in characters 9-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 9) and use this information instead of the information in word 1 for the reference code. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.21. Are characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3) equal to 00010004? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 24 on page 116.22. Are characters 13-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (4 rightmost characters of word 5) equal to 0000? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 25 on page 116.23. Note the following: v Characters 13-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (4 rightmost characters of word 5) contain the disk unit reference code. v Characters 1-8 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 6) contains the disk unit address. v Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) contain the IOP direct select address. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) contains the disk unit type, level and model number. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 115 Find the table for the disk unit type (characters 1-4 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 - 4 leftmost characters of word 8), and use characters 13-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 12 (4 rightmost characters of word 5) as the unit reference code. This ends the procedure. 24. Are characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 12 (word 3) equal to 0002000D? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Use the information in characters 9-16 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 9), instead of the information in word 1 for the reference code, and perform problem analysis. – Characters 1-8 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 6) may contain the disk unit address. – Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) may contain the IOP direct select address. – Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) may contain the disk unit type, level and model number. This ends the procedure.25. Note the following: v Characters 1-8 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 6) contains the disk unit address. v Characters 9-16 of the top 16 character line of function 13 (word 7) contain the IOP direct select address. v Characters 1-8 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (word 8) contains the disk unit type, level and model number. Find the table for the disk unit type (characters 1-4 of the bottom 16 character line of function 13 (4 leftmost characters of word 8) and use 3002 as the unit reference code. Exchange the FRUs for URC 3002 one at a time. This ends the procedure.LICIP14 Licensed Internal Code detected a card slot test failure. 1. Has the I/O adapter moved to a new card location? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 4.2. Perform one of the following, and then continue with the next step: v Use the concurrent maintenance option in Hardware Service Manager in SST/DST to power off, remove, reinsert, and power on the I/O adapter. OR v Power off the system, remove and reinsert the I/O adapter. Then IPL the system.3. Does the reference code occur again for this same I/O adapter? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: No further service action is needed. This ends the procedure.4. Move the I/O adapter to a different card location, that has no I/O processors in the PCI bridge set, by performing one of the following, and then continue with the next step: v Use the concurrent maintenance option in Hardware Service Manager in SST/DST to power off, remove the I/O adapter, install the I/O adapter in a different card location, and power on the I/O adapter.OR v Power off the system, remove the I/O adapter, install the I/O adapter in a different card location, and then IPL the system.5. Does the same reference code occur again for this I/O adapter? v Yes: Replace the I/O adapter. This ends the procedure. v No: Replace the backplane. 116 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) This ends the procedure.LICIP15 Use this procedure to help you recover from an initial program load (IPL) failure. 1. Is the system HMC-managed or managed by Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM)? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 4. 2. Check the LPAR configuration to ensure that the load source and alternate load source devices are valid. Is the LPAR configuration correct? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Correct the LPAR configuration problem. This ends the procedure. 3. Is the load source hosted by another partition? Yes: Contact your next level of support. No: Continue with the next step. 4. Did the failure occur when you were performing a type-D IPL? v No: Go to step 10 on page 118. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Ensure that the device is ready and has valid install media. b. Ensure that the device has the correct SCSI address and that any cables are properly connected and terminated. If a correction is made during the above checks, retry the IPL. If none of the above items resolve the problem, continue with the next step. 5. Are the load source and alternate load source devices controlled by the same I/O adapter, and does the load source disk unit have SLIC loaded on it? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 7. 6. Perform a type-B IPL in manual mode. Does the same SRC occur? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following items, one at a time, and retry the IPL until the problem is resolved (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335): a. The I/O adapter controlling load source and alternate load source devices. Note: The I/O adapter may be embedded on the system unit backplane. b. The common cable, if present, attached between both the load source and alternate load source and the controlling I/O adapter. c. If none of the items above resolve the problem, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 7. Replace the following items, one at a time, and retry the type-D IPL until the problem is resolved (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335): a. Media in the alternate load source device b. Device cables (if present) c. Media device d. Media backplane e. I/O adapter controlling the alternate load source device Note: The I/O adapter may be embedded on the system unit backplane f. If the problem persists after replacing each of these parts, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 117 8. You performed a type A or type B IPL. Is the load source I/O adapter a Fibre Channel adapter? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Continue with step 10. 9. Perform a type-D IPL in manual mode to DST. Look for other SRCs and use them to resolve the problem. If there are no SRCs, or if the SRCs do not resolve the problem, perform the actions for the 2847 3100 SRC. This ends the procedure. 10. Is the device in a valid location (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335)? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Correct the device location problem and retry the IPL. If the problem persists, continue with the next step.11. Perform a type-D IPL in manual mode to DST. Is the type-D IPL successful? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Look for other SRCs and use them to resolve the problem. If there are no SRCs, or the SRCs do not resolve the problem, replace the following items, one at a time, until the problem is resolved (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335): a. Load source disk drive b. Cables (if present) c. Disk drive backplane d. I/O adapter controlling the load source device Note: The I/O adapter may be embedded on the system unit backplane e. Backplane that the I/O adapter is plugged into f. If the problem persists after replacing each of these parts, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.12. The type-D IPL in manual mode to DST was not successful. Is the I/O adapter embedded on the system unit backplane? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Replace the system unit backplane and retry the IPL. If the IPL still fails, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.13. Are the load source and alternate load source controlled by the same I/O adapter? No: Go to step 16 on page 119. Yes: Continue with the next step.14. Replace the I/O adapter and perform a type-A or type-B IPL. Does the IPL complete successfully? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.15. Perform a type-D IPL in manual mode to DST. Is the type-D IPL successful? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Look for other SRCs and use them to resolve the problem. If there are no SRCs, or the SRCs do not resolve the problem, replace the following items, one at a time, until the problem is resolved (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335): a. Load source disk drive b. Cables (if present) c. Disk drive backplane d. I/O adapter controlling the load source device Note: The I/O adapter may be embedded on the system unit backplane e. Backplane that the I/O adapter and I/O processor are plugged into 118 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) f. If the problem persists after replacing each of these parts, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.16. Replace the backplane that the I/O adapter is plugged into and retry the IPL. If the IPL still fails, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.LICIP16 Use this procedure to identify an adapter that is operational but is not located in the same partition as its associated adapter. An adapter identified that its associated adapter is operational but is not located in the same partition. Use this procedure to identify the serial number and then find the location of the associated adapter and reassign it so that both adapters are in the same partition. Note: If the associated adapter is located in a different i5/OS partition, there might also be a B600690A logged against the associated adapter in that partition. 1. The adapter against which the B600690A is logged has identified that its associated adapter can not be found in this partition. Find the resource name that this error was logged against. This can be obtained from the Service Action Log (see ?Using the Service Action Log?). Then, using the resource name, perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Start a Service Tool. c. Select Hardware Service Manager. d. Select Locate resource by resource name. e. Enter the resource name that this error was logged against. f. Take the option to Display detail for the adapter.2. The bottom of the resource detail screen displays any combination of the following information: Attached storage IOA resource name. : Attached storage IOA serial number. : Attached storage IOA link status. . : Or Attached auxiliary IOA resource name: Attached auxiliary IOA serial number: Attached auxiliary IOA link status. : Or Remote storage IOA resource name. . : Remote storage IOA serial number. . : Remote storage IOA link status. . . : 3. Using the serial number information displayed for the Attached or Remote IOA, have the customer determine which partition currently owns the adapter with that serial number by using logical resource or VPD utilities in each of the partitions on the system. Note: The CCIN of the associated adapter is the first four characters of word 6 of the SRC. 4. Then, have the customer ensure that both adapters are owned by the same partition. For further assistance, the customer should contact their software service provider. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 119 Logical partition (LPAR) isolation procedure These procedures help you to identify logical partition (LPAR) configuration conditions and the associated corrective actions. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “LPRIP01”Use this procedure to isolate the problem when LPAR configuration data does not match the current system configuration.LPRIP01 Use this procedure to isolate the problem when LPAR configuration data does not match the current system configuration. 1. Is there only one B6005311 error logged, and is it against the load source device for the partition, in either the Primary or a secondary partition? v Yes: Is the reporting partition the Primary partition? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: Go to step 3 on page 121. 120 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v No: Go to step 4. 2. Was the load source disk unit migrated from another partition within the same system? v Yes: Is this load source device intended to be the load source for the Primary partition? – Yes: To accept the load source disk unit: Go to SST/DST in the current partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Accept load source disk unit. This ends the procedure. – No: Power off the system. Return the original load source disk to the Primary partition and perform a system IPL. This ends the procedure.v No: The load source disk unit has not changed. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 3. The reporting partition is a secondary partition. Since the last IPL of the reporting partition, have one of the following occurred? v Has the Primary partition time/date been moved backward to a time/date earlier than the previous setting? v Has the system serial number been changed? v Was the load source disk unit in this secondary partition, replaced intentionally with a load source from another system or another partition from the same system?v Yes: To accept the load source disk unit: Go to SST/DST in the current partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Accept load source disk unitThis ends the procedure. v No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 4. Are there multiple B600 5311 SRCs logged in the same partition? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: None of the conditions in this procedure have been met, call your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 5. Is the resource for one of the B600 5311 SRCs the load source device and are all of the other B600 5311 entries for resources which are non-configured disk units? Note: To determine if a disk unit is a non-configured disk unit, refer to the ?Work with disk unit options? section in the ?DST options? section of the ?DST chapter? in the iSeries Service Functions information. v Yes: Is the partition that is reporting the error the Primary partition? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: Go to step 7.v No: Go to step 8 on page 122. 6. Was the load source disk unit migrated from another partition within the same system? v Yes: Is this load source device intended to be the load source for the Primary partition? – Yes: To accept the load source disk unit: Go to SST/DST in the current partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Accept load source disk unitThis ends the procedure. – No: Power off the system. Return the original load source disk to the Primary partition and perform a system IPL. This ends the procedure.v No: The load source disk unit has not changed. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 7. The reporting partition is a secondary partition. Since the last IPL of the reporting partition, have one of the following occurred: v Has the Primary partition time/date been moved backward to a time/date earlier than the previous setting? v Has the system serial number been changed? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 121 v Was the load source disk unit in this secondary partition, replaced intentionally with a load source from another system or another partition from the same system?v Yes: To accept the load source disk unit: Go to SST/DST in the current partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Accept load source disk unitThis ends the procedure. v No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 8. One or more B600 5311 SRCs have been logged in the same partition. Do all of the B600 5311 errors have a resource which is a non-configured disk unit in the partition?Note: To determine if a disk unit is a non-configured disk unit, refer to the ?Work with disk unit options? section in the ?DST options? section of the ?DST chapter? in the iSeries Service Functions information. v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: None of the conditions in this procedure have been met, call your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 9. Were any disk unit resources associated with the B600 5311 SRCs added to the partition, since the last IPL of this partition? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following to clear non-configured disk unit configuration data: a. Go to SST/DST in the partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Clear non-configured disk unit configuration data. b. Select each unit in the list which is new to the system and press Enter. c. Continue the system IPL. This ends the procedure.10. None of the resources that are associated with the B600 5311 SRCs are disk units that were added to the partition since the last IPL of the partition. Has a scratch install recently been performed on the partition that is reporting the error(s)? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Go to step 13.11. If a scratch install was not performed, was the clear configuration data option recently used to discontinue LPAR use? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The Clear configuration data option was not used. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.12. Perform the following to clear non-configured disk unit configuration data: a. Go to SST/DST in the partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Clear non-configured disk unit configuration data. b. Select each unit in the list which is new to the system and press Enter. c. Continue the system IPL. This ends the procedure.13. Was the load source device previously mirrored before the scratch install? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Go to step 15.14. Perform the following to clear the old configuration data from the disk unit that was mirroring the old load source disk a. Go to SST/DST in the partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Clear non-configured disk unit configuration data. b. Select the former load source mirror in the list and press Enter.15. Is the Primary partition reporting the B600 5311 error(s)? v No: This ends the procedure. 122 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Yes: Does the customer want multiple partitions on the system? – No: This ends the procedure. – Yes: Use the Recover primary partition configuration data option to retrieve the LPAR configuration data from other devices in the system. a. Go to SST/DST in the primary partition and select Work with system partitions ? Recover configuration data ? Recover primary partition configuration data. The system will perform an automatic IPL. b. Verify the information that appears. - The device should be a former load source device from a secondary partition. - The time and date should reflect a time when that partition was active. It should be more recent than the last change to the logical partition configuration. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 123 Operations Console isolation procedures These procedures help you to isolate a failure with the Operations Console. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)For direct cable only. The following symptoms can be caused by Operations Console failing to connect: v SRC A600 5008 v The status in the Operations Console window remains ?Connecting console?.The following symptoms can be caused by a defective remote control panel cable: v Remote control panel (hung) System control panel functions. v SRC 0000 DDDD with attention light on the system panel. v Remote control panel accepts mode selections, however the system does not respond. v The remote control panel does not function. v The status in the Operations Console window remains ?Connecting console?. 124 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) The following safety notices apply throughout this section. Read all safety procedures before servicing the system. Observe all safety procedures when performing a procedure. Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the field-replaceable unit (FRU) is located before removing, exchanging, or installing a FRU. “OPCIP03”Use this procedure to isolate a bringup failure with Operations Console.OPCIP03 Use this procedure to isolate a bringup failure with Operations Console. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)Use this procedure to isolate an Operations Console bringup failure when the SRC on the panel is A6xx5008 or B6xx5008. If you are not using the Operations Console, see A6005004. This procedure only works with cable-connected and LAN configurations. It is not valid for dial connected configurations. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to Determine if the system has logical partitions before continuing with this procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 125 2. Is the SRC on the panel A6xx5008 or B6xx5008? v No: This ends the procedure. v Yes: Are you connecting Operations Console using the ASYNC adapter? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: You are connecting using a LAN adapter. Go to step 6.3. Are words 17, 18, and 19 all equal to 00000000? v Yes: Report the problem to your next level of support. This ends the procedure. v No: Is word 17 equal to 00000001? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The ASYNC adapter was not detected. Ensure that the ASYNC adapter card is installed, or replace the IOA and try again. This ends the procedure. 4. Is word 17 equal to 00000002? v Yes: On the ASYNC adapter card that was found, no cable was detected. Word 18 contains the card position. Locate the ASYNC adapter card in this card position, and ensure that the external cable is attached. Install or replace the external cable. This ends the procedure. v No: Is word 17 equal to 00000003? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The cable that was detected does not have the correct cable ID. Word 18 contains the card position. Word 19 contains the cable ID. Locate the ASYNC adapter card in this card position, and verify that the correct cable is attached, or replace the cable. This ends the procedure. 5. Is word 17 equal to 00000004? No: Report the problem to you next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: Operations Console failed to make a connection because the port is already being used. Word 18 contains the card position. Disconnect the active communications session and try using the resource again. This ends the procedure.6. Are words 13, 14 and 15 all equal to 00000000? v Yes: Report the problem to you next level of support. This ends the procedure. v No: Is word 13 equal to 00000002? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The LAN hardware failed to activate. Replace the LAN IOA being used. This ends the procedure.7. Is word 13 equal to 00000003? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: A hardware error occurred. Word 14 contains the error code, (example: 53001A80). Word 15 contains the card position. Is the error code equal to 53001A80? Yes: The network cable is not attached to the LAN adapter, the cable is defective, or the network is not operational. This ends the procedure. No: The LAN adapter hardware is not operational. Replace the hardware and try again. This ends the procedure. 8. Is word 13 equal to 00000004? v Yes: The console did not respond. Word 14 contains the number of attempts made. Word 15 contains the card position. The system is inserted into the network but there is no connection to the client (PC). Verify the configuration for the network at the system and client; verify the configuration of Operations Console. This ends the procedure. v No: Is word 13 equal to 00000005? No: Report the problem to your next level support. This ends the procedure. 126 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Yes: IP information was received from the console. Word 14 contains the received IP address. Verify the configuration data for the client (PC) or verify the configuration for the network. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 127 Power isolation procedures Use power isolation procedures for isolating a problem in the power system. Use isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. Some field replaceable units (FRUs) can be replaced with the unit powered on. Follow the instructions in Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 when directed to remove, exchange, or install a FRU. The following safety notices apply throughout the power isolation procedures. Read all safety procedures before servicing the system and observe all safety procedures when performing a procedure. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “Power problems” on page 129Use the following table to learn how to begin analyzing a power problem. “PWR1900” on page 141Determine which procedure to use based on the model number. “PWR1905” on page 142A system unit power supply load fault is occurring. 128 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “PWR1906” on page 144The server detected an error in the power system. “PWR1907” on page 146A unit was dropped from the SPCN configuration. “PWR1908” on page 148A power supply fault or load fault has occurred in a 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. “PWR1909” on page 150A power supply load fault is occurring in a system expansion unit or I/O tower. “PWR1911” on page 152You are here because of a power problem on a dual line cord system. If the failing unit does not have a dual line cord, return to the procedure that sent you here or go to the next item in the FRU list. “PWR1917” on page 157This procedure is used to display or change the configuration ID. “PWR1918” on page 159A voltage regulator card might be failing. “PWR1920” on page 160Use this procedure to verify that the lights on the server control panel and the display panel on all attached I/O expansion units are operating correctly.Power problems Use the following table to learn how to begin analyzing a power problem. Table 17. Analyzing power problems Symptom What you should do System unit does not power on. See “Cannot power on system unit.” The processor or I/O expansion unit does not power off. See “Cannot power off system or SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit” on page 132. The system does not remain powered on during a loss of incoming ac voltage and has an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) installed. Refer to the UPS user’s guide that was provided with your unit. An I/O expansion unit does not power on. See “Cannot power on SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit” on page 136. “Cannot power on system unit”Perform this procedure until you correct the problem and you can power on the system. “Cannot power off system or SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit” on page 132Use this procedure to analyze a failure of the normal command and control panel procedures to power off the system unit or an SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit. “Cannot power on SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit” on page 136You are here because an SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit cannot be powered on, and might be displaying a 1xxx-C62E reference code.Cannot power on system unit Perform this procedure until you correct the problem and you can power on the system. For important safety information before continuing with this procedure, see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. 1. Attempt to power on the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). Does the system power on, and is the system power status indicator light on continuously? Note: The system power status indicator blinks at the slower rate (one blink per two seconds) while powered off, and at the faster rate (one blink per second) during a normal power-on sequence. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 129 No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 13 on page 131. 2. Are there any characters displayed on the control panel (a scrolling dot may be visible as a character)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 5. 3. Are the mainline ac power cables from the power supply, power distribution unit, or external uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to the customer’s ac power outlet connected and seated correctly at both ends? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Connect the mainline ac power cables correctly at both ends and go to step 1 on page 129. 4. Perform the following: a. Verify that the UPS is powered on (if it is installed). If the UPS will not power on, follow the service procedures for the UPS to ensure proper line voltage and UPS operation. b. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable or ac power jumper cable from the system’s ac power connector at the system. c. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the system end of the mainline ac power cable or ac power jumper cable. Note: Some system models have more than one mainline ac power cable or ac power jumper cable. For these models, disconnect all the mainline ac power cables or ac power jumper cables and measure the ac voltage at each cable before continuing with the next step. Is the ac voltage from 200 V ac to 240 V ac, or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? No: Go to step 8 on page 131. Yes: Continue with the next step. 5. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable(s) from the power outlet. b. Exchange the system unit control panel (Un-D1) (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Reconnect the mainline ac power cables to the power outlet. d. Attempt to power on the system.Does the system power on? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The system unit control panel was the failing item. This ends the procedure. 6. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable(s) from the power outlet. b. Exchange the power supply or supplies (Un-E1, Un-E2) (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Reconnect the mainline ac power cables to the power outlet. d. Attempt to power on the system.Does the system power on? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The power supply was the failing item. This ends the procedure. 7. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable(s). b. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1) (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Reconnect the mainline ac power cables to the power outlet. d. Attempt to power on the system.Does the system power on? 130 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The system backplane was the failing item. This ends the procedure. 8. Are you working on a system unit with a power distribution unit with tripped breakers? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Reset the tripped power distribution breaker. b. Verify that the removable ac power cable is not the problem. Replace the cord, as installed, if it is defective. c. If the breaker continues to trip, install a new power supply (as installed) in each location until the defective one is found. This ends the procedure. 9. Does the system have an external UPS installed? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11.10. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the external UPS outlets. Is the ac voltage from 200 V ac to 240 V or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? No: The UPS needs service. For 9910 type UPS, call IBM Service Support. For all other UPS types, have the customer call the UPS provider. In the meantime, go to step 12 to bypass the UPS. Yes: Exchange the ac power cable, as installed (see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691). This ends the procedure.11. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable from the customer’s ac power outlet. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the customer’s ac power outlet. Note: Some system models have more than one mainline ac power cable. For these models, disconnect all the mainline ac power cables and measure the ac voltage at all ac power outlets before continuing with this step. Is the ac voltage from 200 V ac to 240 V ac or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? Yes: Exchange the mainline ac power cable. See the Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. Then go to step 1 on page 129. No: Inform the customer that the ac voltage at the power outlet is not correct. When the ac voltage at the power outlet is correct, reconnect the mainline ac power cables to the power outlet. This ends the procedure.12. Perform the following to bypass the UPS unit: a. Power off your system and the UPS unit. b. Remove the signal cable used between the UPS and the system. c. Remove any power jumper cords used between the UPS and the attached devices. d. Remove the country or region-specific power cord used from the UPS to the wall outlet. e. Use the correct power cord (the original country or region-specific power cord that was provided with your system) and connect it to the power inlet on the system. Plug the other end of this cord into a compatible wall outlet. f. Attempt to power on the system.Does the power-on standby sequence complete successfully? Yes: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 5 on page 130.13. Display the selected IPL mode on the system unit control panel. See ’IPL information’ in Progress Codes, SA76-0093. Is the selected mode the same mode that the customer was using when the power-on failure occurred? No: Go to step 15 on page 132. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 131 Yes: Continue with the next step.14. Is a function 11 reference code displayed on the system unit control panel? No: Go to step 16. Yes: Return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.15. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Select the mode on the system unit control panel that the customer was using when the power-on failure occurred. c. Attempt to power on the system.Does the system power on? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Exchange the system unit control panel (Un-D1) (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). This ends the procedure.16. Continue the IPL. Does the IPL complete successfully? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.Cannot power off system or SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit Use this procedure to analyze a failure of the normal command and control panel procedures to power off the system unit or an SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit. Attention: To prevent loss of data, ask the customer to verify that no interactive jobs are running before you perform this procedure. For important safety information before continuing with this procedure, see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. 1. Is the power off problem on the system unit? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 3. 2. Ensure that the SPCN cables that connect the units are connected and seated correctly at both ends. Does the I/O unit power off, and is the power indicator light blinking slowly? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 7 on page 133. 3. Attempt to power off the system. Does the system unit power off, and is the power indicator light blinking slowly? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The system is not responding to normal power off procedures which could indicate a Licensed Internal Code problem. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 4. Attempt to power off the system using ASMI. Does the system power off? Yes: The system is not responding to normal power off procedures which could indicate a Licensed Internal Code problem. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step. 5. Attempt to power off the system using the control panel power button. Does the system power off? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 10 on page 133. 6. Is there a reference code logged in either ASMI, the control panel, or the HMC that indicates a power problem? Yes: Perform problem analysis for the reference code in the log. This ends the procedure. 132 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 7. Is the I/O expansion unit that will not power off part of a shared I/O tower loop? Yes: Go to step 9. No: Continue with the next step. 8. Attempt to power off the I/O expansion unit. Were you able to power off the expansion unit? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 10. 9. The unit will only power off under certain conditions: v If the unit is in private mode, it should power off with the system unit that is connected by the SPCN frame-to-frame cable. v If the unit is in switchable mode, it should power off if the ?owning? system is powered off or is powering off, and the system unit that is connected by the SPCN frame-to-frame cable is powered off or is powering off. Does the I/O expansion unit power off? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: This ends the procedure.10. Ensure there are no jobs running on the system or partition, and verify that an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is not powering the system or I/O expansion unit. Then continue with the next step. 11. Perform the following: a. Remove the system or I/O expansion unit ac power cord from the external UPS or, if an external UPS is not installed, from the customer’s ac power outlet. If the system or I/O expansion unit has more than one ac line cord, disconnect all the ac line cords. b. Exchange the following FRUs one at a time (see “Physical Locations” on page 339 and Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691). If the system unit is failing: 1) Power supply (Un-E1 or Un-E2). Go to step 12 2) System backplane (Un-P1) 3) System control panel (Un-D1) If an I/O expansion unit is failing: 1) Each power supply. Go to step 12 2) I/O backplane 3) I/O backplane in the unit preceding the unit that will not power off 4) SPCN frame-to-frame cable This ends the procedure.12. A power supply might be the failing item. Attention: When replacing a redundant power supply, a 1xxx 1504, 1514, 1524, or 1534 reference code may be logged in the error log. If you just removed and replaced the power supply in the location associated with this reference code, and the power supply came ready after the install, disregard this reference code. If you had not previously removed and replaced a power supply, the power supply did not come ready after installation, or there are repeated fan fault errors after the power supply replacement, continue to follow these steps. Is the reference code 1xxx-15xx? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Perform the following:a. Find the unit reference code in one of the following tables to determine the failing power supply. b. Ensure that the power cables are properly connected and seated. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 133 c. Is the reference code 1xxx-1500, 1510, 1520, or 1530 and is the failing unit configured with a redundant power supply option (or dual line cord feature)? v Yes: Perform “PWR1911” on page 152 before replacing parts. v No: Continue with step 12dd. Refer to “Physical Locations” on page 339 to determine the location and part number of the failing item. e. Replace the failing power supply (see the following tables to determine which power supply to replace). f. If the new power supply does not fix the problem, perform the following : 1) Reinstall the original power supply. 2) Try the new power supply in each of the other positions listed in the table. 3) If the problem still is not fixed, reinstall the original power supply and go to the next FRU in the list. 4) For reference codes 1xxx-1500, 1510, 1520, and 1530, exchange the power distribution backplane if a problem persists after replacing the power supply. Table 18. Model 8203-E4A Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 7110 E1 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 7120 E2 Table 19. Model 8203-E4A (Quiet office) Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 7110 E1 Attention: For reference codes 1500, 1510, 1520, and 1530, perform “PWR1911” on page 152 before replacing parts. Table 20. 5088, 0588 expansion units Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1516 P02 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1526 P01 Attention: On a dual line cord system, for reference codes 1500, 1510, 1520, and 1530, perform “PWR1911” on page 152 before replacing parts. On a single line cord system, check the ac jumper to the power supply before replacing parts. Table 21. 5094, 5294 I/O expansion units (single line cord) Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1516 P01 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1526 P02 1530, 1531, 1532, 1533, 1534, 1536 P03 Attention: On a dual line cord system, for reference codes 1500, 1510, 1520, and 1530, perform “PWR1911” on page 152 before replacing parts. On a single line cord system, check the ac jumper to the power supply before replacing parts. 134 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Attention: For 5094, 5294 expansion units, do not install power supplies P00 and P01 ac jumper cables on the same ac input module. Table 22. 5094, 5294 I/O expansion units (dual line cord) Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1500, 1501, 1502, 1503 P00 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1516 P01 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1526 P02 1530, 1531, 1532, 1533 P03 Table 23. 5095, 0595, 5790, 7311-D11, 7311-D20, 7314-G30 expansion units Unit Reference Code Power Supply 1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1516, 1517 P01/E1 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1526, 1527 P02/E2 This ends the procedure. 13. Is the reference code 1xxx-2600, 2603, 2605, or 2606? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following:a. Refer to “Physical Locations” on page 339 to determine the location and part number of the failing item. b. Replace the failing power supply. c. Perform the following if the new power supply does not fix the problem: 1) Reinstall the original power supply. 2) Try the new power supply in each of the other positions listed in the table. 3) If the problem still is not fixed, reinstall the original power supply and go to the next FRU in the list. Attention: Do not install power supplies P00 and P01 ac jumper cables on the same ac input module. Table 24. Failing power supplies System or Feature Code Failing Power Supply 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, or 9408-M25 Un-E1, Un-E2 5094, 5294 (single line cord) P01, P02, P03 5094, 5294 (dual line cord) P00, P01, P02, P03 5088, 0588 P02, P01 5095, 0595 P01, P02 5790, 7311-D11, 7311-D20, 7314-G30 E1, E2 This ends the procedure.14. Is the reference code 1xxx 8455 or 8456? v No: Return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure. v Yes: One of the power supplies is missing, and must be installed. Use the following table to determine which power supply is missing, and install the power supply ( see “Physical Locations” on page 339 to determine the part number and exchange procedure). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 135 Table 25. Missing power supplies Reference Code Missing Power Supply 1xxx 8455 Un-E1 1xxx 8456 Un-E2 This ends the procedure.Cannot power on SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit You are here because an SPCN-controlled I/O expansion unit cannot be powered on, and might be displaying a 1xxx-C62E reference code. For important safety information before continuing with this procedure, see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. 1. Power on the system. 2. Starting from SPCN 0 or SPCN 1 on the system unit (see “Physical Locations” on page 339), go to the first unit in the SPCN frame-to-frame cable sequence that does not power on. Is the Data display background light on, or is the power-on LED blinking, or are there any characters displayed on the I/O expansion unit display panel?Note: The background light is a dim yellow light in the Data area of the display panel. Yes: Go to step 12 on page 138. No: Continue with the next step. 3. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the customer’s ac power outlet. Is the ac voltage from 200 V ac to 240 V ac, or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Inform the customer that the ac voltage at the power outlet is not correct. This ends the procedure. 4. Is the mainline ac power cable from the ac module, power supply, or power distribution unit to the customer’s ac power outlet connected and seated correctly at both ends? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Connect the mainline ac power cable correctly at both ends. This ends the procedure. 5. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable from the ac module, power supply, or power distribution unit. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the ac module, power supply, or power distribution unit end of the mainline ac power cable.Is the ac voltage from 200 V ac to 240 V ac, or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 7 on page 137. 6. Are you working on a power distribution unit with tripped breakers? v No: Exchange the mainline ac power cable or power distribution unit (as installed). This ends the procedure. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Reset the tripped power distribution breaker. b. Verify that the removable ac line cord is not the problem. Replace the cord, as installed, if it is defective. c. Install a new power supply (as installed) in all power locations until the defective one is found. 136 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) This ends the procedure. 7. Does the unit you are working on have ac power jumper cables installed? Note: The ac power jumper cables connect from the ac module, or the power distribution unit to the power supplies. Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11. 8. Are the ac power jumper cables connected and seated correctly at both ends? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Connect the ac power jumper cables correctly at both ends. This ends the procedure. 9. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the ac power jumper cables from the ac module, or power distribution unit. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the ac module or power distribution unit (that goes to the power supplies).Is the ac voltage at the ac module or power distribution unit from 200 V ac to 240 V ac, or from 100 V ac to 127 V ac? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Exchange the following as they are installed (see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691): – ac module – Power distribution unit This ends the procedure.10. Perform the following: a. Connect the ac power jumper cables to the ac module, or power distribution unit. b. Disconnect the ac power jumper cable at the power supplies. c. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage of the power jumper cables input to the power supplies.Is the voltage 200 V ac to 240 V ac or 100 V ac to 127 V ac for each power jumper cable? v No: Exchange the power jumper cable. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Exchange the following parts, as installed, one at a time: a. One of the FRUs listed in the following table, according to the enclosure: Table 26. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane b. Display unit c. Power supply 1 d. Power supply 2 e. Power supply 3 This ends the procedure.11. Perform the following: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 137 a. Disconnect the mainline ac power cable (to the expansion unit) from the customer’s ac power outlet. b. Exchange the following FRUs, one at a time: v Power supply. v One of the FRUs listed in the following table, according to the enclosure: Table 27. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane c. Reconnect the mainline ac power cables (from the expansion unit) into the power outlet. d. Attempt to power on the system.Does the expansion unit power on? v Yes: The unit you exchanged was the failing item. This ends the procedure. v No: Repeat this step and exchange the next FRU in the list. If you have exchanged all of the FRUs in the list, ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.12. Is there a reference code displayed on the display panel for the I/O unit that does not power on? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Replace the FRU listed in the following table, according to the enclosure: Table 28. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane This ends the procedure.13. Is the reference code 1xxx xx2E? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Use the new reference code and return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.14. Do the SPCN optical cables (A) connect the failing unit (B) to the preceding unit in the chain or loop? .---------. (A) SPCN | System | Optical Cables -. .----- SPCN | Unit | | V Optical Adapter | SPCN 0 | .-. V .-. ’----.----’ | +------------+ | | | +------------+ | .----’----. .-------’-+ .-------’-+ .---------. | J15 | |Sec J16| |Sec J15| | Sec | 138 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) |Sec Unit +-+UNIT J15| |Unit J16+-+J15 Unit | | 1 | | 2 | | 3 | | 4 | ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ^ | ’---- (B) Failing Unit Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 18 on page 140.15. Remove the SPCN optical adapter (A) from the preceding frame in the string that cannot become powered on. .---------. .--- (A) SPCN Optical Adapter | System | | | Unit | V | SPCN 0 | .-. .-. ’----.----’ | +------------+ | 322 | +------------+ | .----’----. .-------’-+ .-------’-+ .---------. | J15 | |Sec J16| |Sec J15| | Sec | |Sec Unit +-+Unit J15| |Unit J16+-+J15 Unit | | 1 | | 2 | | 3 | | 4 | ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ^ | ’-- Failing Unit 16. Perform the following: Notes: a. The cable may be connected to either J15 or J16. b. Use an insulated probe or jumper when performing the voltage readings.a. Connect the negative lead of a multimeter to the system frame ground. b. Connect the positive lead of a multimeter to pin 2 of the connector from which you removed the SPCN optical adapter in the previous step of this procedure. c. Note the voltage reading on pin 2. d. Move the positive lead of the multimeter to pin 3 of the connector or SPCN card. e. Note the voltage reading on pin 3.Is the voltage on both pin 2 and pin 3 from 1.5 V dc to 5.5 V dc? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Exchange the FRU listed in the following table, according to the enclosure: Table 29. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane This ends the procedure.17. Exchange the following FRUs, one at a time: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 139 a. In the failing unit (first frame with a failure indication), replace the following: Table 30. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane b. In the preceding unit in the string, replace the FRU in Table 30. c. SPCN optical adapter (A) in the preceding unit in the string. d. SPCN optical adapter (B) in the failing unit. e. SPCN optical cables (C) between the preceding unit in the string and the failing unit.This ends the procedure. (A) SPCN Optical .----- (C) SPCN Adapter ----. | Optical Cables | | | | .-- (B) SPCN .---------. | | | Optical | System | | | | Adapter | Unit | V | V | SPCN 0 | .-. V .-. ’----.----’ | +------------+ | | | +------------+ | .----’----. .-------’-+ .-------’-+ .---------. |Sec J15 | | Sec J16| |Sec J15| | Sec | |Unit J16+-+J15 Unit | |Unit J16+-+J15 Unit | | 1 | | 2 | | 3 | | 4 | ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ’---------’ ^ | | ’--- Failing Unit 18. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect the SPCN frame-to-frame cable from the connector of the first unit that cannot be powered on. c. Connect the negative lead of a multimeter to the system frame ground. d. Connect the positive lead of the multimeter to pin 2 of the SPCN cable. Note: Use an insulated probe or jumper when performing the voltage readings. e. Note the voltage reading on pin 2. f. Move the positive lead of the multimeter to pin 3 of the SPCN cable. g. Note the voltage reading on pin 3.Is the voltage on both pin 2 and pin 3 from 1.5 V dc to 5.5 V dc? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Exchange the following FRUs one at a time: 140 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. In the failing unit, replace the FRU listed in the following table: Table 31. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane b. In the preceding unit in the string, replace the FRU in Table 31. c. SPCN frame-to-frame cable. This ends the procedure.19. Perform the following: a. Follow the SPCN frame-to-frame cable back to the preceding unit in the string. b. Disconnect the SPCN cable from the connector. c. Connect the negative lead of a multimeter to the system frame ground. d. Connect the positive lead of a multimeter to pin 2 of the connector. Note: Use an insulated probe or jumper when performing the voltage readings. e. Note the voltage reading on pin 2. f. Move the positive lead of the multimeter to pin 3 of the connector. g. Note the voltage reading on pin 3.Is the voltage on both pin 2 and pin 3 from 1.5 V dc to 5.5 V dc? v Yes: Exchange the following FRUs one at a time: a. SPCN frame-to-frame cable. b. In the failing unit, replace the following: Table 32. Enclosures FRU to be exchanged Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane c. In the preceding unit in the string, replace the FRU in Table 32. This ends the procedure. v No: Exchange the FRU in Table 32 from the unit from which you disconnected the SPCN cable in the previous step of this procedure. This ends the procedure.PWR1900 Determine which procedure to use based on the model number. Follow the instructions for the model or expansion unit you are servicing. For models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25 perform “PWR1905” on page 142. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 141 For 5094 and 5294 units, perform “PWR1906” on page 144. For 5088 and 0588 units, perform “PWR1908” on page 148. For 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7314-G30. 7311-D11, and 7311-D20 units, perform “PWR1909” on page 150. This ends the procedure. PWR1905 A system unit power supply load fault is occurring. Refer to “Power isolation procedures” on page 128 for important safety information before servicing the system. Instructions for Models 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, or 9408-M25 1. Is the reference code 1xxx 1B01? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This procedure only isolates problems that cause 1xxx 1B01 to be logged. Return to the procedure that sent you here. This ends the procedure. 2. Perform the following: a. Power off the system and disconnect the ac power cable from the unit you are working on. b. Disconnect all the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, and disk units) by sliding them partially out of the system unit (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Remove and label all cards (for example, PCI adapters, GX adapter(s), RIO/HSL, and RAID cards if installed). d. Reconnect the ac power cable or cables to the unit you are working on. e. Power on the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588).Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 5. 3. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Replace one of the system fans (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Power on the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588).Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The fan you just replaced was the failing item. This ends the procedure. 4. Have you tried replacing all the fans? v Yes: Reinstall the fan you just replaced in step 3 and continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reinstall the fan that you just removed in step 3 to its original location. c. Repeat step 3 5. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reinstall all the cards (PCI adapters, memory DIMMs, GX adapter(s), RIO/HSL and RAID cards) you removed in step 2 into their original locations. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? 142 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8. 6. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect one of the cards you reinstalled in step 5 on page 142. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Exchange the last card you disconnected in this step (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). This ends the procedure. 7. Have you disconnected all the cards? No: Repeat step 6. Yes: Reinstall all of the parts removed or exchanged in this procedure and return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure. 8. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reconnect all of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, and disk units) that you disconnected in step 2 on page 142. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem has been resolved. This ends the procedure. 9. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect one of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, and disk units) that you reconnected in step 8. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Exchange the last I/O device you disconnected in this step (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). This ends the procedure.10. Have you tried disconnecting all of the I/O devices? No: Repeat step 9. Yes: Continue with the next step.11. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Reinstall all of the parts you have removed or exchanged in this procedure. Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The system is fixed. This ends the procedure.12. Does the system contain only one power supply? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 14 on page 144.13. Replace the power supply. Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Contact your service support.This ends the procedure. No: The system is fixed. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 143 14. Power off the system. Remove one of the power supplies, then power on the system. Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The power supply you just removed is defective. Replace it. This ends the procedure.15. Power off the system. Reinstall the power supply that was removed in step 14, and remove the other power supply. Power on the system. Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The power supply you just removed is defective. Replace it. This ends the procedure.16. Power off the system. Replace both power supplies. Power on the system. Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Contact your service support.This ends the procedure. No: The system is fixed. This ends the procedure.PWR1906 The server detected an error in the power system. Please see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128 for important safety information before servicing the system. PWR1906 Instructions for 5094 and 5294 expansion units 1. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Disconnect all the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, and disk units) from the unit that you are working on by sliding them partially out of the unit. See the service guide for the unit you are servicing. c. Remove and label all of the cards that are installed in the PCI adapter slots. d. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9 on page 145. 2. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Remove, in order, all power supplies except the first one (either P00 or P01 depending on the configuration). c. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 4 on page 145. 3. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Remove the power supply that was left installed in step 2. c. Reconnect the next power supply in order (P01 or P02). d. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Go to step 5 on page 145. v No: Exchange the power supply you removed in step 3b. 144 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) This ends the procedure. 4. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Reconnect the next power supply in order. c. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v No: Repeat this step until all power supplies have been reconnected. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Exchange the power supply that you reconnected in this step. This ends the procedure. 5. Perform the following: a. Remove one of the fans from the unit you are working on that you did not previously remove during this procedure. Note: Disregard a fan reference code if it occurs during this step. b. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The fan that you removed in this step is the failing item. This ends the procedure. 6. Have you removed all of the fans, one at a time? v Yes: Install all of the fans and continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Reinstall the fan that was removed in step 5 to its original location. c. Repeat step 5. 7. Perform the following: a. Remove the power cable (that was not previously removed) from one of the lower DASD device boards (CB1 or CB2). b. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Replace the DASD device board that the power cable was removed from in this step. This ends the procedure. 8. Is a second lower DASD backplane installed and its power cable connected? v Yes: Repeat step 7. v No: Replace the following one at a time: a. DASD upper device board (DB3) b. I/O enclosure backplane (CB1). This ends the procedure. 9. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Reinstall all of the cards that you removed in step 1 on page 144. c. Reconnect the ac power cable to the unit that you are working on. d. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 145 Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 12.10. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Disconnect one of the cards that you connected in step 9 on page 145. c. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Exchange the last card that you disconnected in this step. This ends the procedure.11. Have you disconnected all the cards? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Repeat step 10.12. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. Reconnect all of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, or disk units) that you disconnected in step 1 on page 144. c. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.13. Perform the following: a. Power off the unit you are working on. b. If you have not already done so, disconnect all of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, or disk units) that you reconnected in step 12. c. Reconnect one of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, or disk units) that you just disconnected. d. Power on the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Exchange the last I/O device that you reconnected in this step. This ends the procedure.14. Have you reconnected all the I/O devices? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Repeat step 13 (you can skip part b).PWR1907 A unit was dropped from the SPCN configuration. 1. Is the reference code you are working with 1xxx 913B? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: A system power control network (SPCN) firmware update is needed, but not started due to the SPCN firmware update policy setting. A manual update needs to be started.Notes: – Do not perform maintenance on an expansion unit or modify the SPCN network while the SPCN firmware update is being performed. 146 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) – Performing firmware updates or powering off the system will interrupt SPCN firmware updates and the firmware update will need to be started again after these actions.a. Access the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) and select System Configuration and then Configure I/O Enclosures. b. Record the current SPCN firmware update policy setting so it can be restored later. c. Change the SPCN firmware update policy setting to expanded and click Save Policy Setting to allow for SPCN firmware updates to be done over the RIO/HSL and serial SPCN interfaces. d. Select Start SPCN Firmware Update. The SPCN firmware will now be downloaded to the expansion units that require an update. e. Change the SPCN firmware update policy setting back to what it was originally set to in step 1b and click on Save Policy Setting. Note: The SPCN firmware update can be stopped using the Stop SPCN Firmware Update button. However, to allow the expansion units to be updated to the latest SPCN firmware level, it is recommended that the firmware update be allowed to complete. The progress of the SPCN firmware update can be monitored by clicking on Configure I/O Enclosures to update the screen. Do not use the browser Back or Refresh button to monitor the update progress. The Power Control Network Firmware Update Status column shows the percentage complete and In Progress is displayed while the download is progresses. Not Required is displayed when the download process completes. This ends the procedure. 2. Is the reference code you are working with 1xxx 90F0? v No: Contact your next level of support. v Yes: A unit was dropped from the SPCN configuration. This can be caused by any of the following: – The rack or unit has lost all ac or dc power. – The SPCN function in the unit has an error. – The SPCN frame-to-frame cables, RIO cable or the remote I/O (RIO) adapter card has failed.3. Using the HMC or ASMI, find the 1xxx 90F0 SRC in the error log (see “Displaying error and event logs” on page 649). Use the option Show details to display the location information for the failing unit. 4. After locating the failing unit, ensure that the SPCN frame-to-frame cable and RIO cables are seated correctly; reseat the cables if necessary. Are the cables connected correctly? v No: Correctly reconnect the cables, or replace them if necessary. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.5. Are the ac line cords on the failing unit connected properly at both ends? v No: Reconnect the ac line cords, or replace them if necessary. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.6. Check the voltage at the customer’s ac outlet. Is the voltage correct? v No: Inform the customer that the voltage at the ac power outlet is incorrect. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.7. Are the power supplies functional? v No: Perform the following: a. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to determine the location and part number for each power supply, and to find the appropriate procedure for exchanging the power supplies. b. Replace each power supply one at a time, until the problem has been resolved. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 147 c. If the problem persists after replacing all of the power supplies, continue with the next step.v Yes: Continue with the next step.8. Use the following table to determine the FRUs to replace. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing FRUs. This ends the procedure. Table 33. Expansion enclosures FRUs Enclosure FRU 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane PWR1908 A power supply fault or load fault has occurred in a 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. For important safety information before servicing the system, see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. For location information, see the service guide for the enclosure you are working on. PWR1908 instructions for 5088 or 0588 expansion units Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Perform the following: a. Power off the frame that you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove and label all cards installed in the PCI backplane area. c. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac jumper cable to the unit.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8 on page 149.2. Is the reference code 1xxx 2603? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the PCI backplane. This ends the procedure.3. Perform the following: a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove power supply P01. c. Remove fan assembly B01 from power supply P01 and install it on a new power supply P01. d. Install the new power supply P01. e. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac jumper cable to the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The power supply that you replaced in this step was the failing item. This ends the procedure.4. Perform the following: 148 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove the new power supply P01 and replace it with the original power supply P01. c. Remove power supply P02. d. Remove fan assembly B02 from power supply P02 and install it on a new power supply P02. e. Install the new power supply P02. f. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac jumper cable to the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The power supply that you replaced in this step was the failing item. This ends the procedure.5. Perform the following: a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove both the new power supply P02 and the fan assembly B02. c. Reinstall the original power supply P02 and a new fan assembly B02. d. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac power cables to the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The fan assembly B02 that you replaced in this step was the failing item. This ends the procedure.6. Perform the following: a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove power supply P02. c. Replace the new fan assembly B02 with the original fan assembly B02. d. Reinstall power supply P02. e. Remove power supply P01. f. Remove fan assembly B01 and replace it with a new fan assembly B01. g. Reinstall power supply P01. h. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac jumper cable to the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The fan assembly B01 that you removed in this step is the failing item. This ends the procedure.7. Perform the following: a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Remove power supply P01. c. Replace fan assembly B01 with the original fan assembly B01. d. Reinstall power supply P01. e. Replace the following FRUs one at a time: v Display panel. v PCI backplane assembly CB1. This ends the procedure.8. Perform the following: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 149 a. Power off the frame you are working on by removing the ac jumper cable from the power supplies on the 5088 or 0588 expansion unit. b. Reinstall one of the cards that you removed in step 1 on page 148. c. Power on the frame by reconnecting the ac power cables to the unit you are working on.Does a power reference code occur? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Exchange the last card that you reinstalled in this step. This ends the procedure.9. Have you reinstalled all of the cards? v Yes: Replace the PCI backplane assembly CB1. This ends the procedure. v No: Repeat step 8 on page 149, reinstalling the next card.PWR1909 A power supply load fault is occurring in a system expansion unit or I/O tower. For important safety information before servicing the system, refer to “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. Instructions for 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7311-D11, 7311-D20 and 7314-G30 Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect all the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, and disk units) from the expansion unit or I/O tower you are working on by sliding them partially out of the unit (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). c. Remove and label all cards installed in the PCI adapters area. d. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8 on page 151. 2. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Remove one of the fans from the expansion unit or I/O tower that you have not previously removed during this procedure. Note: If a fan reference code occurs during this step, ignore it. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The fan you removed in this step is the failing item. This ends the procedure. 3. Have you removed all of the fans one at a time? v No: Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reinstall the fan that you removed in step 2 into its original location. c. Repeat step 2. 150 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Yes: Reinstall all of the fans and continue with the next step. 4. Perform the following: Note: If there are no DASD installed in this enclosure, go to step 6. a. Power off the system. b. Remove the I/O tower power supply cable, at the DASD backplane, that you have not previously removed. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? v No: The DASD backplane that was disconnected in this step is the failing item. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step. 5. Have you disconnected the power cables from each of the DASD backplanes one at a time? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Repeat step 4. 6. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Remove a power supply that you have not previously removed, and replace it with a new one. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The power supply that was removed in this step is the failing item. This ends the procedure. 7. Have you removed all of the power supplies one at a time? v Yes: Perform the following: a. Remove the new power supply that you installed in step 6 and reinstall the original power supply. b. Replace the I/O backplane if you are working on a 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796. Replace the tower backplane if you are working on a 5095 or 0595. This ends the procedure.v No: Remove the new power supply that you installed in step 6 and reinstall the original power supply. Then, repeat step 6. 8. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reinstall all of the cards you removed in step 1 on page 150. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11 on page 152. 9. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect one of the cards you reconnected in step 8. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 151 v No: Exchange the last card you disconnected in this step (see Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691) Reinstall all the parts. This ends the procedure.10. Have you disconnected all the cards? v No: Repeat step 9 on page 151. v Yes: Reinstall all the parts and return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.11. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reconnect all of the I/O devices (tape, diskette, optical, or disk units) that you disconnected in step 1 on page 150. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.12. Perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Disconnect one of the I/O devices you reconnected in step 11. c. Power on the system.Does a power reference code occur? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Exchange the last I/O device you disconnected in this step. This ends the procedure.13. Have you disconnected all of the I/O devices? v No: Repeat step 12. v Yes: Reinstall all the parts and return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.PWR1911 You are here because of a power problem on a dual line cord system. If the failing unit does not have a dual line cord, return to the procedure that sent you here or go to the next item in the FRU list. The following steps are for the system unit, unless other instructions are given. For important safety information before servicing the system, refer to “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. 1. If an uninterruptible power supply is installed, verify that it is powered on before proceeding. 2. Are all the units powered on? v Yes: Go to step 7 on page 154. v No: On the unit that does not power on, perform the following: a. Disconnect the ac line cords from the unit that does not power on. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the system end of both ac line cords. Table 34. Correct ac voltage Model or expansion unit Correct ac voltage Model 8203-E4A and 5095, 0595, and 7311-D20 expansion units 100 V to 127 V or 200 V to 240 V 5796 and 7314-G30 expansion units 200 V to 240 V 152 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 34. Correct ac voltage (continued) Model or expansion unit Correct ac voltage 5088, 0588, 5094, 5294, 5790, and 7311-D11 expansion units 200 V to 240 V ac or dc c. Is the voltage correct (refer to Table 34 on page 152)? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 6 on page 154. 3. Are you working on a model 8203-E4A or a 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7314-G30, 7311-D11, or 7311-D20 expansion unit? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Reconnect the ac line cords. b. Verify that the failing unit fails to power on. c. Replace the failing power supply. Use the table below to determine which power supply needs replacing, and then see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for its location, part number, and exchange procedure. Table 35. Failing power supply for models 8203-E4A and 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7314-G30, 7311-D11 or 7311-D20 expansion units Reference code Models or expansion units Failing item name 1510 8203-E4A Power supply 1 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7314-G30, 7311-D11, 7311-D20 Power supply 1 1520 8203-E4A Power supply 2 5095, 0595, 5790, 5796, 7314-G30, 7311-D11, 7311-D20 Power supply 2 This ends the procedure. 4. Perform the following: a. Reconnect the ac line cord to the ac modules. b. Remove the ac jumper cables at the power supplies. c. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the power-supply end of the jumper cable.Is the ac voltage from 200 V to 240 V? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the failing power supply. Use the following table to determine which power supply must be replaced, and then see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for its location, part number, and exchange procedure. Attention: Do not install power supplies P00 and P01 ac jumper cables on the same ac module. Table 36. Failing power supply for 5094, 5294, 5088 or 0588 expansion units Reference code Failing item name 1500 Power supply 0 1510 Power supply 1 for 5094 or 5294 Power supply 2 for 5088 or 0588 1520 Power supply 2 for 5094 or 5294 Power supply 1 for 5088 or 0588 1530 Power supply 3 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 153 This ends the procedure. 5. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the ac jumper cable at the ac module output. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the ac module output.Is the ac voltage from 200 V to 240 V? v Yes: Exchange the ac jumper cable. This ends the procedure. v No: Exchange the ac module (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). This ends the procedure. 6. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the ac line cords from the customer’s ac power outlet. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the customer’s ac power outlet.Is the ac voltage correct (refer to Table 34 on page 152)? v Yes: Exchange the failing ac line cord. This ends the procedure. v No: Perform the following: a. Inform the customer that the ac voltage at the power outlet is not correct. b. Reconnect the ac line cords to the power outlet after the ac voltage at the power outlet is correct. This ends the procedure. 7. Is the reference code 1xxx00AC? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: This reference code may have been caused by an ac outage. If the system will power on without an error, no parts need to be replaced. This ends the procedure. 8. Is the reference code 1xxx1510 or 1520? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Use the following table, figures and Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 to locate the failing parts. Table 37. Power Reference Code Table Model or expansion unit Reference code Locate these parts 8203-E4A 1xxx 1510 Power supply E1 and ac line cord 1 1xxx 1520 Power supply E2 and ac line cord 2 5088 and 0588 (see Figure 2 on page 156) 1xxx 1510 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 2 and the ac module 1xxx 1520 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 1 and the ac module 154 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 37. Power Reference Code Table (continued) Model or expansion unit Reference code Locate these parts 5294 and 5094 (see Figure 1) 1xxx 1500 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 0 and the ac module 1xxx 1510 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 1 and the ac module 1xxx 1520 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 2 and the ac module 1xxx 1530 ac jumper cable connected to power supply 3 and the ac module 5095 and 0595 1xxx 1510 Power supply 1 and ac line cord 1 1xxx 1520 Power supply 2 and ac line cord 2 5790, 5796, 7314-G30, 7311-D11, 7311-D20 1xxx 1510 Power supply 1 and ac line cord 1 1xxx 1520 Power supply 2 and ac line cord 2 Figure 1. Dual line cord drawing for 5094 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 155 b. Locate the ac line cord or the ac jumper cable for the reference code you are working on. c. Go to step 10. 9. Is the reference code 1xxx 1500 or 1xxx 1530? v No: Perform Problem Analysis using the reference code. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Locate the ac jumper cables for the reference code you are working on (see Table 37 on page 154), and then continue with the next step: – If the reference code is 1xxx 1500, determine the locations of ac jumper cables that connect to power supply P00 (see the preceding figures). – If the reference code is 1xxx 1530, determine the locations of ac jumper cables that connect to power supply P03 (see the preceding figures).10. Perform the following: Attention: Do not disconnect the other system line cord when powered on. Attention: Do not disconnect the other ac jumper cable when powered on. a. For the reference code you are working on, disconnect either the ac jumper cable or the ac line cord from the power supply. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the power supply end of the ac jumper cable or the ac line cord. Figure 2. Dual line cord drawing for 5088, or 0588 installed on 5094 156 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Is the ac voltage correct (see Table 34 on page 152)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Exchange the failing power supply. Refer to Table 35 on page 153 and Table 36 on page 153 for its position, and then see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for part numbers and directions to the correct exchange procedures. This ends the procedure.11. Perform the following: a. Disconnect the ac line cords from the power outlet. b. Use a multimeter to measure the ac voltage at the customer’s ac power outlet.Is the ac voltage correct (see Table 34 on page 152)? v Yes: Exchange the following, one at a time: – Failing ac line cord – Failing ac jumper cable (if installed) – Failing ac module (if installed) (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for part numbers and directions to the correct exchange procedures) This ends the procedure. v No: Perform the following: a. Inform the customer that the ac voltage at the power outlet is not correct. b. Reconnect the ac line cords to the power outlet after the ac voltage at the power outlet is correct. This ends the procedure.PWR1917 This procedure is used to display or change the configuration ID. 1. Use either the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) or the control panel to display and change the configuration ID. v If you are using the ASMI, refer to the operations guide for your system and use the instructions for Changing system configuration. Use Table 38 on page 158 to find the correct configuration ID. v If you are using the control panel, continue with the next step.2. Perform the following to display the configuration ID: Attention: The system or unit that will display the ID must be powered off with ac power applied.Notes: v If you have just restored power to the system, the service processor must return to standby before control panel functions will work correctly. Returning the service processor to standby takes a few minutes after the panel appears to be operational. v You must have the panel in manual mode to access function 7 options.a. Select function 07 on the system control panel. Press Enter (07** will be displayed). b. Use the arrow keys to increment or decrement to subfunction A8. 07A8 will be displayed. Press Enter (07A8 00 will be displayed). c. Use the arrow keys to increment or decrement to the first byte of the unit address (usually 3C) for the box you want to check. 07nn will be displayed, where nn is the first byte of the unit address. d. Press Enter (073C 00, for example, will be displayed). e. Use the arrow keys to increment or decrement to the second byte of the unit address (usually 01, 02, etc for I/O expansion units) for the box you want to check. 07nn will be displayed, where nn is the second byte of the unit address (0701, for example, for a unit). Press Enter (0701 00, for example, will be displayed).Note: The display on the addressed I/O expansion unit being addressedshould be blinking on and off while displaying the configuration ID as the last two characters of the bottom line. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 157 f. Use the following table to check the unit configuration ID. Table 38. Unit Configuration IDs Model or expansion unit Configuration ID 5088 and 0588 89 5094 and 5294 8A 5095 and 0595 8B 7311-D11, 5790 88 7311-D20 8C 7314-G30, 5796 8D g. Is the correct configuration ID displayed for the tower selected? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Go to step 6.3. You need to set the unit configuration ID. Are you starting this step from the function 01 view on the control panel? v No: To ensure that the control panel operates properly, return to function 01. Do the following: a. The operator panel should still show the incorrect configuration ID (for example, 07C0). b. Press Enter. The control panel will now show 07xx 00 (for example, 07C0 00). c. Use the arrow keys to display 07**, then press Enter. The control panel will now show 07. d. Use the arrow keys to get the display to function 01, then press Enter. You should now be at the regular function 01 control panel view. e. Continue with the next step.v Yes: Continue with step 4.4. Set the unit configuration ID. Do the following: a. Select function 07 on the system control panel. Press Enter (07** will be displayed). b. Use the arrow keys to increment/decrement to subfunction A9 (07A9 will be displayed). Press Enter (07A9 00 will be displayed). c. Use the arrow keys to increment/decrement to the first byte of the unit address (usually 3C) for the box that you want to change. 07nn (073C, for example) will be displayed, where nn is the first byte of the unit address. Press Enter (073C 00, for example, will be displayed). d. Use the arrow keys to increment/decrement to the second byte of the unit address (usually 01, 02, etc for I/O Expansion units) for the box you want to check. 07nn will be displayed, where nn is the second byte of the unit address (01, for example, for a unit). Press Enter (0701 00, for example, will be displayed).Note: The display on the addressed I/O expansion unit will be blinking on and off. e. Use the arrow keys to increment/decrement to the correct configuration ID (refer to Table 38). 07xx will be displayed where xx is the configuration ID. f. Press Enter (07xx 00 will be displayed). After 20 to 30 seconds, the display on the addressed I/O expansion unit will stop blinking and return to the normal display format. Note: To return the panel to normal display, scroll to 07** and press Enter. g. Continue with the next step.5. Power on the system. Do you still get SRC 1xxxx84D0 or 1xxxx840E? v No: This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.6. Perform the following: 158 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Power off the system. b. Exchange the SPCN card in the failing frame. This ends the procedure.PWR1918 A voltage regulator card might be failing. For instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure, refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 1. Is the reference code 1xxx 8450? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: At least one processor VRM is missing. Inspect all of the processor cards and install the VRM that are missing (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). This ends the procedure.2. Is the reference code 1xxx 2630? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Replace VRM1A and VRM1B (which are one CRU/FRU) on processor 1 (Un-P1-C13) (see “Physical Locations” on page 339). This ends the procedure.3. Is the reference code 1xxx 2640? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Replace VRM1A and VRM1B (which are one CRU/FRU) on processor 2 (Un-P1-C14). This ends the procedure.4. Is the reference code 1xxx 2623? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, if present, one at a time, and in the order listed: a. Base RAID card (Un-P1-C10) b. Auxiliary RAID card (Un-P1-C9)This ends the procedure. 5. Is the reference code 1xxx 2624? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, if present, one at a time, and in the order listed: a. Ethernet card (Un-P1-C7) b. Base RAID card (Un-P1-C10) c. Auxiliary RAID card (Un-P1-C9) d. System backplane (Un-P1) e. DASD drives f. DASD and media backplane (Un-P2)This ends the procedure. 6. Is the reference code 1xxx 2625? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, if present, one at a time, and in the order listed: a. Base RAID card (Un-P1-C10) b. Auxiliary RAID card (Un-P1-C9) c. DASD drives d. DASD and media backplane (Un-P2) e. Ethernet card (Un-P1-C7) f. System backplane (Un-P1)This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 159 7. Is the reference code 1xxx 2626? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, if present: a. Ethernet card (Un-P1-C7)This ends the procedure. 8. Is the reference code 1xxx 2632? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, one at a time, and in the order listed: a. VRM2 for processor 1 (Un-P1-C18) b. System backplane (Un-P1)This ends the procedure. 9. Is the reference code 1xxx 2642? v No Continue with the next step. v Yes: Replace the following, one at a time, and in the order listed: a. VRM2 for processor 2 (Un-P1-C20) b. System backplane (Un-P1)This ends the procedure.PWR1920 Use this procedure to verify that the lights on the server control panel and the display panel on all attached I/O expansion units are operating correctly. For important safety information before continuing with this procedure, see “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Activate the lamp test by performing one of the following: v Select function 04 lamp test on the control panel and press Enter. v Sign on to ASMI and click System Configuration -> Service Indicators -> Lamp Test.2. Look at the server control panel and the display panels on all attached I/O towers. The lamp test is active only for 25 seconds after you press Enter. Check the following lights on the server control panel and all I/O enclosures and towers: v Power-on light. v Attention light. v All dots for the 32 character display.Are all the lights on the control panel and the I/O display panels on? v No: Go to step 4. v Yes: These control panel lights are working correctly. Continue with the next step.3. Are any abnormal characters or character patterns (not reference codes or normal display mode) displayed? v No: The lights are operating correctly. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Continue with the next step.4. Verify that all cables are seated correctly. If the problem persists, replace the control panel. If the problem still persists, use the following table to determine the possible causes for the lamp test failure: 160 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 39. Failing unit Failing unit FRU 8203-E4A, 9407-M15, or 9408-M25 System backplane 5088, 0588 Tower backplane assembly 5094, 5294, 8094-002 Tower backplane assembly 5095, 0595 Tower backplane assembly 7311-D11, 7314-G30, 5790 or 5796 I/O backplane 7311-D20 I/O backplane Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 161 Router isolation procedures These procedures serve as a guide to the correct isolation procedures from the reference code tables. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)Perform these procedures only when directed to do so from another procedure. “RTRIP01” on page 163Gives a link to a topic that might assist you when exchanging the I/O processor (IOP) for the system or partition console of i5/OS™. “RTRIP02” on page 163Gives a link to a topic that might assist you when diagnosing workstation IOP detected errors. “RTRIP03” on page 163Gives links to topics to assist you when diagnosing workstation IOP detected errors. “RTRIP05” on page 163Use the attached procedure when this reference code occurs for a RIO/HSL/12X loop resource, when an I/O expansion unit on the loop is powered off for a concurrent maintenance action. “RTRIP06” on page 164Use the attached procedure when this reference code occurs in a service action code (SAL). 162 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “RTRIP07” on page 165Gives a link to assist you when diagnosing a keyboard error. “RTRIP08” on page 165Gives a link to assist when the Licensed Internal Code detected an IOP programming problem.RTRIP01 Gives a link to a topic that might assist you when exchanging the I/O processor (IOP) for the system or partition console of i5/OS™. Perform “CONSL01” on page 27. RTRIP02 Gives a link to a topic that might assist you when diagnosing workstation IOP detected errors. Perform “TWSIP01” on page 234. RTRIP03 Gives links to topics to assist you when diagnosing workstation IOP detected errors. If you have a twinaxial terminal for the console, perform “TWSIP01” on page 234. Otherwise, perform “WSAIP01” on page 241. RTRIP05 Use the attached procedure when this reference code occurs for a RIO/HSL/12X loop resource, when an I/O expansion unit on the loop is powered off for a concurrent maintenance action. Note: This reference code can occur for the RIO/HSL/12X loop resource when an I/O expansion unit on the loop is powered off for a concurrent maintenance action.Note: A fiber optic cleaning kit may be required for optical RIO/HSL/12X connections. 1. Multiple B600 6982 errors may occur due to efforts to retry and recover. If the recovery efforts were successful, there will be a B600 6985 reference code with xxxx 3206 in word 4 logged after all B600 6982 reference codes in the product activity log (PAL). If this is the case, close out all the B600 6982 entries. Then continue with the next step. 2. Is there a B600 6987 reference code in the service action log (SAL) logged at about the same time? Yes: Close this problem and work the B600 6987. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.3. Is there a B600 6981 reference code in the SAL logged at approximately the same time? Yes: Go to step 8 on page 164. No: Continue with the next step.4. Perform “RIOIP06” on page 34 to determine if any other systems are connected to this loop and then return here. Note: The loop number can be found in the SAL in the description for the HSL_LNK FRU.Are there other systems connect to this loop? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8 on page 164.5. Check for HSL failures in the SALs on the other systems before replacing parts. HSL failures are indicated by SAL entries with HSL I/O bridge and Network Interface Controller (NIC) resources. Ignore B600 6982 and B600 6984 entries. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 163 Are there HSL failures on other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8.6. Repair the problems on the other systems and return to this step. After making repairs on the other systems check the PAL of this system. Is there a B600 6985, along with this loop’s resource name, that was logged after the repairs you made on the other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8.7. For the B600 6985 reference code you found, use “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15 to determine if the loop is now complete. Is the loop complete? Yes: The problem has been resolved. This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 8.8. The FRU list displayed in the SAL may be different from the failing item list given here. Use the SAL’s FRU list when it is available. Does this reference code appear in the SAL with the symbolic FRU HSL_LNK listed as a FRU? Yes: Perform “RIOIP01” on page 28. This ends the procedure. No: Exchange the FRUs listed in the SAL according to their part action codes. This ends the procedure.RTRIP06 Use the attached procedure when this reference code occurs in a service action code (SAL). Note: A fiber optic cleaning kit may be required for optical HSL connections. 1. Is the reference code in the service action log (SAL)? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The reference code is informational. Use “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15 to determine what the reference code means. This ends the procedure.2. This error can appear in the SAL if a tower or another system in the loop did not complete powering on before Licensed Internal Code (LIC) checked this loop for errors. Search the product activity log (PAL) for all B600 6985 reference codes logged for this loop and use “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15 to determine if this error requires service. Is further service required? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.3. There may be multiple B600 6985 reference codes, with xxxx 3205 in word 4, for the same loop resource in the SAL. This is caused by attempts to retry and recover. If there is a B600 6985 reference code with xxxx 3206 or xxxx 3208 in word 4 after the above B600 6985 entries in the PAL, then the recovery efforts were successful. If this is the case, close all the B600 6985 entries for that loop resource in the SAL. Then continue with the next step. 4. Is there a B600 6981 reference code in the SAL? Yes: Close that problem and go to step 9 on page 165. No: Continue with the next step.5. Perform “RIOIP06” on page 34 to determine if any other systems are connected to this loop and then return here. 164 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Note: The loop number can be found in the SAL in the description for the HSL_LNK FRU.Are there other systems connected to this loop? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9.6. Check for HSL failures in the SALs on the other systems before replacing parts. HSL failures are indicated by SAL entries with HSL I/O bridge and Network Interface Controller (NIC) resources. Ignore B600 6982 and B600 6984 entries. Are there HSL failures on other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9.7. Repair the problems on the other systems and return to this step. After making repairs on the other systems check the PAL of this system. Is there a B600 6985 reference code that was logged after the repairs you made on the other systems? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 9.8. For the B600 6985 log you found, use “Status indications for RIO/HSL” on page 15 to determine if the loop is now complete. Is the loop complete? v Yes: The problem has been resolved. This ends the procedure. v No: Go to step 9.9. The FRU list displayed in the SAL may be different from the failing item list given here. Use the SAL’s FRU list when it is available. Does this reference code appear in the SAL with the symbolic FRU HSL_LNK listed as a FRU? v Yes: Perform “RIOIP01” on page 28. This ends the procedure. v No: Exchange the FRUs listed in the SAL according to their part action codes. This ends the procedure.RTRIP07 Gives a link to assist you when diagnosing a keyboard error. Perform “WSAIP01” on page 241. RTRIP08 Gives a link to assist when the Licensed Internal Code detected an IOP programming problem. Perform a system IPL. Is the IPL successful? Yes: Perform “LICIP01” on page 91 to determine the cause of the problem.This ends the procedure. No: Perform the action described in the new reference code. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 165 SAS isolation procedures Use the following Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) isolation procedures if an HMC is not attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “SIP3110” on page 168This procedure resolves problems when disk units are incompatible or a disk unit is missing or failed. “SIP3111” on page 169This procedure resolves the problem when two or more disk units are missing from a RAID 5 or RAID 6 disk array. “SIP3112” on page 171This procedure resolves the problem when one or more disk array members are not at the required physical locations. “SIP3113” on page 172This procedure resolves problems when a disk array is or would become exposed and parity data is out of synchronization. 166 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “SIP3120” on page 174This procedure resolves the problem when Cache data associated with attached disk units cannot be found. “SIP3121” on page 175Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: RAID adapter resources not available due to previous problems (SRC xxxx9054). “SIP3130” on page 175Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Adapter does not support function expected by one or more disk units (SRC xxxx9008). “SIP3131” on page 177Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Required cache data cannot be located for one or more disk units (SRC xxxx9050). “SIP3132” on page 180Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Cache data exists for one or more missing or failed disk units (SRC xxxx9051). “SIP3134” on page 181Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Disk unit requires format before use (SRC xxxx9092). “SIP3140” on page 183Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Multiple adapters connected in an invalid configuration (SRC xxxx9073) “SIP3141” on page 184Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Multiple adapters not capable of similar functions or controlling same set of devices (SRC xxxx9074) “SIP3142” on page 185Use this procedure to resolve the following configuration error: incorrect connection between cascaded enclosures (SRC xxxx4010). “SIP3143” on page 187Use this procedure to resolve the following configuration error: connections exceed adapter design limits (SRC xxxx4020). “SIP3144” on page 188Use this procedure to resolve problems with multipath connections. “SIP3145” on page 191Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Unsupported enclosure function detected (SRC xxxx4110). “SIP3146” on page 193Use this procedure to resolve the configuration error: Incomplete multipath connection between enclosures and device detected (SRC xxxx4041). “SIP3147” on page 194Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Missing remote adapter (SRC xxxx9076) “SIP3148” on page 195Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Attached enclosure does not support required multipath function (SRC xxxx4050). “SIP3149” on page 197Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Incomplete multipath connection between adapter and remote adapter (SRC xxxx9075) “SIP3150” on page 197Use this procedure to perform serial attached SCSI (SAS) fabric problem isolation. “SIP3152” on page 199Use this procedure to resolve possible failed connection problems Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 167 “SIP3153” on page 201Go to SIP3152.SIP3110 This procedure resolves problems when disk units are incompatible or a disk unit is missing or failed. The following SRCs are possible: v SRC xxxx9025. Indicates that an incompatible disk unit is installed at the disk unit location that caused the array to be exposed. v SRC xxxx9030. Indicates that a disk array is exposed due to a missing or failed disk unit. v SRC xxxx9032. Indicates that a disk unit in a disk array is missing or failed, but the array is still protected.If you received SRC xxxx9030 or xxxx9032, one of the following occurred: v A disk unit has failed and the RAID array protection is exposed or will become exposed if another disk unit fails because no hot spare disk unit was available to replace it. If the array is exposed, then the array will continue to be exposed until the disk unit has been replaced and a manual rebuilding of the array has been started. v A disk unit has failed in a RAID array, but a hot spare was used to automatically start rebuilding the array. Replace, format, and configure the failed disk unit as a hot spare. Note: If the previous hot spare disk unit was a larger capacity than the failed disk unit, ensure that the customer understands that the replacement disk unit might not provide adequate hot spare coverage for all of the arrays under this adapter.1. Is the device location information for this SRC available in the service action log (see “Using the Service Action Log” on page 609 for details)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Exchange the disk unit. See “Disk Drive” on page 379. This ends the procedure.2. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the product activity log. Perform one of the following to access system service tools (SST) or dedicated service tools (DST): v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640.3. Perform the following steps: a. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. b. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. c. Continue with the next step.4. Perform the following steps: a. Return to the SST or DST main menu. b. Select Work with disk units ? Display disk configuration ? Display disk configuration status. c. On the Display disk configuration status display, look for the devices attached to the adapter that is identified in step 3.Is there a device that has a status of RAID 5/Unknown, RAID 6/Unknown, RAID 5/Failed, or RAID 6/Failed? No: Continue with step 7 on page 169. Yes: Continue with the next step. 168 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 5. Find the device that has a status of RAID 5/Unknown, RAID 6/Unknown, RAID 5/Failed, or RAID 6/Failed. This is the device that is causing the problem. Show the device address by selecting Display Disk Unit Details ? Display Detailed Address. Record the device address. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or of the expansion unit and find the following items: v The slot that is identified by the direct select address of the adapter v The disk unit location that is identified by the device address6. Have you determined the location of the adapter and disk unit that is causing the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Exchange the disk unit that is causing the problem. See “Disk Drive” on page 379. This ends the procedure.7. Press the function key to cancel and to return to the Display Disk Configuration menu, then do the following: a. Select Display disk hardware status. b. Find a device that is either Not operational or Read/write protected. c. Display details for the device and get the location of the failed disk unit. d. Exchange the disk unit and configure it as a hot spare. Go to “Disk Drive” on page 379. This ends the procedure.SIP3111 This procedure resolves the problem when two or more disk units are missing from a RAID 5 or RAID 6 disk array. The following SRCs are possible: v xxxx9020 v xxxx9021 v xxxx90221. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the Product Activity Log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the Product Activity Log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a current address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 169 Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a current address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addresses2. Perform one of the following options (listed in order of preference): Option 1 Power off the system or partition and install the identified disk units in the correct physical locations (that is the expected addresses) in the system. This ends the procedure. Option 2 Stop the disk array that contains the missing devices. Attention: Customer data might be lost. Perform the following: a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a type D IPL? No: Select Work with disk configuration ? Work with device parity protection. Then, continue with substep 2c. Yes: Continue with substep 2c.c. Select Stop device parity protection. d. Follow the online instructions to stop device parity protection. e. Perform an IPL from disk.Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Go to Starting a Service Call. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.Option 3 If the data on the disk units is not needed, initialize and format the remaining members of the disk array by performing the following steps:Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure. 170 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.SIP3112 This procedure resolves the problem when one or more disk array members are not at the required physical locations. The possible SRC is SRC xxxx9023. 1. Identify the affected adapter and disk units that are not at their required locations by examining the Product Activity Log. Perform the following steps: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. Record all devices that are not at their required locations. These are the array members that have a current address and an expected address that do not match. A current address of 0 is acceptable, and no action is needed to correct it for a known failed drive in the array. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record all devices that are not at their required locations. These are the array members that have a current address and an expected address that do not match. A current address of 0 is acceptable, and no action is needed to correct it for a known failed drive in the array.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addresses2. Perform only one of the following options (listed in order of preference): Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 171 Option 1 Power off the system or partition and install the identified disk units in the correct physical locations (that is the expected addresses) in the system. This ends the procedure. Option 2 Stop the disk array that contains the missing devices. Attention: Customer data might be lost. Perform the following: a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a type D IPL? No: Select Work with disk configuration ? Work with device parity protection. Then, continue with substep 2c. Yes: Continue with the next substep 2c.c. Select Stop device parity protection. d. Follow the online instructions to stop device parity protection. e. Perform an IPL from disk.Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Go to Starting a Service Call. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.Option 3 If the data on the disk units is not needed, initialize and format the remaining members of the disk array by performing the following steps:Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.SIP3113 This procedure resolves problems when a disk array is or would become exposed and parity data is out of synchronization. The possible SRC is xxxx9027. 172 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 1. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the Product Activity Log. Perform the following steps: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the Product Activity Log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a current address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. Record all devices that are missing from the disk array. These are the array members that have both a current address of 0 and an expected address that is not 0.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addresses2. Have the adapter or disk units been physically moved recently? No: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Perform one of the following two options (listed in order of preference): Option 1 Power off the system or partition and restore the I/O adapter and disk units back to their original configuration. This ends the procedure. Option 2 Stop the disk array that contains the missing devices. Attention: Customer data might be lost. Perform the following: a. If you are not already using dedicated service tools, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. b. Select Work with disk units. Did you get to DST with a type D IPL? Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 173 No: Select Work with disk configuration ? Work with device parity protection. Then, continue with substep 3c. Yes: Continue with substep 3c.c. Select Stop device parity protection. d. Follow the online instructions to stop device parity protection. e. Perform an IPL from disk.Does the IPL complete successfully? No: Go to Starting a Service Call. This ends the procedure. Yes: This ends the procedure.Option 3 If the data on the disk units is not needed, initialize and format the disk units by performing the following steps: Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.SIP3120 This procedure resolves the problem when Cache data associated with attached disk units cannot be found. The possible SRC is xxxx9010 1. Has the server been powered off for several days? No Go to step 2. Yes Go to step 5 on page 175.2. Using the appropriate service procedures, remove the adapter. Install the new replacement storage adapter with the following parts installed on it: Note: Label all parts (original and new) before moving them. v The cache directory card from the original storage adapter. Refer to Replacing the cache directory card. v The removable cache card from the original storage adapter. This applies only to certain adapters that have a removable cache card.3. Has a new SRC of xxxx9010 or xxxx9050 occurred? 174 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No Go to step 6. Yes Go to step 44. Was the new SRC xxxx9050? No The new SRC was xxxx9010. Reclaim adapter cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636.Attention: Data might be lost. When an auxiliary cache adapter connected to the RAID adapter logs a xxxx9055 SRC in the hardware error log, the reclaim process does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the reclaim process does result in lost sectors.Note: On the Reclaim Controller Cache Storage results screen, the number of lost sectors is displayed. If the number is 0, there is no data loss. If the number is not 0, data has been lost and the system operator might want to restore data after this procedure is completed.Go to step 6. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure.5. If the server has been powered off for several days after an abnormal power-down, the cache battery pack might be depleted. Do not replace the adapter or the cache battery pack. Reclaim adapter cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Attention: Data might be lost. When an auxiliary cache adapter connected to the RAID adapter logs a xxxx9055 SRC in the hardware error log, the reclaim process does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the reclaim process does result in lost sectors.Note: On the Reclaim Controller Cache Storage results screen, the number of lost sectors is displayed. If the number is 0, there is no data loss. If the number is not 0, data has been lost and the system operator might want to restore data after this procedure is completed.This ends the procedure. 6. Using the appropriate service procedures, remove the adapter. Install the new replacement storage adapter with the following parts installed on it: v The cache directory card from the new storage adapter. Refer to Replacing the cache directory card. v The removable cache card from the new storage adapter. This only applies to certain adapters which have a removable cache card.This ends the procedure.SIP3121 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: RAID adapter resources not available due to previous problems (SRC xxxx9054). Power off the system and remove all new or replacement disk units. IPL the system to DST. If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media. Look for Product Activity Log entries for other reference codes and take action on them. This ends the procedure. SIP3130 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Adapter does not support function expected by one or more disk units (SRC xxxx9008). 1. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the Product Activity Log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 175 v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addressesHave you determined the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Have the adapter or disk units been physically moved recently, or were the disk units previously used by the AIX or Linux operating system? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Perform one of the following options (listed in order of preference): Option 1 Power off the system or partition and restore the adapter and disk units back to their original configuration. This ends the procedure. 176 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Option 2 If the data on the disk units is not needed, initialize and format the disk units by performing the following steps: Attention: Data on the disk unit will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.SIP3131 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Required cache data cannot be located for one or more disk units (SRC xxxx9050). 1. Did you just exchange the adapter as the result of a failure? No: Go to step 3. Yes: Attention: a. The failed adapter that you have just exchanged contains cache data that is required by the disk units that were attached to that adapter. If the adapter that you just exchanged is failing intermittently, reinstalling it and performing an IPL of the system might allow the data to be successfully written to the disk units. After the cache data is written to the disk units and the system is powered off normally, the adapter can be replaced without data being lost. Otherwise, continue with this procedure. b. Label all parts (old and new) before moving them.Go to step 2. 2. Using the appropriate service procedures, remove the adapter. Install the new replacement storage adapter with the following parts installed on it: v The cache directory card from the original storage adapter. Refer to “Replacing the cache directory card.” v The removable cache card from the original storage adapter. This applies only to certain adapters that have a removable cache card.Go to step 8 on page 179. 3. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the Product Activity Log. Perform the following: a. Access SST/DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 177 v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST/DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Device Errors detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc hHexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addressesHave you determined the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step. 4. Have the adapter or disk units been physically moved recently? No: Contact your hardware service provider. Yes: Go to step 5. 5. Is the data on the disk units needed for this or any other system? No: Go to step 7 on page 179. Yes: Go to step 6 6. Restore the adapter and disk units back to their original configuration. The adapter and disk units must be rejoined so that the cache data can be written to the disk units. After the cache data is written to the disk units and the system is powered off normally, the adapter or disk units can be moved to another location. This ends the procedure 178 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 7. Perform only one of the following options, listed in the order of preference: Option 1 Reclaim adapter cache storage. See Reclaiming IOP cache storage. Attention: Data on the disk array will be lost.This ends the procedure. Option 2 If the data on the disk units is not needed, initialize and format the disk units by performing the following steps: Attention: Data on the disk units will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure. 8. Has a new SRC xxxx9010 or xxxx9050 occurred? No: Go to step 10. Yes: Go to step 9. 9. Was the new SRC xxxx9050? No: The new SRC was xxxx9010. Reclaim adapter cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636.Attention: Data might be lost. When an auxiliary cache adapter connected to the RAID adapter logs an xxxx9055 SRC in the hardware error log, the reclaim process does not result in lost sectors. Otherwise, the reclaim process does result in lost sectors.Note: On the Reclaim Controller Cache Storage results screen, the number of lost sectors is displayed. If the number is 0, there is no data loss. If the number is not 0, data has been lost and the system operator might want to restore data after this procedure is completed.Go to step 10. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider.10. Using the appropriate service procedures, remove the adapter. Install the new replacement storage adapter with the following parts installed on it: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 179 v The cache directory card from the new storage adapter. Refer to Replacing the cache directory card. v The removable cache card from the new storage adapter. This only applies to certain adapters that have a removable cache card.This ends the procedure.SIP3132 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Cache data exists for one or more missing or failed disk units (SRC xxxx9051). The possible causes are: v One or more disk units have failed on the adapter. v One or more disk units were either moved concurrently or were removed after an abnormal power off. v The adapter was moved from a different system or a different location on this system after an abnormal power off. v The cache of the adapter was not cleared before it was shipped to the customer.1. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the Product Activity Log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for 180 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addressesHave you determined the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Are there other disk unit or adapter errors that have occurred at approximately the same time as this error? No: Go to step 3. Yes: Go to step 6.3. Is the data on the disk units (and thus the cache data for the disk units) needed for this or any other system? No: Go to step 7. Yes: Go to step 44. Have the adapter card or disk units been physically moved recently? No: Contact your hardware service provider. Yes: Go to step 5.5. Restore the adapter and disk units back to their original configuration. The adapter and disk units must be rejoined so that the cache data can be written to the disk units. After the cache data is written to the disk units and the system is powered off normally, the adapter or disk units can be moved to another location. This ends the procedure. 6. Take action on the other errors that have occurred at the same time as this error. This ends the procedure. 7. Reclaim adapter cache storage. See “Reclaiming IOP cache storage” on page 636. Attention: Data will be lost. This ends the procedure.SIP3134 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Disk unit requires format before use (SRC xxxx9092). The possible causes are: v Disk unit is a previously failed disk unit from a disk array and was automatically replaced by a hot spare disk unit. v Disk unit is a previously failed disk unit from a disk array and was removed and later reinstalled on a different adapter or different location on this adapter. v Appropriate service procedures were not followed when replacing disk units or reconfiguring the adapter, such as not performing a normal power off of the system prior to reconfiguring disk units and adapters. v Disk unit is a member of a disk array, but was detected subsequent to the adapter being configured. v Disk unit has multiple or complex configuration problems.1. Identify the affected adapter and disk units by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 181 v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Device Errors Detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors Logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Device Errors detected field indicates the total number of disk units that are affected. The Device Errors logged field indicates the number of disk units for which detailed information is provided. Under the Device heading, the unit address, type, serial number, and Worldwide ID are provided for up to three disk units. Additionally, the adapter type, serial number, and Worldwide ID for each of these disk units indicates the adapter to which the disk was last attached when it was operational.c. Determine the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit, or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The disk unit locations that are identified by the unit addressesHave you determined the location of the adapter and the devices that are causing the problem? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Are there other disk unit or adapter errors that have occurred at about the same time as this error? No: Go to step 3. Yes: Go to step 5 on page 183.3. Have the adapter card or disk units been physically moved recently? No: Go to step 4. Yes: Go to step 6 on page 183.4. Is the data on the disk units needed for this or any other system? 182 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) No: Go to step 7. Yes: Go to step 6.5. Take action on the other errors that have occurred at the same time as this error. This ends the procedure. 6. Perform one of the following options that is most applicable to your situation: Option 1 Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.Take action for any other errors that are now occurring. This ends the procedure. Option 2 Power off the system or partition and restore the adapter and disk units to their original configuration. This ends the procedure. Option 3 Remove the disk units from this adapter. This ends the procedure.7. Do the following to format the disk units: Attention: All data on the disk units will be lost. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: a. Access SST or DST. b. Select Work with disk units ? Work with disk unit recovery ? Disk unit problem recovery procedures. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: a. Access DST. b. Select Work with disk units. c. Select Initialize and format disk unit for each disk unit. When the new disk unit is initialized and formatted, the display shows that the status is complete. This might take 30 minutes or much longer depending on the capacity of the disk unit. The disk unit is now ready to be added to the system configuration. This ends the procedure.SIP3140 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Multiple adapters connected in an invalid configuration (SRC xxxx9073) The possible causes are: v Incompatible adapters are connected to each other. This includes invalid adapter combinations such as the following: – Adapters with different write cache sizes – One adapter is not supported by i5/OS – An adapter that does not support auxiliary cache is connected to an auxiliary cache adapter – An adapter that supports Dual Storage IOAs is connected to another adapter which does not have the same support – Greater than 2 adapters are connected for Dual Storage IOAs Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 183 – Adapter code levels are not up to date or are not at the same level of functionalityv One adapter, of a connected pair of adapters, is not operating under the i5/OS operating system. Connected adapters must both be controlled by i5/OS. Additionally, both adapters must be in the same system partition. v Adapters connected for Dual Storage IOAs are not cabled correctly. Each type of Dual Storage IOA configuration requires specific cables be used in a supported manner.Determine which of the possible causes applies to the current configuration and take the appropriate actions to correct it. If this does not correct the error, contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. SIP3141 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Multiple adapters not capable of similar functions or controlling same set of devices (SRC xxxx9074) 1. This error relates to adapters connected in a Dual Storage IOA configuration. To obtain the reason or description for this failure, you must find the formatted error information in the Product Activity Log. This should also contain information about the connected adapter. Perform the following: a. Access SST/DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the Product Activity Log and record address information. If a D IPL was NOT performed to get to SST/DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for ?Address Information?. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. The Problem description field indicates the type of problem. The type, serial number, and Worldwide ID of the connected adapter is also available. If a D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc hexadecimal offset 51 bb hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Problem description field indicates the type of problem. The type, serial number, and Worldwide ID of the connected adapter is also available.2. Find the problem description and information for the connected adapter (remote adapter) shown in the error log, and perform the action listed for the reason in the following table: 184 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Table 40. RAID array reason for failure Problem description Full description Action Adapter on which to perform the action Secondary does not support RAID level being used by primary. Secondary adapter detected that the primary has a RAID array with a RAID level that the secondary does not support. Customer needs to upgrade the type of secondary adapter or change the RAID level of the array on the primary to a level that is supported by the secondary. Physically change the type of adapter that logged the error. Change RAID level on primary adapter (remote adapter indicated in the error log). Secondary does not support disk unit function being used by primary. Secondary adapter detected a device function that it does not support. Customer might need to upgrade the adapter code or upgrade the type of secondary adapter. Adapter that logged the error. Secondary is unable to find devices found by the primary. Secondary adapter cannot discover all the devices that the primary has. Verify the connections to the devices from the adapter logging the error. View the disk units under each adapter using HSM to determine the SAS port with the problem. Adapter that logged the error. Secondary found devices not found by the primary. Secondary adapter has discovered more devices than the primary. After this error is logged, an automatic failover will occur. Verify the connections to the devices from the remote adapter as indicated in the error log. View the disk units under each adapter using HSM to determine the SAS port with the problem. Remote adapter indicated in the error log. Secondary port not connected to the same numbered port on primary. SAS connections from the adapter to the devices are incorrect. Common disk expansion drawers must be connected to the same numbered SAS port on both adapters. Verify connections and re-cable SAS connections as necessary. Either adapter. Primary lost contact with disk units accessible by secondary. Link failure from primary adapter to devices. An automatic failover will occur. Verify cable connections from the adapter which logged the error. Possible disk expansion drawer failure. Adapter that logged the error. Other Not currently defined. Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure.SIP3142 Use this procedure to resolve the following configuration error: incorrect connection between cascaded enclosures (SRC xxxx4010). The possible causes are: v Incorrect cabling of cascaded device enclosures v Use of an unsupported device enclosure Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 185 Considerations: v To prevent hardware damage, power off the system, partition, or card slot as appropriate, before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices.1. Identify the affected adapter and its port by examining the product activity log. Perform the following steps: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional Information to record the formatted log information. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There might be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There might be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.c. Determine the location of the adapter that reported the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The physical connector identified by the port number found on the adapter tailstockHave you determined the location of the adapter and its port? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required for the device or device enclosure attached to the identified adapter port. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see ?Serial attached SCSI cable planning,? in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. If unsupported device enclosures are attached, then either remove or replace them with supported device enclosures. 3. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: 186 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.Did the error recur? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure.SIP3143 Use this procedure to resolve the following configuration error: connections exceed adapter design limits (SRC xxxx4020). The possible causes are: v Unsupported number of cascaded device enclosures v Improper cabling of cascaded device enclosuresConsiderations: v To prevent hardware damage, power off the system, partition, or card slot as appropriate, before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices.1. Identify the affected adapter and its port by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There might be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 187 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.c. Determine the location of the adapter that reported the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The physical connector identified by the port number found on the adapter tailstockHave you determined the location of the adapter and its port? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Reduce the number of cascaded device enclosures. Device enclosures can only be cascaded one level deep, and only in certain configurations. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required for the device or device enclosure attached to the identified adapter port. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see ?Serial attached SCSI cable planning,? in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. 3. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.Did the error recur? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure.SIP3144 Use this procedure to resolve problems with multipath connections. This procedure is used to resolve the following configuration errors: v Configuration error, incorrect multipath connection (SRC xxxx4030) v Configuration error, incomplete multipath connection between adapter and enclosure detected (SRC xxxx4040)The possible causes are: v Incorrect cabling to device enclosure. Note: Pay special attention to the requirement that a Y0-cable, YI-cable, or X-cable must be routed along the right side of the rack frame (as viewed from the rear) when connecting to a disk expansion drawer. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required. To see example device configurations with serial attached SCSI (SAS) cabling, see ?Serial attached SCSI cable planning,? in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. v A failed connection caused by a failing component in the SAS fabric between, and including, the adapter and device enclosure.Considerations: v Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage. v Some systems have SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe bus interface logic integrated onto the system boards and use a pluggable RAID Enablement Card (a non-PCI form factor card) for these SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe buses. For these configurations, replacement of the RAID Enablement Card is unlikely to solve a SAS related problem because the SAS interface logic is on the system board. 188 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Some systems have the disk enclosure or removable media enclosure integrated in the system with no cables. For these configurations the SAS connections are integrated onto the system boards and a failed connection can be the result of a failed system board or integrated device enclosure. v Some configurations involve a SAS adapter connecting to internal SAS disk enclosures within a system using a cable card. Keep in mind that when the procedure refers to a device enclosure, it could be referring to the internal SAS disk slots or media slots. Also, when the procedure refers to a cable, it could include a cable card. v When using SAS adapters in a Dual Storage IOA configuration, ensure that the actions taken in this procedure are against the primary adapter (that is, not the secondary adapter).Attention: When SAS fabric problems exist, replacing RAID adapters is not recommended without assistance from your service provider. Because the adapter might contain non-volatile write cache data and configuration data for the attached disk arrays, additional problems can be created by replacing an adapter. 1. Was the SRC xxxx4030? No: Go to step 5 on page 190. Yes: Go to step 2.2. Identify the affected adapter and its port by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock. If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb hHexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 189 c. Determine the location of the adapter that reported the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The physical connector identified by the port number found on the adapter tailstockHave you determined the location of the adapter and its port? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required for the device or device enclosure attached to the identified adapter port. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see Serial attached SCSI cable planning, in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. 4. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.Did the error recur? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure.5. The SRC is xxxx4040. Determine if a problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error by examining the SAS connections as follows: a. On the System Service Tools (SST) screen, select Start a Service Tool then press Enter. b. Select Display/Alter/Dump. c. Select Display/Alter storage. d. Select Licensed Internal Code (LIC) data. e. Select Advanced Analysis. f. Type FABQUERY on the entry line and then select it with option 1. g. On the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen, type -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 0 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter. Note: More information is available by returning to the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen and typing -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 2 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter.Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure.6. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to re-IPL the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.Note: At this point, ignore any problems found and continue with the next step. 7. Determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error by examining the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 5 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? NO Go to step 8 on page 191. YES This ends the procedure. 190 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 8. Because the problem persists, some corrective action is needed to resolve the problem. Proceed by doing the following: Perform only one of the following corrective actions (listed in the order of preference). If one of the corrective actions has previously been attempted, proceed to the next one in the list. v Reseat cables if present on adapter and device enclosure. Perform the following: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Reseat the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the cable, if present, from the adapter to the device enclosure. Perform the following: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Replace the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the internal device enclosure or refer to the service documentation for an external expansion drawer. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, adapter concurrent maintenance can be used instead to power off the adapter slot. b. Replace the device enclosure. c. Power on the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, use adapter concurrent maintenance instead to power on the adapter slot.v Replace the adapter. The procedure to replace the adapter can be found in “PCI adapter” on page 438. v Contact your service provider.9. To determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error, examine the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 5 on page 190 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Go to step 8. Yes: This ends the procedure.SIP3145 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Unsupported enclosure function detected (SRC xxxx4110). The possible causes are: v Device enclosure or adapter code levels are not up to date. v Unsupported type of device enclosure or device.Considerations: To prevent hardware damage or erroneous diagnostic results, remove power from the system as appropriate before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices. 1. Identify the affected adapter and its port by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 191 v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter that is reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There might be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.c. Determine the location of the adapter that reported the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The physical connector identified by the port number found on the adapter tailstock Have you determined the location of the adapter and its port? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Check for the latest PTFs for the device enclosure or adapter and apply them. If unsupported device enclosures or devices are attached, then either remove or replace them with supported device enclosures or devices. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required for the device or device enclosure attached to the identified adapter port. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see Serial attached SCSI cable planning, in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. 3. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor. Did the error recur? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. 192 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) SIP3146 Use this procedure to resolve the configuration error: Incomplete multipath connection between enclosures and device detected (SRC xxxx4041). The possible cause is a failed connection caused by a failing component within the device enclosure, including the device itself. Note: The adapter is not a likely cause of this problem. Considerations: v Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage. v Some systems have the disk enclosure or removable media enclosure integrated in the system with no cables. For these configurations the SAS connections are integrated onto the system boards and a failed connection can be the result of a failed system board or integrated device enclosure. v Some configurations involve a serial attached SCSI (SAS) adapter connecting to internal SAS disk enclosures within a system using a cable card. Keep in mind that when the procedure refers to a device enclosure, it could be referring to the internal SAS disk slots or media slots. Also, when the procedure refers to a cable, it could include a cable card. v When using SAS adapters in a Dual Storage IOA configuration, ensure that the actions taken in this procedure are against the primary adapter (that is, not the secondary adapter).Attention: Removing functioning disk units in a disk array is not recommended without assistance from your service provider. If functioning disk units are removed, a disk array might become unprotected or failed and additional problems could be created. 1. Determine the resource name of the adapter that reported the problem by performing the following: a. Access SST or DST. b. Access the product activity log and record the resource name that this error is logged against. If the resource name is an adapter resource name, use it and continue with the next step. If the resource name is a disk unit resource name, use Hardware Service Manager to determine the resource name of the adapter that is controlling this disk unit.2. Determine if a problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error by examining the SAS connections as follows: a. On the System Service Tools (SST) display, select Start a Service Tool, and then press Enter. b. Select Display/Alter/Dump. c. Select Display/Alter storage. d. Select Licensed Internal Code (LIC) data. e. Select Advanced Analysis. f. Type FABQUERY on the entry line and then select it with option 1. g. On the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen, type -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 0 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter. Note: More information is available by returning to the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen and typing -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 2 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter.Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure.3. Perform the following steps to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 193 b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.4. To determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error, examine the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 2 on page 193 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure.5. Perform only one of the following corrective actions (listed in the order of preference). If one of the corrective actions has previously been attempted, proceed to the next one in the list. v Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see Serial attached SCSI cable planning, in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, SA76-0091. v Reseat the cables, if present, on the adapter and the device enclosure. Perform the following steps: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Reseat the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the cable, if present, from the adapter to the device enclosure. Perform the following steps: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Replace the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the internal device enclosure or refer to the service documentation for an external expansion drawer. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, use adapter concurrent maintenance instead to power off the adapter slot. b. Replace the device enclosure. c. Power on the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, adapter concurrent maintenance can be used instead to power on the adapter slot.v Replace the adapter. The procedure to replace the adapter can be found in “PCI adapter” on page 438. v Contact your service provider.6. To determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error, examine the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 2 on page 193 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Go to step 5. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure..SIP3147 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Missing remote adapter (SRC xxxx9076) 1. An adapter attached in either an Auxiliary Cache or Dual Storage IOA configuration was not discovered in the allotted time. To obtain additional information about the configuration involved, locate the formatted log in the Product Activity Log. a. Access SST/DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. 194 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the Product Activity Log and record address information. If a D IPL was NOT performed to get to SST/DST: The log information is formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for ?Address Information?. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the ?Additional Information? to record the formatted log information. The ?Type of adapter connection? field indicates the type of configuration involved.If a D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the Product Activity Log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc hexadecimal offset 51 bb hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The ?Type of adapter connection? field indicates the type of configuration involved.2. Determine which of the following is the cause of your specific error and take the appropriate actions listed. If this does not correct the error, contact your hardware service provider. The possible causes are: v An attached adapter for the configuration is not installed or is not powered on. Some adapters are required to be part of a Dual Storage IOA Configuration. Ensure that both adapters are properly installed and powered on. v If this is an Auxiliary Cache or Dual Storage IOA configuration, then both adapters may not be in the same partition. Ensure that both adapters are assigned to the same partition. v An attached adapter does not support the desired configuration. v An attached adapter for the configuration is failed. Take action on the other errors that have occurred at the same time as this error. v Adapter code levels are not up to date or are not at the same level of functionality. Ensure that the code for both adapters is at the latest level.Note: The adapter that is logging this error will run in a performance degraded mode, without caching, until the problem is resolved. This ends the procedure.SIP3148 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Attached enclosure does not support required multipath function (SRC xxxx4050). The possible cause is the use of an unsupported device enclosure. Considerations: v Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage.1. Identify the adapter and adapter port associated with the problem by examining the product activity log. Perform the following steps: a. Access SST or DST. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 195 v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and record address information. If a type D IPL was not performed to get to SST or DST: The log information is formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information to record the formatted log information. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.If a type D IPL was performed to get to DST: The log information is not formatted. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. The direct select address (DSA) of the adapter is in the format BBBB-Cc-bb: BBBB Hexadecimal offsets 4C and 4D Cc Hexadecimal offset 51 bb Hexadecimal offset 4FIn order to interpret the hexadecimal information to get device addresses, see “More information from hexadecimal reports” on page 620. The Adapter Port field indicates the port on the adapter reporting the problem. There may be more than one port listed because multiple ports map to the same physical connector. For example, ports 0 through 3 map to the first physical connector, 4 through 7 map to the second physical connector, and so on. The port numbers are labeled on the adapter tailstock.c. Determine the location of the adapter that reported the problem. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 and find the diagram of the system unit or the expansion unit. Then find the following items: v The card slot that is identified by the direct select address (DSA) v The physical connector identified by the port number found on the adapter tailstock Have you determined the location of the adapter and its port? No: Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. If unsupported device enclosures are attached to the identified adapter port, then either remove or replace them with supported device enclosures. 3. Perform the following steps to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor. Did the error recurr? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. 196 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) SIP3149 Use this procedure to resolve the following problem: Incomplete multipath connection between adapter and remote adapter (SRC xxxx9075) The possible cause is incorrect cabling between SAS RAID adapters. Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage. Review the device enclosure cabling and correct the cabling as required. To see example device configurations with SAS cabling, see ?Serial attached SCSI cable planning,? in the Site and Hardware Planning Guide, order number SA76-0091. This ends the procedure. SIP3150 Use this procedure to perform serial attached SCSI (SAS) fabric problem isolation. Considerations: v Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage. v Some systems have SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe bus interface logic integrated onto the system boards and use a pluggable RAID Enablement Card (a non-PCI form factor card) for these SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe buses. For these configurations, replacement of the RAID Enablement Card is unlikely to solve a SAS related problem because the SAS interface logic is on the system board. v Some systems have the disk enclosure or removable media enclosure integrated in the system with no cables. For these configurations the SAS connections are integrated onto the system boards and a failed connection can be the result of a failed system board or integrated device enclosure.Attention: v Before you replace a RAID adapter. Because the adapter might contain nonvolatile write cache data and configuration data for the attached disk arrays, additional problems can be created by replacing an adapter. v Before you remove functioning disk units in a disk array. A disk array might become unprotected or might fail and additional problems might be created if functioning disk units are removed from a disk array. 1. Was the SRC xxxx3020? No Go to step 3. Yes Go to step 2. 2. The possible causes are: v More devices are connected to the adapter than the adapter supports. Change the configuration to reduce the number of devices below what is supported by the adapter. v A SAS device has been incorrectly moved from one location to another. Either return the device to its original location or move the device while the adapter is powered off. v A SAS device has been incorrectly replaced by a SATA device. A SAS device must be used to replace a SAS device.This ends the procedure. 3. Determine the status of the disk units in the array by doing the following steps: a. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. b. Press the F9 key for address information. This is the adapter address. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 197 c. Return to the SST or DST main menu. d. Select Work with disk units ? Display disk configuration ? Display disk configuration status. e. On the Display disk configuration status screen, look for the devices attached to the adapter that was identified.Is there a device that has a status of ?RAID 5/Unknown?, ?RAID 6/Unknown?, ?RAID 5/Failed?, or ?RAID 6/Failed?? No Go to step 5. Yes Go to step 4 4. Other errors should have occurred related to the disk array having degraded protection. Take action on these errors to replace the failed disk unit and restore the disk array to a fully protected state. This ends the procedure. 5. Have other errors occurred at the same time as this error? No Go to step 7. Yes Go to step 6 6. Take action on the other errors that have occurred at the same time as this error. This ends the procedure. 7. Was the SRC xxxxFFFE? No Go to step 10. Yes Go to step 8. 8. Check for the latest PTFs for the device, device enclosure, and adapter and apply them. Did you find and apply a PTF? No Go to step 10. Yes Go to step 9. 9. This ends the procedure. 10. Identify the adapter and adapter port associated with the problem by examining the product activity log. Perform the following: a. Access SST or DST. v If you can enter a command at the console, access system service tools (SST). See “System Service Tools (SST)” on page 611. v If you cannot enter a command at the console, perform an IPL to DST. See “Performing an IPL to DST” on page 640. v If you cannot perform a type A or B IPL, perform a type D IPL from removable media.b. Access the product activity log and display the SRC that sent you here. Record the adapter address and the adapter port by doing one of the following: v If the SRC is xxxxFFFE, press the F9 key for address information. The adapter address is the bus, board, card information. The port is shown in the I/O bus field. Convert the port value from decimal to hexadecimal. v Press the F9 key for address information. The adapter address is the bus, board, card information. Then, press F12 to cancel and return to the previous screen. Then press the F4 key to view the additional information, if available. The adapter port is characters 1 and 2 of the unit address. For example, if the unit address is 123456FF, the port would be 12. v Go to “Hexadecimal Product Activity Log data” on page 617 to obtain the address information. The adapter address is the bus, board, card information. The adapter port is characters 1 and 2 of the unit address. For example, if the unit address is 123456FF, the port would be 12.11. Use the adapter address to find the location of the adapter (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). On the tailstock of the adapter, find the port identified in the previous step. This is the port that is used to attach the device, or device enclosure, that is experiencing the problem. 198 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 12. Because the problem persists, some corrective action is needed to resolve the problem. Proceed by doing the following: Perform only one of the following corrective actions (listed in the order of preference). If one of the corrective actions has previously been attempted, proceed to the next one in the list. v Reseat cables, if present, on adapter and device enclosure. Perform the following steps: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Reseat the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the cable, if present, from the adapter to the device enclosure. Perform the following: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Replace the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the device. See “Disk Drive” on page 379.Note: If there are multiple devices with a path that is not Operational, then the problem is not likely to be with a device. v Replace the internal device enclosure or refer to the service documentation for an external expansion drawer. Perform the following: a. Power off the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, use adapter concurrent maintenance instead to power off the adapter slot. b. Replace the device enclosure. c. Power on the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, use adapter concurrent maintenance instead to power on the adapter slot.v Replace the adapter. The procedure to replace the adapter can be found in “PCI adapter” on page 438. v Contact your service provider.13. Does the problem still occur after performing the corrective action? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Go to step 12.SIP3152 Use this procedure to resolve possible failed connection problems This procedure is used to resolve the following problems: v Multipath redundancy level is worse (SRC xxxx4060) v Device bus fabric error (SRC xxxx4100) v Temporary device bus fabric error (SRC xxxx4101)The possible causes are: v A failed connection caused by a failing component in the serial attached SCSI (SAS) fabric between, and including, the adapter and device enclosure. v A failed connection caused by a failing component within the device enclosure, including the device itself.Note: For SRC xxxx4060, the failed connection was previously working, and may have already recovered. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 199 Considerations: v Power off the system, partition, or card slot before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage. v Some systems have SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe bus interface logic integrated onto the system boards and use a pluggable RAID Enablement Card (a non-PCI form factor card) for these SAS, PCI-X, and PCIe buses. For these configurations, replacement of the RAID Enablement Card is unlikely to solve a SAS-related problem because the SAS interface logic is on the system board. v Some systems have the disk enclosure or removable media enclosure integrated in the system with no cables. For these configurations the SAS connections are integrated onto the system boards and a failed connection can be the result of a failed system board or integrated device enclosure. v Some configurations involve a SAS adapter connecting to internal SAS disk enclosures within a system using a cable card. Keep in mind that when the procedure refers to a device enclosure, it could be referring to the internal SAS disk slots or media slots. Also, when the procedure refers to a cable, it could include a cable card. v When using SAS adapters in a Dual Storage IOA configuration, ensure that the actions taken in this procedure are against the primary adapter (not the secondary adapter).Attention: v When SAS fabric problems exist, replacing RAID adapters is not recommended without assistance from your service provider. Because the adapter might contain nonvolatile write cache data and configuration data for the attached disk arrays, additional problems can be created by replacing an adapter. v Removing functioning disk units in a disk array is not recommended without assistance from your service provider. A disk array might become unprotected or might fail if functioning disk units are removed. The removal of functioning disk units might also result in additional problems in the disk array.1. Determine the resource name of the adapter that reported the problem by performing the following: a. Access SST or DST. b. Access the product activity log and record the resource name that this error is logged against. If the resource name is an adapter resource name, use it and continue with the next step. If the resource name is a disk unit resource name, use the Hardware Service Manager to determine the resource name of the adapter that is controlling this disk unit.2. Determine if a problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error by examining the SAS connections as follows: a. On the System Service Tools (SST) screen, select Start a Service Tool and then press Enter. b. Select Display/Alter/Dump. c. Select Display/Alter storage. d. Select Licensed Internal Code (LIC) data. e. Select Advanced Analysis. f. Type FABQUERY on the entry line and then select it with option 1. g. On the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen, type -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 0 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter. Note: More information is available by returning to the Specify Advanced Analysis Options screen and typing -SUB 01 -IOA DCxx -DSP 2 in the Options field, where DCxx is the adapter resource name. Press Enter.Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure.3. Perform the following to cause the adapter to rediscover the devices and connections: 200 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) a. Use Hardware Service Manager to perform another IPL of the virtual I/O processor that is associated with this adapter. b. Vary on any other resources attached to the virtual I/O processor.4. To determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error, examine the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 2 on page 200 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure.5. Perform only one of the following corrective actions (listed in the order of preference). If one of the corrective actions has previously been attempted, then proceed to the next one in the list. v Reseat cables, if present, on adapter and device enclosure. Perform the following steps: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Reseat the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the cable, if present, from adapter to device enclosure. Perform the following steps: a. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power off the adapter slot, or power off the system or partition. b. Replace the cables. c. Use adapter concurrent maintenance to power on the adapter slot, or power on the system or partition.v Replace the device. See “Disk Drive” on page 379.Note: If there are multiple devices with a path that is not Operational, then the problem is not likely to be with a device. v Replace the internal device enclosure or refer to the service documentation for an external expansion drawer. Perform the following steps: a. Power off the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, adapter concurrent maintenance can be used instead to power off the adapter slot. b. Replace the device enclosure. c. Power on the system or partition. If the enclosure is external, adapter concurrent maintenance can be used instead to power on the adapter slot.v Replace the adapter. The procedure to replace the adapter can be found in “PCI adapter” on page 438. v Contact your service provider.6. To determine if the problem still exists for the adapter that logged this error, examine the SAS connections by performing the actions in step 2 on page 200 again. Do all expected devices appear in the list and are all paths marked as Operational? No: Go to step 5. Yes: The error condition no longer exists. This ends the procedure..SIP3153 Go to SIP3152. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 201 Service processor isolation procedures Use service processor isolation procedures if there is no HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “FSPSP01” on page 205A part vital to system function has been deconfigured. Review the system error logs for errors that call out parts relevant to each reason code. If replacing those parts does not resolve the error, use this procedure. “FSPSP02” on page 206This procedure is for boot failures that terminate very early in the boot process. “FSPSP03” on page 206A system operator or user error has occurred. “FSPSP04” on page 206A problem has been detected in the service processor firmware. “FSPSP05” on page 206The service processor has detected a problem in the platform firmware. 202 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) “FSPSP06” on page 207The service processor reported a suspected intermittent problem. “FSPSP07” on page 207The time of day has been reset to the default value. “FSPSP09” on page 207A problem has been detected with a memory DIMM, but it cannot be isolated to a specific memory DIMM. “FSPSP10” on page 207The part indicated in the FRU list that follows this procedure is not valid or missing for this system’s configuration. “FSPSP11” on page 207The service processor has detected an error on the RIO/HSL port in the system unit. “FSPSP12” on page 208The DIMM FRU that was previously replaced did not correct the memory error. “FSPSP14” on page 208The service processor cannot communicate with the system firmware. The server firmware will continue to run the system and partitions while it attempts to recover communications. Server firmware recovery actions will continue for approximately 30 to 40 minutes. “FSPSP16” on page 208Save any error log and dump data and contact your next level of support for assistance. “FSPSP17” on page 208A system uncorrectable error has occurred. “FSPSP18” on page 208A problem has been detected in the platform LIC. “FSPSP20” on page 209A failing item has been detected by a hardware procedure. “FSPSP22” on page 209The system has detected that a processor chip is missing from the system configuration because JTAG lines are not working. “FSPSP23” on page 209The system needs to perform a service processor dump. “FSPSP24” on page 209The system is running degraded. Array bit steering may be able to correct this problem without replacing hardware. “FSPSP25” on page 209The server has detected an over-temperature thermal fault. “FSPSP27” on page 210An attention line has been detected as having a problem. If the FRU replaced before this procedure did not correct the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP28” on page 210The resource ID (RID) of the FRU could not be found in the vital product data (VPD) table. “FSPSP29” on page 210The system has detected that all I/O bridges are missing from the system configuration. “FSPSP30” on page 211A problem has been encountered accessing the VPD card or the data found on the VPD card has been corrupted. “FSPSP31” on page 211The service processor has detected that one or more of the required fields in the system VPD has not been initialized. “FSPSP32” on page 211A problem with the enclosure has been found. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 203 “FSPSP33” on page 212A problem has been detected in the connection with the HMC. “FSPSP34” on page 212The memory cards are plugged in an invalid configuration and cannot be used by the system. “FSPSP35” on page 213The system has detected a problem with a memory controller. “FSPSP38” on page 213The system has detected an error within the JTAG path. If the FRU replaced before this procedure did not correct the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP42” on page 213An error communicating between two system processors was detected. “FSPSP45” on page 214The system has detected an error with FSI path. “FSPSP46” on page 214Some corrupt areas of flash or RAM have been detected on the service processor. “FSPSP47” on page 214The system has detected an error within the PSI link. To resolve the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP48” on page 214A diagnostic function detects an external processor interface problem. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP49” on page 214A diagnostic function detects an internal processor interface problem. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP50” on page 215A diagnostic function detects a connection problem between a processor chip and a GX chip. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP51” on page 215Runtime diagnostics detected a memory bus correctable error that is exceeding the threshold. The memory bus correctable error will not cause an immediate loss of system operations. However, the system is operating in a degraded mode. “FSPSP52” on page 215A problem has been detected on a memory bus. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: “FSPSP54” on page 215A processor over-temperature has been detected. Check for any environmental issues before replacing any parts. “FSPSP55” on page 216An error has been detected on a bus between two FRUs. The endpoint FRUs have been called out. However, the source of the error could be the bus path between the FRUs. “FSPSP63” on page 216The system has experienced a power error. Please review previous error logs for power-related issues. “FSPSP64” on page 216All the processor support interface (PSI) links of the system are either nonfunctional or deconfigured, so the system cannot perform an IPL appropriately. Look for previous error logs that deconfigure hardware. “FSPSPC1” on page 217If the system hangs after the code that sent you to this procedure appears in the control panel, perform these steps to reset the service processor. “FSPSPD1” on page 218If the system hangs after the code that sent you to this procedure appears in the control panel, perform these steps to reset the service processor. 204 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) FSPSP01 A part vital to system function has been deconfigured. Review the system error logs for errors that call out parts relevant to each reason code. If replacing those parts does not resolve the error, use this procedure. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. Perform the following steps: 1. Is SRC B1xxB10C or B1xxB10D (xx indicates that the Subsystem ID is irrelevant)? v No: Go to step 5 v Yes: The system has detected that one of the following has occurred: – A memory controller that is required for the system to function is deconfigured. – There is not enough memory. – The memory DIMM is plugged incorrectly.Continue with the next step.2. Perform the following steps: a. Reseat all of the memory DIMMs on the system backplane but do not replace any memory DIMM at this time. b. Perform a slow boot, refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665.Does the problem persist? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.3. Use the following procedure to replace memory DIMMs, and perform a slow boot after each replacement until the problem is resolved. Memory DIMMs must be installed in quads and in the correct connectors. Refer to “Physical Locations” on page 339 for information on memory DIMMs. a. Replace the first memory DIMM quad. b. Perform a slow boot, refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665.Does the problem persist? Yes: Repeat this step and replace the second memory DIMM quad. If you have replaced both of the memory DIMM quads, then continue with the next step. No: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.4. Use the following procedure to replace the system backplane. a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot, refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665.Does the problem persist? Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. No: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.5. Is SRC B1xxB107 or B1xxB108? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: The system has detected a problem with the clock module. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). This ends the procedure.6. Is SCR B1xxB106? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: The system has detected that the system backplane is deconfigured. Perform the following: a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot, refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 205 c. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.7. Is SRC B1xxB110 or B1xxB111? v No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. v Yes: The system has detected that the I/O bridge is deconfigured. Perform the following: a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot, refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. c. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.FSPSP02 This procedure is for boot failures that terminate very early in the boot process. This error path is indicated when the SRC data words are scrolling automatically through control panel functions 11, 12, and 13, and the control panel interface buttons are not responsive. Perform the following: 1. Push the white power button to reset the system and start it on the other side of platform LIC. Note: The white power button will only reset the system and attempt to reach standby. 2. Did an SRC occur after starting the system on the other side? No: Verify that the system’s firmware is at the latest level. Update the system’s firmware on the failing side if necessary.This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Is the SRC the same SRC that brought you to this procedure? v No: Return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1 to service this new SRC. This ends the procedure. v Yes: Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. If the problem is not resolved, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.FSPSP03 A system operator or user error has occurred. Refer to the documentation for the task that you were attempting to perform. FSPSP04 A problem has been detected in the service processor firmware. Refer to Operations Guide for ASMI and for Nonpartitioned Systems (SA76-0094) or Operations Guide for the Hardware Management Console and Managed Systems (SA76-0085) and verify that the system’s firmware is at the latest level. Update the system’s firmware if necessary. FSPSP05 The service processor has detected a problem in the platform firmware. Refer to the Operations Guide for ASMI and for Nonpartitioned Systems, SA76-0094 OR the Operations Guide for the Hardware Management Console and its Managed Systems, SA76-0085 and verify that the system’s firmware is at the latest level. Update the system’s firmware if necessary. 206 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) FSPSP06 The service processor reported a suspected intermittent problem. Contact your next level of support. FSPSP07 The time of day has been reset to the default value. 1. To set the time of day, refer to the systems operations guide. 2. If the problem persists, replace the TOD battery (Un-P1-E1): a. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). b. Replace the TOD battery. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. c. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.FSPSP09 A problem has been detected with a memory DIMM, but it cannot be isolated to a specific memory DIMM. 1. Replace all the memory DIMMs on the system backplane. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. 2. Perform a slow boot after replacing all the memory DIMMs. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP10 The part indicated in the FRU list that follows this procedure is not valid or missing for this system’s configuration. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. Perform the following to correct the problem: 1. Does word 8 (the 8 leftmost characters in the 2nd line of function 13) of the reference code end with 02 or 04? No: Go to step 3. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. The FRU that is called out after this procedure is either missing or not valid. Is that FRU installed and connected or plugged in correctly? Yes: The installed FRU is not valid. Remove that FRU. Then contact your next level of support to determine the correct FRU. This ends the procedure. No: The FRU is missing. If the FRU is present but not connected, reconnect it and perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665). Otherwise, contact your next level of support to determine the missing FRU. This ends the procedure.3. Does word 8 end with 01 or 05? No: Return to the Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure. Yes: The FRU that is listed after this procedure has the same serial number as another FRU in the system. Remove all but one of the FRUs that are listed after this procedure and then perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665). This ends the procedure.FSPSP11 The service processor has detected an error on the RIO/HSL port in the system unit. 1. Verify that the system’s firmware is at the latest level. Update the system’s firmware if necessary. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 207 2. If the problem persists, replace the system backplane (Un-P1). 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP12 The DIMM FRU that was previously replaced did not correct the memory error. Perform the following: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. FSPSP14 The service processor cannot communicate with the system firmware. The server firmware will continue to run the system and partitions while it attempts to recover communications. Server firmware recovery actions will continue for approximately 30 to 40 minutes. Perform the following: 1. Record the time the log was created or when the SRC was first noticed. Continue with the next step. 2. Are progress codes being displayed on the panel? v Yes: Server firmware was able to reset the service processor. This ends the procedure. v No: Continue with the next step.3. Has an A7006995 SRC been displayed on the panel? v Yes: Partitions are being powered off and a server dump will be attempted. Follow the A7006995 SRC description if the partitions do not terminate as requested. This ends the procedure. v No: Continue with the next step.4. Has the A1xx SRC remained on the panel for more than 40 minutes? v Yes: Server firmware could not begin termination of the partitions. Contact your next level of support to assist in attempting to terminate any remaining partitions and forcing a server dump. Collect the dump for support, power off and power on the system. This ends the procedure. v No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.FSPSP16 Save any error log and dump data and contact your next level of support for assistance. FSPSP17 A system uncorrectable error has occurred. 1. Look for other serviceable events and use the call outs listed with them to correct the problem. 2. If you need to run the system in a degraded mode until you can perform the service actions, do the following: a. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). b. Power on the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588) to allow the memory diagnostics to clean up the memory. Guard out any defective parts.This ends the procedure.FSPSP18 A problem has been detected in the platform LIC. 208 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Refer to the Operations Guide for the Hardware Management Console and Managed Systems, SA76-0085, or the Operations Guide for ASMI and for Nonpartitioned Systems, SA76-0094, and verify that the server firmware is at the latest level. Update the server firmware if necessary. FSPSP20 A failing item has been detected by a hardware procedure. Perform a slow boot to run full hardware diagnostics. If a new SRC occurs, repair the system using that reference code. If an incomplete occurs, go to “Accessing the ASMI” on page 646 menus to power off, check for deconfigured components and perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure. FSPSP22 The system has detected that a processor chip is missing from the system configuration because JTAG lines are not working. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP23 The system needs to perform a service processor dump. 1. Perform a service processor dump (see “Performing a platform system or service processor dump” on page 653). 2. Attempt to perform an IPL on the system. 3. Save the service processor dump to storage (see “Managing dumps” on page 653). 4. Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.FSPSP24 The system is running degraded. Array bit steering may be able to correct this problem without replacing hardware. 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Go to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. 3. If the problem persists, replace the FRU that is called out after this procedure. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. This ends the procedure.FSPSP25 The server has detected an over-temperature thermal fault. 1. Before replacing any server hardware FRU callouts, look in the error log for thermal problems related to fans, power supplies, etc. Perform all service actions for the thermal problem SRCs first before continuing with any other callouts in the current SRC. Thermal problems are associated with 1100 xxxx SRCs, where xxxx may be any of the following: v 1514 v 1524 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 209 v 7201 v 7203 v 7205 v 7610 v 7611 v 7620 v 7621 v 7630 v 7631 v 7640 v 76412. If no thermal-related SRCs or problems can be found, replace the server hardware FRU called out in the current SRC. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. This ends the procedure.FSPSP27 An attention line has been detected as having a problem. If the FRU replaced before this procedure did not correct the problem, perform the following: Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing any FRUs called out by this procedure. 1. Was the FRU called out before this procedure a memory DIMM (Un-P1-C14 through Un-P1-C17 or Un-P1-C21 through Un-P1-C24) or a GX adapter card (Un-P1-C8 or Un-P1-C6) No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Perform the following: a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.FSPSP28 The resource ID (RID) of the FRU could not be found in the vital product data (VPD) table. 1. Find another callout that reads ?FSPxxxx? where xxxx is a 4 digit hex number that represents the RID. Record the RID and the model of the system. 2. Call next level of support to find out which FRU the RID represents. 3. Replace the FRU that the RID represents. 4. Perform a slow boot to ensure full hardware diagnostics. This ends the procedure.FSPSP29 The system has detected that all I/O bridges are missing from the system configuration. 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing the system backplane. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. 210 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) FSPSP30 A problem has been encountered accessing the VPD card or the data found on the VPD card has been corrupted. This error occurred before VPD collection was completed. No location codes have been created. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588) and remove ac power. 2. Clear any deconfiguration errors for the VPD card. 3. Replace the VPD card (Un-P1-C11). See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 4. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665). Does the problem persist? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.5. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). This ends the procedure.FSPSP31 The service processor has detected that one or more of the required fields in the system VPD has not been initialized. 1. Log into ASMI with authorized service provider authority (see “Accessing the ASMI” on page 646). 2. Set the system VPD values (see “Setting the system enclosure type” on page 650 and “Setting the system identifiers” on page 650). Note: The service processor will automatically reset when leaving the ASMI after updating the system VPD. 3. Power on the system (“Powering on and powering off” on page 588). This ends the procedure.FSPSP32 A problem with the enclosure has been found. The problem is resulting from one of the following: v The enclosure VPD cannot be found. v The enclosure serial number is not programmed. v The enclosure feature code is not programmed.Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. Perform the following: 1. Record the reason code (the last 4 characters of word 11) from the SRC by looking at the operator panel or accessing the error log with the ASMI. 2. Is the reason code A46F? No: Go to step 6 on page 212. Yes: Continue with the next step.3. Check for and apply any server firmware updates. Does the problem persist? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.4. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 211 5. Perform the following: a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665).Does the problem persist? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.6. Is the reason code A460? No: Go to step 8. Yes: Continue with the next step.7. Perform the following: a. Set the enclosure serial number using the ASMI (see “Setting the system identifiers” on page 650). b. The service processor will automatically reset when leaving the ASMI after updating the serial number. c. Perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665).Does the problem persist? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.8. Is the reason code A45F? No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step.9. Perform the following: a. Set the enclosure feature code using the ASMI (see “Setting the system enclosure type” on page 650). The service processor will automatically reset when leaving the ASMI after updating the serial number. b. Perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665).).Does the problem persist? No: This ends the procedure. Yes: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.FSPSP33 A problem has been detected in the connection with the HMC. 1. Ensure that the cable connectors to the network from the HMC, managed system, managed system partitions, and other HMCs are securely connected. If the connections are not secure, plug the cables back into the proper locations and make sure that the connections are good. 2. Check to see if the HMC is working correctly or if the HMC was disconnected incorrectly from the managed system, managed system partitions, and other HMCs. If either has happened, reboot the HMC. 3. Verify that the network connection between the HMC, managed system, managed system partitions, and other HMCs is working properly. 4. If applicable, service the next FRU. See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. 5. If the problem continues to persist, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure.FSPSP34 The memory cards are plugged in an invalid configuration and cannot be used by the system. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 212 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 1. Is the SRC B1xx C02A? Yes: A memory module is missing from the system. The additional parts in the FRU callout list will include all memory modules in the group with the missing card. To correct the error, visually check the system to determine which of these missing is missing, and add the module. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.2. Is the SRC B1xx C029? Yes: A memory module is a different type than the other memory modules in the same group. The additional parts in the FRU callout list will include all memory modules in the group that contain the error. To correct the error, exchange the memory modules of the incorrect type with those of the desired type. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.3. Is the SRC B1xx C02B? Yes: A group of memory modules are missing and are required so that other memory modules on the board can be configured. The additional parts in the FRU callout list will include all missing memory modules in the group. To correct the error, add or remove these modules to the desired locations. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.4. Is the SRC B1xx C036? Yes: A memory module is not supported by this system. The additional parts in the FRU callout list will include all memory modules in the group that contains the unsupported modules. To correct the error, remove these modules from the system or replace them with the correct type. This ends the procedure. No: Return to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. This ends the procedure.FSPSP35 The system has detected a problem with a memory controller. Perform the following to enable redundant utilization: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP38 The system has detected an error within the JTAG path. If the FRU replaced before this procedure did not correct the problem, perform the following: Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing any FRUs called out by this procedure. 1. Was the FRU called out before this procedure a memory DIMM (Un-P1-C14 through Un-P1-C17 or Un-P1-C21 through Un-P1-C24) or a GX adapter card (Un-P1-C8 or Un-P1-C6)? No: No: This ends the procedure Yes: Continue with the next step.2. Perform the following: a. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). b. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.FSPSP42 An error communicating between two system processors was detected. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 213 Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. There is a communication error between the processors and the FRUs called out before this procedure. If you were unable to correct the problem by replacing FRUs that were previously specified before coming to this procedure, consider the possibility of failing system backplanes. 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). 3. Perform a slow boot (see “Performing a slow boot” on page 665). This ends the procedure. FSPSP45 The system has detected an error with FSI path. 1. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1) 2. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP46 Some corrupt areas of flash or RAM have been detected on the service processor. 1. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. 2. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. FSPSP47 The system has detected an error within the PSI link. To resolve the problem, perform the following: Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1) 2. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure.FSPSP48 A diagnostic function detects an external processor interface problem. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing the system backplane. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. FSPSP49 A diagnostic function detects an internal processor interface problem. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing the system backplane. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. 214 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) This ends the procedure. FSPSP50 A diagnostic function detects a connection problem between a processor chip and a GX chip. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions on replacing the system backplane. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. FSPSP51 Runtime diagnostics detected a memory bus correctable error that is exceeding the threshold. The memory bus correctable error will not cause an immediate loss of system operations. However, the system is operating in a degraded mode. To resolve the problem, replace the FRU called out after this procedure. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. FSPSP52 A problem has been detected on a memory bus. If replacing the FRUs previously listed in the FRU list does not fix the problem, perform the following: 1. Power off the system (see “Powering on and powering off” on page 588). 2. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. 3. Perform a slow boot. Refer to “Performing a slow boot” on page 665. This ends the procedure. FSPSP54 A processor over-temperature has been detected. Check for any environmental issues before replacing any parts. 1. Is the ambient room temperature in the normal operating range (less than 35 degrees C/95 degrees F)? No: Notify the customer. The customer must lower the room temperature so that it is within the normal range. Do not replace any parts. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue to the next step.2. Are the front and rear of the CEC drawer, and the front and rear rack doors, free of obstructions that would impede the airflow through the drawer? No: Notify the customer. The system must be free of obstructions for proper airflow. Clean the air inlets and exits in the drawer as required. Do not replace any parts. This ends the procedure. Yes: Continue to the next step.3. Are all of the fans, especially those at the back of the power supply, functioning normally? No: Replace any fans that are not turning or are turning slowly. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions. This ends the procedure. Yes: There are no environmental issues with the cooling of the processors. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 215 FSPSP55 An error has been detected on a bus between two FRUs. The endpoint FRUs have been called out. However, the source of the error could be the bus path between the FRUs. Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for instructions for removing and replacing any FRUs called out by the following procedure. 1. Is word 6 (the 8 leftmost characters of panel function 13) of the reference code 00000001? No: Go to the next step. Yes: Perform the following:a. The XYZ bus has an error. Replace the FRUs called out after this procedure. b. Did replacing the FRUs correct the problem? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Perform the following:c. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). d. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.2. Is word 6 of the reference code 00000002? No: Go to the next step. Yes: Perform the following:a. The AB bus has an error. Replace the FRUs called out after this procedure. b. Did replacing the FRUs correct the problem? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Perform the following:c. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). d. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.3. Is word 6 of the reference code 00000004 or 00000005? No: Go to the next step. Yes: Perform the following:a. The processor - GX card bus or PSI bus has an error. Replace the FRUs called out after this procedure. b. Did replacing the FRUs correct the problem? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Perform the following:c. Replace the system backplane (Un-P1). d. Perform a slow boot. This ends the procedure.4. For any other value in word 6 of the reference code, the bus error is corrected by the FRUs called out after this procedure. Replace the FRUs called out after this procedure. This ends the procedure.FSPSP63 The system has experienced a power error. Please review previous error logs for power-related issues. FSPSP64 All the processor support interface (PSI) links of the system are either nonfunctional or deconfigured, so the system cannot perform an IPL appropriately. Look for previous error logs that deconfigure hardware. 216 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) FSPSPC1 If the system hangs after the code that sent you to this procedure appears in the control panel, perform these steps to reset the service processor. Attention: You should periodically check the system firmware level on all your servers and update the firmware to the latest level, if appropriate. If you were directed to this procedure because the server displayed B1817201, C1001014, or C1001020, or a combination of these codes, the latest firmware can help avoid a recurrence of this problem. Even if the customer cannot update the firmware on this system at this time, all of their systems should be updated to the latest firmware level as soon as possible to help prevent this problem from occurring on other systems. Resetting the service processor on systems with a physical control panel 1. If the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) is available, reset the service processor using the ASMI menus. Were you able to use the ASMI menus to reset the service processor? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.2. Activate the service processor pinhole reset switch on the system’s control (operator) panel by carefully performing these steps: a. Using an insulated paper clip, unbend the paper clip so that it has a straight section about 2 inches long. b. Insert the clip straight into the hole, keeping the clip perpendicular to the plastic bezel. c. When you engage the reset switch, you should feel the detent of the switch. Pressing the reset switch resets the service processor and causes the system to shut down.3. Reboot the system in slow mode from the permanent side, using control panel function 02 or the ASMI menus, if available. 4. If the hang repeats, verify whether there is a firmware update that is available that fixes the problem; apply if available. For more information, see: v If the system is managed by an HMC, see the Operations Guide for the HMC and Managed Systems, SA76-0085. v If the system is not managed by an HMC, see the Operations Guide for the ASMI and Nonpartitioned Systems, SA76-0094.5. Choose from the following options: v If no firmware update is available, continue with the next step. v If a firmware update is available, apply it using the Service Focal Point in the Hardware Management Console (HMC), if attached.Did the update resolve the problem so that the system now boots? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: You are here because there is no HMC attached to the system, the flash update failed, or the updated firmware did not fix the hang. Continue with the next step.6. Choose from the following options: v If you are a customer, contact your authorized hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. v If you are the authorized hardware service provider, continue with the next step.7. Replace the service processor (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). 8. If replacing the service processor does not fix the problem, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 217 FSPSPD1 If the system hangs after the code that sent you to this procedure appears in the control panel, perform these steps to reset the service processor. Attention: You should periodically check the system firmware level on all your servers and update the firmware to the latest level, if appropriate. If you were directed to this procedure because the server displayed B1817201, C1001014, or C1001020, or a combination of these codes, the latest firmware can help avoid a recurrence of this problem. Even if the customer cannot update the firmware on this system at this time, all of their systems should be updated to the latest firmware level as soon as possible to help prevent this problem from occurring on other systems. Resetting the service processor on systems with a physical control panel 1. If the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) is available, reset the service processor using the ASMI menus. Were you able to use the ASMI menus to reset the service processor? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.2. Activate the service processor pinhole reset switch on the system’s control (operator) panel by carefully performing these steps: a. Using an insulated paper clip, unbend the paper clip so that it has a straight section about 2 inches long. b. Insert the clip straight into the hole, keeping the clip perpendicular to the plastic bezel. c. When you engage the reset switch, you should feel the detent of the switch. Pressing the reset switch resets the service processor and causes the system to shut down.3. Reboot the system in slow mode from the permanent side, using control panel function 02 or the ASMI menus, if available. 4. If the hang repeats, verify whether there is a firmware update that is available that fixes the problem; apply if available. For more information, see: v If the system is managed by an HMC, see the Operations Guide for the HMC and Managed Systems, SA76-0085. v If the system is not managed by an HMC, see the Operations Guide for the ASMI and Nonpartitioned Systems, SA76-0094.5. Choose from the following options: v If no firmware update is available, continue with the next step. v If a firmware update is available, apply it using the Service Focal Point in the Hardware Management Console (HMC), if attached.Did the update resolve the problem so that the system now boots? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: You are here because there is no HMC attached to the system, the flash update failed, or the updated firmware did not fix the hang. Continue with the next step.6. Choose from the following options: v If you are a customer, contact your authorized hardware service provider. This ends the procedure. v If you are the authorized hardware service provider, continue with the next step.7. Replace the service processor (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). 8. If replacing the service processor does not fix the problem, contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. 218 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Tape unit isolation procedures This topic contains the procedures necessary to isolate a failure in a tape device. In these procedures, the term tape unit may be any one of the following: v An internal tape drive, including its electronic parts and status indicators v An internal tape drive, including its tray, power regulator, and AMDs v An external tape drive, including its power supply, power switch, power regulator, and AMDs You should interpret the term tape unit to mean the tape drive you are working on. However, these procedures use the terms tape drive and enclosure to indicate a more specific meaning. Read and observe all safety procedures before servicing the system and while performing the procedures in this topic. Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion unit where the FRU is located (see Powering on and powering off) before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 219 DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “TUPIP02” on page 221Use this procedure to perform the 8mm tape drive read self-test and hardware self-test. “TUPIP03” on page 223You were directed here because you may need to exchange a failing part. “TUPIP04” on page 224Use this procedure to reset an IOP and its attached tape units. Read the (overview) before continuing with this procedure. “TUPIP06” on page 228Use this procedure to isolate a Device Not Found message during installation from an alternate device. “Tape unit self-test procedure” on page 229This procedure is designed to allow you to quickly perform a complete set of diagnostic tests on a 6384 or 6387 tape unit. “Tape device ready conditions” on page 231All the conditions that are listed for the device, must be correct for the device to be ready. 220 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) TUPIP02 Use this procedure to perform the 8mm tape drive read self-test and hardware self-test. The write test is performed in “TUPIP03” on page 223. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem (see “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593). 2. Press the Unload switch on the front of the 8mm tape drive. Is a data cartridge present? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Attempt to remove the data cartridge. Can you remove the data cartridge? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The tape drive is the failing part. Go to (Tape cartridge - Manual removal). After removing the data cartridge, exchange the tape drive (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). This ends the procedure.3. Clean the tape drive by using the cleaning cartridge (part 16G8467). If the tape drive ejects the cleaning cartridge with the Disturbance light on, a new cleaning cartridge is needed. The tape drive unloads automatically when cleaning is complete. Cleaning takes up to 5 minutes. Is the Disturbance light on continuously? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Repeat this step while using a new cleaning cartridge. If you are using a new cleaning cartridge and the Disturbance light does not go off, the possible failing part is the 8mm tape drive. Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure.4. Is the Disturbance light blinking? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Choose from the following: – If the 8mm tape drive is a type 6390, the possible failing part is the 6390 tape drive. – If the 8mm tape drive is a type 7208, the possible failing parts are: a. 7208 tape drive b. Power supply c. AMD Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure.5. Perform the read self-test: Notes: a. The 8mm tape drive read self-test and hardware self-test can take up to 5 minutes to run. b. The tape drive runs the read self-test first. During the read self-test, the Read-Write light blinks, and the Disturbance and Ready lights are off.To start the read self-test and hardware self-test, insert the diagnostic cartridge (part 46G2660) into the tape drive. The following conditions indicate that the read self-test ended successfully: v The Read-Write light stops blinking. v The diagnostic cartridge ejects automatically. v The three status lights go on to indicate the start of the hardware test. Does the read self-test end successfully? v No: Does the tape drive eject the diagnostic cartridge? – Yes: Continue with the next step. – No: The tape drive is the failing part. Go to (Tape cartridge - Manual removal). After removing the diagnostic cartridge, exchange the tape drive (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 221 v Yes: Go to step 8.6. Is the Disturbance light blinking approximately four times per second? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: The possible failing part is the diagnostic cartridge (part 46G2660). – If this is your first time through this step, get a new diagnostic cartridge. Go to step 3 on page 221 of this procedure to clean the tape drive again. Afterwards, run the read self-test and hardware self-test while using the new diagnostic cartridge. – If this is your second time through this step, the possible failing part is the 8mm tape drive. Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure.7. The Disturbance light is blinking approximately once per second. v If the 8mm tape drive is a type 6390, the possible failing part is the 6390 tape drive. v If the 8mm tape drive is a type 7208, the possible failing parts are: a. 7208 tape drive b. Power supply c. AMD Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure. 8. The tape drive runs the hardware self-test. During the hardware self-test, the three tape drive status lights are on for 15 to 30 seconds. The three status lights go off when the hardware self-test ends successfully. Does the hardware self-test end successfully? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: When the hardware self-test does not end successfully, the following conditions occur: – The three status lights do not go off. – The Ready and Read-Write lights go off. – The Disturbance light blinks approximately once per second. Possible failing parts are: – If the 8mm tape drive is a type 6390, the possible failing part is the 6390 tape drive. – If the 8mm tape drive is a type 7208, the possible failing parts are: a. 7208 tape drive b. Power supply c. AMD Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure.9. The read self-test and hardware self-test ended successfully. Was the user’s original tape identified as the probable cause of failure? v Yes: Perform the following: a. Mark and date the data cartridge to indicate that it failed with a permanent error. b. Discard this data cartridge when: – Volume statistics (if available) indicate a problem with the data cartridge. – A total of three permanent errors have occurred with the same data cartridge.c. If possible, continue operations with a new data cartridge. Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure. v No: Go to “TUPIP03” on page 223. This ends the procedure. 222 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) TUPIP03 You were directed here because you may need to exchange a failing part. The failing part was determined from one of the following: v Other problem isolation procedures v The Failing item column of the tape unit reference code table v Tape unit service guideNote: Occasionally, the system is available but not performing an alternate IPL (type D IPL). In this instance, any hardware failure of the tape unit I/O processor, or any device attached to it is not critical. With the exception of the loss of the affected devices, the system remains available. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem (see “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593). 2. Do you need to exchange a possible failing device? v No: Do you need to exchange the tape unit I/O processor? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Exchange the tape unit I/O processor (see Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335). When you have completed the remove and replace procedure, continue with the next step.v Yes: Perform the following: – For an internal tape unit, go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. – For an external tape unit, go to the remove and replace procedures in the device service information. 3. Are you working with a tape unit in the system unit or in an expansion unit? v Yes: Is the system available, and can you enter commands on the command line? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 9 on page 224.v No: Continue with the next step. 4. Display the selected IPL type. Is the displayed IPL type D? v No: Do you want to perform an alternate IPL (type D)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 6.v Yes: Go to step 6. 5. Perform an IPL from disk by doing the following: a. Power off the system (see Powering on and powering off). b. Select IPL type A in manual mode. c. Power on the system. d. Go to step 8. 6. Place the first tape of the latest set of SAVSYS tapes or SAVSTG tapes, or the first Software Distribution tape in the alternate IPL tape drive. The tape drive automatically becomes ready for the IPL operation (this may take several minutes). 7. Perform an alternate IPL by doing the following: a. Power off the system. b. Select IPL type D in Manual mode. c. Power on the system. 8. The IPL may take one or more hours to complete. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 223 Does an unexpected reference code appear on the control panel, and is the System Attention light on? v No: Does the IPL complete successfully? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Perform problem analysis to continue analyzing the problem. This ends the procedure.v Yes: Go to step 10. 9. Perform the following to test the tape unit: a. Enter VFYTAP (the Verify Tape command) on the command line. b. Follow the prompts on the Verify Tape displays, then return here and answer the following question.Does the VFYTAP command end successfully? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: This ends the procedure.10. Record the SRC. Is the SRC the same one that sent you to this procedure? Yes: You cannot continue to analyze the problem. Use the original SRC and exchange the FRUs. Begin with the FRU which has the highest percent of probable failure (see the failing item list for this reference code). This ends the procedure. No: A different SRC occurred. Use the new SRC to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.TUPIP04 Use this procedure to reset an IOP and its attached tape units. Read the (overview) before continuing with this procedure. If disk units are attached to an IOP, you must power off the system, then power it on to reset the IOP. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem (see “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593). 2. Is the tape unit powered on? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Press the Unload switch on the front of the tape unit you are working on. b. If a data cartridge or a tape reel is present, do not load it until you need it. c. Continue with the next step of this procedure. 3. Verify the following: v If the external device has a power switch, ensure that it is set to the On position. v Ensure that the power and external signal cables are connected correctly. Note: For every 8mm and 1/4 inch tape unit, the I/O bus terminating plug for the SCSI external signal cable is connected internally. These devices do not need and should not have an external terminating plug. 4. Did you press the Unload switch in step 2? v Yes: Can you enter commands on the command line? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11 on page 226.v No: Press the Unload switch on the front of the tape unit you are working on. If a data cartridge or a tape reel is present, do not load it until you need it. Continue with the next step of this procedure. 224 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 5. Has the tape unit operated correctly since it was installed? If you do not know, continue with the next step of this procedure. Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11 on page 226. 6. If a system message displayed an I/O processor name, a tape unit resource name, or a device name, record the name for use in the next step. You may continue without a name. Does the I/O processor give support to only one tape unit? If you do not know, continue with the next step of this procedure. v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following. You must complete all parts of this step before you press Enter. a. Enter WRKCFGSTS *DEV *TAP ASTLVL(*INTERMED) (the Work with Configuration Status command) on the command line. b. If the device is not varied off, select Vary off before continuing. c. Select Vary on for the failing tape unit. d. Enter RESET(*YES) (the Reset command) on the command line. e. Press Enter. This ends the procedure. 7. This step determines if the I/O processor for the tape unit gives support to other tape units or to a disk unit. Notes: a. If you cannot determine the tape unit you are attempting to use, go to step 11 (See 11 on page 226). b. System messages refer to other tape units that the I/O processor gives support to as associated devices.Enter WRKHDWRSC *STG (the Work with Hardware Resources command) on the command line. Did you record an I/O processor (IOP) resource name in step 6? v No: Perform the following: a. Select Work with resources for each storage resource IOP (CMB01, SIO1, and SIO2 are examples of storage resource IOPs). b. Find the Configuration Description name of the tape unit you are attempting to use, and then record the Configuration Description names of all tape units that the I/O processor gives support to. c. Record whether the I/O processor for the tape unit also gives support to any disk unit resources. d. Continue with the next step.v Yes: Perform the following: a. Select Work with resources for that resource. b. Record the Configuration description name of all tape units for which the I/O processor provides support. c. Record whether the I/O processor for the tape unit also gives support to any disk unit resources. d. Continue with the next step. 8. Does the I/O processor give support to any disk unit resources? No: Continue with the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 225 Yes: The Reset option is not available. Go to step 11. 9. Does the I/O processor give support to only one tape unit? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Select Work with configuration description and press Enter. b. Select Work with status and press Enter. Note: You must complete the remaining parts of this step before you press Enter again. c. If the device is not varied off, select Vary off before continuing. d. Select Vary on for the failing tape unit. e. Enter RESET(*YES) (the Reset command) on the command line. f. Press Enter. This ends the procedure.10. Perform the following: a. Enter WRKCFGSTS *DEV *TAP ASTLVL(*INTERMED) (the Work with Configuration Status command) on the command line. b. Select Vary off for the failing tape unit and associated devices (the devices you identified in step 7 on page 225), and then press Enter. Note: You must complete the remaining parts of this step before you press Enter again. c. Select Vary on for the failing tape unit. d. Enter RESET(*YES) (the Reset command) on the command line. e. Press Enter. f. Select Vary on for the associated devices (tape units) you identified in step 7 on page 225. It is not necessary to use the Reset option again.Does a system message indicate that the vary on operation failed? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.11. The Reset is not available, or you were not able to find the Configuration Description name when using WRKHDWRSC *STG (the Work with Hardware Resources command). You can perform an I/O processor (IOP) reset by performing an IPL of the I/O processor. All devices that are attached to the IOP will reset. The following steps describe how to load an IOP, how to configure a tape drive, how to vary on tape devices, and how to make tape devices available. 12. Is the tape device you are working on an 8mm tape drive? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Verify the following on the 8mm tape drive: – The power and external signal cables are connected correctly. – The Power switch is set to the On position (pushed in). 226 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Note: The SCSI I/O bus terminating plug for the system-external signal cables is connected internally in the 8mm tape drive. The 8mm tape drive does not need, and must not have an external terminating plug. Is the 8mm tape drive Power light on, and is the Disturbance light off? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to “TUPIP02” on page 221 to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.13. Is a data cartridge or a tape reel installed in the tape device? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Remove the data cartridge or tape reel. Continue with the next step.14. Can you enter commands on the command line? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following: a. Power off the system (see Powering on and powering off). b. Power on the system. The system performs an IPL and resets all devices. If the tape device responds to SCSI address 7, the system configures the tape device. This ends the procedure.15. Verify that automatic configuration is on by entering DSPSYSVAL QAUTOCFG (the Display System Value command) on the command line. Is the Autoconfigure device option set to 1? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Perform the following: a. Press Enter to return to the command line. b. Set automatic configuration to On by entering CHGSYSVAL QAUTOCFG ’1’ (the Change System Value command) on the command line.Note: QAUTOCFG resets to its initial value in step 21 on page 228. c. Continue with the next step.16. Perform the following: a. Enter STRSST (the Start SST command) on the command line. b. On the Start Service Tools Sign On display, type in a User ID with QSRV authority and Password. c. Select Start a Service Tool ? Hardware Service Manager ? Logical Hardware Resources ? System Bus Resources. The Logical Hardware Resources on System Bus display shows all of the IOPs. d. Find the IOP you want to reset. You must ensure that no one is using any of the tape units, communication channels, or display stations that are attached to the IOP you want to reset.Does a ?*? indicator appear to the right of the IOP description? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Disk units are attached to the IOP. Perform the following: a. Press F3 until the Exit System Service Tools display appears. b. Press Enter. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 227 c. Power off the system (see Powering on and powering off). d. Power on the system. The system performs an IPL and resets all devices. This ends the procedure.17. Perform the following: a. Select I/O debug ? IPL the I/O processor. b. When the IOP reset is complete, continue with the next step of this procedure.18. Perform the following: a. Press F12 to return to the Logical Hardware Resources on System Bus display. b. Select Resources associated with IOP for the IOP you reset.Did the IOP detect the tape unit? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: The IOP did not detect the tape unit. Consider the following: – Ensure that the tape unit is powered on and that the signal cables are connected correctly. If you find and correct a power or a signal cable problem, return to step 16 on page 227. – The tape unit may be failing. Go to the tape unit service information and perform the procedures for analyzing device problems. If you find and correct a tape unit problem, return to step 16 on page 227. – If none of the above are true, ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.19. Press F3 until the Exit System Service Tools display appears. Then press Enter. 20. Was automatic configuration Off before you performed step 15 on page 227? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: This ends the procedure.21. Enter CHGSYSVAL QAUTOCFG ’0’ (the Change System Value command) on the command line to reset QAUTOCFG to its initial value. This ends the procedure.TUPIP06 Use this procedure to isolate a Device Not Found message during installation from an alternate device. There are several possible causes: v The alternate installation device was not correctly defined. v The alternate installation device was not made ready. v The alternate installation device does not contain installation media. v The alternate installation device is not powered on. v The alternate installation device is not connected properly. v There is a hardware error on the alternate installation device or the attached I/O processor.Read the danger notices in “Tape unit isolation procedures” on page 219 before continuing with this procedure. 1. Is the device that you are using for alternate installation defined as the alternate installation device? v Yes: Is the alternate installation device ready? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Make the alternate installation device ready and retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure. 228 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v No: Correct the alternate installation device information and retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure.2. Is there installation media in the alternate installation device? v Yes: Is the alternate installation device an external device? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 5.v No: Load the correct media and retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure.3. Is the alternate installation device powered on? v Yes: Make sure that the alternate installation device is properly connected to the I/O processor or I/O adapter card. Is the alternate installation device properly connected? Yes: Go to step 5. No: Correct the problem and retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure.v No: Continue with the next step.4. Ensure that the power cable is connected tightly to the power cable connector at the back of the alternate device. Ensure that the power cable is connected to a power outlet that has the correct voltage. Set the alternate device Power switch to the Power On position. The Power light should go on and remain on. If a power problem is present, one of the following power failure conditions may occur: v The Power light flashes, then remains off. v The Power light does not go on. v Another indication of a power problem occurs. Does one of the above power failure conditions occur? v No: The alternate device is powered on and runs its power-on self-test. Wait for the power-on self-test to complete. Does the power-on self-test complete successfully? No: Go to the service information for the specific alternate installation device to correct the problem. Then retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure. Yes: Retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure.v Yes: Perform the following: a. Go to the service information for the specific alternate device to correct the power problem. b. When you have corrected the power problem, retry the alternate installation. This ends the procedure.5. Was a device error recorded in the Product Activity Log? No: Contact your next level of support. This ends the procedure. Yes: See Reference codes to correct the problem. This ends the procedure.Tape unit self-test procedure This procedure is designed to allow you to quickly perform a complete set of diagnostic tests on a 6384 or 6387 tape unit. The following procedure is designed to allow you to quickly perform a complete set of diagnostic tests on a 6384 or 6387 tape unit, without impacting your system operation. This test can also be used to verify good performance of individual tape cartridges. Enter diagnostic mode: 1. Verify that a cartridge is not loaded in the tape unit. To unload a cartridge, press the eject button on the front of the tape unit. If the cartridge does not eject, refer to (Tape unit - manual removal). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 229 2. Press and hold the eject button for about 6 seconds until the amber LED starts flashing slowly, then release the button. The amber (left) LED will flash, indicating that the tape unit is waiting for a cartridge to be inserted.Running the self-test 1. Self-testing begins when a scratch data cartridge is inserted into the tape unit. The Ready (left) LED will flash, indicating that self-testing is in progress.Note: A cartridge must be loaded within 15 seconds, otherwise, the tape unit will automatically revert back to normal operation. If necessary, return to step 1 on page 229 to reenter diagnostic mode. 2. For fastest results, we recommend using an SLR100 Test Tape (P/N 35L0967) which was originally provided with your iSeries™ server. Attention: Use a blank cartridge that does not contain customer data. During this self-test, the cartridge will be rewritten with a test pattern and any customer data will be destroyed.Note: Use a cartridge that is not write-protected. If a write-protected cartridge is inserted while the tape unit is in diagnostic mode, the cartridge will be ejected, see Incorrect cartridge below. Self-testing will only be performed using a write-compatible cartridge type, and with a cartridge that is not damaged, see Incorrect cartridge below. If a cleaning cartridge is inserted while the tape unit is in diagnostic mode, drive cleaning will occur and the tape unit will then return to normal operating mode. Return to step 1 on page 229 to reenter diagnostic mode. 3. At any time, self-testing can be stopped by pressing the eject button. After the current operation is completed, the cartridge will be ejected and tape unit will return to normal operating mode. 4. The Ready (left) LED will continue to flash during the following: v The cartridge load sequence has a approximate duration of 30 seconds. The center LED indicates tape movement. v The hardware test has an approximate duration of 2 and 1/2 minutes. During that time, a static test is performed on tape unit electrical components. No tape motion occurs during this step. v The cartridge load/unload test has an approximate duration of 1 and 1/2 minutes. During that time, the Ready LED will continue to flash while a dynamic test is performed on tape unit mechanical components. Two cartridge load cycles are included. v Duration of the write/read test will vary, depending on what type of cartridge is loaded into the tape unit. When an SLR100 Test Tape is used, typical duration will be 5 minutes. Use of other cartridge types can increase the write/read test duration to 30-40 minutes. During this test, the Ready LED will continue to flash. The center LED indicates tape movement.Interpreting the results Test Passed: When self-testing has completed successfully, and no problems are detected, the cartridge is unloaded from the tape unit and all LEDs are off. Proper function of both the tape unit and tape cartridge have now been verified. Note: A solid amber light indicates that self-testing has completed successfully, but the tape unit requires cleaning. Clean the tape unit by inserting an Dry Process Cleaning Cartridge (P/N 35L0844). Test Failed: The cartridge will remain loaded inside the tape unit, and the amber LED will flash when a problem is detected with either the tape unit or cartridge. Note: To isolate failure to either tape unit or cartridge, return to step 1 on page 229 and repeat this self-test using a different scratch cartridge. 230 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Incorrect cartridge: When the center (green) and right (amber) LEDs flash and a cartridge is unloaded, the tape unit has determined that an incorrect tape cartridge has been inserted, and self-testing cannot be performed. Verify that your tape cartridge is not one of the following: v Write-protected v Damaged v Unsupported media type v Media which is not write-compatible with tape unit.Press the eject button, to end self-test and return the tape unit to normal operating mode. Then return to step 1 on page 229 and run the self-test using another cartridge, or one which is not write-protected. This ends the procedure. Tape device ready conditions All the conditions that are listed for the device, must be correct for the device to be ready. If the device is not ready, use the Action column or other instructions, and go to the service information for the specific tape device. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem (see “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593). Table 41. Tape device ready conditions Storage device Ready description Action 3480 or 3490 v Power switch is set to the On position. v Power light is on. v DC Power light is on. v Control unit On-line switch is set to the On-line position. v Control unit Normal/Test switch is set to the Normal position. v Control unit channel Enable/Disable switch is set to the Enable position. v Tape unit On-line/Off-line switch is set to the On-line position. v Tape is loaded. v Tape unit displays Ready U or Ready F. See the 3480 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Operator’s Guide, SA32-0066, or 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Operator’s Guide, SA32-0124, for instructions on making the tape unit ready. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 231 Table 41. Tape device ready conditions (continued) Storage device Ready description Action 7208 v Power switch is on (pressed). v Power light is on. v Data cartridge is inserted. v Ready light is on. v System external signal cable is connected to the type 2621 I/O processor and to the 7208 tape drive.Note: The SCSI I/O bus terminating plug for the system external signal cable is connected internally in the 7208 tape drive. The 7208 tape drive does not need, and must not have, an external terminating plug. See the 7208 8 mm Tape Drive Operator’s Manual for instructions on making the tape drive ready. If you cannot make the 7208 Model 012 tape drive ready, go to “TUPIP02” on page 221. 9348 v Power switch is set to the On position. v Power light is on. v Tape is loaded. v Status display shows 00 A002. v On-line light is on. See the 9348 Customer Information manual, SA21-9567, for instructions on making the tape unit ready. If you cannot make the tape unit ready, go to the ?Analyzing Problems? section of 9348 Tape Unit Service Information, SY31-0697. 232 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Twinaxial workstation I/O processor isolation procedure Use the procedure below to isolate a failure which has been detected by the twinaxial workstation I/O processor. If you are using a personal computer, an emulation program must be installed and working. Please read and observe all safety procedures before servicing the system and while performing the procedure below. Attention: Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the FRU is located (see Powering on and powering off) before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) Attention: When instructed, remove and connect cables carefully. You may damage the connectors if you use too much force. “TWSIP01” on page 234The workstation IOP detected an error. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 233 TWSIP01 The workstation IOP detected an error. Please read the danger notices in “Twinaxial workstation I/O processor isolation procedure” on page 233 before performing this procedure. One of the following occurred: v All of the workstations on one port are not working. v All of the workstations on the system are not working. v One of the workstations on the system is not working. v The reference code table instructed you to perform this procedure. v The Remote Operations Console is not working. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593 before continuing with this procedure. 2. Are you using a workstation adapter console? Note: A personal computer (used as a console) that is attached to the system by using a console cable feature is known as a workstation adapter console. The cable (part number 46G0450, 46G0479, or 44H7504) connects the system port on the personal computer to a communications I/O adapter on the system. No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to “WSAIP01” on page 241. This ends the procedure. 3. Is the device you are attempting to repair a personal computer (PC)? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: PC emulation programs operate and report system-to-PC communications problems differently. See the PC emulation information for details on error identification. Then, continue with the next step. 4. Perform the following steps: a. Verify that all the devices you are attempting to repair, the primary console, and any alternative consoles are powered on. b. Verify that the all the devices you are attempting to repair, the primary console, and any alternative consoles have an available status. For more information on displaying the device status, see “Hardware Service Manager” on page 644. c. Verify that the workstation addresses of all workstations on the failing port are correct. Each workstation on the port must have a separate address, from 0 through 6. See the workstation service information for details on how to check addresses. d. Verify that the last workstation on the failing port is terminated. All other workstations on that port must not be terminated. e. Ensure that the cables that are attached to the device or devices are tight and are not visibly damaged. f. If there were any cable changes, check them carefully. g. If all of the workstations on the system are not working, disconnect them by terminating at the console. h. Verify the device operation (see the device information for instructions). i. The cursor position can assist in problem analysis. v If the cursor is in the upper right corner, it indicates a communication problem between the workstation IOP and the device. Continue with the next step. 234 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v If the cursor is in the upper left corner, it indicates a communication problem between the workstation IOP and the operating system. Perform the following steps: 1) Verify that all current PTFs are loaded. 2) Ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 5. Is the system powered off? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 8. 6. Perform the following: a. Power on the system in Manual mode. See “IPL type, mode, and speed options” on page 642 for details. b. Wait for a display to appear on the console or a reference code to appear on the control panel.Does a display appear on the console? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: If you disconnected any devices after the console in step 4 on page 234, perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reconnect one device. Note: Ensure that you terminate the device you just reconnected and remove the termination from the device previously terminated. c. Power on the system. d. If a reference code appears on the control panel, go to step 9. e. If no reference code appears, repeat steps a through d of this step until you have checked all devices disconnected previously. f. Continue to perform the initial program load (IPL). This ends the procedure. 7. Does the same reference code that sent you to this procedure appear on the control panel? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Perform problem analysis for this new problem. This ends the procedure. 8. Perform the following to make DST available: a. Ensure that Manual mode on the control panel is selected. b. Select function 21 Make DST Available. c. Check the console and any alternative consoles for a display.Does a display appear on any of the console displays? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: If you disconnected any devices after the console in step 4 on page 234, perform the following: a. Power off the system. b. Reconnect one device. Note: Ensure that you terminate the device you just reconnected and remove the termination from the previously terminated device. c. Power on the system. d. If a reference code appears on the control panel or on the HMC, go to step 9. e. If no reference code, repeat steps a through d of this step until you have checked all devices disconnected previously. f. Continue to perform the initial program load (IPL). This ends the procedure. 9. Ensure that the following conditions are met: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 235 v The workstation addresses of all workstations on the failing port must be correct. Each workstation on the port must have a separate address, from 0 through 6. See the workstation service information if you need help with checking addresses. Did you find a problem with any of the above conditions? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 11.10. Perform the following: a. Correct the problem. b. Select function 21 Make DST Available. c. Check the console and any alternative consoles for a display.Does a display appear on any of the consoles? v Yes: Continue to perform the IPL. This ends the procedure. v No: Does the same reference code appear on the control panel? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Perform problem analysis for this new problem. This ends the procedure.11. Is the reference code one of the following: 0001, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0101, 0103, 0104, 0105, 0106, 5004, 5082, B000, D010, or D023? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Go to step 15 on page 237.12. Does the system have an alternative console on a second workstation IOP? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 14.13. There is either a Licensed Internal Code problem, or there are two device failures on the workstation IOPs, consoles, or cables. The console and any alternative consoles are the most probable causes for this failure. v See the service information for the failing display to attempt to correct the problem. If a display is connected to the system by a link protocol converter, use the link protocol converter information to attempt to correct the problem. The link protocol converter may be the failing item. v If you have another working display, you can exchange the console and alternative consoles and perform an IPL to attempt to correct the problem. v Exchange the following parts one at a time until you determine the failing item: a. Console b. Alternative console c. Cables d. Workstation IOA for the console e. The multi-adapter bridge. This ends the procedure.14. The console, cables, or the workstation IOP card is the most probable causes for this failure. If the console is connected to the system by a link protocol converter, the link protocol converter is possibly the failing item. Use one or more of the following options to correct the problem: a. See the service information for the failing displays for more information. If a display is connected to the system by a link protocol converter, see the link protocol converter information to attempt to correct the problem. b. If you have another working display, you can exchange the console and perform an IPL to attempt to correct the problem. c. Exchange the following parts one at a time until you determine the failing item: 1) Console 2) Workstation IOA 236 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 3) The multi-adapter bridge. 4) Twinaxial attachment (cable) This ends the procedure.15. To continue problem analysis, use a port tester, part 93X2040 or 59X4262, which you may have with your tools or the customer may have one. The port tester has either two or three lights. Is a port tester available? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Check or exchange the cables from the system to the failing display. Did this correct the problem? Yes: You corrected the problem. This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 12 on page 236.16. To use the port tester to isolate the problem, perform the following: v Verify that the port tester is operating correctly by doing a self-test. A self-test can be made at any time, even when the port tester is attached to a port or cable. Perform the following steps to do a self-test: a. Move the selector switch to the center (0) position. b. Push and hold the test button until all lights go on. The yellow lights should go on immediately, and the green light should go on approximately 5 seconds later. The port tester is ready for use if all lights go on.v Leave the system power on.17. Find the input cable to the failing console or port. Is the failing console or the failing port attached to a protocol converter? v No: Perform the following: a. Disconnect the input cable from the failing console. b. Connect the port tester to the input cable. c. Continue with the next step.v Yes: Perform the following: a. Disconnect the cable that comes from the system at the protocol converter. b. Connect the port tester to the cable. c. Continue with the next step.18. Perform the following: a. Set the selector switch on the port tester to the left (1) position for a twinaxial connection. Set the switch to the right (2) position for a twisted pair connection. b. Press and hold the test switch on the port tester for 15 seconds and observe the lights. c. Choose from the following options: v If the port tester has three lights, do the following: – If only the top (green) light is on, go to step 27 on page 239. – If both the top (green) and center (yellow) lights are on, go to step 20 on page 238. Note: The center (yellow) light is always on for twisted pair cable and may be on for fiber optical cable. – If only the bottom (yellow) light is on, go to step 21 on page 238. – If all lights are off, go to step 22 on page 238. – If all lights are on, go to step 19 on page 238.v If the port tester has two lights, do the following: – If only the top (green) light is on, go to step 27 on page 239. – If only the bottom (yellow) light is on, go to step 21 on page 238. – If both lights are off, go to step 22 on page 238. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 237 – If both lights are on, continue with the next step.19. The tester is in the self-test mode. Check the position of the selector switch. v If the selector switch is not in the correct position, go to step 18 on page 237. v If the selector switch is already in the correct position, the port tester is not working correctly. Exchange the port tester, and go to step 16 on page 237.20. The cable you are testing has an open shield. Note: The open shield can be checked only on the cable from the twinaxial workstation attachment to the device or from device to device. Only one section of cable can be checked at a time. See the SA41-3136, Port Tester Use information.This ends the procedure. 21. The cable network is bad. The wires in the cable between the console and the twinaxial workstation attachment are reversed. Go to step 26. 22. Perform the following: a. Find the twinaxial workstation attachment to which the failing console is attached. b. Disconnect the cable from port 0 on that twinaxial workstation attachment. c. Connect the port tester to port 0 on the attachment. d. Set the selector switch on the port tester to the left (1) position.23. Perform the following: a. Press and hold the test switch on the port tester for 15 seconds and observe the lights. b. If the port tester has three lights, do the following: v If both the top (green) and center (yellow) lights are on, continue with step 24. Note: The center (yellow) light is always on for twisted pair cable and may be on for fiber optical cable. v If only the bottom (yellow) light is on, continue with step 24. v If all lights are off, continue with step 24. v If only the top (green) light is on, go to step 26. v If all lights are on, go to step 25.c. If the port tester has two lights, do the following:v If only the top (green) light is on, go to step 26. v If only the bottom (yellow) light is on, continue with step 24. v If both lights are off, continue with step 24. v If both lights are on, go to step 25.24. The test indicated that there was no signal from the system. Reconnect the cable you disconnected and perform the following: a. Exchange the following parts: 1) Twinaxial workstation IOA card 2) The multi-adapter bridge.b. Power on the system to perform an IPL. This ends the procedure.25. The tester is in the self-test mode. Check the position of the selector switch: v If the selector switch is not in the left (1) position, set the switch to the left (1) position. Then go to step 23. v If the selector switch is already in the left (1) position, the port tester is not working correctly. Exchange the port tester and go to step 22.26. The cable to the workstation is the failing item. Cable maintenance is a customer responsibility. The cable must be repaired or exchanged. Then, power on the system to perform an IPL. This ends the procedure. 238 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 27. The port tester detects most problems, but it does not always detect an intermittent problem or some cable impedance problems. The tester may indicate a good condition, although there is a problem with the workstation IOP card or cables. a. If the failing display is connected to a link protocol converter, the link protocol converter is the failing item. See the link protocol converter service information to correct the problem. b. Exchange the following parts: 1) Console 2) Twinaxial workstation IOA 3) The multi-adapter bridge. 4) Cablesc. If you have another working display, you can exchange the console and perform an IPL to attempt to correct the problem. See the service information for the failing display for more information. d. If exchanging the failing items did not correct the problem and the reference code was a 5002, 5082, or 50FF, there may be a Licensed Internal Code problem. Go to “LICIP03” on page 92. e. The problem may be caused by devices that are attached after the console on port 0. This ends the procedure. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 239 Workstation adapter isolation procedure Contains the procedure necessary to isolate a failure that is detected by the workstation adapter, and is used when no display is available with which to perform on-line problem analysis. The workstation adapter detected a problem while communicating with the workstation that is used as the primary console. Note: If you are using a PC, you must install an emulation program. Please read and observe all safety procedures before servicing the system and while performing the procedure below. Attention: Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the FRU is located (see Powering on and powering off) before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005) “WSAIP01” on page 241Use this procedure if your console has a keyboard error with a ?K? on the display. 240 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) WSAIP01 Use this procedure if your console has a keyboard error with a ?K? on the display. Note: If the console has a keyboard error, there may be a ?K? on the display. See the workstation service information for more information. Perform the following procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem: 1. Select the icon on the workstation to make it the console (you may have already done this). You must save the console selection. 2. Access Dedicated Service Tools (DST) by performing the following: a. Select Manual mode on the control panel. b. Use the selection switch on the control panel to display function 21, Make DST Available, and press Enter on the control panel. c. Wait for a display to appear on the console or for a reference code to appear on the control panel.Does a display appear on the console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The problem is corrected. This ends the procedure.3. Isolate the problem to one server and one workstation (console) by performing the following: a. Disconnect the power cable from the workstation. b. Eliminate all workstations, cables, and connector boxes from the network except for one server, one console, two connector boxes, and one cable. c. Ensure that the cables that are connected to the console, the keyboard, and the server are connected correctly and are not damaged.4. Perform the following: a. Ensure that the server console is terminated correctly. b. Set the Power switch on the console to the On position. c. Select the SNA*PS icon on the console. d. See the workstation information for more information.5. Access DST by performing the following: a. Select Manual mode on the control panel. b. Use the selection switch on the control panel to display function 21, Make DST Available, and press Enter on the control panel. c. Wait for a display to appear on the console or for a reference code to appear on the control panel.Does a display appear on the console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: The problem is in a cable, connector box, or device you disconnected in step 3. This ends the procedure.6. Does the reference code A600 5005 appear on the control panel? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Perform problem analysis using this reference code. This ends the procedure.7. Do you have another workstation, cable, and two connector boxes you can exchange with the workstation connected to the server? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: One of the following is causing the problem: Note: The items at the top of the list have a higher probability of fixing the problem than the items at the bottom of the list. – Workstation adapter Licensed Internal Code Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 241 – Workstation adapter configuration – Workstation – Cable – Connector box – Workstation IOA – Workstation IOP If you still have not corrected the problem, ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure.8. Repeat steps 3 on page 241 through 7 on page 241 of this procedure, using a different workstation, cable, and connector boxes. Do you still have a problem? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: The problem is in the cable, connector boxes, or workstation you disconnected. This ends the procedure.9. One of the following is causing the problem: Note: The items at the top of the list have a higher probability of fixing the problem than the items at the bottom of the list. v Workstation adapter Licensed Internal Code v Workstation adapter configuration v Workstation IOA v Communications IOP To bring up a workstation other than the console, perform the following: a. Connect another workstation into this network. b. Select Normal mode on the control panel. c. Perform an IPL. If the sign-on display appears, the following parts are good: v Communications IOP v Workstation IOANote: If a printer connected to this assembly is not working correctly, it may look like the display is bad. Perform a self-test on the printer to ensure that it prints correctly (see the printer service information). If you still have not corrected the problem, ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. 242 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Workstation adapter console isolation procedure Contains the procedure necessary to isolate a failure that is detected by the workstation adapter console. Use this procedure when no display is available with which to perform online problem analysis. Note: If you are using a PC, you must install an emulation program. Read all safety procedures before servicing the system. Observe all safety procedures when performing a procedure. Unless instructed otherwise, always power off the system or expansion tower where the FRU is located, see Powering on and powering off before removing, exchanging, or installing a field-replaceable unit (FRU). DANGERWhen working on or around the system, observe the following precautions: Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard: v Connect power to this unit only with the IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for any other product. v Do not open or service any power supply assembly. v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords. v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remove the power cords from the outlets. 3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors. 4. Remove all cables from the devices To Connect: 1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to the devices. 3. Attach the signal cables to the connectors. 4. Attach the power cords to the outlets. 5. Turn on the devices. (D005)Read and understand the following service procedures before using this section: v Powering on and powering off v “Determining a primary or alternative console” on page 591 v Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 243 Note: If the console has a keyboard error, there may be a K on the display. See the workstation service information for more information. 1. If the system has logical partitions, perform this procedure from the logical partition that reported the problem. To determine if the system has logical partitions, go to “Determining if the system has logical partitions” on page 593. 2. Ensure that your workstation meets the following conditions: v The workstation that you are using for the console is powered on. v The emulation program is installed and is working. v The input/output adapter (IOA) is installed and the workstation console cable is attached. Notes: a. Card information: Hardware that is associated with 6A59 feature is the type 2745 card. b. Cable information: The cable attaches directly to the IOA.Did you find a problem with any of the conditions listed above? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Correct the problem. Then, perform an IPL of the system. This ends the procedure.3. Perform the following to make dedicated service tool (DST) available: a. If there is an alternative console, ensure that it is powered on. b. Ensure that Manual mode on the control panel is selected. c. Select function 21, Make DST Available on the control panel, and press Enter.Does a display appear on either the console or any alternative console? No: Continue with the next step. Yes: Complete the IPL. When the operating system display appears, use the Work with Problem command (WRKPRB) or Analyze Problem command (ANZPRB) to analyze and correct or report any console problems. This ends the procedure.4. Do you have SRC A600 5001, A600 5004, A600 5007, or B075 xxxx (where xxxx is any value)? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: Perform the following: a. Disconnect any cables that are attached to the IOA. b. Install the wrap plug on the IOA. The 2745 wrap plug label is QQ. c. Perform an IPL in Manual mode.5. Does SRC 6A59 5007 occur? v No: Continue with the next step. v Yes: One of the following is causing the problem: – Workstation emulation program – Workstation – Workstation console cableThis ends the procedure.6. Did SRC A600 5001, A600 5004, or 6A59 5008 occur? No: This is a new problem. Use the new reference code to perform problem analysis for the problem, or ask your next level of support for assistance. This ends the procedure. Yes: The Type 2745 workstation adapter is the failing item. This ends the procedure. 244 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Isolating problems on servers that run the AIX or Linux operating systems Use the procedures for AIX or Linux servers if there is not an HMC attached to the server. If the server is connected to an HMC, use the procedures that are available on the HMC to continue FRU isolation. “MAP 0210: General problem resolution” on page 246Use this procedure to exchange the FRUs in the order of their failure probability. “Problems with loading and starting the operating system (AIX and Linux)” on page 246If the system is running partitions from partition standby (LPAR), the following procedure addresses the problem in which one partition will not boot AIX or Linux while other partitions boot successfully and run the operating system successfully. “Storage I/O card modes and jumpers” on page 250 “SCSI service hints” on page 252Use one or more of the following procedures when servicing SCSI adapter or devices. “MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure” on page 259Use this MAP to get a service request number (SRN) if the customer or a previous MAP provided none. “MAP 0030: Additional Problem Determination” on page 266This MAP is used for problems that still occur after all FRUs indicated by the SRN or error code have been exchanged. “MAP 0040: Intermittent Problem Isolation” on page 267This MAP provides a structured way of analyzing intermittent problems. “MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems” on page 269Use this MAP to analyze problems with a SCSI bus. “MAP 0054: PCI-X SCSI Bus Problems” on page 276Use this MAP to determine which FRUs may need to be replaced in order to solve a SCSI bus-related problem on a PCI-X SCSI or PCI-X SCSI RAID adapter. “MAP 0070: 888 sequence in operator panel display” on page 278Use this MAP when you receive an 888 sequence on the operator panel display or monitor. “MAP 0220: Hot-Swap FRU problem resolution” on page 279Use this procedure to exchange hot-swappable field replaceable units (FRUs). “MAP 0230: Platform error problem resolution” on page 284Use this MAP to resolve problems reported by SRNs A00-xxx to A25-xxxx. “MAP 0260: System hangs during resource configuration” on page 288Use this MAP when the system unit hangs while configuring a resource. “MAP 0270: SCSI RAID problem resolution and verification” on page 291Use this MAP to resolve SCSI RAID adapter, cache, or drive problems. “MAP 0280: Console and Keyboard Problem Resolution” on page 295Use this MAP to resolve console and keyboard problems when the system is booting. “MAP 0285: Multipath I/O (MPIO) Problem Resolution” on page 296Use this MAP to handle SRN A23-001 and ssss-640 (where ssss is the 3 or 4 digit Failing Function Code (FFC) of an SCSD drive) to check the path from adapter to device. “MAP 0291: Missing Device or Bus Problem Resolution” on page 299Use this MAP when a bus or device (such as a disk drive) is reported as a missing resource by the diagnostics. “PFW1540: Problem isolation procedures” on page 301The PFW1540 procedures are used to locate problems in the processor subsystem or I/O subsystem(s). “PFW1542: I/O problem isolation procedure” on page 302This I/O problem-determination procedure isolates I/O card and I/O subsystem failures. When I/O problem isolation is complete, all cables and cards that are failing will have been replaced or reseated. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 245 “PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure” on page 316Use this problem isolation procedure to aid in solving memory and processor problems that are not found by normal diagnostics.MAP 0210: General problem resolution Use this procedure to exchange the FRUs in the order of their failure probability. v Step 0210-1 Did the problem report provide a part number for the FRU you are about to replace? NO Go to Step 0210-2. YES Go to Step 0210-3.v Step 0210-2 Find the failing function codes in the Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691, and record the FRU part number and description of each FRU. v Step 0210-3 Obtain the replacement part. v Step 0210-4 Go to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335, and follow the procedures for the FRU you are servicing.Problems with loading and starting the operating system (AIX and Linux) If the system is running partitions from partition standby (LPAR), the following procedure addresses the problem in which one partition will not boot AIX or Linux while other partitions boot successfully and run the operating system successfully. It is the customer’s responsibility to move devices between partitions. If a device must be moved to another partition to run standalone diagnostics, contact the customer or system administrator. If the optical drive must be moved to another partition, all SCSI devices connected to that SCSI adapter must be moved because moves are done at the slot level, not at the device level. Depending on the boot device, a checkpoint may be displayed on the operator panel for an extended period of time while the boot image is retrieved from the device. This is particularly true for tape and network boot attempts. If booting from an optical drive or tape drive, watch for activity on the drive’s LED indicator. A blinking LED indicates that the loading of either the boot image or additional information required by the operating system being booted is still in progress. If the checkpoint is displayed for an extended period of time and the drive LED is not indicating any activity, there might be a problem loading the boot image from the device. Notes: 1. For network boot attempts, if the system is not connected to an active network or if the target server is inaccessible (which can also result from incorrect IP parameters being supplied), the system will still attempt to boot. Because time-out durations are necessarily long to accommodate retries, the system may appear to be hung. Refer to checkpoint CA00 E174. 2. If the partition hangs with a 4-character checkpoint in the display, the partition must be deactivated, then reactivated before attempting to reboot. 3. If a BA06 000x error code is reported, the partition is already deactivated and in the error state. Reboot by activating the partition. If the reboot is still not successful, go to step 3 on page 247. 246 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) This procedure assumes that a diagnostic CD-ROM and an optical drive from which it can be booted are available, or that diagnostics can be run from a NIM (Network Installation Management) server. Booting the diagnostic image from an optical drive or a NIM server is referred to as running standalone diagnostics. 1. Is a Hardware Management Console attached to the managed system? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 3. 2. Look at the service action event error log in Manage Serviceable Events on the HMC. Perform the actions necessary to resolve any open entries that affect devices in the boot path of the partition or that indicate problems with I/O cabling. Then try to reboot the partition. Does the partition reboot successfully? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step. 3. Boot to the SMS main menu: v If you are rebooting a partition from partition standby (LPAR), go to the properties of the partition and select Boot to SMS, then activate the partition. v If you are rebooting from platform standby, access the ASMI (see “Accessing the ASMI using a Web browser” on page 646. Select Power/Restart Control, then Power On/Off System. In the AIX/Linux partition mode boot box, select Boot to SMS menu ? Save Settings and Power On. At the SMS main menu, select Select Boot Options and verify whether the intended boot device is correctly specified in the boot list. Is the intended load device correctly specified in the boot list? v Yes: Perform the following: a. Remove all removable media from devices in the boot list from which you do not want to load the operating system. b. If you are attempting to load the operating system from a network, go to step 4. c. If you are attempting to load the operating system from a disk drive or an optical drive, go to step 7 on page 248. d. No: Go to step 5. 4. If you are attempting to load the operating system from the network, perform the following: v Verify that the IP parameters are correct. v Use the SMS ping utility to attempt to ping the target server. If the ping is not successful, have the network administrator verify the server configuration for this client. v Check with the network administrator to ensure that the network is up. Also ask the network administrator to verify the settings on the server from which you are trying to load the operating system. v Check the network cabling to the adapter. Restart the partition and try loading the operating system. Does the operating system load successfully? Yes: This ends the procedure. No: Go to step 7 on page 248. 5. Use the SMS menus to add the intended boot device to the boot sequence. Can you add the device to the boot sequence? Yes: Restart the partition. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step. 6. Ask the customer or system administrator to verify that the device you are trying to load from is assigned to the correct partition. Then select List All Devices and record the list of bootable devices that displays. Is the device from which you want to load the operating system in the list? Yes: Go to step 7 on page 248. No: Go to step 10 on page 248. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 247 7. Try to load and run standalone diagnostics against the devices in the partition, particularly against the boot device from which you want to load the operating system. You can run standalone diagnostics from an optical drive or a NIM server. To boot standalone diagnostics, follow the detailed procedures in “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672. Note: When attempting to load diagnostics on a partition from partition standby, the device from which you are loading standalone diagnostics must be made available to the partition that is not able to load the operating system, if it is not already in that partition. Contact the customer or system administrator if a device must be moved between partitions in order to load standalone diagnostics. Did standalone diagnostics load and start successfully? Yes: Go to step 8. No: Go to step 14 on page 249. 8. Was the intended boot device present in the output of the option Display Configuration and Resource List, which is run from the Task Selection menu? v Yes: Continue with the next step. v No: Go to step 10. 9. Did running diagnostics against the intended boot device result in a No Trouble Found message? Yes: Go to step 12 on page 249. No: Go to the list of service request numbers and perform the repair actions for the SRN reported by the diagnostics. When you have completed the repair actions, go to step 13 on page 249.10. Perform the following actions: a. Perform the first item in the action list below. In the list of actions below, choose SCSI or IDE based on the type of device from which you are trying to boot the operating system. b. Restart the system or partition. c. Stop at the SMS menus and select Select Boot Options. d. Is the device that was not appearing previously in the boot list now present? Yes: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. No: Perform the next item in the action list and then return to step 10b. If there are no more items in the action list, go to step 11 on page 249.Action list: Note: See Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for part numbers and links to exchange procedures. a. Verify that the SCSI or IDE cables are properly connected. Also verify that the device configuration and address jumpers are set correctly. b. Do one of the following: v SCSI boot device: If you are attempting to boot from a SCSI device, remove all hot-swap disk drives (except the intended boot device, if the boot device is a hot-swap drive).If the boot device is present in the boot list after you boot the system to the SMS menus, add the hot-swap disk drives back in one at a time, until you isolate the failing device. v IDE boot device: If you are attempting to boot from an IDE device, disconnect all other internal SCSI or IDE devices. If the boot device is present in the boot list after you boot the system to the SMS menus, reconnect the internal SCSI or IDE devices one at a time, until you isolate the failing device or cable.c. Replace the SCSI or IDE cables. d. Replace the SCSI backplane (or IDE backplane, if present) to which the boot device is connected. e. Replace the intended boot device. f. Replace the system backplane. 248 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 11. Choose from the following: v If the intended boot device is not listed, go to “PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure” on page 316. This ends the procedure. v If an SRN is reported by the diagnostics, go to the list of service request numbers and follow the action listed. This ends the procedure.12. Have you disconnected any other devices? Yes: Reinstall each device that you disconnected, one at a time. After you reinstall each device, reboot the system. Continue this procedure until you isolate the failing device. Replace the failing device, then go to step 13. No: Perform an operating system-specific recovery process or reinstall the operating system. This ends the procedure.13. Is the problem corrected? Yes: Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure. No: If replacing the indicated FRUs did not correct the problem, or if the previous steps did not address your situation, go to “PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure” on page 316. This ends the procedure.14. Is a SCSI boot failure (where you cannot boot from a SCSI-attached device) also occurring? v Yes: Go to “PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure” on page 316. This ends the procedure. v No: Continue to the next step.15. Perform the following actions to determine if another adapter is causing the problem: a. Remove all adapters except the one to which the optical drive is attached and the one used for the console. b. Reload the standalone diagnostics. Can you successfully reload the standalone diagnostics? v Yes: Perform the following: 1) Reinstall the adapters that you removed (and attach devices as applicable) one at a time. After you reinstall each adapter, retry the boot operation until the problem reoccurs. 2) Replace the adapter or device that caused the problem. 3) Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. This ends the procedure.v No: Continue with the next step.16. The graphics adapter (if installed), optical drive, IDE or SCSI cable, or system board is most likely defective. Does your system have a PCI graphics adapter installed? Yes: Continue with the next step. No: Go to step 1817. Perform the following to determine if the graphics adapter is causing the problem: a. Remove the graphics adapter. b. Attach a TTY terminal to the system port. c. Try to reload standalone diagnostics. Do the standalone diagnostics load successfully? Yes: Replace the graphics adapter. This ends the procedure. No: Continue with the next step.18. Replace the following (if not already replaced), one at a time, until the problem is resolved: a. Optical drive b. IDE or SCSI cable that goes to the optical drive c. System board that contains the integrated SCSI or IDE adapters.If this resolves the problem, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. If the problem still persists or if the previous descriptions did not address your particular situation, go to “PFW1548: Memory and processor subsystem problem isolation procedure” on page 316. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 249 This ends the procedure.Storage I/O card modes and jumpers The 2748 and 2778 I/O cards can run in either compression mode or enhanced mode. v Compression Mode: Compression mode should only be used when you want to run Integrated Hardware Disk Compression. In compression mode, the write cache size is 4 MB. v Enhanced Mode: Enhanced mode has an enhanced write cache size. In enhanced mode, the write cache size for the 2748 I/O card is 26MB, and the maximum compressed write cache size for the 2778 I/O card is 104MB. Enhanced mode also provides support for Extended Adaptive Cache (by attachment of a read cache device) and Extended Adaptive Cache Simulator.The following subtopics are included here: v “Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card.” v When an error regarding the mode of the storage I/O card appears, the error message indicates whether the jumper is missing or overridden. – If the error message is CPPEA20, the I/O card has overridden the mode set by the jumper. See “Mode jumper has been overridden” on page 251. – If the error message is CPPEA21, the I/O card has detected that the jumper is missing. See “Mode jumper is missing” on page 252. “Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card”Provides detailed steps for setting or changing the mode of an I/O card. “Mode jumper has been overridden” on page 251Covers how to correct the error message that appears when the mode jumper has been overridden. “Mode jumper is missing” on page 252The error message CPPEA21 appears when the mode jumper is missing from the storage I/O card.Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card Provides detailed steps for setting or changing the mode of an I/O card. How to set or change the mode of an I/O card: The 2748 and 2778 I/O cards support two modes: compression and enhanced. The rear of the I/O card is marked with a C, indicating compression mode, and an E, indicating enhanced mode. Three pins on the rear of the I/O card determine the mode of the card, depending on which of the pins have a jumper placed on them. The jumper may be moved at any time, but changes only take effect during a system IPL. Refer to the illustration below while changing the mode jumper. 250 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 1. Power off the system, ensuring that no jobs are currently processing (see Powering on and powering off). 2. Choose from the following options: v To set the mode of the card to compressed (C), place the jumper on the top and middle pins. v To set the mode of the card to enhanced (E), place the jumper on the middle and bottom pins.3. Select the IPL type and mode. 4. Power on the system.Mode jumper has been overridden Covers how to correct the error message that appears when the mode jumper has been overridden. The error message CPPEA20 appears when the mode jumper has been overridden. This is due to cache data that is in a conflicting mode. 1. To begin correcting this error, examine the mode jumpers in the rear section of the storage I/O card. Note: The mode jumper is accessible without requiring the removal of the I/O card. 2. Choose from the following options: v If the mode jumper is not in the desired position, follow the steps in “Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card” on page 250. v If the mode jumper is in the desired position and any other I/O card or device reference codes occurred at about the same time as this error, contact your service representative. v If the mode jumper is in the desired position and no other I/O card or device reference codes occurred at about the same time as this error, then power the system down normally and IPL. See Powering on and powering off. This ends the procedure. Figure 3. Changing the mode jumper Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 251 Mode jumper is missing The error message CPPEA21 appears when the mode jumper is missing from the storage I/O card. 1. Locate the jumper. 2. Power off the system. See Powering on and powering off. 3. Install the jumper in the correct position. See “Setting or changing the mode of an I/O card” on page 250. 4. Power on the system. This ends the procedure.SCSI service hints Use one or more of the following procedures when servicing SCSI adapter or devices. General SCSI Configuration Checks With any type of SCSI problem, begin with the following steps: 1. Verify that all SCSI devices on the SCSI bus have a unique address. 2. Verify that all cables are connected securely and that there is proper termination at both ends of the SCSI bus. 3. Verify that the cabling configuration does not exceed the maximum cable length for the adapter in use. 4. Verify that the adapters and devices that you are working with are at the appropriate microcode levels for the customer situation. If you need assistance with microcode issues, contact your service support structure. 5. If there are multiple SCSI adapters on the SCSI bus, verify that the customer is using the appropriate software (such as HACMP™ or HANFS) to support such an arrangement. If the correct software is not in use, some SCSI errors should be expected when multiple adapters attempt to access the same SCSI device. Also, each adapter should have a unique address.High Availability or Multiple SCSI System Checks If you have a high-availability configuration, or if more than one system is attached to the same SCSI bus, do the following: 1. Verify that the adapters and devices have unique SCSI addresses. The default SCSI adapter address is always 7. If you have more than one adapter on the bus, change the address of at least one by using SMIT (SMIT Devices ? SCSI Adapter ? Change/Show characteristics of an adapter). You must make the changes to the database only, then reboot the system in order for the change to take effect.Note: Diagnostics defaults to using ID 7 (it is recommended that this ID not be used in high availability configurations). 2. If RAID devices such as the 7135 or 7137 are attached, run the appropriate diagnostics for the device. If problems occur, contact your service support structure for assistance. If the diagnostics are run incorrectly on these devices, misleading SRNs can result. 3. Diagnostics cannot be run against OEM devices; doing so results in misleading SRNs. 4. Verify that all cables are connected securely and that both ends of the SCSI bus is terminated correctly. 5. Verify that the cabling configuration does not exceed the maximum cable length for the adapter in use. Refer to the SCSI Cabling section in the RS/6000® eServer™ pSeries® Adapters, Devices, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems for more details on SCSI cabling issues. 6. Verify that the adapter and devices are at the appropriate microcode levels for the customer situation. If you need assistance with microcode issues, contact your service support structure.SCSI-2 Single-Ended Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure Before replacing a SCSI-2 single-ended adapter, use these procedures to determine if a short-circuit condition exists on the SCSI bus. The same positive temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor is used for both the internal and external buses. The PTC protects the SCSI bus from high currents due to short-circuiting 252 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) on the cable, terminator, or device. It is unlikely that the PTC can be tripped by a defective adapter. Unless instructed to do so by these procedures, do not replace the adapter because of a tripped PTC resistor. A fault (short-circuit) causes an increase in PTC resistance and temperature. The increase in resistance causes the PTC to halt current flow. The PTC returns to a low resistive and low temperature state when the fault is removed from the SCSI bus or when the system is turned off. Wait 5 minutes for the PTC resistor to fully cool, then retest. These procedures determine if the PTC resistor is still tripped and then determine if there is a short-circuit somewhere on the SCSI bus. Determining Where to Start Use the following to determine the adapter configuration and select the appropriate procedure: v If there are external cables attached to the adapter, start with the External Bus PTC Isolation Procedure for your type of adapter. v If there are no external cables attached, start with the “Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure” on page 254. v If there is a combination of external and internal cables start with the External Bus PTC Isolation Procedure for your type of adapter. If this procedure does not resolve the problem, continue with the Internal Bus PTC Isolation Procedure for your type of adapter.External SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure Isolate the external SCSI bus PTC fault with the following procedure: Note: The external bus is of single-ended design. 1. Ensure the system power and all externally attached device power is turned off. All testing is accomplished with the power off. 2. Disconnect any internal and external cables from the adapter and remove the adapter from the system. 3. Verify with a digital ohmmeter that the internal PTC resistor, labeled Z1, (refer to the illustration after Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure, step 3 on page 254) is cool and in a low resistance state, typically less than 1/2 Ohm. Measuring across, be sure to probe both sides of the PTC where the solder joints and board come together. The polarity of the test leads is not important. If necessary, allow the PTC resistor to cool and measure again. 4. Locate Capacitor C1 and measure the resistance across it by using the following procedure: a. Connect the positive lead to the side of the capacitor where the + is indicated on the board near C1. Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. b. Connect the negative lead to the opposite side of the capacitor marked ?GND.? Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. c. If there is no short-circuit present, then the resistance reading is high, typically hundreds of Ohms.Note: Because this is a measurement across unpowered silicon devices, the reading is a function of the ohmmeter used. v If there is a fault, the resistance reading is low, typically below 10 Ohms. Because there are no cables attached, the fault is on the adapter. Replace the adapter. Note: Some multi-function meters label the leads specifically for voltage measurements. When using this type of meter to measure resistance, the plus lead and negative lead my not be labeled correctly. If you are not sure that your meter leads accurately reflect the polarity for measuring resistance, repeat this step with the leads reversed. If the short-circuit is not indicated with the leads reversed, the SCSI bus is not faulted (short-circuited). Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 253 v If the resistance measured was high, proceed to the next step.5. Reattach the external cable to the adapter, then do the following: a. Measure across C1 as previously described. b. If the resistance is still high, in this case above 10 Ohms, then there is no apparent cause for a PTC failure from this bus. If there are internal cables attached, continue to the “Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure.” c. If the resistance is less than 10 Ohms, there is a possibility of a fault on the external SCSI bus. Troubleshoot the external SCSI bus by disconnecting devices and terminators. Measure across C1 to determine whether the fault has been removed. Replace the failing component. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.External SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus Probable Tripped PTC Causes The following list provides some suggestions of things to check when the PTC is tripped: v A short-circuited terminator or cable. Check for bent pins on each connector and removable terminator. v Intermittent PTC failures can be caused by improperly seated cable connectors. Reseat the connector and flex the cable in an attempt to duplicate the fault condition across C1. v Plugging or unplugging a cable or terminator while the system is turned on (hot plugging). v A short-circuited device. v Differential devices or terminators are attached to the single-ended SCSI bus. Note: The SCSI-2 Fast/Wide and Ultra PCI Adapters use an onboard electronic terminator on the external SCSI bus. When power is removed from the adapter, as in the case of this procedure, the terminator goes to a high impedance state and the resistance measured cannot be verified, other than it is high. Some external terminators use an electronic terminator, which also goes to a high impedance state when power is removed. Therefore, this procedure is designed to find a short-circuited or low resistance fault as opposed to the presence of a terminator or a missing terminator.Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus PTC Isolation Procedure Isolate the internal SCSI bus PTC resistor fault with the following procedure: Note: The internal bus is single-ended. 1. Ensure that system power and all externally attached device power is turned off. 2. Disconnect any internal and external cables from the adapter, then remove the adapter from the system. 3. Verify with a digital ohmmeter, that the internal PTC resistor, labeled Z1, is cool and in a low resistance state, typically less than 1/2 Ohm. Measuring across, be sure to probe both sides of the PTC where the solder joints and board come together. The polarity of the test leads is not important. If necessary, allow the PTC to cool and measure again. Refer to the following illustration. 254 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Note: Ensure that only the probe tips are touching the solder joints. Do not allow the probes to touch any other part of the component. 4. Locate capacitor C1 and measure the resistance across it using the following procedure: a. Connect the positive lead to the side of the capacitor where the + is indicated. Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. b. Connect the negative lead to the opposite side of the capacitor. Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. c. If there is no short-circuit present, the resistance reading is high, typically hundreds of Ohms.Note: Because this is a measurement across unpowered silicon devices, the reading is a function of the ohmmeter used. v If there is a fault, the resistance reading is low, typically below 10 Ohms. Because there are no cables attached, the fault is on the adapter. Replace the adapter. Note: Some multi-function meters label the leads specifically for voltage measurements. When using this type of meter to measure resistance, the plus lead and negative lead my not be labeled correctly. If you are not sure that your meter leads accurately reflect the polarity for measuring resistance, repeat this step with the leads reversed. Polarity is important in this measurement to prevent forward-biasing diodes, which lead to a false low resistance reading. If the short circuit is not indicated with the leads reversed, the SCSI bus is not faulted (short-circuited). v If the resistance is high and there is no internal cable to reattach, there is no apparent cause for the PTC resistor diagnostic failure. v If the resistance is high and there is an internal cable to reattach, proceed to the next step.5. Reattach the internal cable to the adapter, then do the following: a. Measure across C1 as described previously. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 255 b. If the resistance is still high, above 25 Ohms, there is no apparent cause for a PTC failure. c. If the resistance is less than 10 Ohms, a fault on the internal SCSI bus is possible. Troubleshoot the internal SCSI bus by disconnecting devices and terminators. Measure across C1 to determine if the fault has been removed.Note: Some internal cables have nonremovable terminators.Internal SCSI-2 Single-Ended Bus Probable Tripped PTC Resistor Causes The following list provides some suggestions of things to check when the PTC is tripped: v A short-circuited terminator or cable. Check for bent pins on each connector and removable terminator. v Intermittent PTC failures can be caused by incorrectly seated cable connectors. Reseat the connector and flex the cable in an attempt to duplicate the fault condition across C1. v A short-circuited device. v On some systems, the terminator is fixed to the internal cable and cannot be removed. If all devices are removed from the cable and the resistance is still low, then the cable should be replaced. Note: The SCSI-2 Fast/Wide and Ultra PCI adapters use an onboard electronic terminator on the internal SCSI bus. When power is removed from the adapter, as in the case of this procedure, the terminator goes to a high impedance state and the resistance measured cannot be verified, other than it is high. Some internal terminators use an electronic terminator, which also goes to a high impedance state when power is removed. Therefore, this procedure is designed to find a short-circuit or low resistance fault as opposed to the presence of a terminator or a missing terminator.SCSI-2 Differential Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure Use this procedure when SRN xxx-240 or xxx-800 has been indicated. The differential adapter can be identified by the 4-B or 4-L on the external bracket plate. Before replacing a SCSI-2 differential adapter, use these procedures to determine if a short-circuit condition exists on the SCSI Bus. The PTC protects the SCSI bus from high currents due to short-circuits on the cable, terminator, or device. It is unlikely that the PTC can be tripped by a defective adapter. Unless instructed to do so by these procedures, do not replace the adapter because of a tripped PTC resistor. A fault (short-circuit) causes an increase in PTC resistance and temperature. The increase in resistance causes the PTC to halt current flow. The PTC returns to a low resistive and low temperature state when the fault is removed from the SCSI bus or when the system is turned off. Wait 5 minutes for the PTC resistor to fully cool, then retest. These procedures determine if the PTC resistor is still tripped and then determine if there is a short-circuit somewhere on the SCSI bus. External SCSI-2 Differential Adapter Bus PTC Isolation Procedure Isolate the external SCSI bus PTC fault with the following procedure: Notes: 1. Ensure that only the probe tips are touching the solder joints. Do not allow the probes to touch any other part of the component. 2. The external bus is differential.1. Ensure that system power and all externally attached device power is turned off. 256 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 2. Check to ensure all devices are marked SCSI Differential and that the terminator on the end of the SCSI bus is also marked differential. If not, you may have a single-ended SCSI device or terminator on the differential SCSI bus. Single-ended devices do not work on a differential SCSI bus and may cause a PTC type error to be reported. The entire SCSI bus may appear to be intermittent. After ensuring the system is completely differential, continue. 3. Disconnect the external cables from the adapter and remove the adapter from the system. 4. Verify with a digital ohmmeter that the internal PTC resistor, labeled Z1, (refer to the illustration on page “External SCSI-2 Differential Adapter Bus PTC Isolation Procedure” on page 256) is cool and in a low resistance state, typically less than 1/2 Ohm. Measuring across, be sure to probe both sides of the PTC resistor where the solder joints and board come together. The polarity of the test leads is not important. If necessary, allow the PTC resistor to cool and measure again. 5. Locate capacitor C1 and measure the resistance across it using the following procedure: a. Connect the negative lead to the side of the capacitor marked ?GND?. Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. b. Connect the positive lead to the side of the capacitor marked ?Cathode D1? on the board near C1. Be sure to probe at the solder joint where the capacitor and board come together. v If there is no fault present, then the resistance reading is 25 to 35 Ohms. The adapter is not faulty. Continue to the next step. v If the resistance measured is higher than 35 Ohms, check to see if RN1, RN2, and RN3 are plugged into their sockets. If these sockets are empty, you are working with a Multi-Initiators or High-Availability system. With these sockets empty, a resistive reading across C1 cannot be verified other than it measures a high resistance (not a short-circuit). If the resistance measurement is not low enough to be suspected as a fault (lower than 10 Ohms), continue to the next step. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 257 v If the resistance is high and there is no external cable to reattach, there is no apparent cause for the PTC diagnostic failure. v If the resistance reading is low, typically below 10 Ohms, there is a fault. Because there are no cables attached, the fault is on the adapter. Replace the adapter. v If the resistance measured was high and there is an external cable to reattach, proceed to the next step.6. Reattach the external cable to the adapter. a. Measure across C1 as previously described. b. If the resistance is between 10 to 20 Ohms, there is no apparent cause for a PTC resistor failure. c. If the resistance is less than 10 Ohms, there is a possibility of a fault on the external SCSI bus. Troubleshoot the external SCSI bus by disconnecting devices and terminators. Measure across C1 to determine if the fault has been removed.SCSI-2 Differential Adapter Probable Tripped PTC Causes The following list provides some suggestions of things to check when the PTC is tripped: v A short-circuited terminator or cable. Check for bent pins on each connector and removable terminator. v Intermittent PTC failures can be caused by incorrectly seated cable connectors. Reseat the connector and flex the cable in an attempt to duplicate the fault condition across C1. v Plugging or unplugging a cable or terminator while the system is turned on (hot-plugging). v A short-circuited device. v Single-ended devices are attached to the differential SCSI bus.Dual-Channel Ultra SCSI Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure Use the following procedures if diagnostics testing indicates a potential positive temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor fault or the TERMPWR short-circuited LED is lit. This procedure is used for SRNs 637-240 and 637-800 on the Dual-Channel Ultra SCSI Adapter. If the TERMPWR short-circuited LED is lit, use this procedure to help isolate the source of the problem on the failing channel. 1. Identify the adapter by its label of 4-R on the external bracket. Then, determine if the failure is on channel A or channel B. 2. The same PTC is used for both the internal and external buses. The PTC protects the SCSI bus from high currents due to short-circuits on the cable, terminator, or device. It is unlikely that the PTC can be tripped by a defective adapter. A fault (short-circuit) causes an increase in PTC resistance and temperature. The increase in resistance causes the PTC to halt current flow. The PTC returns to a low resistive and low temperature state when the fault is removed from the SCSI bus or when the system is turned off. Wait 5 minutes for the PTC resistor to fully cool, then retest. 3. If this same error persists, or the TERMPWR short-circuited LED is lit, replace the components of the failing channel in the following order (wait five minutes between steps): a. If the failure is on the external cable, replace the following: 1) Cable 2) Device 3) Attached subsystem 4) Adapterb. If the failure is on the internal cable, replace the following: 1) Cable 2) Device 258 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 3) Backplane 4) Adapterc. If the failure persists, verify that the parts exchanged are in the correct channel (internal or external, A or B). If the errors are still occurring, continue isolating the problem by going to “MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems” on page 269.64-bit PCI-X Dual Channel SCSI Adapter PTC Failure Isolation Procedure Use the following procedures if diagnostics testing indicates a potential self-resetting thermal fuse problem. This procedure is used for SRN 2524-702 on the integrated dual-channel SCSI adapter in a 7039/651 system. 1. Identify the adapter as the one embedded in the system board. Then, determine if the failure is on channel 0 or channel 1. 2. The thermal fuse protects the SCSI bus from high currents due to short-circuits on the terminator, cable, or device. It is unlikely that the thermal fuse can be tripped by a defective adapter. A fault (short-circuit) causes an increase in resistance and temperature of the thermal fuse. The increase in temperature causes the thermal fuse to halt current flow. The thermal fuse returns to a low resistive and low temperature state when the fault is removed from the SCSI bus or when the system is turned off. Wait 10 seconds for the thermal fuse to reset itself and recover, then retest. 3. If the same error persists, replace the components of the failing channel in the following order. Wait 10 seconds for the thermal fuse to reset itself between steps. a. Cable b. Device c. DASD backplane (if present) d. System board (adapter)4. If the failure persists, verify that the parts exchanged are in the correct channel (0 or 1). If the errors are still occurring, continue isolating the problem by going to “MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems” on page 269.MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure Use this MAP to get a service request number (SRN) if the customer or a previous MAP provided none. Purpose of this MAP Use this MAP to get a service request number (SRN) if the customer or a previous MAP provided none. If you are unable to power the system on, refer to the “Power isolation procedures” on page 128. v Step 0020-1 Visually check the server for obvious problems such as unplugged power cables or external devices that are powered off. Did you find an obvious problem? NO Go to Step 0020-2. YES Fix the problem, then go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0020-2 Are the AIX online diagnostics installed?Note: If AIX is not installed on the server or partition, answer no to the above question. NO If the operating system is running, perform its shutdown procedure. Get help if needed. Go to Step 0020-4. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 259 YES Go to Step 0020-3.v Step 0020-3 Note: When possible, run online diagnostics in service mode. Online diagnostics perform additional functions compared to standalone diagnostics. Run online diagnostics in concurrent mode when the customer does not let you power-off the system unit. To run online diagnostics in service mode, go to substep 5. If the system unit is already running in the service mode and you want to run online diagnostics, proceed to the question at the bottom of this MAP step. Otherwise, continue with 1 through 4 in the following procedure. 1. Log in with root authority or use CE login. If necessary, ask the customer for the password. 2. Enter the diag -a command to check for missing resources. a. If you see a command line prompt, proceed to substep 3 below. b. If the DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu is displayed, with the letter M shown next to any resource, select that resource, then press Commit (F7 key). Follow any instructions displayed. If you are prompted with a message Do you want to review the previously displayed error select Yes and press Enter. If an SRN displays, record it, and go to Step 0020-15. If there is no SRN, go to substep 3 below. c. If the MISSING RESOURCE menu is displayed, follow any instructions displayed. If you are prompted with a message Do you want to review the previously displayed error select Yes and press Enter. If an SRN displays, record it, and go to Step 0020-15. If there is no SRN, go to substep 3 below.3. Enter the diag command. 4. Go to Step 0020-5. 5. If the operating system is running, perform its shutdown procedure (get help if needed). 6. Turn off the system unit power and wait 45 seconds before proceeding. 7. Turn on the system unit power. 8. Load the online diagnostics in service mode. 9. Wait until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display or the system appears to have stopped. Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed? NO Go to Step 0020-16. YES Go to Step 0020-5.v Step 0020-4 Note: If you are working on a partition, do not remove the power as directed in the following procedure. Remove the power only if you are working on a server that does not have multiple partitions. 1. If the server does not have multiple partitions, disconnect the power from the server, wait 45 seconds, then reconnect the power. 2. If the server supports slow boot (See “Performing a slow boot” on page 665) set the server to perform a slow boot for the next boot that is performed. If the system does not support slow boot, do a normal boot in the next step. 3. Refer to “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672 to load the standalone diagnostics. Before continuing to the next step, ensure that the server power is turned on, or if you are working on a partition, the partition is started. The server or partition should be booting the standalone diagnostics from a CD-ROM or a network server. 4. Wait until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display or the server boot appears to have stopped. Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed? NO Go to Step 0020-16. YES Go to Step 0020-5. 260 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Step 0020-5 Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed (screen number 801001) with no obvious problem (for example, blurred or distorted)? NO For display problems, go to Step 0020-12. YES To continue with diagnostics, go to Step 0020-6.v Step 0020-6 Press the Enter key. Is the FUNCTION SELECTION menu displayed (screen number 801002)? NO Go to Step 0020-13. YES Go to Step 0020-7.v Step 0020-7 1. Select the option ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS ROUTINES. Notes: a. If the terminal type is not defined, do so now. You cannot proceed until this is complete. b. If you have SRNs from a Previous Diagnostics Results screen, process these Previous Diagnostics Results SRNs prior to processing any SRNs you may have received from an SRN reporting screen.2. If the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu (screen number 801003) displays, select the option PROBLEM DETERMINATION. 3. Find your system response in the following table. Follow the instructions in the Action column. System Response Action Previous Diagnostic Results. Do you want to review the previously displayed error? You have a pending item in the error log for which there is no corresponding Log Repair Action. To see this error, select YES at the prompt. Information from the error log is displayed in order of last event first. Record the error code, the FRU names and the location code of the FRUs. Go to Step 0020-15. The RESOURCE SELECTION menu or the ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu is displayed (screen number 801006). Go to Step 0020-8. The system halted while testing a resource. Record SRN 110-xxxx, where xxxx is the first four digits of the menu number displayed in the upper-right corner of the diagnostic menu. Go to Step 0020-15. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 261 System Response Action The MISSING RESOURCE menu is displayed or the letter M is displayed alongside a resource in the resource list. If the MISSING RESOURCE menu is displayed, follow the displayed instructions until either the ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu or an SRN is displayed. If an M is displayed in front of a resource (indicating that it is missing) select that resource then choose the Commit (F7 key). Notes: 1. Run any supplemental media that may have been supplied with the adapter or device, and then return to substep 1 of Step 0020-7. 2. If the SCSI enclosure services device appears on the missing resource list along with the other resources, select it first. 3. ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system. The ISA adapter configuration service aid in standalone diagnostics allows the identification and configuration of ISA adapters.If the ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu is displayed, go to Step 0020-11. If an 8-digit error code is displayed, record it and go to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to Step 0020-15. The message The system will now continue the boot process is displayed continuously on the system unit’s console. Go to Step 0020-4. The message Processing supplemental diagnostic diskette media is displayed continuously on the system unit’s console. Call your service support. The diagnostics begin testing a resource. Note: If the option Problem Determination was selected from the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu, and if a recent error has been logged in the error log, the diagnostics automatically begin testing the resource. Follow the displayed instructions. If the No Trouble Found screen is displayed, press Enter. If another resource is tested, repeat this step. If the ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu is displayed, go to Step 0020-11. If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to Step 0020-15. If an 8-digit error code is displayed, go to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. The system did not respond to selecting the advanced diagnostics option. Go to Step 0020-13. A system unit with a beeper did not beep while booting. Record SRN 111-947 and then go to Step 0020-15 The system unit emits a continuous sound from the beeper. Record SRN 111-947 and then go to Step 0020-15. An SRN or an eight-digit error code is displayed. Record the error code, the FRU names, and the location code for the FRUs. If a SRN is displayed, go to Step 0020-15. If an 8-digit error code is displayed, go to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. The system stopped with a 3-digit or 4-digit code displayed in the operator panel display. Record SRN 101-xxx (where xxx is the rightmost three digits of the displayed code). Go to Step 0020-15. 262 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) System Response Action An 888 message is displayed in the operator panel display. Note: The 888 may or may not be flashing. Go to “MAP 0070: 888 sequence in operator panel display” on page 278. v Step 0020-8 On the DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION or ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu, look through the list of resources to make sure that all adapters and SCSI devices are listed including any new resources. Notes: 1. Resources attached to serial and parallel ports may not appear in the resource list. 2. If running diagnostics in a partition within a partitioned system, resources assigned to other partitions will not be displayed on the resource list.Did you find all the adapters or devices on the list? NO Go to Step 0020-9. YES Go to Step 0020-11.v Step 0020-9 Is the new device or adapter an exact replacement for a previous one installed at same location? NO Go to Step 0020-10. YES The replacement device or adapter may be defective. If possible, try installing it in an alternate location if one is available; if it works in that location, then suspect that the location where it failed to appear has a defective slot. Schedule time to replace the hardware that supports that slot. If it does not work in alternate location, suspect a bad replacement adapter or device. If you are still unable to detect the device or adapter, contact your service support structure.v Step 0020-10 Is the operating system software to support this new adapter or device installed? NO Load the operating system software. YES The replacement device or adapter may be defective. If possible, try installing it in an alternate location if one is available; if it works in that location, then suspect that the location where it failed to appear has a defective slot. Schedule time to replace the hardware that supports that slot. If it does not work in alternate location, suspect a bad replacement adapter or device. If you are still unable to detect the device or adapter, contact your service support structure.v Step 0020-11 Select and run the diagnostic test problem determination or system verification on one of the following: – The resources with which the customer is having problems. If the resource is not shown on the DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION menu, then run diagnostics on its parent (the adapter or controller to which the resource is attached). – The resources you suspect are causing a problem. – All resources. Note: When choosing All Resources, interactive tests are not done. If no problem is found running All Resources, select each of the individual resources on the selection menu to run diagnostics tests on to do the interactive tests Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 263 Find the response in the following table, or follow the directions on the test results screen. Diagnostic Response Action An SRN or an eight-digit error code is displayed on the screen. Record the error code, the FRU names, and the location code for the FRUs. If an SRN is displayed, go to Step 0020-15. If an 8-digit error code is displayed, go to the information center, and perform a search on the error code to obtain the name and location of the failing FRU. Perform the listed action. The TESTING COMPLETE menu and the No trouble was found message are displayed, and you have not tested all of the resources. Press Enter and continue testing other resources. The TESTING COMPLETE menu and the No trouble was found message are displayed, and you have tested all of the resources. Go to Step 0020-14. Note: If you have not run the sysplanar test, do so before going to Step 0020-14. The system halted while testing a resource. Record SRN 110-xxxx, where xxxx is the first three or four digits of the menu number displayed in the upper-right corner of the diagnostic menu screen. Go to Step 0020-15. When running the Online Diagnostics, an installed device does not appear in the test list. Ensure that the diagnostic support for the device was installed. The display configuration service aid can be used to determine whether diagnostic support is installed for the device. Record SRN 110-101. Go to Step 0020-15. Note: Supplemental diskettes may be required if service aids are run from standalone diagnostics. The IBM ARTIC960 Quad T1/E1 adapter diagnostics display a message indicating that the interface board (PMC) is either not installed or is malfunctioning. Install a PMC board if not already installed. When running online diagnostics on any of the IBM ARTIC960 family of adapters and the message indicates that the PMC is not installed, but it is installed, do the following: v Reseat the PMC board, then run diagnostics. v If the response is the same, replace the PMC and then go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. The symptom was not found in the table. Return to the Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. v Step 0020-12 The following step analyzes a console display problem. Find your type of console display in the following table. Follow the instructions given in the Action column. Type of Console Display Action TTY-type terminal Be sure the TTY terminal attributes are set correctly. See ?Running the Diagnostic Programs from a TTY Terminal? in “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672. If you did not find a problem with the attributes, go to the documentation for this type of TTY terminal, and continue problem determination. If you do not find the problem, record SRN 111-259, then go the Step 0020-15. Graphics display Go to the documentation for this type of graphics display, and continue problem determination. If you do not find the problem, record SRN 111-82c, then go to Step 0020-15. 264 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Type of Console Display Action HMC (Hardware Management Console) Go to the HMC service procedures in Service Guide for the Hardware Management Console Models 7042-CR4 and 7042-C06, SA76-0120. If HMC tests find no problem, there may be a problem with the communication between the HMC and the managed system. If the HMC communicates with the managed system through a network interface, verify whether the network interface is functional. If the HMC communicates with the managed system through the HMC interface, check the cable between the HMC and the managed system. If it is not causing the problem, suspect a configuration problem of the HMC communications setup. v Step 0020-13 There is a problem with the keyboard. Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table. Follow the instructions given in the Action column. Keyboard Type Action Type 101 keyboard (U.S.). Identify by the size of the Enter key. The Enter key is in only one horizontal row of keys. Record SRN 111-736, then go to Step 0020-15. Type 102 keyboard (W.T.). Identify by the size of the Enter key. The Enter key extends into two horizontal rows. Record SRN 111-922; then go to Step 0020-15. Kanji-type keyboard. (Identify by the Japanese characters.) Record SRN 111-923; then go to Step 0020-15. TTY terminal keyboard Go to the documentation for this type of TTY terminal and continue problem determination. HMC (Hardware Management Console) Go to the HMC service procedures in Service Guide for the Hardware Management Console Models 7042-CR4 and 7042-C06, SA76-0120. If HMC tests find no problem, there may be a problem with the communication between the HMC and the managed system. If the HMC communicates with the managed system through a network interface, verify whether the network interface is functional. If the HMC communicates with the managed system through the HMC interface, check the cable between the HMC and the managed system. If it is not causing the problem, suspect a configuration problem of the HMC communications setup. v Step 0020-14 The diagnostics did not detect a problem. If the problem is related to either the system unit or the I/O expansion box, refer to the service documentation for that unit. If the problem is related to an external resource, use the problem determination procedures, if available, for that resource. If a problem occurs when running online diagnostics but not when running the stand-alone diagnostics, suspect a software problem. Check for the presence of supplemental diagnostic material, such as diskettes or documentation. This is possibly a problem with software or intermittent hardware. If you think that you have an intermittent hardware problem, go to “MAP 0040: Intermittent Problem Isolation” on page 267. v Step 0020-15 Take the following actions: 1. Handle multiple SRNs and error codes in the following order: a. 8-Digit Error Codes. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 265 b. SRNs with a source code other than F or G. c. SRNs with a source code of F. Run online diagnostics in advanced and problem determination mode to obtain maximum isolation. d. SRNs with a source code of G. Note: The priority for multiple SRNs with a source of G is determined by the time stamp of the failure. Follow the action for the SRN with the earliest time stamp first. e. Device SRNs and error codes (5-digit SRNs). If a group has multiple SRNs, it does not matter which SRN is handled first. 2. Find the SRN. If the SRN is not listed, look for it in the following: – Any supplemental service manual for the device – The diagnostic problem report screen for additional information – The ?Service Hints? service aid in “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 6723. Perform the action listed. 4. If you replace a part, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0020-16 Look up the AIX IPL progress codes for definitions of configuration program indicators. They are normally 0xxx or 2xxx. Is a configuration program indicator displayed? NO Go to the “Problems with loading and starting the operating system (AIX and Linux)” on page 246. YES Record SRN 101-xxxx (where xxxx is the rightmost three or four digits or characters of the configuration program indicator). Go to Step 0020-17.v Step 0020-17 Is a physical location code or an AIX location code displayed on the operator panel display? NO Go to Step 0020-15. YES Record the location code, then go to Step 0020-15.MAP 0030: Additional Problem Determination This MAP is used for problems that still occur after all FRUs indicated by the SRN or error code have been exchanged. Purpose of This MAP Use this MAP for problems that still occur after all FRUs indicated by the SRN or error code have been exchanged. Note: Check the action text of the SRN before proceeding with this MAP. If there is an action listed, perform that action before proceeding with this MAP. v Step 0030-1 Some external devices (including rack drawers that contain devices) have their own problem determination procedures. If the problem is related to an external device that has its own problem determination procedure, run those procedures if not already run. If they do not correct the problem, continue with this MAP. v Step 0030-2 266 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) The problem may have been caused by a resource that has not been tested. System Checkout tests all resources. If the online Diagnostics are installed and you are able to load them, then All Resources under the Diagnostic Selection menu should be run. If you get a different SRN, look up the SRN in the SRN chapters and perform the listed action. If you are unable to run All Resources under the Diagnostic Selection menu or you do not get another SRN when running it, continue with this MAP. v Step 0030-3 If the problem is related to a SCSI device, SCSI bus, or SCSI controller, go to “MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems” on page 269. If you are unable to isolate the problem with MAP 0050, continue with Step 0030-4. v Step 0030-4 1. Find the resource(s) that are identified by the SRN or error code in the following table. 2. Perform the first action listed for the resource. 3. If you exchange a FRU or change a switch setting, test the resource again. 4. If the action does not correct the problem, perform the next action until all actions have been tried. If an action says to exchange a FRU that you have already exchanged, go to the next action. If an action corrects the problem, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. 5. If you perform all of the actions and do not correct the problem, check the Service Hints service aid for information. If the service aid does not help, call your service support structure. Failing Resource Repair Action SCSI Device Exchange the SCSI controller. Replace the power supply. Pluggable SCSI or IDE controller Exchange the backplane into which the adapter is plugged. Keyboard, tablet, mouse, dials, LPF keys, diskette drive Check the cable attaching the device to its adapter. If you do not find a problem, exchange the device’s adapter. Pluggable adapters, CPU cards, and controllers Determine whether the adapter contains any attached FRUs such as fuses, DRAMs, and crossover cables. 1. Check or exchange any attached FRU on the resource. 2. If the adapter is plugged into a riser card, check or exchange the riser card. 3. Exchange the backplane into which the adapter is plugged. System and I/O backplanes Contact your service support structure. Built-In system ports Replace the service processor if present. A device attached to the system by a cable and an adapter. 1. Replace the adapter for the device. 2. Replace the cable to the device. IDE Device Replace the cable between the IDE controller and the device. If the IDE controller is packaged on a backplane, replace that backplane, otherwise replace the adapter containing the IDE controller. MAP 0040: Intermittent Problem Isolation This MAP provides a structured way of analyzing intermittent problems. Purpose of This MAP This MAP provides a structured way of analyzing intermittent problems. It consists of two tables: Hardware Symptoms and Software Symptoms. Because software or hardware can cause intermittent problems, consider all symptoms relevant to your problem. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 267 How to Use This MAP This MAP contains information about causes of intermittent symptoms. In the following tables, find your symptoms, and read the list of things to check. When you exchange a FRU, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557 to check out the system. Hardware SymptomsNote: This table spans several pages. Symptom of Hardware Problem Things to Check For Any hardware log entry in the error log. Use the Hardware Error Report service aid to view the error log and check for: v Multiple errors on devices attached to the same SCSI bus. v Multiple errors on devices attached to the same async adapter. v Multiple errors on internally installed devices only.Contact your service support structure for assistance with error report interpretation. Hardware-caused system crashes v The connections on the CPU planar or CPU card v Memory modules for correct connections v Connections to the system planar. v Cooling fans operational v The environment for a too-high or too-low operating temperature. v Vibration: proximity to heavy equipment. System unit powers off a few seconds after powering On. v Fan speed. Some fans contain a speed-sensing circuit. If one of these fans is slow, the power supply powers the system unit off. v Correct voltage at the outlet into which the system unit is plugged. v Loose power cables and fan connectors, both internal and external. System unit powers off after running for more than a few seconds. v Excessive temperature in the power supply area. v Loose cable connectors on the power distribution cables. v Fans turning at full speed after the system power has been on for more than a few seconds. Only internally installed devices are failing. Check the following items that are common to more than one device: v Ground connections on all of the disk drives and other types of drives installed. v Loose connections on the power cables to the planars, drives, fans, and battery. v System unit cooling. Is the input air temperature within limits? Are all the fans running at full speed? Are any of the vent areas blocked? v Signal cables to the diskette drives, and the power supply. v SCSI device signal cables for loose connectors and terminators. v Loose SCSI device address jumpers. v Possible contamination of any device that has a cleaning procedure. See the operator guide for cleaning instructions. v Excessive static electricity. v Correct voltage at the system unit power outlet 268 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Symptom of Hardware Problem Things to Check For Only externally attached devices are failing. Check the following items that are common to more than one device. v Check the SCSI signal cables to the devices for loose connectors and terminators. v Check devices that use jumpers to set the SCSI address for loose jumpers. v Check any device that has a cleaning procedure for contamination. See the operator guide for cleaning instructions. v Check for excessive static electricity. v Check the outlet that the device is plugged into for correct voltage. v Check the error log for entries for the adapter driving the failing devices. v Check the temperature of the devices. Are the cooling vents blocked? Are the fans running? v Check for other devices near the failing device that may be radiating noise (displays, printers, and so on). Software Symptoms Symptom of Software Problem Things to Check For Any symptom you suspect is related to software. Use the software documentation to analyze software problems. Check the RETAIN® database for known problems with your type of system unit or software. Software-caused system crashes Check the following software items: v Is the problem only with one application program? v Is the problem only with one device? v Does the problem occur on a recently installed program? v Was the program recently patched or modified in any way? v Is the problem associated with any communication lines? v Check for static discharge occurring at the time of the failure. MAP 0050: SCSI bus problems Use this MAP to analyze problems with a SCSI bus. Purpose of this MAP Use this MAP to analyze problems with a SCSI bus. Considerations v To prevent hardware damage or erroneous diagnostic results from a system with its power turned on, use ?PCI hot-plug manager? subtask ?replace/remove PCI hot plug adapter? before connecting or disconnecting cables or devices. v Also, use this MAP for SCSI adapters that are built into system backplanes or I/O backplanes. If this procedure calls for replacing a SCSI adapter and the SCSI adapter is built into the system backplane or I/O backplane, replace the system backplane or I/O backplane as appropriate. v If the failure is a terminator power failure (SRNs xxx-226, xxx-240, xxx-800), always allow five minutes for the PTC to cool. v The differential version of the adapter has socket-type terminators to support high-availability. If this is the adapter’s configuration, the terminators would have been removed from the adapter. MAP steps requiring the removal of the cable from the adapter do not apply, because an adapter that is not terminated always fails diagnostics. Proper SCSI diagnostics require proper termination. If the Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 269 configuration involves a Y-cable, leave it, with the appropriate terminator, attached to the adapter. Or, place an external differential terminator on the external port. v If the system uses shared disk-drive hardware or a high-availability configuration, ensure that the other system that is sharing the devices is not using the devices. For additional information concerning high-availability configurations, see “SCSI service hints” on page 252. v For intermittent problems that cannot be resolved with this MAP, refer to “SCSI service hints” on page 252. v If the SCSI bus is attached to a RAID subsystem, refer to the RAID subsystem documentation for any problem determination. If the RAID adapter is a PCI-X RAID adapter, refer to the PCI-X SCSI RAID Controller Reference Guide for AIX.Follow the steps in this MAP to isolate a SCSI bus problem.Note: This procedure removes devices and components from a SCSI bus until a problem or a symptom or problem is eliminated. If you follow the entire procedure, you will remove all components of a SCSI bus in the following order: 1. Hot-swap devices 2. Devices that are not hot-swap 3. SCSI Enclosure Services (SES) device or enclosures 4. SCSI cables 5. SCSI adapterDo the following: v Step 0050-1 Have changes been made recently to the SCSI configuration? NO Go to Step 0050-2. YES Go to Step 0050-5.v Step 0050-2 Are there any hot-swap devices (SCSI disk drives or media devices) controlled by the adapter? NO Go to Step 0050-3. YES Go to Step 0050-11.v Step 0050-3 Are there any devices other than hot-swappable devices controlled by the adapter? NO Go to Step 0050-4. YES Go to Step 0050-13.v Step 0050-4 Is an enclosure or drawer that supports hot-swap devices controlled by the adapter? NO Go to Step 0050-22. YES Go to Step 0050-15.v Step 0050-5 This step handles cases where recent changes have been made to the SCSI configuration. Using the first three digits of the SRN, refer to the FFC listing and determine if the adapter is single-ended or differential. Is the adapter a single-ended adapter? NO Go to Step 0050-6. YES Go to Step 0050-7. 270 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) v Step 0050-6 The adapter’s termination jumper settings may be incorrect. Power off the system, and inspect jumper J7. Are the jumpers correct? NO Go to Step 0050-8. YES Go to Step 0050-9.v Step 0050-7 If the adapter is not being used in a high-availability configuration, be sure sockets RN1, RN2, and RN3 are populated. If the adapter is being used in a high-availability configuration, be sure sockets RN1, RN2, and RN3 are not populated. Go to Step 0050-9. v Step 0050-8 1. Correct the jumper settings and reinstall the adapter and all cables. 2. Power on the system, and run diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did the diagnostic pass? NO Go to Step 0050-9. YES Go to Step 0050-10.v Step 0050-9 Check for the following problems: – Address conflicts between devices. – Cabling problems such as configurations that exceed the maximum cable lengths, missing termination, or excessive termination. Did you find a problem? NO Go to Step 0050-2. YES Go to Step 0050-10.v Step 0050-10 1. Correct the problem. 2. Power on the system, and run diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. YES Go to Step 0050-2.v Step 0050-11 This step determines if a hot-swap device is causing the failure. 1. Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 274. 2. Disconnect all hot-swap devices attached to the adapter. 3. Go to “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275. 4. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 5. Run the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Step 0050-12. YES Go to Step 0050-3.v Step 0050-12 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 271 Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 274. Reconnect the hot-plug devices one at a time. After reconnecting each device, do the follow: 1. Go to “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275. 2. Rerun the diagnostics on the adapter. 3. If the adapter fails, the problem may be with the last device reconnected. Perform these substeps: a. Follow repair procedures for that last device. b. Rerun diagnostics on the adapter. c. If diagnostics fail, replace the SES backplane corresponding to the slot for the device. d. Rerun diagnostics. e. If diagnostics fail, replace the last device. f. Rerun diagnostics on the adapter. g. If diagnostics pass, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. Otherwise, contact your support center. Note: A device problem can cause other devices attached to the same SCSI adapter to go into the defined state. Ask the system administrator to make sure that all devices attached to the same SCSI adapter as the device that you replaced are in the available state.4. If no errors occur, the problem could be intermittent. Make a record of the problem. Running the diagnostics for each device on the bus may provide additional information.v Step 0050-13 This step determines if a device other than a hot-swappable device is causing the failure. Follow these steps: 1. Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 274. 2. Disconnect all devices attached to the adapter (except for the device from which you boot to run diagnostics; you may want to temporarily move this device to another SCSI port while you are trying to find the problem). 3. Go to “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275. 4. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 5. Run the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Step 0050-14. YES Go to Step 0050-4.v Step 0050-14 Reconnect the devices one at time. After reconnecting each device, follow this procedure: 1. Rerun the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. 2. If there is a failure, the problem should be with the last device reconnected. Follow the repair procedures for that device, then go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. 3. If no errors occur, the problem could be intermittent. Make a record of the problem. Running the diagnostics for each device on the bus may provide additional information.v Step 0050-15 This step determines whether the SCSI Enclosure Services (SES) controller, which provides hot-plug capability for SCSI drives in the server, is causing the problem. Note: In most cases the SES controller is integrated on the backplane that is used to connect SCSI devices, for example a disk drive backplane. If your system has hot-plug capability and the SES controller is separate from the SCSI drive backplane, there will be an intermediate card on the 272 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) SCSI bus between the SCSI adapter and the device or SCSI backplane. You will have to make a visual check to see if there are any intermediate cards on the SCSI bus that is displaying a problem. Does a separate SES controller plug into the SCSI device backplane? NO Go to Step 0050-18. YES Go to Step 0050-16.v Step 0050-16 Follow these steps: 1. Power off the system. 2. Remove the intermediate SES controller card. Locate the SES controller part number under Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. 3. Power on the system. 4. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 5. Run the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Step 0050-17. YES Go to Step 0050-18.v Step 0050-17 Follow these steps: 1. Power off the system. 2. Replace the intermediate SES controller card. 3. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0050-18 Follow these steps: 1. Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 274. 2. Disconnect all cables attached to the SCSI adapter. For SCSI differential adapters in a high-availability configuration, see Considerations. 3. Go to “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275. 4. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 5. Run the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Step 0050-19. YES Replace the adapter, then go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0050-19 Follow these steps: 1. Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 274. 2. Reconnect the cables to the adapter. Does the SES controller (an intermediated SES controller) plug into the backplane? NO Go to Step 0050-20. YES Go to Step 0050-21.v Step 0050-20 Follow these steps: Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 273 1. Replace the SES controller. Locate the intermediate SES controller part number under Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691. 2. Power on the system. 3. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 4. Run the diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. YES Go to Step 0050-21.v Step 0050-21 One of the cables remaining in the system is defective. Refer to Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691 for the cable part numbers. Replace the parts one at a time in the order listed. Follow these steps for each FRU replaced: 1. Rerun the diagnostics for the adapter. 2. If there is any failure, continue with the next FRU. 3. If there is no failure, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0050-22 Follow these steps: 1. Go to “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration.” 2. Disconnect all cables attached to the adapter (except for the cable to the device from which you boot to run diagnostics; you may want to temporarily move this device to another SCSI port while you are trying to find the problem). 3. Go to “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275. 4. If the Missing Options menu displays, select the option The resource has been turned off, but should remain in the system configuration for all the devices that were disconnected. 5. Run the diagnostics on the adapter. Did a failure occur? NO Go to Step 0050-23. YES Replace the adapter, then go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.v Step 0050-23 One of the cables remaining in the system is defective. Refer to Chapter 8, “Part Information,” on page 691 for the cable part numbers. Replace the parts one at time in the order listed. Follow these steps for each FRU replaced: 1. Rerun the diagnostics for the adapter. 2. If there is any failure, continue with the next FRU. 3. If there is no failure, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. “Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration”Use this procedure when you are preparing to deconfigure a hot-plug SCSI device or cable. This procedure will help determine if a SCSI device or SCSI device cable is causing your system problem. “After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration” on page 275Use this procedure after you deconfigure or hot-plug a SCSI device to ensure that the replaced component was successfully installed.Preparing for hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration Use this procedure when you are preparing to deconfigure a hot-plug SCSI device or cable. This procedure will help determine if a SCSI device or SCSI device cable is causing your system problem. Purpose of this procedure: 274 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Use this procedure to determine if a SCSI device or SCSI device cable is causing the symptom. Disconnect all cables attached to the adapter, (except for the cable to the device from which you boot to run diagnostics; temporarily move these device cables to another SCSI port while you are trying to find the problem). 1. Go to “Running the online and eServer stand-alone diagnostics” on page 672 and perform the prerequisite tasks described in the Before you begin topic. 2. Determine which SCSI adapter you plan to remove the cables or devices from. 3. Adapter slots are numbered on the rear of the system unit, record the slot number and location of each adapter being removed. 4. Ensure that any processes or applications that might use the adapter are stopped. 5. Enter the system diagnostics by logging in as ?root? user or as the ?celogin? user. Type the diag command on the AIX command line. 6. When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS menu displays, press Enter. The FUNCTION SELECTION menu appears. 7. From the FUNCTION SELECTION menu, select Task Selection, then press Enter. 8. From the Task Selection list, select PCI Hot Plug Manager. 9. From the PCI Hot Plug Manager menu, select Unconfigure a Device, then press Enter. 10. Press F4 or ESC 4 to display the Device Names menu. 11. Select the adapter from which you are removing the cables or devices in the Device Names menu. 12. In the Keep Definition field, use the tab key to answer Yes. 13. In the Unconfigure Child Devices field, use the Tab key to answer Yes, then press Enter. The ARE YOU SURE screen displays. 14. Press Enter to verify the information. A successful deconfiguration is indicated by the ?OK? message displayed next to the Command field at the top of the screen. 15. Press F4 or ESC 4 twice to return to the Hot Plug Manager menu. 16. Select replace/remove PCI Hot Plug adapter. 17. Select the slot that has the adapter you want to remove the cables or devices from in the system. 18. Select Remove. Note: A fast blinking amber LED located at the back of the machine indicates the slot that you selected. 19. Press Enter. This places the adapter in the ?action? state, meaning it is ready to be removed from the system. (You do not need to remove the adapter, unless it makes removing the cables attached to it easier).After hot-plug SCSI device or cable deconfiguration Use this procedure after you deconfigure or hot-plug a SCSI device to ensure that the replaced component was successfully installed. 1. Press Enter, then continue to follow the screen instructions until you receive a message that the replacement is successful. A successful replacement is indicated by the OK message displayed next to the command field at the top of the screen. 2. Press the F3 or ESC 3 key to return to the PCI Hot-Plug Manager menu. 3. Press the F3 or ESC 3 key to return to the TASK selection list. 4. Select Log Repair Action. 5. Select the adapter you just removed the cables or devices from, then press Enter. 6. Press Commit (F7 or ESC 7), then press Enter. 7. Press the F10 or the ESC 0 key to exit diagnostics. 8. Type the diag -a command on the command line. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 275 MAP 0054: PCI-X SCSI Bus Problems Use this MAP to determine which FRUs may need to be replaced in order to solve a SCSI bus-related problem on a PCI-X SCSI or PCI-X SCSI RAID adapter. Purpose of This MAP Use the following to determine which FRUs may need to be replaced in order to solve a SCSI bus-related problem on a PCI-X SCSI or PCI-X SCSI RAID adapter. Considerations v Remove power from the system before connecting and disconnecting cables or devices, as appropriate, to prevent hardware damage or erroneous diagnostic results. v Note that some systems have SCSI and PCI-X bus interface logic integrated onto the system boards and use a pluggable RAID enablement card (a non-PCI form factor card) for these SCSI and PCI-X buses. An example of such a RAID enablement card is FC 5709. For these configurations, replacement of the RAID enablement card is unlikely to solve a SCSI bus-related problem, because the SCSI bus interface logic is on the system board. v Some adapters provide two connectors, one internal and one external, for each SCSI bus. For this type of adapter, it is not acceptable to use both connectors for the same SCSI bus at the same time. SCSI bus problems are likely to occur if this is done. However, it is acceptable to use an internal connector for one SCSI bus and an external connector for another SCSI bus. The internal and external connectors are labeled to indicate which SCSI bus they correspond to.Attention: RAID adapters should not be replaced when SCSI bus problems exist, except with assistance from your service support structure. Because the adapter may contain non-volatile write cache data and configuration data for the attached disk arrays, additional problems can be created by replacing an adapter when SCSI bus problems exist. Attention: Do not remove functioning disks in a disk array without assistance from your service support structure. A disk array may become degraded or failed if functioning disks are removed, and additional problems may be created. Follow the steps in this MAP to isolate a PCI-X SCSI bus problem. v Step 0054-1 Identify the SCSI bus on which the problem is occurring on by examining the hardware error log. To view the hardware error log, do the following: 1. Invoke diagnostics and select Task Selection on the Function Selection screen. 2. Select Display Hardware Error Report. 3. Choose one of the following options: – If the type of adapter is not known, select Display Hardware Errors for Any Resource. – If the adapter is a PCI-X SCSI adapter, select Display Hardware Errors for PCI-X SCSI Adapters. – If the adapter is a PCI-X SCSI RAID adapter, select Display Hardware Errors for PCI-X SCSI RAID Adapters.4. Select the resource, or select All Resources if the resource is not known. If you had previously selected Display Hardware Errors for Any Resource, then select All Resources. 5. On the Error Summary screen, look for an entry with a SRN corresponding to the problem which sent you here, and select it. 276 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Note: If multiple entries exist for the SRN, some entries might be old or the problem has occurred on multiple entities (adapters, disk arrays, or devices). Older entries can be ignored; however, this MAP may need to be used multiple times if the same problem has occurred on multiple entities. 6. Select the hardware error log to view. While viewing the hardware error log, under the Detail Data and SENSE DATA headings, identify the first four bytes of the hexadecimal data (for example, nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn ...). The four bytes identified in the error log can be interpreted as: 00bb ssLL where: – bb, when not FF, identifies the adapter’s SCSI bus – ss, when not FF, identifies the SCSI ID of a device – LL, when not FF, identifies the logical unit number (LUN) of a device Go to Step 0540-2. v Step 0054-2 Are the last two bytes of the four bytes identified in Step 0540-1, equal to FFFF (for example, 00bb FFFF, where bb identifies the adapter’s SCSI bus)? NO Go to Step 0540-4. YES Go to Step 0540-3.v Step 0054-3 While the error persists, replace the components of the failing SCSI bus in the following order: 1. Cable on bus bb (if present) 2. Adapter (if SCSI bus interface logic is on the adapter) or system board (if SCSI bus interface logic is on the system board) To replace a component, and see if the problem was corrected, do the following: 1. Follow the removal and replacement procedure for the component as previously described in this step. 2. Run diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. When the problem is resolved, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. v Step 0054-4 Are the last two bytes of the four bytes identified in Step 0540-1, equal to FF00 (for example, 00bb FF00, where bb identifies the adapter’s SCSI bus)? NO Go to Step 0540-6. YES Go to Step 0540-5.v Step 0054-5 While the error persists, replace the components of the failing SCSI bus in the following order: 1. Cable on bus bb (if present) 2. Adapter (if SCSI bus interface logic is on the adapter) or system board (if the SCSI bus interface logic is on the system board) 3. DASD backplane attached to bus bb (if present) To replace a component, and see if the problem was corrected, do the following: 1. Follow the removal and replacement procedure for the component as previously described in this step. 2. Run diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. When the problem is resolved, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. v Step 0054-6 Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 277 While the error persists, replace the components of the failing SCSI bus in the following order: 1. Device on bus bb with SCSI ID ss 2. Cable on bus bb (if present) 3. Adapter (if SCSI bus interface logic is on the adapter) or system board (if SCSI bus interface logic is on the system board) To replace a component and see if the problem was corrected, do the following: 1. Follow the removal and replacement procedure for the component as previously described in this step. 2. Run diagnostics in system verification mode on the adapter. When the problem is resolved, go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557.MAP 0070: 888 sequence in operator panel display Use this MAP when you receive an 888 sequence on the operator panel display or monitor. Purpose of this MAP An 888 sequence in operator panel display suggests that either a hardware or software problem has been detected and a diagnostic message is ready to be read. Note: The 888 will not necessarily flash on the operator panel display. v Step 0070-1 Perform the following steps to record the information contained in the 888 sequence message. 1. Wait until the 888 sequence displays. 2. Record, in sequence, every code displayed after the 888. On systems with a 3-digit or a 4-digit operator panel, you may need to press the system’s ?reset? button to view the additional digits after the 888. Stop recording when the 888 digits reappear. 3. Go to Step 0070-2.v Step 0070-2 Using the first code that you recorded, use the following list to determine the next step to use. Type 102 Go to Step 0070-3. Type 103 Go to Step 0070-4.v Step 0070-3 A type 102 message generates when a software or hardware error occurs during system execution of an application. Use the following information to determine the content of the type 102 message. The message readout sequence is: 102 = Message type RRR = Crash code (the three-digit code that immediately follows the 102) SSS = Dump status code (the three-digit code that immediately follows the Crash code). Record the crash code and the dump status code from the message you recorded in Step 0070-1. Are there additional codes following the dump status? No Go to Step 0070-5. Yes The message also has a type 103 message included in it. Go to Step 0070-4 to decipher the SRN and field replaceable unit (FRU) information in the type 103 message.Note: Type 102 messages have no associated SRNs. v Step 0070-4 278 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) A type 103 message is generated by the hardware when certain types of hardware errors are detected. Use the following steps and information you recorded in Step 0070-1 to determine the content of the type 103 message. The message readout sequence is: 103 = Message type (x)xxx (y)yyy = SRN (where (x)xxx = the three- or four-digit code following the 103 and (y)yyy is the three- or four-digit code following the (x)xxx code). 1. Record the SRN and FRU location codes from the recorded message. 2. Find the SRN in the Service Request Number List and perform the indicated action.Note: The only way to recover from an 888 type of halt is to turn off the system unit. v Step 0070-5 Perform the following steps: 1. Turn off the system unit power. 2. Turn on the system unit power, and load the online diagnostics in service mode. 3. Wait until one of the following conditions occurs: – You are able to load the diagnostics to the point where the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu displays. – The system stops with an 888 sequence. – The system appears to hang. Is the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu displayed? No Go to Chapter 1, “Starting a Service Call,” on page 1. Yes Go to Step 0070-6.v Step 0070-6 Run the All Resources options under Advanced Diagnostics in Problem Determination Mode. Was an SRN reported by the diagnostics? No This is possibly a software-related 888 sequence. Follow the procedure for reporting a software problem. Yes Record the SRN and its location code information. Find the SRN in the SRN Listing and do the indicated action.MAP 0220: Hot-Swap FRU problem resolution Use this procedure to exchange hot-swappable field replaceable units (FRUs). Note: The FRU you want to hot plug might have a defect on it that can cause the hot-plug operation to fail. If, after following the hot-plug procedure, you continue to get an error message that indicates that the hot-plug operation has failed, schedule a time for deferred maintenance when the system containing the FRU can be powered off. Then go to MAP 0210: General problem resolution, Step 0210-2 and answer NO to the question Do you want to exchange this FRU as a hot-plug FRU? Attention: If the FRU is a disk drive or an adapter, ask the system administrator to perform the steps necessary to prepare the device for removal. v Step 0220-1 1. If the system displayed a FRU part number on the screen, use that part number to exchange the FRU. If there is no FRU part number displayed on the screen, refer to the SRN listing. Record the SRN source code and the failing function codes in the order listed. 2. Find the failing function codes in the FFC listing, and record the FRU part number and description of each FRU. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 279 3. To determine if the part is hot-swappable, refer to the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 procedure for the part. Does this system unit support hot-swapping of the first FRU listed? NO Go to “MAP 0210: General problem resolution” on page 246. YES Go to Step 0220-2.v Step 0220-2 Is the FRU a hot-swap power supply or fan? NO Go to Step 0220-4. YES Go to Step 0220-3.v Step 0220-3 Note: Refer to Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 for the part. 1. Remove the old FRU. 2. Install the new FRU. 3. Enter the diag command. Go to Step 0220-14. v Step 0220-4 Is the FRU a hot-plug PCI adapter? NO Go to Step 0220-5. YES Go to Step 0220-12.v Step 0220-5 Is the FRU a SCSI hot-plug device? NO Go to Step 0220-11. YES Go to Step 0220-6.v Step 0220-6 Is the hot-plug drive located within a system unit? NO Go to Step 0220-8. YES Go to Step 0220-7.v Step 0220-7 Refer to the removal and replacement procedures for your system in Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335. Go to Step 0220-13. v Step 0220-8 Does the hot-plug drive’s enclosure have procedures for removing and replacing SCSI disk drives? NO Go to Step 0220-9. YES If a hot-plug procedure exists, use that procedure to remove the old hot-plug SCSI disk drive and replace it with a new hot-plug SCSI disk drive. Otherwise, if no hot-plug procedure exists, use the power off procedure to remove the old SCSI disk drive and replace it with a new SCSI disk drive. Go to Step 0220-13.v Step 0220-9 1. Ask the customer to back up the data on the drive that you intend to replace onto another drive. 2. Verify that the disk drive is in the defined state. The amber LED on the hot-plug disk drive should be off. Is the hot-plug disk drive’s amber LED unlit? 280 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) NO Ask the customer to remove the hot-plug disk drive from the operating system configuration (refer the customer to the system management guide for more information). YES Go to Step 0220-10.v Step 0220-10 Using the hot-plug task service aid, replace the hot-plug drive using the following procedure: 1. Use the option List the SES Devices to show the configuration of the hot-plug slots. Identify the slot number of the adapter for the FRU you want to replace. 2. Select the option REPLACE/REMOVE a Device Attached to an SES Device. 3. Select the slot which contains the SCSI hot-plug drive you want to replace. Press Enter. You will see a fast blinking green light on the front on the hot-plug drive indicating that it is ready for removal. Note: Refer to the ?Installing hardware? section of the information; locate the server information that you are servicing and follow the tables to locate the correct removal or replacement procedure. 4. Remove the old hot-plug drive. 5. Install the new hot-plug drive. After the hot-plug drive is in place, press Enter. 6. Press Exit. Wait while configuration is done on the drive, until you see the ?hot-plug task? on the service aid menu. Go to Step 0220-15. v Step 0220-11 Attention: Do not remove functioning disks in a disk array attached to a PCI-X SCSI RAID controller without assistance from your service support structure. A disk array may become degraded or failed if functioning disks are removed and additional problems may be created. If you still need to remove a RAID array disk attached to a PCI-X SCSI RAID controller, use the SCSI and SCSI RAID hot-plug manager. Using the hot-plug task service aid, replace the hot-plug drive using the hot plug RAID service aid: Note: The drive you want to replace must be either a SPARE or FAILED drive. Otherwise, the drive would not be listed as an ?Identify and remove resources selection? within the RAID HOT-PLUG DEVICES screen. In that case you must ask the customer to put the drive into FAILED state. Refer the customer to the Operating System and Device management in the AIX library for more information. Ask the customer to back up the data on the drive that you intend to replace. 1. Select the option RAID HOT-PLUG DEVICES within the HOT-PLUG TASK under DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE AIDS. 2. Select the RAID adapter that is connected to the RAID array containing the RAID drive you want to remove, then select COMMIT. 3. Choose the option IDENTIFY in the IDENTIFY AND REMOVE RESOURCES menu. 4. Select the physical disk which you want to remove from the RAID array and press Enter. 5. The disk will go into the IDENTIFY state, indicated by a flashing light on the drive. Verify that it is the physical drive you want to remove, then press Enter. 6. At the IDENTIFY AND REMOVE RESOURCES menu, choose the option REMOVE and press Enter. 7. A list of the physical disks in the system that may be removed will be displayed. If the physical disk you want to remove is listed, select it and press Enter. The physical disk will go into the REMOVE state, as indicated by the LED on the drive. If the physical disk you want to remove is not listed, it is not a SPARE or FAILED drive. Ask the customer to put the drive in the FAILED state before you can proceed to remove it. Refer the customer to the Operating System and Device management in the AIX library for more information. 8. Refer to the service guide for the system unit or enclosure that contains the physical drive for removal and replacement procedures for the following substeps: a. Remove the old hot-plug RAID drive. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 281 b. Install the new hot-plug RAID drive. After the hot-plug drive is in place, press Enter. The drive will exit the REMOVE state, and will go to the NORMAL state after you exit diagnostics. Note: There are no elective tests to run on a RAID drive itself under diagnostics (the drives are tested by the RAID adapter).9. This completes the repair. Return the system to the customer. Ask the customer to add the physical disk drive to the original configuration within the RAID. Refer them to system management guide for more information.v Step 0220-12 1. Remove the old adapter FRU and replace it with the new adapter FRU. Refer to the Chapter 3, “Locating FRUs,” on page 335 procedure for the part. 2. Enter the diag command. 3. Go to the FUNCTION SELECTION menu, and select the option Advanced Diagnostics Routines. 4. When the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu displays, select the option System Verification. 5. Go to Step 0220-14.v Step 0220-13 1. If not already running diagnostics, enter the diag command. Note: If you are already running service mode diagnostics and have just performed the task Configure Added/Replaced Devices (under the SCSI Hot Swap manager of the Hot Plug Task service aid), you must use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS menu before proceeding with the next step, or else the drive might not appear on the resource list. 2. Go to the FUNCTION SELECTION menu, and select the option Advanced Diagnostics Routines. 3. When the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu displays, select the option System Verification. Does the hot-plug SCSI disk drive you just replaced appear on the resource list? NO Verify that you have correctly followed the procedures for replacing hot-plug SCSI disk drives in the system service guide. If the disk drive still does not appear in the resource list, go to “MAP 0210: General problem resolution” on page 246 to replace the resource that the hot-plug SCSI disk drive is plugged into. YES Go to Step 0220-14.v Step 0220-14 Run the diagnostic test on the FRU you just replaced. Did the diagnostics run with no trouble found? NO Go to Step 0220-15. YES Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. Before returning the system to the customer, if a hot-plug disk has been removed, ask the customer to add the hot-plug disk drive to the operating system configuration. Refer to Operating System and Device Management in the AIX library for more information.v Step 0220-15 1. Use the option Log Repair Action in the TASK SELECTION menu to update the AIX error log. If the repair action was reseating a cable or adapter, select the resource associated with your repair action. If it is not displayed on the resource list, select sysplanar0. Note: On systems with a fault indicator LED, this changes the fault indicator LED from the fault state to the normal state. 2. While in diagnostics, go to the FUNCTION SELECTION menu. Select the option Advanced Diagnostics Routines. 282 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 3. When the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu displays, select the optionSystem Verification. Run the diagnostic test on the FRU you just replaced, or sysplanar0. Did the diagnostics run with no trouble found? NO Go to Step 0220-16. YES If you changed the service processor or network settings, restore the settings to the value they had prior to servicing the system. If you performed service on a PCI RAID subsystem involving changing of the RAID adapter cache card or changing the configuration on RAID disks, ask the customer to run ?PCI SCSI disk array manager? using smitty to resolve the PCI SCSI RAID adapter configuration. The following is an example of how the customer would resolve the configuration: 1. At the AIX command line, type smitty pdam. 2. On the PCI SCSI Disk Array Manager screen, select RECOVERY OPTIONS. 3. If a previous configuration exists on the replacement adapter, this must be cleared. Select Clear PCI SCSI RAID Adapter Configuration. Press F3. 4. On the Recovery Options screen, select RESOLVE PCI SCSI RAID ADAPTER CONFIGURATION. 5. On the Resolve PCI SCSI RAID Adapter Configuration screen, select ACCEPT CONFIGURATION on DRIVES. 6. On the PCI SCSI RAID Adapter selection menu, select the adapter that you changed. 7. On the next screen, press Enter. 8. On the ?Are You Sure?? selection menu, press Enter to continue. 9. You receive an OK status message when the recovery is complete. If you get a Failed status message, verify that you are preforming recovery on the correct adapter, then do this complete procedure. When you complete the recovery, exit smitty to return to the AIX command line.Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. v Step 0220-16 Does the original problem persist? NO If a FRU was replaced, run the log repair action service aid under the online diagnostics for the resource that was replaced. If the resource associated with your action is not displayed on the resource list, select sysplanar0. If steps were taken to make the device ready for removal, inform the system administrator of the steps required to return the system to the original state. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. YES Go to Step 0220-17.v Step 0220-17 Have you exchanged all the FRUs that correspond to the failing function codes? NO Go to Step 0220-18. YES The SRN did not identify the failing FRU. Schedule a time to run diagnostics in service mode. If the same SRN is reported in service mode, go to “MAP 0030: Additional Problem Determination” on page 266.v Step 0220-18 Note: Before proceeding, remove the FRU you just replaced and install the original FRU in its place. Does the system unit support hot-swapping of the next FRU listed? NO Go to “MAP 0210: General problem resolution” on page 246. YES The SRN did not identify the failing FRU. Schedule a time to run diagnostics in service mode. If the same SRN is reported in service mode, go to Step 0220-14. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 283 MAP 0230: Platform error problem resolution Use this MAP to resolve problems reported by SRNs A00-xxx to A25-xxxx. Step 0230-1 1. The last character of the SRN is bit-encoded as follows:8 4 2 1 | | | | | | | Replace all FRUs listed | | Hot-swap is supported | Software or Firmware could be the cause Reserved 2. Refer to the last character in the SRN. A 4, 5, 6, or 7 indicates a possible software or firmware problem. Does the last character indicate a possible software or firmware problem? NO Go to Step 0230-4YES Go to Step 0230-2. Step 0230-2 Ask the customer if any software or firmware has been installed recently. Has any software or firmware been installed recently? NO Go to Step 0230-4. YES Go to Step 0230-3. Step 0230-3 Suspect the new software or firmware. Check with your support center for any known problems with the new software or firmware. Are there any known problems with the software or firmware? NO Go to Step 0230-4. YES Obtain and follow the procedure to correct the software problem. This completes the repair.Step 0230-4 Were any FRUs or location code reported with the SRN? NO Go to Step 0230-5. YES Go to Step 0230-9 Step 0230-5 Run the diagnostics in problem determination mode on sysplanar0. Were there any FRUs reported with the SRN? NO Go to Step 0230-6. YES Go to Step 0230-9 284 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) Step 0230-6 Did the system display: ?Previous Diagnostic Results - Do you want to review the previously displayed error?? NO Go to Step 0230-7. YES You have a pending item in the error log for which there is no corresponding log repair action. To see this error, select YES at the prompt. Information from the error log displays in order of last event first. Record the error code, the FRU names and the location code of the FRUs. Go to Step 0230-7 Step 0230-7 Were there any other SRNs that begin with an A00 to A1F reported? NO Go to Step 0230-8. YES Go to Step 0230-1 and use the new SRN.Step 0230-8 Attempt to boot the system on slow boot mode. If the system boots, run the diagnostics in problem determination mode on sysplanar0 Were any new error codes or SRNs reported? NO Call your support center. YES Follow the procedure for the new error code or SRN. Step 0230-9 1. Obtain the list of physical location codes and FRU numbers that were listed on the Problem Report Screen. The list can be obtained by running the sysplanar0 diagnostics or using the task Display Previous Diagnostic Results. 2. Record the physical location codes and FRU numbers. 3. Refer to the last character in the SRN. A 2, 3, 6, or 7 indicates that hot-swap is possible. Does the last character indicate that hot-swap is possible? NO Go to Step 0230-10. YES Go to Step 0230-14 Step 0230-10 Note: If necessary, refer to “Powering on and powering off” on page 588 for information on system shutdown and powering the system on and off. 1. If the operating system is running, perform the operating system’s shutdown procedure. 2. Turn off power to the system. 3. Refer to the last character in the SRN. A 1, 3, 5, or 7 indicates that all FRUs listed on the Problem Report Screen need to be replaced. For SRNs ending with any other character, exchange one FRU at a time, in the order listed.Note: Use the appropriate procedure under Chapter 4, “Removing and replacing FRUs,” on page 349 to replace any FRUs indicated. 4. Turn on power to the system. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 285 5. Load “Running the online diagnostics in service mode” on page 673.Note: If the Diagnostics Operating Instructions do not display or you are unable to select the option Task Selection , check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems. If you do not find a problem, go to “MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure” on page 259 and get a new SRN. 6. Wait until the Diagnostics Operating Instructions are displayed or the system appears to stop. 7. Press Enter. 8. Select Diagnostic Routines at the function selection menu. 9. Select System Verification. 10. If a missing options exist, particularly if it is related to the device that was replaced, resolve the missing options before proceeding 11. Select the option Task Selection. 12. Select the option Log Repair Action. 13. Log a repair action for each replaced resource. 14. If the resource associated with your repair action is not displayed on the resource list, select sysplanar0. 15. Return to the Task Selection Menu. 16. If the FRU that was replaced was memory and the system is running as a full system partition, select Run Exercisers and run the short exerciser on all the resources, otherwise proceed to Step 0230-15. 17. If you ran the exercisers in Step 0230-10, substep 16, return to the Task Selection menu. 18. Select Run Error Log Analysis and run analysis on all the resources. Was a problem reported? NO The repair is complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. YES Go to Step 0230-11. Step 0230-11 Is the problem the same as the original problem? NO The symptom has changed. Check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems. If you do not find a problem, go to “MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure” on page 259 and get a new SRN. YES Go to Step 0230-12. Step 0230-12 Look at the physical location codes and FRU part numbers you recorded. Have you exchanged all the FRUs that were listed? NO Go to Step 0230-13. YES The SRN did not identify the failing FRU. Call your support person for assistance. Step 0230-13 1. After performing a shutdown of the operating system, turn off power to the system. 2. Remove the new FRU and install the original FRU. 3. Exchange the next FRU in list. 4. Turn on power to the system. 286 Power Systems: Service Guide for the IBM Power 520 (8203-E4A, 9407-M15, and 9408-M25) 5. Load “Running the online diagnostics in service mode” on page 673.Note: If the Diagnostics Operating Instructions do not display or you are unable to select the option Task Selection, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems. If you do not find a problem, go to “MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure” on page 259 and get a new SRN. 6. Wait until the Diagnostics Operating Instructions are displayed or the system appears to stop. 7. Press Enter. 8. Select Diagnostic Routines at the function selection menu. 9. Select System Verification. 10. If a missing options exist, particularly if it is related to the device that was replaced, resolve the missing options before proceeding. 11. Select the option Task Selection. 12. Select the option Log Repair Action. 13. Log a repair action for each replaced resource. 14. If the resource associated with your action does not appear on the Resource List, select sysplanar0. 15. Return to the Task Selection Menu. 16. If the FRU that was replaced was memory and the system is running as a full system partition, select Run Exercisers and run the short exerciser on all the resources, otherwise proceed to Step 0230-15. 17. If you ran the exercisers in Step 0230-13, substep 16, return to the Task Selection menu. 18. Select Run Error Log Analysis and run analysis on all the resources. Was a problem reported? NO The repair is complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Verifying a repair,” on page 557. YES Go to Step 0230-11. Step 0230-14 The FRUs can be hot-swapped. If you do not want to use the hot-swap, go to Step 0230-10.Note: See the hot-swap procedures in the Chapter 4, “Removing and replacing FRUs,” on page 349 section. 1. Refer to the last character in the SRN. A 1, 3, 5, or 7 indicates that all FRUs listed on the Problem Report Screen must be replaced. For SRNs ending with any other character, exchange one FRU at a time, in the order listed. 2. If available, use the CE Login and enter the diag command.Note: If CE Login is not available, have the system administrator enter superuser mode and then enter the diag command. 3. After the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display, press Enter. 4. Select the option Task Selection. 5. Select the option Log Repair Action. 6. If the resource associated with your action is not displayed on the Resource List, select sysplanar0. 7. Log a repair action for each replaced resource. 8. Return to the Task Selection menu. 9. For systems running as a full system partition, select Run Exercisers and run the short exerciser on all resources. Chapter 2. Isolation Procedures 287 10. Use the option Log Repair Action in the Task Selection menu to update the AIX error log. If the repair action was reseating a cable or adapter, select the resource associated with your repair action. If it is not displayed on the resource list, select sysplanar0.Note: On systems with a Fault Indicator LED, this changes the Fault Indicator LED from the fault state to the normal state.Was a problem reported? NO The repair is complete. Return the system to the customer. YES Go to Step 0230-15. Step 0230-15 Is the problem the same as the original problem? NO The symptom has changed. Check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems. If you do not find a problem, go to “MAP 0020: Problem determination procedure” on page 259 and get a new SRN. YES Go to Step 0230-16. Step 0230-1